REGISTER INFORMATION PAGE
Vol. 32 Iss. 1 - September 07, 2015

The Virginia Register OF REGULATIONS is an official state publication issued every other week throughout the year. Indexes are published quarterly, and are cumulative for the year. The Virginia Register has several functions. The new and amended sections of regulations, both as proposed and as finally adopted, are required by law to be published in the Virginia Register. In addition, the Virginia Register is a source of other information about state government, including petitions for rulemaking, emergency regulations, executive orders issued by the Governor, and notices of public hearings on regulations.

ADOPTION, AMENDMENT, AND REPEAL OF REGULATIONS

An agency wishing to adopt, amend, or repeal regulations must first publish in the Virginia Register a notice of intended regulatory action; a basis, purpose, substance and issues statement; an economic impact analysis prepared by the Department of Planning and Budget; the agency’s response to the economic impact analysis; a summary; a notice giving the public an opportunity to comment on the proposal; and the text of the proposed regulation.

Following publication of the proposal in the Virginia Register, the promulgating agency receives public comments for a minimum of 60 days. The Governor reviews the proposed regulation to determine if it is necessary to protect the public health, safety and welfare, and if it is clearly written and easily understandable. If the Governor chooses to comment on the proposed regulation, his comments must be transmitted to the agency and the Registrar no later than 15 days following the completion of the 60-day public comment period. The Governor’s comments, if any, will be published in the Virginia Register. Not less than 15 days following the completion of the 60-day public comment period, the agency may adopt the proposed regulation.

The Joint Commission on Administrative Rules (JCAR) or the appropriate standing committee of each house of the General Assembly may meet during the promulgation or final adoption process and file an objection with the Registrar and the promulgating agency. The objection will be published in the Virginia Register. Within 21 days after receipt by the agency of a legislative objection, the agency shall file a response with the Registrar, the objecting legislative body, and the Governor.

When final action is taken, the agency again publishes the text of the regulation as adopted, highlighting all changes made to the proposed regulation and explaining any substantial changes made since publication of the proposal. A 30-day final adoption period begins upon final publication in the Virginia Register.

The Governor may review the final regulation during this time and, if he objects, forward his objection to the Registrar and the agency. In addition to or in lieu of filing a formal objection, the Governor may suspend the effective date of a portion or all of a regulation until the end of the next regular General Assembly session by issuing a directive signed by a majority of the members of the appropriate legislative body and the Governor. The Governor’s objection or suspension of the regulation, or both, will be published in the Virginia Register. If the Governor finds that changes made to the proposed regulation have substantial impact, he may require the agency to provide an additional 30-day public comment period on the changes. Notice of the additional public comment period required by the Governor will be published in the Virginia Register.

The agency shall suspend the regulatory process for 30 days when it receives requests from 25 or more individuals to solicit additional public comment, unless the agency determines that the changes have minor or inconsequential impact.

A regulation becomes effective at the conclusion of the 30-day final adoption period, or at any other later date specified by the promulgating agency, unless (i) a legislative objection has been filed, in which event the regulation, unless withdrawn, becomes effective on the date specified, which shall be after the expiration of the 21-day objection period; (ii) the Governor exercises his authority to require the agency to provide for additional public comment, in which event the regulation, unless withdrawn, becomes effective on the date specified, which shall be after the expiration of the period for which the Governor has provided for additional public comment; (iii) the Governor and the General Assembly exercise their authority to suspend the effective date of a regulation until the end of the next regular legislative session; or (iv) the agency suspends the regulatory process, in which event the regulation, unless withdrawn, becomes effective on the date specified, which shall be after the expiration of the 30-day public comment period and no earlier than 15 days from publication of the readopted action.

A regulatory action may be withdrawn by the promulgating agency at any time before the regulation becomes final.

FAST-TRACK RULEMAKING PROCESS

Section 2.2-4012.1 of the Code of Virginia provides an exemption from certain provisions of the Administrative Process Act for agency regulations deemed by the Governor to be noncontroversial.  To use this process, Governor's concurrence is required and advance notice must be provided to certain legislative committees.  Fast-track regulations will become effective on the date noted in the regulatory action if no objections to using the process are filed in accordance with § 2.2-4012.1.

EMERGENCY REGULATIONS

Pursuant to § 2.2-4011 of the Code of Virginia, an agency, upon consultation with the Attorney General, and at the discretion of the Governor, may adopt emergency regulations that are necessitated by an emergency situation. An agency may also adopt an emergency regulation when Virginia statutory law or the appropriation act or federal law or federal regulation requires that a regulation be effective in 280 days or less from its enactment. The emergency regulation becomes operative upon its adoption and filing with the Registrar of Regulations, unless a later date is specified. Emergency regulations are limited to no more than 18 months in duration; however, may be extended for six months under certain circumstances as provided for in § 2.2-4011 D. Emergency regulations are published as soon as possible in the Register.

During the time the emergency status is in effect, the agency may proceed with the adoption of permanent regulations through the usual procedures. To begin promulgating the replacement regulation, the agency must (i) file the Notice of Intended Regulatory Action with the Registrar within 60 days of the effective date of the emergency regulation and (ii) file the proposed regulation with the Registrar within 180 days of the effective date of the emergency regulation. If the agency chooses not to adopt the regulations, the emergency status ends when the prescribed time limit expires.

STATEMENT

The foregoing constitutes a generalized statement of the procedures to be followed. For specific statutory language, it is suggested that Article 2 (§ 2.2-4006 et seq.) of Chapter 40 of Title 2.2 of the Code of Virginia be examined carefully.

CITATION TO THE VIRGINIA REGISTER

The Virginia Register is cited by volume, issue, page number, and date. 29:5 VA.R. 1075-1192 November 5, 2012, refers to Volume 29, Issue 5, pages 1075 through 1192 of the Virginia Register issued on
November 5, 2012.

The Virginia Register of Regulations is published pursuant to Article 6 (§ 2.2-4031 et seq.) of Chapter 40 of Title 2.2 of the Code of Virginia.

Members of the Virginia Code Commission: John S. Edwards, Chair; James M. LeMunyon, Vice Chair, Gregory D. Habeeb; Ryan T. McDougle; Pamela S. Baskervill; Robert L. Calhoun; Carlos L. Hopkins; E.M. Miller, Jr.; Thomas M. Moncure, Jr.; Christopher R. Nolen; Timothy Oksman; Charles S. Sharp; Robert L. Tavenner.

Staff of the Virginia Register: Jane D. Chaffin, Registrar of Regulations; Karen Perrine, Assistant Registrar; Anne Bloomsburg, Regulations Analyst; Rhonda Dyer, Publications Assistant; Terri Edwards, Operations Staff Assistant.


PUBLICATION SCHEDULE AND DEADLINES
Vol. 32 Iss. 1 - September 07, 2015

September 2015 through October 2016

Volume: Issue

Material Submitted By Noon*

Will Be Published On

32:1

August 19, 2015

September 7, 2015

32:2

September 2, 2015

September 21, 2015

32:3

September 16, 2015

October 5, 2015

32:4

September 30, 2015

October 19, 2015

32:5

October 14, 2015

November 2, 2015

32:6

October 28, 2015

November 16, 2015

32:7

November 10, 2015 (Tuesday)

November 30, 2015

32:8

November 24, 2015 (Tuesday)

December 14, 2015

32:9

December 9, 2015

December 28, 2015

32:10

December 21, 2015 (Monday)

January 11, 2016

32:11

January 6, 2016

January 25, 2016

32:12

January 20, 2016

February 8, 2016

32:13

February 3, 2016

February 22, 2016

32:14

February 17, 2016

March 7, 2016

32:15

March 2, 2016

March 21, 2016

32:16

March 16, 2016

April 4, 2016

32:17

March 30, 2016

April 18, 2016

32:18

April 13, 2016

May 2, 2016

32:19

April 27, 2016

May 16, 2016

32:20

May 11, 2016

May 30, 2016

32:21

May 25, 2016

June 13, 2016

32:22

June 8, 2016

June 27, 2016

32:23

June 22, 2016

July 11, 2016

32:24

July 6, 2016

July 25, 2016

32:25

July 20, 2016

August 8, 2016

32:26

August 3, 2016

August 22, 2016

33:1

August 17, 2016

September 5, 2016

33:2

August 31, 2016

September 19, 2016

33:3

September 14, 2016

October 3, 2016

33:4

September 28, 2016

October 17, 2016

33:5

October 12, 2016

October 31, 2016

*Filing deadlines are Wednesdays unless otherwise specified.


NOTICES OF INTENDED REGULATORY ACTION
Vol. 32 Iss. 1 - September 07, 2015

TITLE 12. HEALTH
Medicare-Medicaid Demonstration Waivers
Notice of Intended Regulatory Action

Notice is hereby given in accordance with § 2.2-4007.01 of the Code of Virginia that the Board of Medical Assistance Services intends to consider promulgating 12VAC30-121, Medicare-Medicaid Demonstration Waivers and amending 12VAC30-50, Amount, Duration, and Scope of Medical and Remedial Care Services. The purpose of the proposed action is to create the Commonwealth Coordinated Care program, which enables individuals who are eligible for both Medicare and Medicaid services (dual eligibles) to receive acute, primary, and long-term care services in a coordinated managed care system.

The dual eligible population is of particular interest for a managed care program because the participants represent some of the most vulnerable citizens who typically have extensive medical, behavioral health, social, and long-term care needs. In the Commonwealth, dual eligibles are currently excluded from managed care because Medicare, being their first payer of services, covers their acute care services. Also, managed care organizations did not originally cover long-term care services (neither nursing facility services nor home and community-based services). These dual eligible persons have been receiving acute and long-term care services in Medicaid's fee-for-service system.

As a result of being in the fee-for-service system, no single health care provider or entity is responsible for coordinating all of these individuals' care, resulting in an inefficient system that is cumbersome for the individuals with misaligned benefit structures and opportunities for cost shifting. This system has likely led to unnecessary hospital admissions, unnecessary use of nursing facilities, and the mismanagement of medications.

Integrating primary and acute care services with long-term care and behavioral health services into one delivery system will streamline the delivery of services by offering ongoing access to quality health and long-term care services, care coordination, and referrals to appropriate community resources. This will also empower the Commonwealth's full dual eligible beneficiaries to remain independent, residing in settings of their choice for as long as possible.

The Social Security Act (§ 1932(a)) permits the combining of Medicare and Medicaid services to dual eligible individuals under the authority of a Financial Administration Demonstration Waiver. The goal of this action is to provide integrated care to dual eligible individuals who are currently excluded from participating in managed care programs. This change will enable these participants to access their primary, acute, behavioral health, and long-term care services through a single managed delivery system, thereby increasing the coordination of services across the spectrum of care.

Commonwealth Coordinated Care (CCC) Program participants will include adult full benefit dual eligible individuals (ages 21 and older), including full benefit dual eligible individuals in the Elderly or Disabled with Consumer Direction (EDCD) Waiver and full benefit dual eligible individuals residing in nursing facilities. Individuals who are required to "spend down" income in order to meet Medicaid eligibility requirements will not be eligible. The CCC Program also will not include individuals for whom DMAS only pays a limited amount each month toward their cost of care (e.g., deductibles only) such as: (i) qualified Medicare beneficiaries (QMBs); (ii) special low income Medicare beneficiaries (SLMBs); (iii) qualified disabled working individuals (QDWIs); or (iv) qualified individuals (QIs).

The proposed regulatory action will allow DMAS to combine certain aspects of managed care, long-term care, and Medicare into one program. The program is expected to offer participants care coordination, which will, it is anticipated, improve their quality of care. To accomplish this, DMAS is including certain populations and certain services previously excluded from managed care into a new managed care program. This new managed care program is being offered on a voluntary basis in five regions of the Commonwealth: Central Virginia, Tidewater, Northern Virginia, Charlottesville/Western, and the Roanoke region. The program has been phased in on a regional basis over the first 12 months of the program, starting with the Central Virginia and Tidewater regions. Eligible individuals were notified of the opportunity to enroll during March 2014 and the first opportunity for enrollment was effective on April 1, 2014. The remaining three regions were phased in later in 2014.

Covered services will include the following:

1. All Medicare Parts A, B, and D services (including inpatient, outpatient, durable medical equipment (DME), skilled nursing facilities (NFs), home health, and pharmacy);

2. The majority of Medicaid State Plan services that are not covered by Medicare, including behavioral health and transportation services;

3. Medicaid-covered EDCD Waiver services: adult day health care, personal care (consumer and agency directed), respite services (consumer and agency directed), personal emergency response system (PERS), transition coordination, and transition services;

4. Personal care services for persons enrolled in the Medicaid Works program;

5. Nursing facility services; and

6. Flexible benefits that will be at the option of participating plans.

The agency does not intend to hold a public hearing on the proposed action after publication in the Virginia Register.

Statutory Authority: § 32.1-325 of the Code of Virginia; §§ 1932 and 1915(c) of the Social Security Act.

Public Comment Deadline: October 7, 2015.

Agency Contact: Matthew Behrens, Project Manager, Department of Medical Assistance Services, 600 East Broad Street, Suite 1300, Richmond, VA 23219, telephone (804) 625-3673, FAX (804) 786-1680, or email matthew.behrens@dmas.virginia.gov.

VA.R. Doc. No. R15-3786; Filed August 10, 2015, 8:46 a.m.
TITLE 12. HEALTH
Family Access to Medical Insurance Security Plan
Notice of Intended Regulatory Action

Notice is hereby given in accordance with § 2.2-4007.01 of the Code of Virginia that the Board of Medical Assistance Services intends to consider amending 12VAC30-141, Family Access to Medical Insurance Security Plan. The purpose of the proposed action is to grant eligibility to applicable qualified state employees or their dependents who are otherwise eligible to enroll in the FAMIS MOMs program to be enrolled in the program. Current regulations exclude state employees who have access to subsidized health insurance coverage from enrolling in the FAMIS MOMS program, even if they are otherwise eligible by income and residency. This amendment will only affect state employees who are qualified for employer-sponsored health insurance; wage employees are not eligible to receive a state contribution toward the cost of their health coverage.

The agency does not intend to hold a public hearing on the proposed action after publication in the Virginia Register.

Statutory Authority: § 32.1-351 of the Code of Virginia; Title XXI of the Social Security Act.

Public Comment Deadline: October 7, 2015.

Agency Contact: Emily McClellan, Regulatory Supervisor, Policy Division, Department of Medical Assistance Services, 600 East Broad Street, Suite 1300, Richmond, VA 23219, telephone (804) 371-4300, FAX (804) 786-1680, or email emily.mcclellan@dmas.virginia.gov.

VA.R. Doc. No. R16-4365; Filed August 10, 2015, 7:49 a.m.
TITLE 18. PROFESSIONAL AND OCCUPATIONAL LICENSING
Virginia Certified Home Inspectors Regulations
Notice of Intended Regulatory Action

Notice is hereby given in accordance with § 2.2-4007.01 of the Code of Virginia that the Virginia Board for Asbestos, Lead, and Home Inspectors intends to consider amending 18VAC15-40, Virginia Certified Home Inspectors Regulations. The certified home inspector program is a voluntary regulatory program administered by the Board for Asbestos, Lead, and Home Inspectors. Chapter 411 of the 2015 Acts of Assembly requires anyone who conducts a home inspection on a new residential structure to be certified by the board and to have successfully completed a training module developed by the board in conjunction with the Department of Housing and Community Development. The training module must be based on the International Residential Code component of the Virginia Uniform Statewide Building Code. Certification would become mandatory for those individuals who wish to conduct a home inspection on new residential structures. The board is required to develop regulation to implement Chapter 411 of the 2015 Acts of Assembly for implementation on July 1, 2016. The act further requires the board to develop the training module prior to July 1, 2016, and make such training module available for use in accordance with Chapter 411.

The agency intends to hold a public hearing on the proposed action after publication in the Virginia Register.

Statutory Authority: §§ 54.1-201 and 54.1-501 of the Code of Virginia.

Public Comment Deadline: October 7, 2015.

Agency Contact: Trisha L. Henshaw, Executive Director, Virginia Board for Asbestos, Lead, and Home Inspectors, 9960 Mayland Drive, Suite 400, Richmond, VA 23233, telephone (804) 367-8595, FAX (804) 350-5354, or email alhi@dpor.virginia.gov.

VA.R. Doc. No. R16-4423; Filed August 17, 2015, 10:43 a.m.
TITLE 22. SOCIAL SERVICES
Standards for Licensed Child Day Centers
Withdrawal of Notice of Intended Regulatory Action

Notice is hereby given in accordance with § 2.2-4007.01 of the Code of Virginia that the State Board of Social Services has WITHDRAWN the Notice of Intended Regulatory Action for 22VAC40-185, Standards for Licensed Child Day Centers, and 22VAC40-186, Standards for Licensed Child Day Centers, which was published in 29:3 VA.R. 341 October 8, 2012.

Agency Contact: Debra O'Neill, Child Care Consultant, Department of Social Services, 801 East Main Street, Richmond, VA 23219, telephone (804) 726-7648, FAX (804) 726-7132, or email debra.oneill@dss.virginia.gov.

VA.R. Doc. No. R13-3376; Filed August 19, 2015, 3:45 p.m.
TITLE 22. SOCIAL SERVICES
Standards for Licensed Child Day Centers
Withdrawal of Notice of Intended Regulatory Action

Notice is hereby given in accordance with § 2.2-4007.01 of the Code of Virginia that the State Board of Social Services has WITHDRAWN the Notice of Intended Regulatory Action for 22VAC40-185, Standards for Licensed Child Day Centers, and 22VAC40-186, Standards for Licensed Child Day Centers, which was published in 29:3 VA.R. 341 October 8, 2012.

Agency Contact: Debra O'Neill, Child Care Consultant, Department of Social Services, 801 East Main Street, Richmond, VA 23219, telephone (804) 726-7648, FAX (804) 726-7132, or email debra.oneill@dss.virginia.gov.

VA.R. Doc. No. R13-3376; Filed August 19, 2015, 3:45 p.m.
TITLE 22. SOCIAL SERVICES
Temporary Assistance for Needy Families (TANF)
Notice of Intended Regulatory Action

Notice is hereby given in accordance with § 2.2-4007.01 of the Code of Virginia that the State Board of Social Services intends to consider amending 22VAC40-295, Temporary Assistance for Needy Families (TANF). The current regulation describes fair hearings and administrative disqualification hearings. While those are different types of hearings, the current regulation can be interpreted as meaning fair hearings and administrative disqualification hearings are the same. The agency proposes amending 22VAC40-295-140 to provide further clarification regarding the interplay between the two hearing processes and eliminate the misunderstanding about these separate processes.

The agency does not intend to hold a public hearing on the proposed action after publication in the Virginia Register.

Statutory Authority: § 63.2-217 of the Code of Virginia.

Public Comment Deadline: October 7, 2015.

Agency Contact: Bridget Shelmet, Department of Social Services, 801 East Main Street, Richmond, VA 23219, telephone (804) 726-7144, FAX (804) 726-7357, or email bridget.shelmet@dss.virginia.gov.

VA.R. Doc. No. R16-4443; Filed August 9, 2015, 10:07 a.m.

REGULATIONS
Vol. 32 Iss. 1 - September 07, 2015

TITLE 1. ADMINISTRATION
DEPARTMENT OF GENERAL SERVICES
Proposed Regulation

Title of Regulation: 1VAC30-45. Certification for Noncommercial Environmental Laboratories (amending 1VAC30-45-10, 1VAC30-45-30 through 1VAC30-45-130, 1VAC30-45-300 through 1VAC30-45-400, 1VAC30-45-500, 1VAC30-45-510, 1VAC30-45-520, 1VAC30-45-600, 1VAC30-45-610, 1VAC30-45-660, 1VAC30-45-670, 1VAC30-45-720 through 1VAC30-45-771, 1VAC30-45-775, 1VAC30-45-791, 1VAC30-45-796, 1VAC30-45-798, 1VAC30-45-811, 1VAC30-45-850; adding 1VAC30-45-95; repealing 1VAC30-45-530, 1VAC30-45-780 through 1VAC30-45-788, 1VAC30-45-800 through 1VAC30-45-808, 1VAC30-45-820 through 1VAC30-45-829).

Statutory Authority: § 2.2-1105 of the Code of Virginia.

Public Hearing Information: No public hearings are scheduled.

Public Comment Deadline: November 6, 2015.

Agency Contact: Rhonda Bishton, Regulatory Coordinator, Department of General Services, 1100 Bank Street, Suite 420, Richmond, VA 23219, telephone (804) 786-3311, FAX (804) 371-8305, or email rhonda.bishton@dgs.virginia.gov.

Basis: Section 2.2-1102 A 1 of the Code of Virginia authorizes the Department of General Services (DGS) to prescribe regulations necessary or incidental to the performance of the department's duties or execution of powers conferred by the Code of Virginia.

Section 2.2-1105 A of the Code of Virginia authorizes the Division of Consolidated Laboratory Services (DCLS) to establish and conduct a program for the certification of laboratories conducting any tests, analyses, measurements, or monitoring required pursuant to the Air Pollution Control Law (§ 10.1-1300 et seq. of the Code of Virginia), the Virginia Waste Management Act (§ 10.1-1400 et seq. of the Code of Virginia), or the State Water Control Law (§ 62.1-44.2 et seq. of the Code of Virginia). Section 2.2-1105 C of the Code of Virginia authorizes DCLS to establish a fee system to pay for the costs of the certification program.

Purpose: Environmental laboratories are required by § 2.2-1105 of the Code of Virginia to be certified before submitting data to the Department of Environmental Quality (DEQ) under Virginia's air, water, and waste laws and regulations. This statutory requirement is carried out by DCLS under the regulatory requirements of 1VAC30-45 (noncommercial laboratories) and 1VAC30-46 (commercial laboratories).

Certifying environmental laboratories to a single set of standards has several benefits. Certification promotes continuous quality improvement. Certification gives confidence that work is performed properly and to a known standard. Under the certification program, assurance is provided that all environmental laboratories meet the same proficiency testing and quality assurance and quality control standards. Meeting these standards ensures that the laboratories have the ability to produce environmental test data of known quality and defensibility for levels of pollutants in environmental samples. The limits set by DEQ for air and water pollutants and for solid and hazardous waste help protect our environment and public health. Laboratory measurements of environmental samples determine compliance with Virginia's environmental laws and therefore are the key to providing protection of public health and welfare. Certifying laboratories to one standard reduces the uncertainties associated with decisions made by the regulatory agencies that affect the protection of human health and the environment.

Current fees charged under the program are insufficient to support the program as required by § 2.2-1105 C of the Code of Virginia. The current fees are inadequate for three reasons. First, the fees were set initially using an estimate of the number of laboratories to be certified that was too high. Second, the program fees were established in 2004 and do not account for inflation in the intervening years. Third, the fee structure does not take into account the variety and amount of testing done by the laboratories that DCLS certifies.

The original estimate of laboratories that would be covered by the program was based on limited information provided by DEQ and other sources. Using this information, DCLS estimated the number of in-house and commercial laboratories that were serving DEQ permit holders. This estimate proved to be too high and the resulting fees, based on these estimates, are too low. The revised fees are based on the number of laboratories currently certified under the program.

The current fee provisions do not include a factor for inflation. The fees were proposed in 2004 in regulations that did not become final until 2009. The cost of living has increased by approximately 20% since 2004. The revised fees have been adjusted to account for this increase in the cost of living.

The current fee provisions do not take into account the range of testing and the variety of testing done by the certified laboratories. This results in fees that do not mirror the scope of the laboratory testing. The work performed by DCLS to certify a laboratory is directly related to the number of test methods performed and the number of matrices tested by the laboratory. The revised fee structure accounts for these differences. The revised fees are adjusted in proportion to the number of test methods a laboratory performs and for the number of matrices tested.

The agency has gained operational experience through certifying laboratories since January 2009. The proposed action revises the procedures used to certify the laboratories, eliminating provisions that no longer apply and revising some provisions to make the program more efficient. This includes the addition of procedures to suspend laboratory certification. Suspension is a benefit to the laboratory that may otherwise have its certification withdrawn.

Noncommercial environmental laboratories perform proficiency tests quite well. During a 31-month period (2010, 2011, and the first nine months of 2012), these laboratories had a 95.79% success rate. Through this experience DCLS has determined that reducing the annual requirement for two proficiency test studies for each field of certification to one proficiency test study will reduce the cost of the program for the laboratories and for the agency without reducing the benefit gained from the certification program.

The current regulation contains requirements for laboratories that perform toxicity, asbestos, or radiochemical testing. No current noncommercial environmental laboratory performs these specialized types of tests. DCLS is removing these requirements in this proposal for this reason. Only those requirements pertinent to noncommercial laboratories should be included in the regulation. The proposal does stipulate that if a noncommercial environmental laboratory decides to perform one or more of these types of tests, the laboratory would have to meet the requirements for these types of testing that are set out in the 2009 TNI Standards incorporated by reference into proposed 1VAC30-46. These laboratories would also need to pay the test category fees for these types of testing as set out in proposed 1VAC30-46.

The quality control requirements that are part of Article 4 (1VAC30-45-600 et seq.) in the current regulation are based on the 2003 NELAC standards. The NELAC Institute (TNI) has revised the 2003 standards and now requires TNI-accredited laboratories to meet the 2009 standards. The 2009 TNI Standards have eliminated or increased flexibility for a number of these quality control requirements. DCLS is proposing in a separate rulemaking (1VAC30-46) that commercial environmental laboratories meet the 2009 TNI Standards. Where TNI has revised these provisions to make them more flexible or has eliminated requirements, this proposed action does the same so that the noncommercial laboratories will not be required to meet standards more stringent than the commercial laboratories.

Substance: The substantive revisions to 1VAC30-45 are listed below.

1. 1VAC30-45-40. The definition of "environmental analysis" includes two exceptions that DCLS has previously made through guidance.

2. 1VAC30-45-70 B. The procedures pertinent to the initial certification period are deleted. The initial certification period was established as January 1, 2009, to January 1, 2012, when DCLS certified environmental laboratories for the first time. Because DCLS has completed the initial certification of noncommercial environmental laboratories, these provisions no longer apply.

3. 1VAC30-45-70 C. The requirement for laboratories to file an application for renewal every other year is deleted. Renewal can be done efficiently without an additional application process.

4. 1VAC30-45-95. A new section pertaining to suspension is added. Suspension provides the laboratory an opportunity to correct a problem that would ordinarily cause the agency to withdraw certification from the laboratory. This section sets out the procedures used to suspend laboratory certification in part or in total. DCLS also may provide extra time under these provisions for a lab to correct deficiencies before suspension occurs.

5. 1VAC30-45-110. The procedures to deny or withdraw certification are revised. The notification procedures are revised to be more explicit. The appeal process provisions are simplified, referring only to the Administrative Process Act.

6. 1VAC30-45-130. The current fees are replaced by a system and new fees that reflect the current costs of the program. The revised fees account for inflation since 2004. Revised fees represent more closely the cost of certifying each laboratory. These fees take into account the number of test methods and the number of matrices for which the laboratory seeks or maintains certification. The cost of certifying a laboratory is directly proportional to the number of methods and matrices to be certified.

7. 1VAC30-45-500 through 1VAC30-45-520. The requirement for two successful proficiency test studies every year is replaced by a requirement for one successful proficiency test study per year for each field of certification. A laboratory may participate in a second proficiency test study if the first test is unsuccessful. The revision to the proficiency test requirements includes revised procedures.

8. 1VAC30-45-530. The specific requirements for aquatic toxicity proficiency testing are deleted. Noncommercial environmental laboratories currently certified under the program do not perform this type of testing because it is specialized.

9. 1VAC30-45-750 B, 1VAC30-45-780 through 1VAC30-45-789, 1VAC30-45-800 through 1VAC30-45-809, and 1VAC30-45-819 through 1VAC30-45-840. The quality control requirements for toxicity, radiochemical, and asbestos testing are deleted. These types of testing are not performed by noncommercial environmental laboratories currently certified under the program because this testing is specialized. If a noncommercial laboratory wishes to become certified for one or more of these types of testing, the laboratory will be required to meet the 2009 TNI Standards requirements for toxicity, radiochemical, and asbestos testing.

10. Over 20 provisions in Article 4, the quality system standards, have been deleted, relaxed, or made more flexible. These provisions were revised to ensure that they are no more stringent than the accreditation standards for commercial laboratories. DCLS is proposing in a separate rulemaking to accredit commercial laboratories to the requirements of the 2009 TNI Standards replacing the currently used 2003 NELAC Standards. These changes are a result of the change to the 2009 TNI Standards for commercial laboratories.

Issues: The advantage to the general public is the maintenance of up-to-date standards for the certification of noncommercial environmental laboratories. There are no disadvantages to the public.

There are two primary reasons this action is necessary for DCLS and the Commonwealth. First the revisions to 1VAC30-45 modify or reduce the program's administrative requirements making the program more efficient to operate. Second charging the revised fees will enable the agency to cover the cost of the certification program. There are no disadvantages to the agency or Commonwealth.

There are a number of advantages for the environmental laboratories certified under 1VAC30-45. Many of these proposed revisions reduce the costs for the noncommercial laboratories. The main examples of the revisions that reduce cost for the laboratories are described below.

The proposed action drops the requirement to perform proficiency test studies from two to one each year for each field of certification. Noncommercial environmental laboratory costs will drop as a result. In some cases this reduced requirement may offset the increase in fees proposed in this action. The noncommercial laboratories have demonstrated a high success rate in the performance of proficiency tests. These laboratories have often asked that the proficiency test study requirement be limited to one proficiency test. DCLS believes reducing the requirement from two to one proficiency test each year will not have a negative effect on the efficacy of the program.

The noncommercial laboratories will also benefit from the changes to the quality system standards. These revisions delete or relax standards or provide flexibility in meeting the standards. These changes reduce the costs of certification for the laboratories.

The primary disadvantage of the proposed action for the affected laboratories is the increase in fees. The fee structure is revised to reflect the actual cost to the agency of certifying each laboratory. The fees are increased generally and will be charged annually rather than every other year. The increase in fees should be offset by the reduction in the proficiency test requirement.

Department of Planning and Budget's Economic Impact Analysis:

Summary of the Proposed Amendments to Regulation. The Division of Consolidated Laboratory Services (DCLS) proposes to amend its regulations that govern certification of noncommercial environmental laboratories. Current regulations were initially proposed in 2004 and became effective in 2009. Now that DCLS has had several years of experience in certifying noncommercial laboratories, they are proposing to amend these regulations to remove obsolete language, make many clarifying changes to regulatory text and also to make several substantive changes to these regulations. The substantive changes that DCLS proposes will:

1. Add two types of tests that do not qualify under the regulatory definition of environmental analysis,

2. Remove the requirement that certified noncommercial labs fill out a renewal application,

3. Add new rules that will govern suspension of non-compliant laboratories and revise the rules that govern denial and withdrawal of certification,

4. Make changes to quality control rules in these regulations so that they are harmonized with DCLS's regulations that govern commercial environmental laboratories,

5. Reduce the number of successful proficiency tests that labs must complete each year from two to one for each field of certification and

6. Increase fees.

Result of Analysis. Benefits likely outweigh costs for most proposed regulatory changes. For some proposed changes, there is insufficient information to ascertain whether benefits outweigh costs.

Estimated Economic Impact. Current regulations define "environmental analysis" and list several types of testing that are excluded from this definition. Laboratories are not required to be certified under these regulations (for the purposes of complying with the Virginia Air Pollution Control Act, the Virginia Waste Management Act and the State Water Control Act) in order to perform tests that are on the excluded list. DCLS now proposes to add two tests; geochemical and permeability testing for solid waste compliance and materials specification for air quality compliance when product certifications specify the data required by an air permit such as fuel type, BTU content, sulfur content or VOC content, will be added to the excluded list. DCLS staff reports that these tests are currently exempted in DCLS guidance. No entity is likely to incur any costs on account of this regulatory change. Regulated entities will likely gain some benefit from this change as language in regulation is legally enforceable and regulated entities are entitled to notice of any changes to such language and are also entitled to participate in the process that any proposed changes must go through.

Current regulations require certified labs to fill out a renewal application at least 90 days before the expiration date of their current certification. DCLS proposes to drop this requirement as they believe that renewal of certification can be accomplished without a formal application (by the lab attesting to compliance with applicable regulation, reporting acceptable proficiency test results and by paying the required renewal fees). No entity is likely to incur any costs on account of this proposed change as labs will still have to remain in compliance with these regulations. Affected labs will save some time and may also save some money (if they were not submitting their renewal application electronically) on account of this change.

Current regulations allow DCLS to decertify labs that are not in compliance with regulations or that have been found to have falsified any data or have provided false information to support certification. Labs that are decertified currently would have to reapply for certification. DCLS proposes to amend regulatory language for decertification to increase clarity and also proposes to add rules for suspension of certification. Under these new rules, DCLS will be able to notify labs of deficiencies and, in most cases, give them up to 60 days to remediate those deficiencies. Under proposed regulations, if a lab has deficiencies, has been notified of those deficiencies and does not remediate them within the allowed time, DCLS will be able to suspend certification for 6 months or the remainder of the certification period (whichever is longer). Adding language that allows suspension of certification will benefit both the department and affected labs. The department will have a remedy short of decertification for the labs under their purview. Labs will benefit from these changes as they will allow labs time to address identified problems without going through the time and expense of reapplying for certification after they have fixed their issues. No entity is likely to incur any additional expense under these proposed changes.

Current regulations are not identical to regulations for the certification of commercial environmental laboratories. DCLS proposes to delete or relax several quality control requirements in current regulations so that these regulations are no more stringent than those for commercial environmental labs. DCLS, for instance, proposes to delete language that requires a copy of certification statements be retained in analysts' personnel files. No entity is likely to incur additional costs on account of changes like these. Noncommercial environmental labs are likely to accrue some time and money savings on account of these changes that harmonize rules for noncommercial and commercial environmental labs.

Current regulations require certified labs to complete proficiency testing for each field of certification approximately every 6 months. DCLS proposes to only require one successful test per certification field each year in order to maintain certification. DCLS estimates that this change will save labs that only perform simple test procedures (STP labs) between $149 and $245 per year. General labs will save between $198 and $296 per year. This regulatory change will benefit labs while still requiring labs to prove proficiency in testing for which they are certified.

Current regulations require renewal of certification biennially and include a fee schedule that was written in 2004 (and only effective since 2009) when this certification program became required by legislation. When current fees were set, DCLS had limited information from DEQ and other sources and over-estimated how many labs would need to be certified (and, therefore, underestimated the approximate portion of the cost of the certification program each lab would have to bear). As a consequence of both an initial underestimation of sufficient fees and because fees have not been adjusted as the cost of this certification program has risen, DCLS now proposes to require certification to be renewed every year and to increase fees for renewal.

Current renewal fees for the 56 certified STP labs are between $475 and $600 every two years. Fees for the 53 certified general labs currently range between $2,825 and $5,200 every two years. DCLS proposes to set the annual renewal fee for STP labs at $600. DCLS also proposes to increase fees for renewal of certification for general labs. DCLS staff estimates that fees for 47 STP labs will increase by 100%; fees for the remaining 9 STP labs will increase 153%. DCLS staff estimates that fees for general labs will increase between 2% and 56%; fees for two labs will increase between 2% and 6%, fees for 22 labs will increase by between 19% and 28%, fees for 27 labs will increase between 31% and 48% and fees for two labs will increase between 50% and 56%.

DCLS will benefit from these fee increases as they will likely allow this regulatory program to be more fully self-funded. To the extent that this program provides a benefit to the public, proposed fee increases will allow that benefit to continue. Labs will bear the costs of these increased fees. There is insufficient information to ascertain whether the benefits of increasing fees will outweigh the costs of doing so.

Businesses and Entities Affected. DCLS reports that they certify 109 noncommercial labs under the provisions of these regulations. Of these 109 labs certified, 80 belong to local governments, 13 are owned by industrial companies, one is owned by a private water utility, eight belong to the Commonwealth of Virginia and seven are run by agencies of the federal government. None of these laboratories qualify as small businesses.

Localities Particularly Affected. Localities with certified labs will be particularly affected by this proposed regulatory action.

Projected Impact on Employment. This regulatory action is unlikely to affect employment in the Commonwealth.

Effects on the Use and Value of Private Property. For affected privately owned noncommercial labs, increasing fees will likely cause a small decrease in company profits and in the value of companies that own these labs.

Small Businesses: Costs and Other Effects. No small businesses will be affected by these proposed regulatory changes.

Small Businesses: Alternative Method that Minimizes Adverse Impact. No small businesses will be affected by these proposed regulatory changes.

Real Estate Development Costs. This regulatory action will likely have no effect on real estate development costs in the Commonwealth.

Legal Mandate. The Department of Planning and Budget (DPB) has analyzed the economic impact of this proposed regulation in accordance with § 2.2-4007.04 of the Administrative Process Act and Executive Order Number 14 (10). Section 2.2-4007.04 requires that such economic impact analyses include, but need not be limited to, a determination of the public benefit, the projected number of businesses or other entities to whom the regulation would apply, the identity of any localities and types of businesses or other entities particularly affected, the projected number of persons and employment positions to be affected, the projected costs to affected businesses or entities to implement or comply with the regulation, and the impact on the use and value of private property. Further, if the proposed regulation has an adverse effect on small businesses, § 2.2-4007.04 requires that such economic impact analyses include (i) an identification and estimate of the number of small businesses subject to the regulation; (ii) the projected reporting, recordkeeping, and other administrative costs required for small businesses to comply with the regulation, including the type of professional skills necessary for preparing required reports and other documents; (iii) a statement of the probable effect of the regulation on affected small businesses; and (iv) a description of any less intrusive or less costly alternative methods of achieving the purpose of the regulation. The analysis presented above represents DPB's best estimate of these economic impacts.

Agency's Response to Economic Impact Analysis: The agency is providing the following comments on the July 6, 2015, revised economic impact analysis (EIA).

Estimated Economic Impact - page 3, first full paragraph. The regulation for commercial environmental laboratories (1VAC30-46) is being revised separately. The standards that commercial environmental laboratories currently meet and will have to continue to meet under revised 1VAC30-46 are different than those for noncommercial environmental laboratories under revised 1VAC30-45. The quality control standards are the same in both regulations as currently written. The quality control standards for noncommercial environmental laboratories are being harmonized under this proposed revision to provide flexibility or to lessen the quality control requirements where the revised standards for the commercial environmental laboratories also do so. Where the proposed revisions to 1VAC30-46 for commercial environmental laboratories provide flexibility or reduce requirements pertaining to these standards, the revisions to 1VAC30-45 provide these identical changes to ensure that the noncommercial laboratories are meeting no more stringent standards than the commercial laboratories.

Estimated Economic Impact - page 3, second full paragraph; and page 4, first full paragraph. The agency background document, TH02, on page 10, addresses the overall cost change of the proposed revisions to 1VAC30-45. While the noncommercial laboratories will incur higher fees, the reduction in the requirement to perform proficiency testing (PT) studies each year will greatly compensate for this increase in fees.

DCLS provides four examples in the TH02 to demonstrate how fees will change under the new fee structure given the reduction in the requirement to perform PT studies. The four examples follow for comparison.

Example A: A laboratory performing a total of 8 test methods on nonpotable water in four test categories (oxygen demand, bacteriology, physical, and inorganic chemistry) will see a fee increase of 19% [current fee annualized is $1787.50; proposed annual fee is $2125; increase of $337.50].

Example B: A laboratory performing a total of 8 methods on nonpotable water in four test categories (bacteriology, physical, inorganic chemistry, and organic chemistry) will see a fee increase of 24% [current fee annualized is $1900; proposed annual fee is $2350; increase of $450].

Example C: A laboratory performing a total of 11 methods on nonpotable water and solid and chemical materials in two test categories (physical and inorganic chemistry) will see a fee increase of 28% [current fee annualized is $1637.50; proposed annual fee is $2090; increase of $452.50].

Example D: A laboratory performing a total of 9 methods on nonpotable water and solid and chemical materials in four test categories (oxygen demand, physical, bacteriology, and inorganic chemistry) will see a fee increase of 31% [current fee annualized is $1787.50; proposed annual fee is $2345; increase of $915].

Most laboratories performing any number of tests defined as simple test procedures (STP) will incur a fee increase of 100%. These laboratories currently pay $600 every two years. Under the proposal they will pay $600 annually, an increase of $300 each year.

At the same time, DCLS will require only one proficiency test study for each field of certification (matrix, technology/method, and analyte). This is a significant cost reduction for both the STP laboratories and the general laboratories. A typical STP laboratory performs nonpotable water testing for E. coli, total suspended solids, and biochemical oxygen demand. Some STPs perform only two of these tests; others test pH in addition to these tests. The majority of the STP labs (64%) will see an overall savings on average of between $149 and $245 each year due to the reduced proficiency testing requirement.

A typical general environmental lab performs tests for simple and complex nutrients as well as those tests performed by the STP labs. Others add a test for total residual chlorine to the basic STP lab tests. The majority of the general environmental labs (64% or 34 labs) will save on average between $198 and $296 each year from the reduction in the requirement to perform PT studies. Twelve other general environmental laboratories are certified for many fields of certification, including test methods for organic chemistry and chemical metals testing. Their savings will be greater but their fees will be higher as well.

Using the four examples above, the reduction in PT costs would be as follows: Example A=$296; Example B=$289; Example C=$362; and Example D=$341.

The PT costs illustrated above are an average of the prices charged by four approved PT providers that offer all the PT studies required by these laboratories.

Overall Changes in Laboratory Cost to Maintain Certification. While the proposed fees will increase, the cost of maintaining certification will be reduced overall. The reduction in the requirement to purchase and perform PT studies from two to one each year will offset the increase in fees for all laboratories. This can be demonstrated by using the four examples shown above for general environmental 1aboratories.


DESCRIPTION

EXAMPLE A

EXAMPLE B

EXAMPLE C

EXAMPLE D

Current annualized fee

$1787.50

$1900.00

$1637.50

$1787.50

Current PT cost

$592.00

$578.00

$724.00

$682.00

Total current fee and PT costs

$2379.50

$2478.00

$2361.50

$2469.50

Proposed annual fee

$2125.00

$2350.00

$2090.00

$2345.00

Reduced PT cost under

proposal

$296.00

$289.00

$362.00

$341.00

Total proposed fee and PT

costs

$2421.00

$2639.00

$2452.00

$2686.00

TOTAL INCREASE IN COST
TO MAINTAIN CERTIFICATION UNDER PROPOSAL

$41.50 (1.7%)

$161.00 (6.5%)

$90.50 (3.8%)

$216.50 (8.8%)


The laboratories performing only simple test procedures (STP) will also benefit from the reduction in the requirement to purchase and perform PT studies from two to one each year. The PT section above indicates that 64% of STP laboratories would see an average savings between $149 and $245 per year. To demonstrate the overall cost change for STP laboratories, two examples are provided using these PT cost savings. Example E will see a savings of $149 each year. Example F will see a savings of $245 each year.

DESCRIPTION

EXAMPLE E

EXAMPLE F

Current annualized fee

$300.00

$300.00

Current PT cost

$298.00

$490.00

Total current fee and PT costs

$598.00

$790.00

Proposed annual fee

$600.00

$600.00

Reduced PT cost under proposal

$149.00

$245.00

Total proposed fee and PT costs

$749.00

$845.00

TOTAL INCREASE IN COST TO MAINTAIN CERTIFICATION UNDER PROPOSAL

$151.00 (25.3%)

$55.00 (6.7%)


The increase in the proposed fees is substantially reduced by the reduction in PT study requirements proposed under the revisions to 1VAC30-45. The examples provided show an overall increase of cost (fees and PT studies) for the noncommercial laboratories ranging from 1.7% to 25.3% annually compared with the increase in fees of 19% to 100%.

Summary:

The proposed amendments (i) streamline the procedures for application and renewal of certification, (ii) reduce the requirement to perform proficiency test studies to one study annually for each field of certification, (iii) eliminate requirements for specialized testing that noncommercial laboratories currently do not perform, (iv) add procedures for suspension of certification to provide a laboratory time to correct problems to avoid decertification, (v) make explicit the requirements to notify a laboratory that the agency has cause to deny certification or to decertify, (vi) simplify the appeal procedure language, (vii) restructure and modify the fee system and increase the fees paid by laboratories, and (viii) eliminate or provide increased flexibility for a number of quality system provisions (Article 4).

Part I
General Provisions

1VAC30-45-10. Purpose.

Section 2.2-1105 of the Code of Virginia directs the Division of Consolidated Laboratory Services to establish a program to certify environmental laboratories that perform tests, analyses, measurements or monitoring required pursuant to the Commonwealth's air, waste and water laws and regulations. This chapter sets out the required standards and the process by which owners of noncommercial environmental laboratories may obtain certification for their laboratories. 1VAC30-46 covers commercial environmental laboratories and NELAP-accredited environmental laboratories seeking reciprocal accreditation in Virginia.

1VAC30-45-30. Applicability.

A. This chapter applies to any owner of a noncommercial environmental laboratory.

B. Any environmental laboratory owned by an agency of the federal government may be certified as follows:

1. By DGS-DCLS DCLS to the standards set out in this chapter; or

2. By a federal primary accrediting authority accreditation body to the standards established by the National Environmental Laboratory Accreditation Conference TNI.

C. Citizen monitoring groups. Section 62.1-44.19:11 of the Code of Virginia both establishes a citizen water quality monitoring program for Virginia and encourages the growth of the program. The Department of Environmental Quality (DEQ) has a separate program of quality assurance and quality control (QA/QC) standards for citizen monitoring groups and their laboratories to follow. The following laboratories shall meet the DEG QA/QC requirements developed for the purposes of citizen monitoring of water quality in lieu of the requirements of 1VAC30-45 or 1VAC30-46:

1. Laboratories owned by citizen monitoring groups.

2. Laboratories at institutions of higher education affiliated with citizen monitoring groups for the purposes of analyzing samples for the groups.

D. Environmental research performed by environmental laboratories owned by institutions of higher education. Institutions of higher education. Environmental laboratories owned by institutions of higher education located in Virginia that perform analyses for the purpose of providing environmental research data to DEQ at DEQ's request shall meet the QA/QC requirements specified by DEQ. An environmental laboratory owned by an institution of higher education located in Virginia that performs environmental research for DEQ shall not be subject to the requirements of either 1VAC30-45 or 1VAC30-46 unless DEQ requires the laboratory to do so.

1VAC30-45-40. Definitions.

Where a term is defined in this section, the term shall have no other meaning, even if it is defined differently in the Code of Virginia or another regulation of the Virginia Administrative Code. Unless specifically defined in this section, the terms used in this chapter shall have the meanings commonly ascribed to them by recognized authorities. The following words and terms when used in this chapter shall have the following meanings unless the context clearly indicates otherwise.

"Acceptance criteria" means specified limits placed on characteristics of an item, process, or service defined in requirement documents.

"Accuracy" means the degree of agreement between an observed value and an accepted reference value. Accuracy includes a combination of random error (precision) and systematic error (bias) components that are due to sampling and analytical operations. Accuracy is an indicator of data quality.

"Algae" means simple single-celled, colonial, or multicelled, mostly aquatic plants, containing chlorophyll and lacking roots, stems and leaves that are either suspended in water (phytoplankton) or attached to rocks and other substrates (periphyton).

"Aliquot" means a portion of a sample taken for analysis.

"Analyte" means the substance or physical property to be determined in samples examined.

"Analytical method" means a technical procedure for providing analysis of a sample, defined by a body such as the Environmental Protection Agency or the American Society for Testing and Materials, that may not include the sample preparation method.

"Assessment" means the evaluation process used to measure or establish the performance, effectiveness, and conformance of an organization and its systems or both to defined criteria.

"Assessor" means the person who performs on-site assessments of laboratories' capability and capacity for meeting the requirements under this chapter by examining the records and other physical evidence for each one of the tests for which certification has been requested assigned by DCLS to perform, alone or as part of an assessment team, an assessment of an environmental laboratory.

"Audit" means a systematic evaluation to determine the conformance to quantitative and qualitative specifications of some operational function or activity.

"Authority" means, in the context of a governmental body or local government, an authority created under the provisions of the Virginia Water and Waste Authorities Act, Chapter 51 (§ 15.2-5100 et seq.) of Title 15.2 of the Code of Virginia.

"Batch" means environmental samples that are prepared together or analyzed together or both with the same process and personnel, using the same lot or lots of reagents. "Analytical batch" means a batch composed of prepared environmental samples (extracts, digestates or concentrates) that are analyzed together as a group. An analytical batch can include prepared samples originating from various environmental matrices and can exceed 20 samples. "Preparation batch" means a batch composed of one to 20 environmental samples of the same matrix that meets the criteria in this definition for "batch" and with a maximum time between the start of processing of the first and last sample in the batch to be 24 hours.

"Benthic macroinvertebrates" means bottom dwelling animals without backbones that live at least part of their life cycles within or upon available substrates within a body of water.

"Blank" means a sample that has not been exposed to the analyzed sample stream in order to monitor contamination during sampling, transport, storage or analysis. The blank is subjected to the usual analytical and measurement process to establish a zero baseline or background value and is sometimes used to adjust or correct routine analytical results. Blanks include the following types:

1. Field blank. A blank prepared in the field by filling a clean container with pure deionized water and appropriate preservative, if any, for the specific sampling activity being undertaken.

2. Method blank. A sample of a matrix similar to the batch of associated samples (when available) that is free from the analytes of interest and is processed simultaneously with and under the same conditions as samples through all steps of the analytical procedures, and in which no target analytes or interferences are present at concentrations that impact the analytical results for sample analyses.

"Calibration" means to determine, by measurement or comparison with a standard, the correct value of each scale reading on a meter, instrument or other device. The levels of the applied calibration standard should bracket the range of planned or expected sample measurements.

"Calibration curve" means the graphical relationship between the known values, such as concentrations, of a series of calibration standards and their instrument response.

"Calibration standard" means a substance or reference material used to calibrate an instrument.

"Certified reference material" means a reference material one or more of whose property values are certified by a technically valid procedure, accompanied by or traceable to a certificate or other documentation that is issued by a certifying body.

"Client" or "customer" means the Department of Environmental Quality (DEQ) when used in the context of quality assurance and specific quality control provisions.

"Commercial environmental laboratory" means an environmental laboratory where environmental analysis is performed for another person.

"Corrective action" means the action taken to eliminate the causes of an existing nonconformity, defect or other undesirable situation in order to prevent recurrence.

"DGS-DCLS" "DCLS" means the Division of Consolidated Laboratory Services of the Department of General Services.

"Demonstration of capability" means the procedure to establish the ability of the analyst to generate data of acceptable accuracy and precision.

"Detection limit" means the lowest concentration or amount of the target analyte that can be determined to be different from zero by a single measurement at a stated degree of confidence.

"Environmental analysis" or "environmental analyses" means any test, analysis, measurement, or monitoring used for the purposes of the Virginia Air Pollution Control Law, the Virginia Waste Management Act or the State Water Control Law (§ 10.1-1300 et seq., § 10.1-1400 et seq., and § 62.1-44.2 et seq., respectively, of the Code of Virginia). For the purposes of these regulations, any test, analysis, measurement, or monitoring required pursuant to the regulations promulgated under these three laws, or by any permit or order issued under the authority of any of these laws or regulations is "used for the purposes" of these laws. The term shall not include the following:

1. Sampling of water, solid and chemical materials, biological tissue, or air and emissions.

2. Field testing and measurement of water, solid and chemical materials, biological tissue, or air and emissions, except when performed in an environmental laboratory rather than at the site where the sample was taken.

3. Taxonomic identification of samples for which there is no national accreditation standard such as algae, benthic macroinvertebrates, macrophytes, vertebrates and zooplankton.

4. Protocols used pursuant to § 10.1-104.2 of the Code of Virginia to determine soil fertility, animal manure nutrient content, or plant tissue nutrient uptake for the purposes of nutrient management.

5. Geochemical and permeability testing for solid waste compliance.

6. Materials specification for air quality compliance when product certifications specify the data required by an air permit such as fuel type, Btu content, sulfur content, or VOC content.

"Environmental laboratory" or "laboratory" means a facility or a defined area within a facility where environmental analysis is performed. A structure built solely to shelter field personnel and equipment from inclement weather shall not be considered an environmental laboratory.

"Establishment date" means the date set for the accreditation program under 1VAC30-46 and the certification program to be established under this chapter.

"Establishment of certification program" or "established program" means that DGS-DCLS DCLS has completed the initial accreditation of environmental laboratories covered by 1VAC30-46 and the initial certification of environmental laboratories covered by 1VAC30-45.

"Facility" means something that is built or installed to serve a particular function.

"Field of certification" or "FoC" means an approach to certifying laboratories by those matrix, technology/method, and analyte/analyte group analyte combinations for which DCLS offers certification.

"Field of proficiency testing" or "FoPT" means analytes for which a laboratory is required to successfully analyze a PT sample in order to obtain or maintain certification, collectively defined as matrix, technology/method, and analyte.

"Field testing and measurement" means any of the following:

1. Any test for parameters under 40 CFR Part 136 for which the holding time indicated for the sample requires immediate analysis; or

2. Any test defined as a field test in federal regulation.

The following is a limited list of currently recognized field tests or measures that is not intended to be inclusive: continuous emissions monitoring; on-line online monitoring; flow monitoring; tests for pH, residual chlorine, temperature and dissolved oxygen; and field analysis for soil gas.

"Finding" means an assessment conclusion that identifies a condition having a significant effect on an item or activity. An assessment finding is normally a deficiency and is normally accompanied by specific examples of the observed condition. referenced to a laboratory certification standard and supported by objective evidence that identifies a deviation from a laboratory certification standard requirement.

"Governmental body" means any department, agency, bureau, authority, or district of the United States government, of the government of the Commonwealth of Virginia, or of any local government within the Commonwealth of Virginia.

"Holding time (or maximum allowable holding time)" means the maximum time that a sample may be held prior to analysis and still be considered valid or not compromised can elapse between two specified activities.

"Initial certification period" means the period during which DGS-DCLS is accepting and processing applications for the first time under this chapter as specified in 1VAC30-45-60.

"International System of Units (SI)" means the coherent system of units adopted and recommended by the General Conference on Weights and Measures.

"Laboratory control sample" or "LCS" means a sample matrix, free from the analytes of interest, spiked with verified known amounts of analytes or a material containing known and verified amounts of analytes. It is generally used to establish intra-laboratory or analyst specific precision and bias or to assess the performance of all or a portion of the measurement system. "Laboratory control sample" or "LCS" may also be named laboratory fortified blank, spiked blank, or QC check sample.

"Laboratory manager" means the person who has overall responsibility for the technical operation of the environmental laboratory and who exercises actual day-to-day supervision of laboratory operation for the appropriate fields of testing and reporting of results. The title of this person may include but is not limited to laboratory director, technical director, laboratory supervisor or laboratory manager.

"Legal entity" means an entity, other than a natural person, who has sufficient existence in legal contemplation that it can function legally, be sued or sue, and make decisions through agents as in the case of corporations.

"Limit of detection" or "LOD" means an estimate of the minimum amount of a substance that an analytical process can reliably detect. An LOD is analyte and matrix specific and may be laboratory dependent.

"Limit of quantitation" or "LOQ" means the minimum levels, concentrations, or quantities of a target variable (e.g., target analyte) that can be reported with a specified degree of confidence.

"Local government" means a municipality (city or town), county, sanitation district, or authority.

"Macrophytes" means any aquatic or terrestrial plant species that can be identified and observed with the eye, unaided by magnification.

"Matrix" means the component or substrate that may contain the analyte of interest. A matrix can be a field of certification matrix or a quality system matrix.

1. Field of certification matrix. These matrix definitions shall be used when certifying a laboratory.

a. Non-potable Nonpotable water. Any aqueous sample that has not been designated a potable or potential potable water source. Includes surface water, groundwater, effluents, water treatment chemicals, and TCLP or other extracts.

b. Solid and chemical materials. Includes soils, sediments, sludges, products and byproducts of an industrial process that results in a matrix not previously defined.

c. Biological tissue. Any sample of a biological origin such as fish tissue, shellfish, or plant material. Such samples shall be grouped according to origin.

d. Air and emissions. Whole gas or vapor samples including those contained in flexible or rigid wall containers and the extracted concentrated analytes of interest from a gas or vapor that are collected with a sorbent tube, impinger solution, filter or other device.

2. Quality system matrix. For purposes of batch and quality control requirement determinations, the following matrix types shall be used:

a. Drinking water. Any aqueous sample that has been designated a potable or potential potable water source.

b. Aqueous. Any aqueous sample excluded from the definition of drinking water matrix or saline/estuarine source. Includes surface water, groundwater, effluents, and TCLP or other extracts.

c. Saline/estuarine. Any aqueous sample from an ocean or estuary, or other salt water source.

d. Nonaqueous liquid. Any organic liquid with less than 15% settleable solids.

e. Biological tissue. Any sample of a biological origin such as fish tissue, shellfish, or plant material. Such samples shall be grouped according to origin.

f. Solids. Includes soils, sediments, sludges and other matrices with more than 15% settleable solids.

g. Chemical waste. A product or by-product byproduct of an industrial process that results in a matrix not previously defined.

h. Air and emissions. Whole gas or vapor samples including those contained in flexible or rigid wall containers and the extracted concentrated analytes of interest from a gas or vapor that are collected with a sorbent tube, impinger solution, filter or other device.

"Matrix spike (spiked sample or fortified sample)" means a sample prepared by adding a known mass of target analyte to a specified amount of matrix sample for which an independent estimate of target analyte concentration is available. Matrix spikes are used, for example, to determine the effect of the matrix on a method's recovery efficiency.

"Matrix spike duplicate (spiked sample or fortified sample duplicate)" means a second replicate matrix spike prepared in the laboratory and analyzed to obtain a measure of the precision of the recovery for each analyte.

"National Environmental Laboratory Accreditation Conference (NELAC)" means a voluntary organization of state and federal environmental officials and interest groups with the primary purpose to establish mutually acceptable standards for accrediting environmental laboratories. A subset of NELAP.

"National Environmental Laboratory Accreditation Program (NELAP)" means the overall National Environmental Laboratory Accreditation Program of which NELAC is a part.

"National Institute of Standards and Technology" or "NIST" means an agency of the U.S. Department of Commerce's Technology Administration that is working with EPA, states, NELAC, and other public and commercial entities to establish a system under which private sector companies and interested states can be certified by NIST to provide NIST-traceable proficiency testing (PT) samples.

"Negative control" means measures taken to ensure that a test, its components, or the environment do not cause undesired effects, or produce incorrect test results.

"Noncommercial environmental laboratory" means either of the following:

1. An environmental laboratory where environmental analysis is performed solely for the owner of the laboratory.

2. An environmental laboratory where the only performance of environmental analysis for another person is one of the following:

a. Environmental analysis performed by an environmental laboratory owned by a local government for an owner of a small wastewater treatment system treating domestic sewage at a flow rate of less than or equal to 1,000 gallons per day.

b. Environmental analysis performed by an environmental laboratory operated by a corporation as part of a general contract issued by a local government to operate and maintain a wastewater treatment system or a waterworks.

c. Environmental analysis performed by an environmental laboratory owned by a corporation as part of the prequalification process or to confirm the identity or characteristics of material supplied by a potential or existing customer or generator as required by a hazardous waste management permit under 9VAC20-60.

d. Environmental analysis performed by an environmental laboratory owned by a Publicly Owned Treatment Works (POTW) for an industrial source of wastewater under a permit issued by the POTW to the industrial source as part of the requirements of a pretreatment program under Part VII (9VAC25-31-730 et seq.) of 9VAC25-31.

e. Environmental analysis performed by an environmental laboratory owned by a county authority for any municipality within the county's geographic jurisdiction when the environmental analysis pertains solely to the purpose for which the authority was created.

f. Environmental analysis performed by an environmental laboratory owned by an authority or a sanitation district for any participating local government of the authority or sanitation district when the environmental analysis pertains solely to the purpose for which the authority or sanitation district was created.

"Owner" means any person who owns, operates, leases or controls an environmental laboratory.

"Person" means an individual, corporation, partnership, association, company, business, trust, joint venture or other legal entity.

"Physical," for the purposes of fee test categories, means the tests to determine the physical properties of a sample. Tests for solids, turbidity and color are examples of physical tests.

"Positive control" means measures taken to ensure that a test or its components are working properly and producing correct or expected results from positive test subjects.

"Precision" means the degree to which a set of observations or measurements of the same property, obtained under similar conditions, conform to themselves. Precision is an indicator of data quality. Precision is expressed usually as standard deviation, variance or range, in either absolute or relative terms.

"Primary accrediting authority accreditation body" means the agency or department designated at the territory, state or federal level as the recognized authority with the responsibility and accountability for granting NELAC accreditation to a specific laboratory for a specific field of accreditation body responsible for assessing a laboratory's total quality system, on-site assessment, and PT performance tracking for fields of accreditation.

"Proficiency test or testing (PT)" means evaluating a laboratory's performance under controlled conditions relative to a given set of criteria through analysis of unknown samples provided by an external source.

"Proficiency test (PT) field of testing" means the approach to offer proficiency testing by maxtrix, technology/method, and analyte/analyte group.

"Proficiency test (PT) sample" means a sample, the composition of which is unknown to both the analyst and the laboratory and is provided to test whether the analyst or laboratory or both laboratory can produce analytical results within specified acceptance criteria.

"Proficiency testing (PT) program" means the aggregate of providing rigorously controlled and standardized environmental samples to a laboratory for analysis, reporting of results, statistical evaluation of the results and the collective demographics and results summary of all participating laboratories.

"Program," in the context of a regulatory program, means the relevant U.S. Environmental Protection Agency program such as the water program under the Clean Water Act (CWA), the air program under the Clean Air Act (CAA), the waste program under the Comprehensive Environmental Response, Compensation and Liability Act (CERCLA or Superfund) or the waste program under the Resource Conservation and Recovery Act (RCRA).

"Publicly Owned Treatment Works (POTW)" means a treatment works as defined by § 212 of the CWA, which is owned by a state or municipality (as defined by § 502(4) of the CWA). This definition includes any devices and systems used in the storage, treatment, recycling, and reclamation of municipal sewage or industrial wastes of a liquid nature. It also includes sewers, pipes, and other conveyances only if they convey wastewater to a POTW treatment plant. The term also means the municipality as defined in § 502(4) of the CWA, which has jurisdiction over the indirect discharges to and the discharges from such a treatment works.

"Quality assurance" or "QA" means an integrated system of management activities involving planning, quality control, quality implementation, assessment, reporting and quality improvement to ensure that a product process, item, or service meets defined standards of quality with a stated level of confidence is of the type and quality needed and expected by the client.

"Quality assurance officer" means the person who has responsibility for the quality system and its implementation. Where staffing is limited, the quality assurance officer may also be the laboratory manager.

"Quality control" or "QC" means the overall system of technical activities whose purpose is to measure and control the quality of a product or service so that it meets the needs of users that measures the attributes and performance of a process, item, or service against defined standards to verify that they meet the stated requirements established by the customer; operational techniques and activities that are used to fulfill requirements for quality; and also the system of activities and checks used to ensure that measurement systems are maintained within prescribed limits, providing protection against "out of control" conditions and ensuring that the results are of acceptable quality.

"Quality manual" means a document stating the management policies, objectives, principles, organizational structure and authority, responsibilities, accountability, and implementation of an agency, organization, or laboratory, to ensure the quality of its product and the utility of its product to its users.

"Quality system" means a structured and documented management system describing the policies, objectives, principles, organizational authority, responsibilities, accountability, and implementation plan of an organization for ensuring quality in its work processes, products (items), and services. The quality system provides the framework for planning, implementing, and assessing work performed by the organization and for carrying out required quality assurance and quality control activities.

"Range" means the difference between the minimum and maximum of a set of values.

"Reference material" means a material or substance one or more properties of which are sufficiently well established to be used for the calibration of an apparatus, the assessment of a measurement test method, or for assigning values to materials.

"Reference standard" means a standard, generally of the highest metrological quality available at a given location, from which measurements made at that location are derived.

"Responsible official" means one of the following, as appropriate:

1. If the laboratory is owned or operated by a private corporation, "responsible official" means (i) a president, secretary, treasurer, or a vice-president of the corporation in charge of a principal business function, or any other person who performs similar policy-making or decision-making functions for the corporation or (ii) the manager of one or more manufacturing, production, or operating facilities employing more than 250 persons or having gross annual sales or expenditures exceeding $25 million (in second-quarter 1980 dollars), if authority to sign documents has been assigned or delegated in accordance with corporate procedures.

2. If the laboratory is owned or operated by a partnership, association, or a sole proprietor, "responsible official" means a general partner, officer of the association, or the proprietor, respectively.

3. If the laboratory is owned or operated by a governmental body, "responsible official" means a director or highest official appointed or designated to oversee the operation and performance of the activities of the environmental laboratory.

4. Any person designated as the responsible official by an individual described in subdivision 1, 2 or 3 of this definition, provided the designation is in writing, the designation specifies an individual or position with responsibility for the overall operation of the environmental laboratory, and the designation is submitted to DGS-DCLS DCLS.

"Sampling" means the act of collection for the purpose of analysis.

"Sanitation district" means a sanitation district created under the provisions of Chapters 3 (§ 21-141 et seq.) through 5 (§ 21-291 et seq.) of Title 21 of the Code of Virginia.

"Sewage" means the water-carried human wastes from residences, buildings, industrial establishments or other places together with such industrial wastes and underground, surface, storm, or other water as may be present.

"Simple test procedures" or "STP" means any of the following:

1. Field testing and measurement performed in an environmental laboratory.

2. The test procedures to determine:

a. Biochemical oxygen demand (BOD) or carbonaceous BOD (CBOD);

b. Fecal coliform;

c. Total coliform;

d. Fecal streptococci;

e. E. coli;

f. Enterococci;

g. Settleable solids (SS);

h. Total dissolved solids (TDS);

i. Total solids (TS);

j. Total suspended solids (TSS);

k. Total volatile solids (TVS); and

l. Total volatile suspended solids (TVSS).

"Standard operating procedure (SOP)" or "SOP" means a written document that details the method of an operation, analysis or action whose techniques and procedures are thoroughly prescribed and which is accepted for an operation, analysis, or action with thoroughly prescribed techniques and steps. An SOP is officially approved as the method for performing certain routine or repetitive tasks.

"Standardized reference material (SRM)" or "SRM" means a certified reference material produced by the U.S. National Institute of Standards and Technology or other equivalent organization and characterized for absolute content, independent of analytical method.

"System laboratory" means a noncommercial laboratory that analyzes samples from multiple facilities having the same owner.

"TCLP" or "toxicity characteristic leachate procedure" means Test Method 1311 in "Test Methods for Evaluating Solid Waste, Physical/Chemical Methods," EPA Publication SW-846, as incorporated by reference in 40 CFR 260.11. This method is used to determine whether a solid waste exhibits the characteristic of toxicity (see 40 CFR 261.24).

"Test" means a technical operation that consists of the determination of one or more characteristics or performance of a given product, material, equipment, organism, physical phenomenon, process or service according to a specified procedure.

"Test, analysis, measurement or monitoring required pursuant to the Virginia Air Pollution Control Law" means any method of analysis required by the Virginia Air Pollution Control Law (§ 10.1-1300 et seq.); by the regulations promulgated under this law (9VAC5) including any method of analysis listed either in the definition of "reference method" in 9VAC5-10-20, or listed or adopted by reference in 9VAC5; or by any permit or order issued under and in accordance with this law and these regulations.

"Test, analysis, measurement or monitoring required pursuant to the Virginia Waste Management Act" means any method of analysis required by the Virginia Waste Management Act (§ 10.1-1400 et seq.); by the regulations promulgated under this law (9VAC20), including any method of analysis listed or adopted by reference in 9VAC20; or by any permit or order issued under and in accordance with this law and these regulations.

"Test, analysis, measurement or monitoring required pursuant to the Virginia Water Control Law" means any method of analysis required by the Virginia Water Control Law (§ 62.1-44.2 et seq.); by the regulations promulgated under this law (9VAC25), including any method of analysis listed or adopted by reference in 9VAC25; or by any permit or order issued under and in accordance with this law and these regulations.

"Test method" means an adoption of a scientific technique for performing a specific measurement as documented in a laboratory standard operating procedure or as published by a recognized authority.

"The NELAC Institute" or "TNI" means the organization whose standards environmental laboratories must meet to become accredited under 1VAC30-46, the regulation governing commercial environmental laboratories in Virginia.

"Toxicity characteristic leachate procedure" or "TCLP" means Test Method 1311 in "Test Methods for Evaluating Solid Waste, Physical/Chemical Methods," EPA Publication SW-846, as incorporated by reference in 40 CFR 260.11. This method is used to determine whether a solid waste exhibits the characteristic of toxicity (see 40 CFR 261.24).

"Traceability" means the property of a result of a measurement whereby it can be related to appropriate standards, generally international or national standards, through an unbroken chain of comparisons.

"U.S. Environmental Protection Agency" or "EPA" means the federal government agency with responsibility for protecting, safeguarding and improving the natural environment (i.e., air, water and land) upon which human life depends.

"Virginia Air Pollution Control Law" means Chapter 13 (§ 10.1-1300 et seq.) of Title 10.1 of the Code of Virginia, which is titled "Air Pollution Control Board."

"Virginia Environmental Laboratory Accreditation Program" or "VELAP" means the program DCLS operates to certify environmental laboratories under this chapter.

"Wastewater" means liquid and water-carried industrial wastes and domestic sewage from residential dwellings, commercial buildings, industrial and manufacturing facilities and institutions.

"Waterworks" means each system of structures and appliances used in connection with the collection, storage, purification, and treatment of water for drinking or domestic use and the distribution thereof to the public, except distribution piping.

"Zooplankton" means microscopic animals that float freely with voluntary movement in a body of water.

1VAC30-45-50. Scope of certification.

A. Noncommercial environmental laboratories shall be certified based on the general laboratory standards set out in Part II (1VAC30-45-200 et seq.) of this chapter and on the specific test methods or analysis, monitoring or measurement required by regulatory permit or other requirement under the Virginia Air Pollution Control Law, Virginia Waste Management Act, or Virginia Water Control Law, the regulations promulgated under these laws, and by permits and orders issued under and in accordance with these laws or regulations.

B. DGS-DCLS DCLS shall review alternative test methods and procedures for certification when these are proposed by the applicant laboratory. The provisions of 1VAC30-45-70 E and 1VAC30-45-90 B govern alternative test methods and procedures.

C. Certification shall be granted for one or more fields of certification, including the matrix, the technology and methods used by the noncommercial environmental laboratory, and the individual analytes or analyte groups determined by the particular method used by the laboratory.

1VAC30-45-60. General: certification requirements.

A. Components of certification. The components of certification include review of personnel qualifications, on-site assessment, proficiency testing, and quality systems. The criteria for these components, set out in Part II (1VAC30-45-200 et seq.) of this chapter, shall be fulfilled for certification.

B. Individual laboratory sites and mobile laboratories.

1. Individual laboratory sites are subject to the same application process, assessments, and other requirements as environmental laboratories. Any remote laboratory sites are considered separate sites and subject to separate on-site assessments.

2. Laboratories located at the same physical location shall be considered an individual laboratory site if these laboratories are owned by the same person, and have the same laboratory manager and quality system.

3. Laboratories located at separate, noncontiguous physical locations may request to be considered as an individual laboratory site if these laboratories are owned by the same person and have the same laboratory manager and quality system.

4. 3. A mobile laboratory, which is configured with equipment to perform analyses, whether associated with a fixed-based laboratory or not, is considered an environmental laboratory and shall require separate certification. This certification shall remain with the mobile laboratory and be site independent. Moving the configured mobile laboratory to a different site will not require a new or separate certification. Before performing analyses at each new site, the laboratory shall ensure that instruments and equipment have been checked for performance and have been calibrated.

1VAC30-45-70. Process to apply and obtain certification.

A. Duty to apply. All owners of noncommercial environmental laboratories shall apply for certification as specified by the provisions of this section. Applications for certification must be obtained from DCLS program staff by email at Lab_Cert@dgs.virginia.gov.

B. Timely initial applications.

1. Owners of noncommercial environmental laboratories applying for certification under this chapter for the first time shall submit an application to DGS-DCLS no later than September 29, 2009.

2. Owners of noncommercial environmental laboratories that come into existence after January 1, 2009, shall submit an initial application to DGS-DCLS no later than 180 calendar days prior to beginning operation.

C. Timely renewal applications. The owner of a certified noncommercial environmental laboratory shall submit an application for renewal of certification at least 90 calendar days prior to expiration of certification.

B. Owners of noncommercial environmental laboratories applying for certification under this chapter for the first time shall submit an application to DCLS as specified under subsection F of this section.

C. Renewal and reassessment.

1. DCLS shall renew certification annually for the certified laboratory provided the laboratory does the following:

a. Maintains compliance with this chapter.

b. Attests to this compliance by signing the certificate of compliance provided under subdivision F 3 of this section.

c. Reports acceptable proficiency test values as required by Article 3 (1VAC30-45-500 et seq.) of Part II of this chapter.

d. Pays the fee required by 1VAC30-45-130.

2. DCLS shall reassess the certified environmental laboratory during an on-site assessment as required by Article 2 (1VAC30-45-300 et seq.) of Part II of this chapter.

D. Responsibilities of the owner and operator when the laboratory is owned by one person and operated by another person.

1. When an environmental laboratory is owned by one person but is operated by another person, the operator may submit the application for the owner.

2. If the operator fails to submit the application, the owner is not relieved of his responsibility to apply for certification.

3. While DGS-DCLS DCLS may notify noncommercial environmental laboratories of the date their applications are due, failure of DGS-DCLS DCLS to notify does not relieve the owner of his obligation to apply under this chapter.

E. Submission of applications for modifications to certification. An owner of a certified noncommercial environmental laboratory shall follow the process set out in 1VAC30-45-90 B to add a new matrix, technology/method, an analyte or analyte group, modify a test method or institute use of a method or technology not in the laboratory's standard operating procedures, including alternative test methods or procedures to modify the laboratory's scope of certification.

F. Contents of application.

1. Applications shall include but not be limited to the following information and documents:

a. Legal name of laboratory;

b. Name of owner of laboratory;

c. Name of operator of laboratory, if different than owner;

d. Street address and description of location of laboratory;

e. Mailing address of laboratory, if different from street address;

f. Address of owner, if different from laboratory address;

g. Name, address, telephone number, facsimile number and e-mail email, as applicable, of responsible official;

h. Name, address, telephone number, facsimile number and e-mail email, as applicable, of laboratory manager;

i. Name, address, telephone number, facsimile number and e-mail email, as applicable, of designated quality assurance officer;

j. Name title, and telephone number of laboratory contact person;

k. Laboratory type (e.g., public water system, public wastewater system or combination of the two, or industrial (with type of industry indicated));

l. Laboratory hours of operation;

m. Fields of certification (matrix, technology/method, and analyte/analyte group) analyte) for which certification is sought;

n. Methods employed, including analytes;

o. n. The results of the three most recent proficiency test studies one successful unique PT study for each field of proficiency testing as required by Article 3 (1VAC30-45-500 et seq.) of Part II of this chapter;

p. o. Quality assurance manual; and

q. Lab identification number (for renewal only); and

r. p. For mobile laboratories, a unique vehicle identification number, such as a manufacturer's vehicle identification number (VIN#), serial number, or license number.

2. Fee. The application shall include payment of the fee as specified in 1VAC30-45-130.

3. Certification of compliance.

a. The application shall include a "Certification of Compliance" statement signed and dated by the responsible official, by the quality control officer and by the laboratory manager.

b. The certification of compliance shall state: "The applicant understands and acknowledges that the laboratory is required to be continually in compliance with the Virginia environmental laboratory certification program regulation (1VAC30, Chapter 45) and is subject to the provisions of 1VAC30-45-100 in the event of noncompliance. I certify under penalty of law that this document and all attachments were prepared under my direction or supervision in accordance with a system designed to assure that qualified personnel properly gather and evaluate the information submitted. Based on my inquiry of the person or persons who manage the laboratory or those persons directly responsible for gathering and evaluating the information, the information submitted is, to the best of my knowledge and belief, true, accurate and complete. Submitting false information or data shall result in denial of certification or decertification. I hereby further certify that I am authorized to sign this application."

G. Completeness determination.

1. DGS-DCLS DCLS shall determine whether an application is complete and notify the laboratory of the result of such determination. During the initial certification period, DGS-DCLS DCLS shall provide this notice within 90 calendar days of its receipt of a laboratory's initial application. Following the initial certification period, DGS-DCLS shall provide this notice within 60 calendar days of DGS-DCLS's receipt of a laboratory's initial application and within 30 calendar days of DGS-DCLS' receipt of a laboratory's renewal application.

2. An application shall be determined complete if it contains all the information required pursuant to subsection F of this section and is sufficient to evaluate the laboratory prior to the on-site assessment. Designating an application complete does not preclude DGS-DCLS DCLS from requesting or accepting additional information.

3. If DGS-DCLS DCLS determines that an application is incomplete, DGS-DCLS's the DCLS notification of such determination shall explain why the application is incomplete and specify the additional information needed to make the application complete.

4. Except during the initial certification period, if If DCLS makes no determination is made within 60 within 90 calendar days of DGS-DCLS's its receipt of either (i) the application or (ii) additional information, in the case of an application determined to be incomplete, the application shall be determined to be complete. During the initial certification period, the time period shall be 90 calendar days.

5. If the laboratory has not submitted the required additional information within 90 days of receiving a notice from DGS-DCLS DCLS requesting additional information, DGS-DCLS DCLS may return the incomplete application and inform the laboratory that the application cannot be processed. The laboratory may then submit a new application.

H. Grant of interim certification pending final determination on application.

1. DGS-DCLS DCLS shall grant a laboratory interim certification status under the following conditions:

a. The laboratory's application is determined to be complete;

b. The laboratory has satisfied all the requirements for certification, including all requests for additional information, with the exception of on-site assessment; and

c. DGS-DCLS DCLS is unable to schedule the on-site assessment within 90 120 days of its determination that the application is complete (for initial applications) or before the laboratory's certification expires (for renewal applications).

2. A laboratory with interim certification status shall have the same rights and status as a laboratory that has been granted certification by DGS-DCLS DCLS.

3. Interim certification expires when DGS-DCLS DCLS issues a final determination on certification.

I. On-site assessment. 1. An on-site assessment shall be performed and the follow-up and reporting procedures for such assessments shall be completed in accordance with Article 2 (1VAC30-45-300 et seq.) of Part II of this chapter prior to issuance of a final determination on certification.

2. Alternative on-site assessment option. If DGS-DCLS is unable to schedule an on-site assessment under the conditions of subsection H 1 c of this section, the owner of the applicant laboratory may use third-party on-site assessors instead of DGS-DCLS on-site assessors under the following conditions:

a. The third-party on-site assessors are on a DGS-DCLS-approved list of on-site assessors; and

b. The owner of the applicant laboratory agrees to pay the third-party on-site assessors.

J. Final determination on certification. 1. Upon completion of the certification review process and corrective action, if any, DGS-DCLS DCLS shall grant certification in accordance with subsection K of this section or deny certification in accordance with subsection L of this section.

2. Except during the initial certification period, DGS-DCLS shall complete action on a laboratory's application within nine months from the time a completed application is received from the laboratory.

K. Grant of certification.

1. When a laboratory meets the requirements specified for receiving certification, DGS-DCLS DCLS shall issue a certificate to the laboratory. The DCLS shall send the certificate shall be sent to the laboratory manager, and shall notify the responsible official shall be notified.

2. The director of DGS-DCLS DCLS or his designee shall sign the certificate. The certificate shall include the following information:

a. Name of owner of laboratory;

b. Name of operator of laboratory, if different from owner;

c. Name of responsible official;

d. Address and location of laboratory;

e. Laboratory identification number;

f. Fields of certification (matrix, technology/method, analyte/analyte group) and analyte) for which certification is granted;

g. Any addenda or attachments; and

h. Issuance date and expiration date.

3. The laboratory shall post the most recent certificate of certification and any addenda to the certificate issued by DGS-DCLS DCLS in a prominent place in the laboratory facility.

4. Certification shall expire two years one year after the date on which certification is granted.

L. Denial of certification.

1. DGS-DCLS DCLS shall deny certification to an environmental laboratory in total if the laboratory is found to be falsifying any data or providing false information to support certification.

2. Denial of certification in total or in part.

a. DGS-DCLS DCLS may deny certification to an environmental laboratory in total or in part if the laboratory fails to do any of the following:

(1) Pay the required fees.

(2) Employ laboratory staff to meet the personnel qualifications as required by Part II (1VAC30-45-200 et seq.) of this chapter.

(3) Successfully analyze and report proficiency testing samples as required by Part II of this chapter.

(4) Submit a corrective action report plan in accordance with Part II of this chapter in response to a deficiency report from the on-site assessment team within the required 30 calendar days.

(5) Implement the corrective actions detailed in the corrective action report plan within the time frame specified by DGS-DCLS DCLS.

(6) Pass required on-site assessment as specified in Part II of this chapter.

(7) Implement a quality system as defined in Part II of this chapter.

b. DGS-DCLS DCLS may deny certification to an environmental laboratory in total or in part if the laboratory's application is not determined to be complete within 90 calendar days following notification of incompleteness because the laboratory is delinquent in submitting information required by DGS-DCLS DCLS in accordance with this chapter.

c. DGS-DCLS DCLS may deny certification to an environmental laboratory in total or in part if the DGS-DCLS DCLS on-site assessment team is unable to carry out the on-site assessment pursuant to Article 2 (1VAC30-45-300 et seq.) of Part II of this chapter because a representative of the environmental laboratory denied the team entry during the laboratory's normal business hours that it specified in its application.

3. DGS-DCLS DCLS shall follow the process specified in 1VAC30-45-110 when denying certification to an environmental laboratory.

M. Reapplication following denial of certification. 1. Upon denial of certification, the laboratory shall wait six months before reapplying for certification. 2. DGS-DCLS DCLS shall not waive application fees for a laboratory reapplying for certification.

1VAC30-45-80. Maintaining certification.

A. Certification remains in effect until withdrawn by DGS-DCLS DCLS, withdrawn voluntarily at the written request of the certified laboratory, or until expiration of the certification period. To maintain certification, the certified laboratory shall comply with the elements listed in this section and in 1VAC30-45-90.

B. Quality systems. Laboratories seeking to maintain certification under this chapter shall assure consistency and promote the use of quality assurance and quality control procedures. Article 4 (1VAC30-45-600 et seq.) of Part II of this chapter specifies the quality assurance and quality control requirements that shall be met to maintain certification.

C. Proficiency tests. Laboratories seeking to maintain certification under this chapter shall perform proficiency tests as required under Article 3 (1VAC30-45-500 et seq.) of Part II of this chapter.

D. Recordkeeping and retention. All laboratory records associated with certification parameters shall be kept as provided by the requirements for records under Part II (1VAC30-45-200 et seq.) of this chapter. These records shall be maintained for a minimum of three years unless the records are required to be maintained for a longer period by another section of this regulation or another regulation. All such records shall be available to DGS-DCLS DCLS upon request.

1VAC30-45-90. Notifications and changes to certification elements and status.

A. Changes to key certification criteria. The certified laboratory shall notify DGS-DCLS DCLS in writing of any changes in key certification criteria within 30 calendar days of the change. Key certification criteria are laboratory ownership, location, key personnel, and major instrumentation.

B. Changes to scope of certification.

1. DGS-DCLS DCLS may approve a laboratory's application to add a new matrix, technology, analyte, or test method to a laboratory's scope of certification or to otherwise modify the laboratory's scope of certification by performing a data review.

2. To apply, the owner of the certified laboratory shall submit the following to DGS-DCLS DCLS:

a. A letter written request signed by the owner that briefly summarizes the addition to be made to the laboratory's scope of certification.

b. Pertinent information demonstrating the laboratory's capability to perform the additional matrix, technology/method, or analyte/analyte group analyte, such as proficiency testing performance and quality control performance.

c. A written standard operating procedure covering the new matrix, technology/method, or analyte/analyte group analyte.

3. DGS-DCLS DCLS may approve a laboratory's application for modification to its scope of certification by performing a review of the application materials submitted, without an on-site assessment. The addition of a technology or test method requiring the use of specific equipment may require an on-site assessment. Other reviews of performance and documentation may be carried out by DGS-DCLS DCLS depending on the modification for which the laboratory applies.

4. Within 90 calendar days of the receipt of the application from the certified environmental laboratory, DGS-DCLS DCLS shall review and determine whether the proposed modification may be approved.

5. If the proposed modification to the laboratory's scope of certification is approved, DGS-DCLS DCLS shall amend the laboratory's certificate of certification.

6. DCLS shall not send the amended certificate of certification to the laboratory until DCLS receives the payment of the fee required under 1VAC30-45-130 F 1.

C. Change of ownership or location of laboratory.

1. The certified laboratory shall submit a written notification to DGS-DCLS DCLS of the change of ownership or location of the laboratory within 30 calendar days of the change. This requirement applies only to fixed-based and not pertaining to change of location does not apply to mobile laboratories.

2. Certification may be transferred when the legal status or ownership of a certified laboratory changes as long as the transfer does not affect the laboratory's personnel, equipment, or organization.

3. If the laboratory's personnel, equipment, or organization are affected by the change of legal status or ownership, DGS-DCLS DCLS may require recertification or reapplication in any or all of the categories for which the laboratory is certified.

4. DGS-DCLS DCLS may require an on-site assessment depending on the nature of the change of legal status or ownership. DGS-DCLS DCLS shall determine the elements of any on-site assessment required.

5. When there is a change in ownership, the new owner of the certified laboratory shall assure historical traceability of the laboratory identification numbers.

6. 5. When there is a change in ownership, the new owner of the certified laboratory shall keep all records and analyses performed by the previous owner under his scope of pertaining to certification for a period of three years, or longer if required by other regulations. These records and analyses are subject to inspection by DGS-DCLS DCLS during this three-year period. This provision applies regardless of change of ownership, accountability or liability.

D. Voluntary withdrawal. Any environmental laboratory owner who wishes to withdraw the laboratory from its certification status or from being certified, in total or in part, shall submit written notification to DGS-DCLS no later than 30 calendar days before the end of the laboratory's certification term DCLS. Within 30 calendar days, DGS-DCLS DCLS shall provide the laboratory with a written notice of withdrawal.

1VAC30-45-95. Suspension of certification.

A. DCLS may suspend certification from an environmental laboratory in total or in part to allow the laboratory time to correct the reason for which DCLS may withdraw certification. Suspension is limited to the reasons listed in subsection B of this section.

B. DCLS may suspend certification from an environmental laboratory in part or in total when the laboratory has failed to do any of the following:

1. Participate in the proficiency testing program as required by Article 2 (1VAC30-45-300 et seq.) of Part II of this chapter.

2. Satisfactorily complete proficiency testing studies as required by Article 2 (1VAC30-45-300 et seq.) of Part II of this chapter.

3. Maintain a quality system as defined in Article 4 (1VAC30-45-600 et seq.) of Part II of this chapter.

4. Employ staff that meets the personnel qualifications of Article 1 (1VAC30-45-200 et seq.) of Part II of this chapter.

5. Notify DCLS of any changes in key certification criteria as set forth in 1VAC30-45-90.

C. Process to suspend certification.

1. When DCLS becomes aware of a cause to suspend a laboratory, the agency shall send notification to the responsible official and the laboratory manager stating it appears to DCLS that the laboratory has failed to meet the 1VAC30-45 standards for one or more of the reasons listed in subsection B of this section. DCLS shall send the notification by certified mail.

2. The DCLS notification shall do the following:

a. Require the laboratory to provide DCLS with documentation of the corrective action already taken with regard to its failure to meet a standard under subsection B of this section.

b. State the corrective action the laboratory must take and the time allowed for this corrective action to be completed in order to retain certification.

3. The environmental laboratory may proceed to correct the deficiencies for which DCLS may suspend the laboratory's certification.

4. Alternatively the laboratory may state in writing that DCLS is incorrect in its observations regarding potential suspension and give specific reasons why the laboratory believes DCLS should not suspend certification. The laboratory has the right to due process as set forth in 1VAC30-45-110, the Administrative Process Act (§ 2.2-4000 et seq. of the Code of Virginia), and Part 2A of the Rules of the Supreme Court of Virginia.

5. With the exception of subdivision B 4 of this section, DCLS may allow the laboratory up to 60 days to correct the problem for which it may have its certification suspended.

6. DCLS shall set a date for suspension that follows the period provided under subdivision 5 of this subsection to restore certification.

7. If the laboratory does not correct its deficiencies within the time period allowed or pursue options under subdivision 4 of this subsection, DCLS may suspend a laboratory in part or in total.

8. DCLS shall notify the laboratory by letter if the laboratory's certification is suspended in part or in total. DCLS shall send the notification by certified mail. DCLS shall also notify the pertinent Virginia state agency of the laboratory's suspension status.

9. The laboratory may provide information demonstrating why suspension is not warranted in accordance with subdivision 4 of this subsection.

D. Responsibilities of the environmental laboratory and DCLS when certification has been suspended.

1. The term of suspension shall be limited to six months or the period of certification whichever is longer.

2. The environmental laboratory shall not continue to analyze samples or report analysis for the fields of certification for which DCLS has suspended certification.

3. The environmental laboratory shall retain certification for the fields of certification, methods, and analytes where it continues to meet the requirements of this chapter.

4. The laboratory's suspended certification status shall change to certified when the laboratory demonstrates to DCLS that the laboratory has corrected the deficiency or deficiencies for which its certification was suspended.

5. An environmental laboratory with suspended certification shall not have to reapply for certification if the cause or causes for suspension are corrected within the term of suspension.

6. If the laboratory fails to correct the causes of suspension within the term of suspension, DCLS shall decertify the laboratory in total or in part.

1VAC30-45-100. Decertification.

A. DGS-DCLS DCLS shall decertify an environmental laboratory in total if the laboratory is found to be falsifying any data or providing false information to support certification.

B. DGS-DCLS DCLS may decertify an environmental laboratory in part or in total when the laboratory has failed to do any of the following:

1. Participate in the proficiency testing program as required by Article 3 (1VAC30-45-500 et seq.) of Part II of this chapter.

2. Complete Satisfactorily complete proficiency testing studies and maintain a history of at least two successful proficiency testing studies for each affected certified field of testing out of the three most recent proficiency testing studies as defined in as required by Article 3 (1VAC30-45-500 et seq.) of Part II of this chapter.

3. Maintain a quality system as defined in Article 4 (1VAC30-45-600 et seq.) of Part II of this chapter.

4. Employ staff that meet meets the personnel qualifications in Article 1 (1VAC30-45-200 et seq.) of Part II of this chapter.

5. Submit an acceptable corrective action report plan after two opportunities as specified in 1VAC30-45-390.

6. Implement corrective action specified in the laboratory's corrective action report plan as set out under 1VAC30-45-390.

7. Notify DGS-DCLS DCLS of any changes in key certification criteria as set forth in 1VAC30-45-90.

8. Use accurate references to the laboratory's certification status in the laboratory's documentation.

9. Allow a DCLS assessment team entry during normal business hours to conduct an on-site assessment required by Article 2 (1VAC30-45-300 et seq.) of Part II of this chapter.

10. Pay the required fees specified in 1VAC30-45-130.

C. DGS-DCLS DCLS shall follow the process specified in 1VAC30-45-110 when decertifying an environmental laboratory.

D. Responsibilities of the environmental laboratory and DGS-DCLS DCLS when certification has been withdrawn.

1. Laboratories that lose their certification in full shall return their certificate to DGS-DCLS DCLS.

2. If a laboratory loses certification in part, an addendum to the certificate shall be issued by DGS-DCLS DCLS shall issue a revised certificate to the laboratory.

3. When the environmental laboratory has lost certification in full or in part, the laboratory shall not continue to analyze samples or report analyses for the fields of certification that DCLS has decertified.

E. After correcting the reason or cause for decertification under 1VAC30-45-100 subsection A or B of this section, the laboratory owner may reapply for certification under 1VAC30-45-70.

1VAC30-45-110. Procedures to deny certification, to or decertify a laboratory, and; appeal procedures.

A. Notification.

1. If DGS-DCLS believes it has grounds DCLS becomes aware of a cause to deny certification or to decertify an environmental laboratory, DGS-DCLS DCLS shall notify the environmental laboratory in writing of its intent to hold an informal fact finding under § 2.2-4019 of the Code of Virginia in order to make a decision on the denial of certification or decertification this information and require a response from the responsible official. DGS-DCLS DCLS shall send this notification by certified mail to the responsible official and provide a copy to the manager of the environmental laboratory. The notice of informal fact finding shall provide a detailed explanation of the basis for the notice.

2. For a potential denial of certification, the notice shall state that the laboratory has failed to meet the 1VAC30-45 standards and shall specify one or more of the reasons for denial of certification under 1VAC30-45-70 L, providing a detailed explanation of the basis for the denial of certification.

3. For a potential decertification, the notice shall state that the laboratory has failed to meet the 1VAC30-45 standards and shall specify one or more of the reasons for decertification under 1VAC30-45-100 A or B, providing a detailed explanation of the basis for decertification.

4. In its notice, DCLS shall request the laboratory to notify DCLS in writing if the laboratory believes the agency is incorrect in its determination. Before rendering a decision on decertification or denial of certification, DCLS shall provide the opportunity for the laboratory to meet with DCLS in an informal fact-finding proceeding pursuant to § 2.2-4019 of the Code of Virginia.

5. If the laboratory believes DCLS to be incorrect in its determination, the laboratory shall provide DCLS with a detailed written demonstration of why DCLS should not deny certification to or decertify the laboratory. The laboratory shall include this demonstration in the response required under subdivision 6 of this subsection.

6. The laboratory shall provide DCLS with a written response within 30 calendar days of the date of notification from DCLS. The laboratory shall indicate whether it disputes the DCLS determination provided in the agency notice and whether the laboratory requests an informal fact-finding proceeding. If the laboratory does not respond, DCLS shall render its case decision.

B. Following the informal fact finding held pursuant to § 2.2-4019 of the Code of Virginia, the director shall render a decision regarding certification, and shall send this notification by certified mail to the responsible official and provide a copy to the manager of the environmental laboratory. If the director's decision is adverse to the environmental laboratory, the responsible official may appeal this decision in accordance with § 2.2-4026 of the Code of Virginia and Part 2A of the Rules of the Supreme Court of Virginia.

C. The provisions of this section do not preclude informal discussions between DGS-DCLS and any environmental laboratory that has been notified of a possible denial of certification or of decertification. These informal discussions to resolve the concerns that prompted the notice shall be held prior to the informal fact-finding proceeding.

B. An environmental laboratory may appeal a final decision by DCLS to deny certification to or decertify a laboratory pursuant to the Administrative Process Act (§ 2.2-4000 et seq. of the Code of Virginia).

D. C. The certification status of an environmental laboratory appealing decertification shall not change pending the final decision of the appeals filed under the Virginia Administrative Process Act (§ 2.2-4000 et seq. of the Code of Virginia) and Part 2A of the Rules of Supreme Court of Virginia.

1VAC30-45-120. Exemptions.

A. DGS-DCLS DCLS may grant a partial or full exemption from the requirements of this chapter based on compliance and performance.

B. DGS-DCLS DCLS may consider granting an exemption if a laboratory applies for an exemption and has met all certification requirements for a period of four consecutive years.

C. An environmental laboratory may apply for an exemption by submitting a request. The request shall include the following information:

1. The scope of the requested exemption;

2. Whether the exemption should be partial or total;

3. If partial, what form the exemption will take; and

4. Why the exemption is appropriate.

D. Upon receiving an application for an exemption, DGS-DCLS DCLS shall provide notice of the request for an exemption in the Virginia Register of Regulations.

E. The notice shall provide a 30-day comment period on the request and shall specify the nature of the request.

F. DGS-DCLS DCLS shall grant or deny the exemption request and provide a written response to the requesting laboratory within 90 calendar days of receipt of the request.

G. Exemptions granted by DGS-DCLS DCLS shall be for a period of no more than 24 months.

1VAC30-45-130. Fees.

A. General.

1. Fees shall be submitted with all applications, including reapplications, for certification and all renewal applications for certification. Applications shall not be designated as complete until the fee is received by DGS-DCLS. Environmental laboratories shall pay a fee with all applications, including reapplications, for certification. DCLS shall not designate an application as complete until it receives payment of the fee.

2. Each certified environmental laboratory shall pay an annual fee to maintain its certification. DCLS shall send an invoice to the certified environmental laboratory.

3. Fees shall be nonrefundable.

B. Fee computation.

1. Fees shall be computed based on the test methods for which a laboratory seeks certification and on the laboratory type. For the purpose of fee calculation, the designations for the laboratory type are (i) a general environmental laboratory or (ii) an environmental laboratory performing only simple test procedures.

2. The fee shall be the total of the base fee and the test category fees for the specific laboratory type to be certified.

3. The test category fees cover categories for the test methods to be certified as specified in the laboratory's application.

4. If the total of the base fee and the test category fees is more than the maximum fee designated for the specific laboratory type to be certified, the laboratory shall pay the maximum fee.

C. Laboratories B. Environmental laboratories performing only simple test procedures shall pay an annual fee of $600.

1. The base fee shall be $100.

2. The maximum fee shall be $600.

D. General environmental laboratories.

1. The base fee shall be $1,700.

2. The maximum fee shall be $5,200.

E. Test category fees.

1. Fees shall be charged for each category of tests to be certified.

2. The fee for each category includes one or more analytical methods unless otherwise specified. With the exception of the test categories labeled oxygen demand and physical, test categories related to test methods for water are defined by 40 CFR 136.3.

3. Fees.

TEST CATEGORY

FEE

Oxygen demand (BOD or COD)

$375

Bacteriology

$375

Inorganic chemistry, fewer than four methods

$375

Inorganic chemistry, four or more methods

$750

Chemistry metals, one – two methods

$450

Chemistry metals, more than two methods

$1,000

Organic chemistry, fewer than four methods

$600

Organic chemistry, four or more methods

$1,200

Aquatic toxicity, acute methods only

$400

Aquatic toxicity, acute and chronic methods

$700

Radiochemical

$1,000

Physical

$375

C. Fee computation for general environmental laboratories.

1. Fees shall be applied on an annual basis.

2. Environmental laboratories shall pay the total of the base fee and the test category fees set out in subsections D and E of this section.

D. Base fees for general environmental laboratories.

1. DCLS determines the base fee for a laboratory by taking into account both the total number of methods and the total number of field of certification matrices for which the laboratory would be certified.

2. DCLS shall charge the base fees set out in Table 1. The base fee for a laboratory is located by first finding the row for the total number of methods to be certified and then finding the box on that row located in the column headed by the total number of matrices to be certified. For example, DCLS charges a base fee of $1300 to a laboratory performing a total of eight methods for one matrix.

TABLE 1: BASE FEES

Number of Methods

1 Matrix

2 Matrices

1 - 9

$1300

$1430

10 - 29

$1400

$1575

30 - 99

$1550

$1825

E. Test category fees for general environmental laboratories.

1. The test category fees cover the types of testing for which a laboratory may be certified as specified in the laboratory's application or as certified at the time of annual billing.

2. Fees shall be charged for each category of tests to be certified.

3. Fees shall be charged for the total number of field of certification matrices to be certified under the specific test category. For example, if a laboratory is performing inorganic chemistry for both nonpotable water and solid and chemical materials matrices, the fee for this test category would be found in the column for two matrices.

4. The fee for each category includes one or more analytical methods unless otherwise specified.

5. DCLS shall charge the test category fees set out in Table 2. The test category fees for a laboratory are located by first finding the row with the total number of test methods for the test category to be certified. The fee to be charged for the test category will be found on that row in the column headed by the total number of matrices to be certified. A laboratory performing four test methods for inorganic chemistry in nonpotable water and solid and chemical materials (two matrices) would be charged a test category fee of $375.

6. Noncommercial environmental laboratories that perform toxicity, radiochemical, or asbestos testing shall pay the test category fees established for these types of testing in 1VAC30-46-150.

TABLE 2: TEST CATEGORY FEES

Test Category

Fees by Number of Matrices

One

Two

Oxygen demand

$225

$335

Bacteriology, 1 - 3 total methods

$175

$265

Bacteriology, 4 or more total methods

$220

$330

Physical, 1 - 5 total methods

$175

$265

Physical, 6 - 10 total methods

$220

$330

Inorganic chemistry, 1 - 10 total methods

$250

$375

Inorganic chemistry, 11 - 20 total methods

$315

$475

Inorganic chemistry, 21 - 49 total methods

$394

$590

Chemistry metals, 1 - 5 total methods

$325

$490

Chemistry metals, 6 - 20 total methods

$410

$615

Organic chemistry, 1 - 5 total methods

$400

$600

Organic chemistry, 6 - 20 total methods

$500

$750

7. Fee examples. Three examples are provided.

a. Example 1:

Base Fee

One matrix and four test methods

$1300

Test Category Fees

One Matrix

Nonpotable Water

Bacteriology (2 methods)

$175

Nonpotable Water

Oxygen demand (1 method)

$225

Nonpotable Water

Physical (1)

$175

TOTAL

$1875

b. Example 2:

Base Fee

One matrix and 15 test methods

$1400

Test Category Fees

One Matrix

Nonpotable Water

Bacteriology (2 methods)

$175

Nonpotable Water

Inorganic chemistry (9 methods)

$250

Nonpotable Water

Chemistry metals (2 methods)

$325

Nonpotable Water

Oxygen demand (1 method)

$225

Nonpotable Water

Physical (1)

$175

TOTAL

$2550

c. Example 3:

Base Fee

Two matrices and 27 test methods

$1575

Test Category Fees

One Matrix

Nonpotable Water

Bacteriology (4 methods)

$220

Nonpotable Water

Oxygen demand (1 method)

$225

Solid and Chemical Materials

Chemistry metals (1 method)

$325

Two Matrices

Nonpotable Water and Solid and Chemical Materials

Inorganic chemistry (13 methods)

$475

Nonpotable Water and Solid and Chemical Materials

Physical (7 methods)

$330

TOTAL

$3150

F. Additional fees. Additional fees shall be charged to laboratories applying for the following: (i) modification to scope of certification under 1VAC30-45-90 B, (ii) transfer of ownership under 1VAC30-45-90 C, (iii) exemption under 1VAC30-45-120, (iv) request that multiple noncontiguous laboratory sites be considered as one site under 1VAC30-45-60 B 3, or (v) (iv) petition for a variance under 1VAC30-45-140.

1. For any certified environmental laboratory that applies to modify its scope of certification as specified under 1VAC30-45-90 B, DCLS shall assess a fee determined by the method in subsection G of this section.

2. Under 1VAC30-45-90 C, DCLS may charge a transfer fee to a certified laboratory that transfers ownership. A fee shall be charged if DCLS (i) needs to review documentation sent by the laboratory about the transfer of ownership or (ii) determines that an on-site assessment is necessary to evaluate the effect of the transfer of ownership. DCLS shall assess a fee determined by the method in subsection G of this section. If, under 1VAC30-45-90 C, DCLS determines that the change of ownership or location of laboratory requires recertification of or reapplication by the laboratory, the laboratory shall pay the application fees required under this section.

1. 3. General environmental laboratories applying for an exemption under 1VAC30-45-120 shall pay an initial application fee of $250 and if the exemption is granted, up to an additional $1,000 depending on the scope of the exemption. $700 plus an additional fee based on the actual time needed for DCLS to assess the exemption request. The total fee shall not exceed the actual time DCLS takes to assess the exemption request. Laboratories performing only simple test procedures applying for an exemption under 1VAC30-45-120 shall pay an initial application fee of $100 and if the exemption is granted, up to an additional $1,000 depending on the scope of the exemption. The fee assessed for the scope of the exemption shall be based on the actual time needed for DGS-DCLS to make the determination $300 plus an additional fee based on the actual time needed for DCLS to assess the exemption request. The total fee shall not exceed the actual time DCLS takes to assess the exemption request. The fee assessed shall be calculated using the method in subsection G of this section.

2. For any certified environmental laboratory that applies to modify its scope of certification as specified under 1VAC30-45-90 B, DGS-DCLS shall assess a fee determined by the method in subsection G of this section.

3. Under 1VAC30-45-90 C, DGS-DCLS may charge a transfer fee to a certified laboratory that transfers ownership. A fee shall be charged if DGS-DCLS (i) needs to review documentation sent by the laboratory about the transfer of ownership or (ii) determines that an on-site assessment is necessary to evaluate the effect of the transfer of ownership. DGS-DCLS shall assess a fee determined by the method in subsection G of this section. If DGS-DCLS determines that a fee should be charged, the fee shall be a minimum of $100 and a maximum of $1,000. If, under 1VAC30-45-90 C, DGS-DCLS determines that the change of ownership or location of laboratory requires recertification of or reapplication by the laboratory, the laboratory shall pay the application fees required under this section.

4. Under 1VAC30-45-60 B 3, the owner of multiple noncontiguous laboratories may request that DGS-DCLS consider these laboratories to be one site. If, as a result of the request being granted, DGS-DCLS needs to perform multiple on-site assessments, DGS-DCLS shall charge a fee for the additional on-site assessments. The fee shall be the sum of reasonable travel costs and labor charges for the additional on-site assessments. The labor charges will be determined following the method in subsection G of this section.

5. 4. Under 1VAC30-45-140, any person regulated by this chapter may petition the director to grant a variance from any requirement of this chapter. DGS-DCLS DCLS shall charge a an initial fee for the time needed of $700 plus an additional fee based on the actual time needed for DCLS to review the petition, including any on-site assessment required. The total fee shall not exceed the actual time DCLS takes to review and make a determination on the request for a variance. The fee shall be determined by the method specified in subsection G of this section.

G. Fee determination.

1. The fee shall be the sum of the total hourly charges for all reviewers plus any on-site review costs incurred.

2. An hourly charge per reviewer shall be determined by (i) obtaining a yearly cost by multiplying the reviewer's annual salary by 1.35 (accounts for overhead such as taxes and insurance) and then (ii) dividing the yearly cost by 1,642 (number of annual hours established by Fiscal Services, DGS, for billing purposes).

3. The charge per reviewer shall be determined by multiplying the number of hours expended in the review by the reviewer's hourly charge.

4. If an on-site review is required, travel time and on-site review time shall be charged at the same hourly charge per reviewer, and any travel expenses shall be added.

H. Out-of-state laboratories - travel costs. The owner of an environmental laboratory located in another state who applies for certification under this chapter shall also pay a fee equal to the reasonable travel costs associated with conducting an on-site assessment at the laboratory. Reasonable travel costs include transportation, lodging, per diem, and telephone and duplication charges.

I. DGS-DCLS DCLS shall derive the travel costs charged under subsections G and H of this section from the Commonwealth of Virginia reimbursement allowances and rates for lodging, per diem, and mileage.

Article 2
On-Site Assessment

1VAC30-45-300. Frequency of on-site assessment.

A. A comprehensive on-site assessment shall be conducted of each laboratory as a condition for granting certification initially and at renewal every two years. DCLS shall reassess each certified laboratory every two years starting from the date of the previous assessment plus or minus six months.

B. Other on-site assessments.

1. If DGS-DCLS DCLS identified a deficiency on a previous on-site assessment, the agency may conduct a follow-up on-site assessment.

2. DGS-DCLS DCLS may conduct an on-site assessment when a laboratory applies to modify its scope of certification,; when a transfer of owner occurs that affects personnel, equipment, or the laboratory facilities,; or when a laboratory applies for an exemption or a variance. Any other change occurring in a laboratory's operations that might reasonably be expected to alter or impair analytical capability and quality may trigger an on-site assessment.

1VAC30-45-310. Announced and unannounced on-site assessments.

A. DGS-DCLS DCLS may conduct, at its discretion, either announced or unannounced on-site assessments.

B. Advance notice of an assessment shall not be necessary.

C. To the maximum extent practical, DGS-DCLS DCLS, when necessary, shall work with the owner of an environmental laboratory to obtain government security clearances for assessment personnel as far in advance as possible. The owner of the environmental laboratory shall facilitate expeditious attainment of the necessary clearances.

D. To the maximum extent practical, assessment personnel shall minimize disruption of a laboratory's operations and take into account competing demands on the time of laboratory personnel.

1VAC30-45-320. Request for records.

Prior to the actual site visit, DGS-DCLS DCLS may request in writing from a laboratory those records required to be maintained by this chapter.

1VAC30-45-330. Areas to be assessed.

DGS-DCLS DCLS shall assess the laboratory against the personnel and quality control standards in Article 1 (1VAC30-45-200 et seq.) and Article 4 (1VAC30-45-600 et seq.) of this part. The specific areas evaluated in an on-site assessment shall include but not be limited to:

1. Adequacy of the laboratory facility.

2. Organization and management of the laboratory.

3. Qualifications and experience of laboratory personnel.

4. Receipt, tracking and handling of samples.

5. Quantity, condition, and performance of laboratory instrumentation and equipment.

6. Preparation and traceability of calibration standards.

7. Test methods (including the adequacy of the laboratory's standard operating procedures as well as confirmation of the analyst's adherence to SOPs, and the analyst's proficiency with the described task).

8. Data reduction procedures, including an examination of raw data and confirmation that final reported results can be traced to the raw data/original observations.

9. Quality assurance and quality control procedures, including adherence to the laboratory's quality assurance plan and adequacy of the plan.

10. Recordkeeping.

1VAC30-45-340. National security considerations.

A. Assessments at facilities owned or operated by federal agencies or contractors may require security clearances, appropriate badging, or a security briefing before the assessment begins.

B. The laboratory shall notify DGS-DCLS DCLS in writing of any information that is controlled for national security reasons and cannot be released to the public.

1VAC30-45-350. Arrival, admittance, and opening conference.

A. Arrival. Assessment personnel shall arrive at the laboratory during established working hours. The laboratory manager (or, if unavailable, the laboratory manager's designee) shall be located as soon as possible after the assessment personnel arrive on the premises.

B. Admittance of assessment personnel.

1. A laboratory's refusal to admit the assessment personnel for an on-site assessment shall result in an automatic failure of the laboratory to receive certification or loss of an existing certification by the laboratory, unless there are extenuating circumstances that are accepted and documented by DGS-DCLS DCLS. The team leader for the assessment personnel shall notify DGS-DCLS DCLS as soon as possible after refusal of entry.

2. DCLS shall consider any verbal or physical threat to the health and safety of its assessors or any overt antagonism towards its assessors as a refusal to admit the assessors for the purpose of on-site assessment. The assessors shall vacate the laboratory and shall notify DCLS as soon as possible of the circumstances of this refusal to admit. This refusal to admit shall result in an automatic failure of the laboratory to receive certification or the automatic loss of an existing certification by the laboratory.

C. Health and safety.

1. Under no circumstance, and especially as a precondition to gain access to a laboratory, shall assessment personnel be required or even allowed to sign any waiver of responsibility on the part of the laboratory for injuries incurred during an assessment.

2. Assessment personnel shall comply with all facility and laboratory safety procedures.

D. Opening conference. An opening conference shall be conducted and shall address the following topics:

1. The purpose of the assessment;

2. The identification of assessment personnel;

3. The test methods that will be examined;

4. Any pertinent records and procedures to be examined during the assessment and the names of the individuals in the laboratory responsible for providing assessment personnel with such records;

5. The roles and responsibilities of laboratory staff and managers;

6. Any special safety procedures that the laboratory may think necessary for the protection of assessment personnel;

7. The standards and criteria that will be used in judging the adequacy of the laboratory operation;

8. Confirmation of the tentative time for the exit conference; and

9. Discussion of any questions the laboratory may have about the assessment process.

1VAC30-45-380. Closing conference.

A. Assessment personnel shall meet with representatives of the laboratory following the assessment for a closing conference.

B. During the closing conference, assessment personnel shall inform the laboratory of the preliminary findings and the basis for such findings. The laboratory shall have an opportunity to provide further explanation or clarification relevant to the preliminary findings. If the laboratory objects to the preliminary findings during the closing conference, all objections shall be documented by the assessment personnel and included in the final report to DGS-DCLS DCLS.

C. Additional problem areas may be identified in the final report.

D. Any potentially illegal activity that may be the subject of further action shall not be discussed in the closing conference.

1VAC30-45-390. Follow-up and reporting procedures.

A. DGS-DCLS DCLS shall present an assessment report to the laboratory within 30 calendar days of the assessment.

B. If there are deficiencies identified in the assessment report, the laboratory shall have 30 calendar days from the date of its receipt of the assessment report to provide a response to DGS-DCLS DCLS. This response shall be called a corrective action report plan.

C. An exception to the deadlines specified in subsections A and B of this section may occur in appropriate circumstances. Two circumstances that may be considered appropriate by DGS-DCLS DCLS are where a possible enforcement investigation or other action has been initiated or where the laboratory shows good cause for an extension.

D. The corrective action report plan shall include the following:

1. Any objections that the laboratory has with regard to the assessment report;

2. The action that the laboratory proposes to implement to correct each deficiency identified in the assessment report; and

3. The time period required to accomplish the corrective action.

E. DGS-DCLS DCLS shall determine and shall notify the laboratory within 30 calendar days of receipt whether the corrective action report plan is an acceptable response to the deficiencies identified in the assessment report.

F. If the corrective action report plan (or a portion of the report) plan) is determined to be unacceptable to remedy the deficiency, DGS-DCLS DCLS shall provide written notification to the responsible official and manager of the laboratory including a detailed explanation of the basis for such determination. Following receipt of such notification, the laboratory shall have an additional 30 calendar days to submit a revised corrective action report plan acceptable to DGS-DCLS DCLS.

1VAC30-45-400. Documentation of on-site assessment.

A. Checklists. The checklists used by assessment personnel during the assessment shall become a part of DGS-DCLS's DCLS's file for the laboratory.

B. Assessment report format.

1. The final assessment report shall contain a narrative description of the adequacy of the laboratory as it relates to the assessment standards specified in this chapter and in 1VAC30-45-330.

2. Assessment reports shall contain:

a. Name of owner of the laboratory (or operator of the laboratory, if different from the owner);

b. Identification of the laboratory assessed;

c. Date of the assessment;

d. Identification and affiliation of all assessment personnel;

e. Identification of participants in the assessment process;

f. Identification of analytes and test methods assessed;

g. Statement of the objective of the assessment;

h. Summary;

i. Assessment observations, findings (including any deficiencies), objections noted by the laboratory, and requirements; and

j. Comments and recommendations.

3. The assessment findings and requirements shall be referenced to the standards in Part II (1VAC30-45-200 et seq.) of this chapter so that both the finding is understood and the specific requirement is outlined. The assessor shall specify the laboratory records, documents, equipment, procedures, or staff evaluated and the observations that contributed to each identified deficiency. The assessment report shall support with sufficient data all assessment findings and the overall evaluation of the laboratory.

4. The comments and recommendations section may be used to convey recommendations aimed at helping the laboratory improve.

C. Release of report.

1. The assessment report shall be released initially by DGS-DCLS DCLS to the responsible official and the laboratory manager. The assessment report shall not be released to the public until findings of the assessment and the corrective actions have been finalized, all information relating to national security has been stricken from the report in accordance with prescribed procedures, and the report has been provided to the laboratory.

2. Once the assessment report has been released to the laboratory, any member of the public may request a copy of the report under the requirements of the Virginia Freedom of Information Act (§ 2.2-3700 et seq. of the Code of Virginia).

3. Checklists used by assessment personnel during the on-site assessment shall be provided to the laboratory with the final on-site assessment report.

D. The laboratory shall have access to documentation pertaining to any on-site assessment of its facilities. Any laboratory wishing to review its files shall request such assistance of DGS-DCLS DCLS five days prior to visiting DGS-DCLS DCLS. A laboratory may request copies of its documents without visiting DGS-DCLS DCLS. A reasonable fee may be charged for copying, mailing, and staff time.

Article 3
Proficiency Testing

1VAC30-45-500. Laboratory enrollment in proficiency testing program.

A. Required level of participation.

1. To be certified initially and to maintain certification, a laboratory shall participate in two single-blind, single-concentration PT studies, where available, per year for each PT field of testing for which it seeks or wants to maintain certification. Laboratories applying to be certified for environmental toxicology (aquatic toxicity, sediment toxicity, or soils toxicity) shall meet the requirements of subdivision 3 of this subsection.

2. Laboratories shall obtain PT samples from any PT provider approved under the requirements of the NELAC standards for proficiency test providers set out in Chapter 2 of the 2003 standards such as NIST. For PT fields of testing having no approved providers listed by NELAC, the laboratory shall consult DGS-DCLS for an approved provider.

3. Laboratories applying to be certified for environmental toxicology (aquatic toxicity, sediment toxicity, or soils toxicity). To be certified initially and to maintain certification, a laboratory shall participate in at least one PT study per year (i.e., not more than 12 months apart), when available, for each method code (matrix, organism, exposure system and endpoint) for which it seeks or wants to maintain certification. Laboratories seeking certification for aquatic toxicity testing shall meet the requirements of 1VAC30-45-530.

1. To be certified initially and to maintain certification, a laboratory shall participate in PT studies as specified in 1VAC30-45-520 B for the fields of certification (FoC) for which the laboratory seeks or wants to maintain certification.

2. The applicant laboratory shall obtain PT samples from a PT provider approved by TNI. If a PT sample is not available from a TNI-approved provider, the laboratory shall consult DCLS for an approved provider.

B. Requesting certification.

1. When applying for certification, the laboratory owner shall notify DGS-DCLS DCLS of the fields of testing certification for which the laboratory chooses to become certified and shall participate in the appropriate PT studies.

2. For all fields of testing certification for which PT samples are not available, the laboratory shall ensure the reliability of its testing procedures by maintaining a quality system that meets all applicable requirements of Article 4 (1VAC30-45-600 et seq.) of Part II of this chapter.

C. Reporting results. 1. Each laboratory shall authorize the PT study provider to release all certification and remediation results and "acceptable" or "not acceptable" status the results of the final evaluation report of the laboratory's PT study directly to DGS-DCLS DCLS, in addition to the laboratory.

2. The results of all of the PT sample tests including "acceptable" or "not acceptable" status shall be part of the public record.

1VAC30-45-510. Requirements for laboratory testing of PT study samples.

A. The samples shall be analyzed and the results returned to the PT study provider no later than 45 calendar days from the scheduled study shipment date. Samples for environmental toxicology shall be analyzed within 45 calendar days of sample receipt. The laboratory shall report the result within 45 calendar days of completion of the PT. The laboratory shall report the analytical results from its analysis of the PT study to the PT provider on or before the closing date of the study using the reporting format specified by the PT provider.

B. The laboratory's management and all analysts shall ensure that all PT samples are managed, analyzed, and reported in the same manner as real environmental samples utilizing the same staff, methods as used for routine analysis of that analyte, procedures, equipment, and facilities. When analyzing a PT sample, the laboratory shall employ the same calibration, laboratory quality control and acceptance criteria, sequence of analytical steps, number of replicates and other procedures as used when analyzing routine samples.

C. Restrictions on exchanging information. Laboratories shall comply with all of the following restrictions on the transfer of PT samples and communication of PT sample results prior to the time the results of the study are released. Laboratory management or staff shall not:

1. Send any PT sample, or a portion of a PT sample, to another laboratory for any analysis for which it seeks certification or is certified.

2. Knowingly receive any PT sample or portion of a PT sample from another laboratory for any analysis for which the sending laboratory seeks certification or is certified.

3. Communicate with any individual at another laboratory (including intra-company communication) concerning the PT sample.

4. Attempt to obtain the assigned value of any PT sample from their PT provider.

D. Maintenance of records. The laboratory shall maintain copies of all written, printed, and electronic records, including but not limited to bench sheets, instrument strip charts or printouts, data calculations, and data reports, resulting from the analysis of any PT sample for three years or for as long as is required by the applicable regulatory program. These records shall include a copy of the PT study report forms used by the laboratory to record PT results. All of these laboratory records shall be made available to the DCLS assessors of DGS-DCLS during on-site audits assessments of the laboratory.

1VAC30-45-520. PT criteria for laboratory certification.

A. Result categories.

1. The criteria described in this section apply individually to each PT field of testing FoPT, as defined by the laboratory seeking to obtain or maintain certification in its certification request. These criteria apply only to the PT portion of the overall certification standard.

2. There are two PT result categories: "acceptable" and "not acceptable."

B. Initial and continuing certification.

1. A laboratory seeking to obtain or maintain certification shall successfully complete two PT studies one PT study for each requested PT field of testing within the most recent three rounds attempted FoC.

2. Once a laboratory has been granted certification status, it shall continue to complete PT studies for each PT field of testing FoPT and maintain a history of at least two one acceptable PT studies for each PT field of testing out of the most recent three study each calendar year. The laboratory shall complete its PT studies by September 30 of each calendar year.

3. For a laboratory seeking to obtain initial certification, the most recent three rounds attempted shall have occurred within 18 months of the laboratory's application date. When the PT sample used for initial certification was analyzed by the laboratory prior to the date of application, the analysis date of the PT sample shall be no more than 12 months prior to the application date of certification.

4. For a laboratory seeking initial certification, or for For a laboratory performing supplemental testing, the PT studies shall be at least 15 calendar days apart from the closing date of one study to the shipment date of another study for the same PT field of testing FoPT.

5. For a laboratory to maintain certification, completion dates of successive proficiency rounds for a given PT field of testing shall be approximately six months apart. Failure to meet the semiannual schedule is regarded as a failed study.

5. When the PT study result is reported by the PT provider as "acceptable" the environmental laboratory has satisfied the PT requirement.

6. When the PT study result is "not acceptable," the environmental laboratory shall follow the procedure in subsection C of this section.

7. DCLS shall consider a laboratory's analytical result for a FoPT not acceptable when the laboratory makes any reporting error or omission that results in a nonspecific match between the analytical result for the FoPT and any criterion that identifies the laboratory or the field of certification for which the PT sample was analyzed for the purpose of initial or continued certification.

C. Procedure and requirements for "not acceptable" PT study results.

1. When a laboratory receives a PT study result of "not acceptable," the laboratory shall determine the cause for the failure and perform and document corrective action. The corrective action documentation shall be completed within 30 days of receiving the "not acceptable" PT study result and be submitted to DCLS upon request.

2. Upon completion of the corrective action the laboratory shall perform another PT study for each FoPT that had a "not acceptable" result.

3. If the laboratory successfully completes the makeup PT study by receiving an "acceptable" result before December 31, DCLS shall not suspend the laboratory's certification for the pertinent FoC.

4. If the laboratory receives a "not acceptable" result on the makeup PT study, DCLS shall notify the laboratory that there is cause to suspend the laboratory's certification for the FoC for which the PT study was "not acceptable."

5. DCLS shall not extend the period for annual PT study completion beyond December 31 each year. Failure to satisfactorily complete a PT study by December 31 shall result in suspension of certification in total or in part.

6. If the laboratory receives a "not acceptable" result on three successive PT studies, DCLS shall decertify the laboratory for the pertinent FoC until such time that the laboratory:

a. Completes corrective action for all failed studies and submits its corrective action report to DCLS;

b. Obtains an "acceptable" result for the PT studies; and

c. Applies for a change to its scope of certification and pays applicable fees required by 1VAC30-45-90 B and 1VAC30-45-130 F.

7. DCLS shall follow the provisions of 1VAC30-45-110 in decertifying the laboratory.

C. Supplemental studies.

1. A laboratory may elect to participate in PT studies more frequently than required by the semiannual schedule. This may be desirable, for example, when a laboratory first applies for certification or when a laboratory fails a study and wishes to quickly reestablish its history of successful performance.

2. These additional studies shall be reported and are counted and scored the same way as routinely scheduled studies and shall be at least 15 calendar days apart.

D. Failed studies and corrective action.

1. Whenever a laboratory fails a study, it shall determine the cause for the failure and take any necessary corrective action. It shall then document in its own records and provide to DGS-DCLS both the investigation and the action taken.

2. If a laboratory fails two out of the three most recent studies for a given field of testing, its performance is considered unacceptable for that field. The laboratory shall then meet the requirements of initial certification as described in subsection B of this section.

E. Second failed study.

1. The PT provider reports laboratory PT performance results to DGS-DCLS at the same time that it reports the results to the laboratory.

2. If a laboratory fails a second study out of the most recent three, as described in subdivision D 2 of this section, DGS-DCLS shall take action within 60 calendar days to determine the certification status for the unacceptable PT field of testing.

F. Scheduling of PT studies. Laboratories shall determine the schedule for their PT studies.

G. D. Withdrawal from PT studies. A laboratory may withdraw from a PT study for an analyte or analytes or for the entire study if the laboratory notifies both the PT provider and DGS-DCLS before the closing date of the PT study. This does not exempt the laboratory from participating in the semiannual schedule. any FoPT on or before the close date of the study. Withdrawing from a study shall not exempt the laboratory from meeting the annual analysis requirements necessary for continued certification.

1VAC30-45-530. Special requirements for aquatic toxicity. (Repealed.)

A. Laboratories seeking certification for aquatic toxicity testing shall be assessed through on-site assessment and evaluation of EPA Discharge Monitoring Report-Quality Assurance (DMR-QA) test results when available. A failed DMR-QA endpoint shall require both of the following:

1. A formal response to DGS-DCLS with an explanation of the probable cause for the endpoint failure and description of corrective actions to be taken (where appropriate).

2. A decision by DGS-DCLS to accept the response or require additional actions on the part of the laboratory or by DGS-DCLS.

B. If a laboratory's response is unacceptable and DGS-DCLS does not require additional on-site assessments, the laboratory shall complete another study. Such additional studies shall be conducted at least 15 calendar days from the previous study until the results are acceptable to DGS-DCLS. DGS-DCLS may conduct additional on-site assessments as necessary based on the results of any additional studies.

C. When the DMR-QA whole effluent toxicity portion does not include all test procedures required for a permit, the laboratory shall perform a proficiency test for aquatic toxicity testing.

D. DGS-DCLS shall not base loss of certification for aquatic toxicity testing solely on PT results.

Article 4
Quality System

1VAC30-45-600. Quality system.

A. This article sets out the general requirements that an environmental laboratory has to successfully demonstrate to be recognized as competent to carry out specific environmental tests. The environmental laboratory shall establish, implement and maintain a quality system based on the required elements contained in this article.

B. The quality system shall be appropriate to the type, range and volume of testing, analysis, measurement or monitoring performed by the laboratory.

C. The quality system's documentation shall be communicated to, understood by, available to, and implemented by the appropriate personnel. All personnel concerned with testing and calibration activities within the laboratory shall familiarize themselves with the quality documentation and implement the policies and procedures in their work.

C. D. If more stringent standards or requirements are included in a mandated test method or by regulation, the laboratory shall demonstrate that such requirements are met. If it is not clear which standard or requirement is more stringent, the standard or requirement from the method or regulation is to be followed.

D. E. Provisions pertaining to the management of the quality system appear in 1VAC30-45-610 through 1VAC30-45-700. Provisions pertaining to the technical requirements for the quality system appear in 1VAC30-45-710 through 1VAC30-45-770.

1VAC30-45-610. Quality manual.

A. General.

1. The laboratory shall document its quality system in a quality manual. The quality manual shall reflect all quality assurance and quality control practices and programs used by the laboratory. The required elements of the quality system may be described in more than one document.

2. The quality manual shall be maintained current under the responsibility of the quality assurance officer.

3. The quality manual and any related documents shall be communicated to, understood by, available to, and implemented by all laboratory personnel.

4. The quality manual shall include but not be limited to the elements listed in subsection subsections B and C of this section.

B. The elements of a quality manual shall include but not be limited to:

1. Title page. The quality manual shall list the following items on the title page:

a. 1. A document title;

b. 2. The laboratory's full name and address;

c. 3. The name, address (if different from above), and telephone number of the responsible official, laboratory manager, and quality assurance officer;

d. 4. The laboratory facility or facilities covered by the quality manual;

e. 5. Signed and dated concurrence, with appropriate titles, of the responsible official, laboratory manager, and quality assurance officer; and

f. 6. The effective date of the quality manual.;

2. 7. Table of contents. and applicable lists of references, glossaries, and appendices; and

3. 8. A quality policy statement, including objectives of the quality system and commitment to good ethical laboratory practices and to upholding the requirements of this chapter's standards.

C. The quality manual shall include or reference but not be limited to:

4. 1. The organization and management structure of the laboratory, its place in any parent organization and relevant organizational charts.

5. The relationship between management, technical operations, support services and the quality system.

6. The capabilities of the laboratory or scope of its operation.

7. 2. Job descriptions of key staff and reference to the job descriptions of other staff.

8. 3. Processes or procedures for establishing that personnel have adequate training and experience in the duties they are expected to carry out and are receiving any needed training.

9. Ethics policy statement developed by the laboratory. Processes and procedures for educating and training personnel in their ethical and legal responsibilities including the potential penalties for improper, unethical or illegal actions.

10. 4. Mechanisms for ensuring that the laboratory reviews all new work to ensure that it has the appropriate facilities and resources before commencing such work.

11. 5. Procedures to ensure that all records required by this chapter are retained, as well as procedures for control and maintenance of documentation through a document control system that ensures that all standard operating procedures, manuals, or documents clearly indicate the time period during which the procedure or document was in force.

12. 6. Procedures for dealing with complaints.

13. 7. Procedures for audits and data review.

14. Reference to verification 8. Verification practices that may include inter-laboratory comparisons, proficiency testing programs, use of reference materials and internal quality control schemes.

15. 9. Procedures to be followed for feedback and corrective action whenever testing discrepancies are detected, or departures from documented policies and procedures occur.

16. 10. The laboratory management arrangements for permitting departures from documented policies and procedures or from standard specifications when the departures are planned and controlled.

17. Reference to the 11. The major equipment and reference measurement standards used as well as the physical facility and environment used by the laboratory in conducting tests.

18. Reference to procedures 12. Procedures for calibration, verification and maintenance of equipment.

19. 13. A list of all technology/methods under which the laboratory performs its certified testing.

20. The laboratory's procedures 14. Procedures for achieving traceability of measurements, including standards.

21. 15. Procedures for receiving, handling, storing, and disposing of submitted samples.

22. Reference to procedures 16. Procedures for reporting analytical results.

17. Policy addressing the use of unique electronic signatures, where applicable.

C. D. Review and approval of quality manual.

1. The quality assurance officer shall review the laboratory's quality assurance program, manual and any related documentation whenever there is any change in test methods employed by the laboratory, change in equipment, or any other change in the laboratory that affects the quality assurance program.

2. The quality assurance manual shall be reviewed and approved by the quality assurance officer, the laboratory manager, and the responsible official at least annually.

1VAC30-45-660. Required records.

A. Sample handling.

1. The laboratory shall maintain a record of all procedures to which a sample is subjected while in the possession of the laboratory. These shall include but are not limited to all records pertaining to sample preservation, identification, receipt, acceptance or rejection, log-in, storage and tracking. The laboratory shall also maintain sampling information on each sample. This includes time and date of collection, type of sample (grab or composite), type of container, sampling point and preservation.

2. The laboratory shall have documented procedures for the receipt and retention of samples, including provisions necessary to protect the integrity of the samples.

B. Laboratory support activities. The laboratory shall retain the following documents and data:

1. All original raw data, whether hard copy or electronic, for calibrations, samples and quality control measures, including analysts' work sheets and data output records (chromatograms, strip charts, and other instrument response readout records).

2. A written description or reference to the specific test method used that includes a description of the specific computational steps used to translate parametric observations into a reportable analytical value.

3. Copies of final reports.

4. Archived standard operating procedures.

5. Correspondence relating to laboratory activities.

6. All corrective action reports plans, audits, and audit responses.

7. Proficiency test results and raw data.

8. Results of data review, verification, and cross-checking procedures.

C. Analytical records. The laboratory shall retain essential information associated with analytical documents, such as strip charts, tabular printouts, computer data files, analytical notebooks, and run logs. This information includes, but is not limited to, all manual calculations, (e.g., manual integrations); sample preparation; standard and reagent origin, receipt, preparation, and use; quality control protocols and assessment; and method performance criteria.

D. Administrative records. The laboratory shall maintain the following administrative records:

1. Personnel qualifications, experience and training records.

2. Records of demonstration of capability for each analyst or work cell.

3. A log of names, initials and signatures for all individuals who are responsible for signing or initialing any laboratory record.

1VAC30-45-670. Audits.

A. Internal audits.

1. The laboratory shall arrange for annual internal audits to verify that its operations continue to comply with the requirements of the laboratory's quality system. It is the responsibility of the quality assurance officer to plan and organize audits as required by a predetermined schedule and requested by management.

2. Trained and qualified personnel who are, wherever resources permit, independent of the activity to be audited, shall carry out these audits. Personnel shall not audit their own activities except when it can be demonstrated that an effective audit will be carried out.

3. Where the audit findings cast doubt on the correctness or validity of the laboratory's calibrations or test results, the laboratory shall take immediate corrective action.

4. A laboratory may have an audit performed under contract by an outside source competent to audit the laboratory's operations.

B. Managerial review.

1. The laboratory management shall conduct a review, at least annually, of its quality system and its testing and calibration activities to ensure its continuing suitability and effectiveness and to introduce any necessary changes or improvements in the quality system and laboratory operations.

2. The review shall take account of reports from managerial and supervisory personnel, the outcome of recent internal audits, assessments by external bodies, the results of inter-laboratory comparisons or proficiency tests, corrective actions and other relevant factors.

3. The laboratory shall have a procedure for review by management and maintain records of review findings and actions.

4. Where the staff of a laboratory is limited to a single analyst, a supervisor may perform a managerial review.

C. Audit review. All audit and review findings and any corrective actions that arise from them shall be documented. The laboratory management shall ensure that these actions are discharged within the agreed time frame as indicated in the quality manual or standard operating procedures or both. For clarification, documentation of audit and review findings should be a simple procedure, essentially a memorandum setting out the findings of the audit and managerial review and any action to follow.

D. Corrective actions.

1. In addition to providing acceptance criteria and specific protocols for corrective actions in the method standard operating procedures, the laboratory shall implement general procedures to be followed to determine consistently when departures from documented policies, procedures and quality control have occurred. These procedures may include but are not limited to the following:

a. Identify the individual or individuals responsible for assessing each quality control data type;

b. Identify the individual or individuals responsible for initiating or recommending corrective actions or both;

c. Define how the analyst shall treat a data set if the associated quality control measurements are unacceptable;

d. Specify how out-of-control situations and subsequent corrective actions are to be documented; and

e. Specify procedures for management (including the quality assurance officer) to review corrective action reports plans.

2. To the extent possible, samples shall be reported only if all quality control measures are acceptable. If a quality control measure is found to be out of control, and the data are to be reported, all samples associated with the failed quality control measure shall be reported with the appropriate data qualifiers.

1VAC30-45-720. Equipment and reference materials.

A. The laboratory shall be furnished with all items of equipment, including reference materials, required for the correct performance of tests for which certification is sought. The laboratory shall maintain records of reference materials sufficient to provide proper performance of tests. In those cases where the laboratory needs to use equipment outside its permanent control it shall ensure that the relevant requirements of this article are met.

B. All equipment shall be properly maintained, inspected and cleaned. Maintenance procedures shall be documented.

C. Any item of the equipment that has been subjected to overloading or mishandling, or that gives suspect results, or has been shown by verification or otherwise to be defective shall be taken out of service immediately, clearly identified as being out of service and, wherever possible, stored at a specified place until it has been repaired and shown by calibration, verification or test to perform satisfactorily. The laboratory shall examine the effect of this defect on previous calibrations or tests.

D. Each item of equipment including reference materials shall be labeled, marked or otherwise identified to indicate its calibration status.

E. Records of each major item of equipment significant to the tests performed shall be maintained. These records shall include documentation on all routine and non-routine maintenance activities. The laboratory shall maintain records of reference materials sufficient to provide proper performance of tests. The records shall include:

1. The name of the item of equipment;

2. The manufacturer's name, type identification, and serial number or other unique identification;

3. Date received and date placed in service (if available);

4. 3. Current location, where appropriate;

5. If available, condition when received (e.g., new, used, reconditioned);

6. 4. Copy of the manufacturer's instructions, where available;

7. 5. Dates and results of calibrations or verifications or both and date of the next calibration or verification;

8. 6. Details of maintenance carried out to date and planned for the future; and

9. 7. History of any damage, malfunction, modification or repair.

1VAC30-45-730. Test methods and standard operating procedures.

A. Methods documentation.

1. The laboratory shall have documented instructions on the use and operation of all relevant equipment, on the handling and preparation of samples, and for calibration or testing, where the absence of such instructions could jeopardize the calibrations or tests.

2. All instructions, standards, manuals and reference data relevant to the work of the laboratory shall be maintained up to date and be readily available to the staff.

B. Standard operating procedures (SOPs).

1. Laboratories shall maintain SOPs that accurately reflect all phases of current laboratory activities such as assessing data integrity, corrective actions, handling customer complaints, and all test methods. These documents, for example, may be equipment manuals provided by the manufacturer or internally written documents. The test methods may be copies of published methods as long as any changes or selected options in the methods are documented and included in the laboratory methods manual.

2. The SOPs shall be organized. Each SOP shall clearly indicate the effective date of the document, the revision number, and the signature or signatures of the responsible laboratory manager or managers.

3. Copies of all SOPs shall be accessible to all personnel.

C. Laboratory methods manuals. SOPs for laboratory methods.

1. The laboratory shall have and maintain an in-house methods manual or manuals SOP for each certified analyte or test method.

2. This manual may consists of copies of published or referenced methods or standard operating procedures that have been SOP may be a copy of a published or referenced method or may be written by the laboratory. In cases where modifications to the published method have been made by the laboratory or where the referenced test method is ambiguous or provides insufficient detail, these changes or clarifications shall be clearly described. Each test method shall include or reference where applicable:

a. Identification of the test method;

b. Applicable matrix or matrices;

c. Method detection limit Limits of detection or quantitation;

d. Scope and application, including components parameters to be analyzed;

e. Summary of the test method;

f. Definitions;

g. Interferences;

h. Safety;

i. Equipment and supplies;

j. Reagents and standards;

k. Sample collection, preservation, shipment and storage;

l. Quality control;

m. Calibration and standardization;

n. Procedure;

o. Calculations Data analysis and calculations;

p. Method performance;

q. Pollution prevention;

r. Data assessment and acceptance criteria for quality control measures;

s. Corrective actions for out-of-control data;

t. Contingencies for handling out-of-control or unacceptable data;

u. Waste management;

v. References; and

w. Any tables, diagrams, flowcharts and validation data.

D. Test methods.

1. Laboratories shall use (i) promulgated test methods in accordance with the Code of Federal Regulations; (ii) test methods stated in any current permit issued by Virginia the State Air Pollution Control Board, the Virginia Waste Management Board, or the State Water Control Board; or (iii) alternate test procedures approved by the board issuing the permit or the Department of Environmental Quality, including applicable quality assurance requirements, and sample preservation, container, storage, and holding time requirements. Laboratories shall use the latest valid edition of a method unless it is not appropriate to do so.

2. The laboratory shall use appropriate test methods and procedures for all tests and related activities within its responsibility (including sample handling, transport and storage, preparation and analysis). The method and procedures shall be consistent with the accuracy required and with any standard specifications relevant to the calibrations or tests concerned.

3. When the use of reference test methods for a sample analysis is mandated, only those methods shall be used.

4. Where test methods are employed that are not required, as in the Performance Based Measurement System approach, the methods shall be fully documented and validated (see subsection E of this section).

E. Demonstration of capability.

1. Prior to acceptance and institution of any test method, satisfactory initial demonstration of method capability is required. In general, this demonstration does not test the performance of the method in real world samples, but in the applicable and available clean quality system matrix sample (a quality system matrix in which no target analytes or interferences are present at concentrations that impact the results of a specific test method), e.g. for example, drinking water, solids, biological tissue and air. Laboratories shall follow the procedure in subsection F of this section to demonstrate capability.

2. Thereafter, continuing ongoing demonstration of method performance, such as laboratory control samples, is required.

3. In cases where a laboratory analyzes samples using a test method that has been in use by the laboratory before July 1999 for at least one year prior to applying for certification, and there have been no significant changes in instrument type, personnel or test method, the continuing demonstration of method performance and the analyst's documentation of continued proficiency shall be acceptable. The laboratory shall have records on file to demonstrate that an initial demonstration of capability is not required.

4. In all cases, the laboratory shall complete and retain a certification statement and shall make the statement available upon request. The laboratory shall retain all associated supporting data necessary to reproduce the analytical results summarized in the certification statement.

5. The laboratory shall complete a demonstration of capability each time there is a change in instrument type, personnel or test method, including the addition of an analyte to a certified test method.

6. In laboratories with specialized work cells (a group consisting of analysts with specifically defined tasks that together perform the test method), the group as a unit shall meet the criteria of this subsection. This demonstration of capability shall be fully documented.

F. Procedure for demonstration of capability. The following steps shall be performed for mandated test methods. However, before any results are reported using this method, actual sample spike results may be used to meet this standard, (i.e., at least four consecutive matrix spikes within the last 12 months). For analytes that do not lend themselves to spiking, (e.g., TSS), the demonstration of capability may be performed using quality control samples. The laboratory may document that other approaches to demonstration of capability are adequate. This documentation shall be included in the laboratory's quality manual:

1. A quality control (QC) sample may be obtained from an outside source or may be prepared by the laboratory using alternate source stock standards that are prepared independently from those used in instrument calibration.

2. The analyte or analytes shall be diluted in a volume of clean quality system matrix sufficient to prepare four aliquots at the concentration specified, or if unspecified, to a concentration of 1-4 times the limit of quantitation.

3. At least four aliquots shall be prepared and analyzed according to the test method either concurrently or over a period of days.

4. Using all of the results, calculate the mean recovery in the appropriate reporting units (such as g/L) and the standard deviations of the population sample (n-1) (in the same units) for each parameter of interest. When it is not possible to determine mean and standard deviations, such as for presence or absence of the analyte and logarithmic values, the laboratory shall assess performance against established and documented criteria.

5. Compare the information from subdivision 4 of this subsection to the corresponding acceptance criteria for precision and accuracy in the test method (if applicable) or in laboratory-generated acceptance criteria (if there are not established mandatory criteria). If all parameters meet the acceptance criteria, the analysis of actual samples may begin. If any one of the parameters do not meet the acceptance criteria, the performance is unacceptable for that parameter.

6. When one or more of the tested parameters fail at least one of the acceptance criteria, the analyst shall proceed according to either subdivision 6 a or 6 b below of this subsection.

a. Locate and correct the source of the problem and repeat the test for all parameters of interest beginning with subdivision 3 of this subsection.

b. Beginning with subdivision 3 of this subsection, repeat the test for all parameters that failed to meet criteria. Repeated failure, however, confirms a general problem with the measurement system. If this occurs, locate and correct the source of the problem and repeat the test for all compounds of interest beginning with subdivision 3 of this subsection.

G. Certification statement. The following certification statement shall be used to document the completion of each demonstration of capability. A copy of the certification statement shall be retained in the personnel records of each affected employee.

Demonstration of Capability
Certification Statement

Date: Page __of __

Laboratory Name:

Laboratory Address:

Analyst(s) Name(s):

Matrix:

(examples: laboratory pure water, soil, air, solid, biological tissue)

Method number, SOP#, Rev#, and Analyte, or Class of Analytes or Measured Parameters

(examples: barium by 200.7, trace metals by 6010 B, benzene by 8021 B, etc.)

We, the undersigned, CERTIFY that:

1. The analysts identified above, using the cited test method(s), which is in use at this facility for the analyses of samples under the Virginia Environmental Laboratory Certification Program, have met the Demonstration of Capability.

2. The test method(s) was performed by the analyst(s) identified on this certification.

3. A copy of the test method(s) and the laboratory-specific SOPs are available for all personnel on-site.

4. The data associated with the demonstration capability are true, accurate, complete and self-explanatory(1).

5. All raw data (including a copy of this certification form) necessary to reconstruct and validate these analyses have been retained at the facility, and that the associated information is well organized and available for review by authorized assessors.

Laboratory Manager's Name and Title________________ Signature________________ Date_______

Quality Assurance Officer's Name___________________ Signature________________ Date_______

(1)True - consistent with supporting data. Accurate - based on good laboratory practices consistent with sound scientific principles and practices. Complete - includes the results of all supporting performance testing. Self-explanatory - data properly labeled and stored so that the results are clear and require no additional explanation.

H. Sample aliquots. Where sampling (as in obtaining sample aliquots from a submitted sample) is carried out as part of the test method, the laboratory shall use documented procedures and appropriate techniques to obtain representative subsamples.

I. Data verification. Calculations and data transfers shall be subject to appropriate checks. The laboratory shall establish standard operating procedures to ensure that (i) the reported data are free from transcription and calculation errors and (ii) all quality control measures are reviewed and evaluated before data are reported. The laboratory also shall establish standard operating procedures addressing manual calculations including manual integrations.

J. Documentation and labeling of standards and reagents. Documented procedures shall exist for the reception and storage of consumable materials used for the technical operations of the laboratory.

1. The laboratory shall retain records for all standards, reagents, reference materials and media including the manufacturer/vendor, the manufacturer's Certificate of Analysis or purity (if available), the date of receipt, recommended storage conditions, and an expiration date after which the material shall not be used unless its reliability is verified by the laboratory.

2. Original containers (such as provided by the manufacturer or vendor) shall be labeled with an expiration date if this date is provided by the manufacturer or vendor.

3. Records shall be maintained on standard and reference material preparation. These records shall indicate traceability to purchased stocks or neat compounds, reference to the method of preparation, date of preparation, expiration date and preparer's initials.

4. Sufficient identification of containers of prepared reagents and standards shall be provided to ensure proper performance of tests.

K. Computers and electronic data related requirements. Where computers, automated equipment or microprocessors are used for the capture, processing, manipulation, recording, reporting, storage or retrieval of test data, the laboratory shall ensure the following:

1. Computer software developed by the user is documented in sufficient detail and is suitably validated as being adequate for use.

2. Procedures are established and implemented for protecting the integrity of data, such as integrity of data entry or capture, data storage, data transmission and data processing.

3. Computer and automated equipment are maintained to ensure proper functioning and provided with the environmental and operating conditions necessary to maintain the integrity of calibration and test data.

4. Appropriate procedures are established and implemented for the maintenance of security of data including the prevention of unauthorized access to, and the unauthorized amendment of, computer records.

1VAC30-45-740. Measurement traceability and calibration.

A. General requirements. All equipment used for environmental tests, including equipment for subsidiary measurements (e.g., for environmental conditions) having a significant effect on the accuracy or validity of the result of the environmental test or sampling shall be calibrated before being put into service and on a continuing basis. The laboratory shall have an established program and procedure for the calibration of its equipment. This includes balances, thermistors, thermometers and control standards. Such a program shall include a system for selecting, using, calibrating, checking, controlling and maintaining measurement standards, reference materials used as measurement standards, and measuring and test equipment used to perform environmental tests.

B. Traceability of calibration.

1. The laboratory shall ensure that the equipment used can provide the uncertainty of measurement needed.

2. The overall program of calibration or verification or both and validation of equipment shall be designed and operated so as to ensure that measurements made by the laboratory are traceable to national standards of measurement.

3. Where traceability of measurements to the International System of Units (SI) is not possible or not relevant, the same requirements for traceability to, for example, certified reference materials, agreed methods and/or or consensus standards, are required. The laboratory shall provide satisfactory evidence of correlation of results, for example by participation in a suitable program of inter-laboratory comparisons, proficiency testing, or independent analysis.

C. Reference standards and reference materials.

1. Reference standards. The laboratory shall have a program and procedure for the calibration of its reference standards. Reference standards of measurement shall be calibrated by a body that can provide traceability as described in subsection B of this section. Such reference standards of measurement held by the laboratory (such as Class S or equivalent weights or traceable thermometers) shall be used for calibration only and for no other purpose, unless it can be demonstrated that their performance as reference standards would not be invalidated. Where commercially available, this traceability shall be to a national standard of measurement.

2. Reference materials. Reference materials shall, where commercially available, be traceable to SI units of measurement, or to certified reference materials. Where possible, traceability shall be to national or international standards of measurement, or to national or international standard reference materials. Internal reference materials shall be checked as far as is technically and economically practicable.

D. Calibration. Calibration requirements are divided into two parts: (i) requirements for analytical support equipment and (ii) requirements for instrument calibration. In addition, the requirements for instrument calibration are divided into initial instrument calibration and continuing instrument calibration verification.

1. Support equipment. These standards apply to all devices that may not be the actual test instrument, but are necessary to support laboratory operations. These include but are not limited to balances, ovens, refrigerators, freezers, incubators, water baths, temperature measuring devices (including thermometers and thermistors), thermal/pressure sample preparation devices and volumetric dispensing devices (such as Eppendorf®, or automatic dilutor or dispensing devices) if quantitative results are dependent on their accuracy, as in standard preparation and dispensing or dilution into a specified volume.

a. All support equipment shall be maintained in proper working order. The records of all repair and maintenance activities, including service calls, shall be kept.

b. All support equipment shall be calibrated or verified at least annually, using NIST traceable references when available, over the entire range of use. The results of such calibration shall be within the specifications required of the application for which this equipment is used. If not, the laboratory shall either (i) remove the equipment from service until repaired or (ii) maintain records of established correction factors to correct all measurements.

c. Raw data records shall be retained to document equipment performance.

d. Prior to use on each working day On each day the equipment is used, balances, ovens, refrigerators, freezers, and water baths shall be checked in the expected use range, with NIST traceable references where available. The acceptability for use or continued use shall be according to the needs of the analysis or application for which the equipment is being used.

e. Mechanical volumetric dispensing devices including burettes (except Class A glassware) shall be checked for accuracy on at least a quarterly use basis. Glass microliter syringes are to be considered in the same manner as Class A glassware, but shall come with a certificate attesting to established accuracy or the accuracy shall be initially demonstrated and documented by the laboratory.

f. For chemical tests, the temperature, cycle time and pressure of each run of autoclaves shall be documented by the use of appropriate chemical indicators or temperature recorders and pressure gauges.

g. For biological tests that employ autoclave sterilization, the following requirements apply:

(1) The performance of each autoclave shall be initially evaluated by establishing its functional properties and performance, for example heat distribution characteristics with respect to typical uses. Autoclaves shall meet specified temperature tolerances. Pressure cookers fitted only with a pressure gauge are not recommended for sterilization of media or decontamination of wastes.

(2) Records of autoclave operations including temperature and time shall be maintained. This shall be done for every cycle. Acceptance and rejection criteria shall be established and used to evaluate the autoclave efficiency and effectiveness.

2. Instrument calibration.

a. This standard specifies the essential elements that define the procedures and documentation for initial instrument calibration and continuing instrument calibration verification to ensure that the data shall be of known quality and be appropriate for a given regulation or decision. This standard does not specify detailed procedural steps for calibration, but establishes the essential elements for selection of the appropriate technique or techniques. If more stringent standards or requirements are included in a mandated test method or by regulation, the laboratory shall demonstrate that such requirements are met. If it is not apparent which standard is more stringent, then the requirements of the regulation or mandated test method are to be followed.

b. Initial instrument calibrations. The following items are essential elements of initial instrument calibration:

(1) The laboratory shall include or reference the details of the initial instrument calibration procedures, including calculations, integrations, acceptance criteria and associated statistics in the standard operating procedure for the test method. When initial instrument calibration procedures are referenced in the test method, then the laboratory shall retain the referenced material and make it available for review.

(2) The laboratory shall retain sufficient raw data records to permit reconstruction of the initial instrument calibration, (e.g., calibration date, test method, instrument, analysis date, each analyte name, analyst's initials or signature, concentration and response, calibration curve or response factor, or unique equation or coefficient used to reduce instrument responses to concentration).

(3) Sample results shall be quantitated from the initial instrument calibration and may not be quantitated from any continuing instrument calibration verification unless otherwise required by regulation, method, or program.

(4) All initial instrument calibrations shall be verified with a standard obtained from a second manufacturer or lot. Traceability shall be to a national standard, when available. This element does not apply to laboratories performing only simple test procedures.

(5) Criteria for the acceptance of an initial instrument calibration shall be established, (e.g., correlation coefficient and relative percent difference). The criteria used shall be 0.995 or greater for the calibration coefficient unless a different criterion is included in the method being used.

(6) Results of samples not bracketed by initial calibration standards (within calibration range) shall be reported as having less certainty, (e.g., defined qualifiers or flags or explained in the case narrative). The lowest calibration standard shall be above the detection limit.

(7) If the initial instrument calibration results are outside established acceptance criteria, corrective actions shall be performed. Data associated with an unacceptable initial instrument calibration shall not be reported.

(8) Calibration standards shall include concentrations at or below the regulatory limit or decision level, if these limits or levels are known by the laboratory, unless these concentrations are below the laboratory's demonstrated detection limits.

(9) If a reference or mandated method does not specify the number of calibration standards, the minimum number is two, not including blanks or a zero standard. The laboratory shall have a standard operating procedure for determining the number of points for establishing the initial instrument calibration.

c. Continuing instrument calibration verification.

(1) When an initial instrument calibration is not performed on the day of analysis, the validity of the initial calibration shall be verified prior to sample analyses by a continuing instrument calibration check with each analytical batch. This provision does not apply to laboratories performing only simple test procedures.

(2) The following items are essential elements of continuing instrument calibration verification:

(a) The laboratory shall include or reference the details of the continuing instrument calibration procedure, calculations and associated statistics in the standard operating procedure for the test method.

(b) The laboratory shall verify calibration for each compound, element, or other discrete chemical species, except for multicomponent analytes such as Aroclors, Total Petroleum Hydrocarbons, or Toxaphene where a representative chemical related substance or mixture can be used.

(c) The laboratory shall perform a continuing instrument calibration verification as follows:

(i) At the beginning and end of each analytical batch. If an internal standard is used, only one verification needs to be performed at the beginning of the analytical batch;

(ii) Whenever it is expected that the analytical system may be out of calibration or might not meet the verification acceptance criteria;

(iii) If the time period for calibration or the most previous calibration verification has expired; or

(iv) For analytical systems that contain a calibration verification requirement.

(d) Sufficient raw data records shall be retained to permit reconstruction of the continuing instrument calibration verification, (e.g., or test method, instrument, analysis date, each analyte name, concentration and response, calibration curve or response factor, or unique equations or coefficients used to convert instrument responses into concentrations). Continuing calibration verification records shall explicitly connect the continuing verification data to the initial instrument calibration.

(e) Criteria for the acceptance of a continuing instrument calibration verification shall be established, (e.g., percent recovery or relative percent difference).

(f) If the continuing instrument calibration verification results obtained are outside established acceptance criteria, corrective actions shall be performed. If routine corrective action procedures fail to produce a second consecutive (immediate) calibration verification within acceptance criteria, then either the laboratory has to demonstrate acceptable performance after corrective action with two consecutive successful calibration verifications, or a new initial instrument calibration shall be performed. If the laboratory has not verified calibration, sample analyses shall not occur until the analytical system is calibrated or calibration verified. If samples are analyzed using a system on which the calibration has not yet been verified, the results shall be flagged. Data associated with an unacceptable calibration verification may be fully useable under the following special conditions:

(i) When the acceptance criteria for the continuing calibration verification are exceeded high, (i.e., high bias,) and there are associated samples that are nondetects, then those nondetects may be reported. Otherwise the samples affected by the unacceptable calibration verification shall be reanalyzed after a new calibration curve has been established, evaluated and accepted.

(ii) When the acceptance criteria for the continuing calibration verification are exceeded low, (i.e., low bias,) those sample results may be reported if they exceed a maximum regulatory limit or decision level. Otherwise the samples affected by the unacceptable verification shall be reanalyzed after a new calibration curve has been established, evaluated and accepted.

1VAC30-45-750. Quality assurance.

A. General. The laboratory shall have quality control procedures for monitoring the validity of environmental tests undertaken. The resulting data shall be recorded in such a way that trends are detectable and, where practicable, statistical techniques shall be applied to the reviewing of the results. This monitoring shall be planned and reviewed and may include, but not be limited to, the following:

1. Regular use of certified reference materials and/or or internal quality control using secondary reference materials or both.

2. Participation in interlaboratory comparison or proficiency testing program.

3. Replicate tests using the same or different methods.

4. Retesting of retained samples.

5. Correlation of results for different characteristics of a sample (for example (e.g., total phosphate should be greater than or equal to orthophosphate).

B. Essential quality control procedures. The general quality control principles in subsections C through F of this section shall apply, where applicable, to all environmental laboratories. The manner in which they are implemented is dependent on the types of tests performed by the laboratory. 1VAC30-45-760 through 1VAC30-45-829 specify quality control requirements for specific test types. 1VAC30-45-770 through 1VAC30-45-775, 1VAC30-45-790 through 1VAC30-45-798, and 1VAC30-45-810 through 1VAC30-45-818 specify quality control requirements for chemical testing, microbiological testing, and air testing, respectively. Noncommercial environmental laboratories that analyze environmental samples using other types of testing such as toxicity, radiochemical, or asbestos testing shall meet the quality control standards for the specific method and the specific type of testing in the 2009 TNI Standards for Environmental Laboratories. The standards for any given test type shall assure that the applicable principles are addressed.

C. All laboratories shall have detailed written protocols in place to monitor the following quality controls:

1. Positive and negative controls to monitor tests such as blanks, spikes, reference toxicants.

2. Tests to define the variability or repeatability of the laboratory results or both such as replicates.

3. Measures to assure the accuracy of the test method including calibration or continuing calibrations or both, use of certified reference materials, proficiency test samples, or other measures.

4. Measures to evaluate test method capability, such as method detection limits and quantitation limits or range of applicability such as linearity.

5. Selection of appropriate formulae to reduce raw data to final results such as regression analysis, comparison to internal and external standard calculations, and statistical analyses.

6. Selection and use of reagents and standards of appropriate quality.

7. Measures to assure the selectivity of the test for its intended purpose.

8. Measures to assure constant and consistent test conditions (both instrumental and environmental) where required by the test method such as temperature, humidity, light, or specific instrument conditions.

1VAC30-45-760. Quality control requirements.

A. General.

1. The quality control protocols specified by the laboratory's method manual SOPs shall be followed (1VAC30-45-730 C). The laboratory shall ensure that either the (i) applicable essential standards outlined in this section through 1VAC30-45-829 1VAC30-45-775, 1VAC30-45-791 through 1VAC30-45-798, and 1VAC30-45-811 or (ii) mandated methods or regulations, whichever are more stringent, are incorporated into their method manuals SOPs. When it is not apparent which is more stringent, the quality control controls in the mandated method or regulations is are to be followed.

2. All quality control measures shall be assessed and evaluated on an ongoing basis and quality control acceptance criteria shall be used to determine the validity of the data. The laboratory shall have procedures for the development of acceptance/rejection criteria where no method or regulatory criteria exists.

B. Initial test method evaluation. For all test methods other than toxicity and microbiology, the requirements of subdivisions 1 and 2 of this subsection apply. For toxicity and microbiology testing, the initial test method evaluation requirements are contained in 1VAC30-45-780 through 1VAC30-45-788 and 1VAC30-45-790 through 1VAC30-45-798, respectively. For the evaluation of precision and bias (subdivision 3 of this subsection), the requirements of subdivision 3 a of this subsection apply to standard methods. The requirements of subdivision 3 b of this subsection apply to the methods referenced in that subdivision.

1. Limit of detection (LOD).

a. The laboratory shall determine the LOD for the method for each target analyte of concern in the quality system matrices. All sample processing steps of the analytical method shall be included in the determination of the LOD.

b. The validity of the LOD shall be confirmed by qualitative identification of the analyte(s) in a quality control sample in each quality system matrix containing the analyte at no more than two to three times the LOD for single analyte tests and one to four times the LOD for multiple analyte tests. This verification shall be performed on every instrument that is to be used for analysis of samples and reporting of data.

c. An LOD study is not required for any component for which spiking solutions or quality control samples are not available such as temperature, or, when test results are not to be reported to the LOD (versus the limit of quantitation or working range of instrument calibration), according to 1VAC30-45-771, 1VAC30-45-805, and 1VAC30-45-814, and 1VAC30-45-826. Where an LOD study is not performed, the laboratory may not report a value below the limit of quantitation.

2. Limit of quantitation (LOQ).

a. The laboratory shall determine the LOQ for each analyte of concern according to a defined, documented procedure.

b. The LOQ study is not required for any component or property for which spiking solutions or quality control samples are not commercially available or otherwise inappropriate (e.g., pH).

c. The validity of the LOQ shall be confirmed by successful analysis of a QC sample containing the analytes of concern in each quality system matrix one to two times the claimed LOQ. A successful analysis is one where the recovery of each analyte is within the established test method acceptance criteria or client data quality objectives for accuracy. This single analysis is not required if the bias and precision of the measurement system is evaluated at the LOQ.

3. Evaluation of precision and bias.

a. Standard methods. The laboratory shall evaluate the precision and bias of a standard method for each analyte of concern for each quality system matrix according to either of the following:

(1) The single-concentration four-replicate recovery study procedures in 1VAC30-45-730 F; or

(2) An alternate procedure documented in the quality manual when the analyte cannot be spiked into the sample matrix and quality control samples are not commercially available.

b. Nonstandard methods.

(1) For laboratory-developed test methods or nonstandard test methods that were not in use by the laboratory before July 2003, the laboratory shall have a documented procedure to evaluate precision and bias. The laboratory shall also compare results of the precision and bias measurements with criteria given in the reference method or criteria established by the laboratory.

(2) Precision and bias measurements shall evaluate the method across the analytical calibration range of the method. The laboratory shall also evaluate precision and bias in the relevant quality system matrices and shall process the samples through the entire measurement system for each analyte of interest.

(3) The following are examples of a systematic approach to evaluate precision and bias:

(a) Example 1. Analyze QC samples in triplicate containing the analytes of concern at or near the limit of quantitation, at the upper-range of the calibration (upper 20%) and at a mid-range concentration. Process these samples on different days as three sets of samples through the entire measurement system for each analyte of interest. Each day one QC sample at each concentration is analyzed. A separate method blank shall be subjected to the analytical method along with the QC samples on each of the three days. (Note that the three samples at the LOQ concentration can demonstrate sensitivity as well.) For each analyte, calculate the mean recovery for each day, for each level over days, and for all nine samples. Calculate the relative standard deviation for each of the separate means obtained. Compare the standard deviations for the different days and the standard deviations for the different concentrations. If the different standard deviations are all statistically insignificant (e.g., F-test), then compare the overall mean and standard deviation with the established criteria from above.

(b) Example 2. A validation protocol such as the Tier I, Tier II, and Tier III requirements in U.S. EPA Office of Water's Alternate Test Procedure (ATP) approval process.

4. Evaluation of selectivity. The laboratory shall evaluate selectivity by following the checks established within the method. These checks may include mass spectral tuning, second column confirmation, ICP inter-element interference checks, chromatography retention time windows, sample blanks, spectrochemical absorption or fluorescence profiles, co-precipitation evaluations, and electrode response factors.

1VAC30-45-770. Chemical testing: positive and negative controls.

A. Negative control – method performance.

1. Purpose. The method blank is used to assess the preparation batch for possible contamination during the preparation and processing steps. The method blank shall be processed along with and under the same conditions as the associated samples to include all steps of the analytical procedure. Procedures shall be in place to determine if a method blank is contaminated. Any affected samples associated with a contaminated method blank shall be reprocessed for analysis or the results reported with appropriate data qualifying codes.

2. Frequency. The method blank shall be analyzed at a minimum of one per preparation batch. In those instances for which no separate preparation method is used (example: (e.g., volatiles in water) the batch shall be defined as environmental samples that are analyzed together with the same method and personnel, using the same lots of reagents, not to exceed the analysis of 20 environmental samples.

3. Composition. The method blank shall consist of a quality system matrix that is similar to the associated samples and is known to be free of the analytes of interest.

4. Evaluation criteria and corrective action. While the goal is to have no detectable contaminants, each method blank shall be critically evaluated as to the nature of the interference and the effect on the analysis of each sample within the batch. The source of contamination shall be investigated and measures taken to minimize or eliminate the problem and affected samples reprocessed or data shall be appropriately qualified if:

a. The concentration of a targeted analyte in the blank is at or above the reporting limit as established by the test method or by regulation, and is greater than 1/10 of the amount measured in any sample.

b. The blank contamination otherwise affects the sample results as per the test method requirements or the individual project data quality objectives.

c. When a blank is determined to be contaminated, the cause shall be investigated and measures taken to minimize or eliminate the problem. Samples associated with a contaminated blank shall be evaluated as to the best corrective action for the samples (e.g., reprocessing or data qualifying codes). In all cases the corrective action shall be documented.

B. Positive control – method performance. Laboratory control sample (LCS).

1. Purpose. The LCS is used to evaluate the performance of the total analytical system, including all preparation and analysis steps. Results of the LCS are compared to established criteria and, if found to be outside of these criteria, indicates that the analytical system is "out of control." Any affected samples associated with an out of control LCS shall be reprocessed for re-analysis or the results reported with appropriate data qualifying codes.

2. Frequency. The LCS shall be analyzed at a minimum of one per preparation batch. Exceptions would be for those analytes for which no spiking solutions are available such as total suspended solids, total dissolved solids, total volatile solids, total solids, pH, color, odor, temperature, dissolved oxygen or turbidity. In those instances for which no separate preparation method is used (example: volatiles in water) the batch shall be defined as environmental samples that are analyzed together with the same method and personnel, using the same lots of reagents, not to exceed the analysis of 20 environmental samples.

3. Composition. The LCS is a quality system matrix, known to be free of analytes of interest, spiked with known and verified concentrations of analytes. NOTE: the matrix spike may be used in place of this control as long as the acceptance criteria are as stringent as for the LCS. Alternatively the LCS may consist of a media containing known and verified concentrations of analytes or as Certified Reference Material (CRM). All analyte concentrations shall be within the calibration range of the methods. The following shall be used in choosing components for the spike mixtures:

The components to be spiked shall be as specified by the mandated test method or other regulatory requirement or as requested by the client. In the absence of specified spiking components the laboratory shall spike per the following:

a. For those components that interfere with an accurate assessment such as spiking simultaneously with technical chlordane, toxaphene and PCBs, the spike should be chosen that represents the chemistries and elution patterns of the components to be reported.

b. For those test methods that have extremely long lists of analytes, a representative number may be chosen. The analytes selected should be representative of all analytes reported. The following criteria shall be used for determining the minimum number of analytes to be spiked. However, the laboratory shall insure that all targeted components are included in the spike mixture over a two-year period. For methods that include 1-10 targets, spike all components; for methods that include 11-20 targets, spike at least 10% 10 components or 80%, whichever is greater; and for methods with more than 20 targets, spike at least 16 components.

4. Evaluation criteria and corrective action.

a. The results of the individual batch LCS are calculated in percent recovery or other appropriate statistical technique that allows comparison to established acceptance criteria. The laboratory shall document the calculation.

b. The individual LCS is compared to the acceptance criteria as published in the mandated test method. Where there are no established criteria, the laboratory shall determine internal criteria and document the method used to establish the limits or utilize client specified assessment criteria.

c. A LCS that is determined to be within the criteria effectively establishes that the analytical system is in control and validates system performance for the samples in the associated batch. Samples analyzed along with a LCS determined to be "out of control" shall be considered suspect and the samples reprocessed and re-analyzed or the data reported with appropriate data qualifying codes.

5. If a large number of analytes are in the LCS, it becomes statistically likely that a few will be outside control limits. This may not indicate that the system is out of control, therefore corrective action may not be necessary. Upper and lower marginal exceedance (ME) limits can be established to determine when corrective action is necessary. A ME is defined as being beyond the LCS control limit (3 standard deviations), but within the ME limits. ME limits are between 3 and 4 standard deviations around the mean.

a. The number of allowable marginal exceedances is based on the number of analytes in the LCS. If more analytes exceed the LCS control limits than is allowed, or if any one analyte exceeds the ME limits, the LCS fails and corrective action is necessary. This marginal exceedance approach is relevant for methods with long lists of analytes. It will not apply to target analyte lists with fewer than 11 analytes.

b. The number of allowable marginal exceedances is as follows:

Number of analytes in LCS

Number of analytes allowed in ME of the LCS control limit

Greater than 90

Five

71‑90

Four

51‑70

Three

31‑50

Two

11‑30

One

Fewer than 11

None

c. Marginal exceedances shall be random. If the same analyte exceeds the LCS control limit repeatedly, it is an indication of a systemic problem. The source of the error shall be located and corrective action taken. Laboratories shall have a written procedure to monitor the application of marginal exceedance allowance to the LCS to ensure random behavior.

C. Sample specific controls - general.

1. The laboratory shall document procedures for determining the effect of the sample matrix on method performance. These procedures relate to the analyses of quality system matrix specific Quality Control (QC) samples and are designed as data quality indicators for a specific sample using the designated test method. These controls alone are not used to judge laboratory performance.

2. Examples of matrix specific QC include: Matrix Spike (MS); Matrix Spike Duplicate (MSD); sample duplicates; and surrogate spikes. The laboratory shall have procedures in place for tracking, managing, and handling matrix specific QC criteria including spiking appropriate components at appropriate concentrations, calculating recoveries and relative percent difference, evaluating and reporting results based on performance of the QC samples.

D. Sample specific controls - matrix spike and matrix spike duplicates.

1. Purpose. Matrix specific QC samples indicate the effect of the sample matrix on the precision and accuracy of the results generated using the selected method. The information from these controls is sample/matrix specific and would not normally be used to determine the validity of the entire batch.

2. Frequency. The frequency of the analysis of matrix specific samples shall be determined as part of a systematic planning process (e.g., Data Quality Objectives) or as specified by the test method.

3. Composition. The components to be spiked shall be as specified by the mandated test method. Any permit specified analytes, as specified by regulation or client requested analytes shall also be included. If there are no specified components, the laboratory shall spike per the following:

a. For those components that interfere with an accurate assessment such as spiking simultaneously with technical chlordane, toxaphene and PCBs, the spike should be chosen that represents the chemistries and elution patterns of the components to be reported.

b. For those test methods that have extremely long lists of analytes, a representative number may be chosen using the following criteria for choosing the number of analytes to be spiked. However, the laboratory shall insure that all targeted components are included in the spike mixture over a two-year period.

(1) For methods that include 1-10 targets, spike all components;

(2) For methods that include 11-20 targets, spike at least 10% 10 components or 80%, whichever is greater;

(3) For methods with more than 20 targets, spike at least 16 components.

4. Evaluation criteria and corrective action.

a. The results from matrix spike/matrix spike duplicate are primarily designed to assess the precision and accuracy of analytical results in a given matrix and are expressed as percent recovery (%R), relative percent difference (RPD), or other appropriate statistical technique that allows comparison to established acceptance criteria. The laboratory shall document the calculation for %R, RPD or other statistical treatment used.

b. The results are compared to the acceptance criteria as published in the mandated test method. Where there are no established criteria, the laboratory shall determine internal criteria and document the method used to establish the limits. For matrix spike results outside established criteria corrective action shall be documented or the data reported with appropriate data qualifying codes.

E. Sample specific controls - matrix duplicates.

1. Purpose. Matrix duplicates are defined as replicate aliquots of the same sample taken through the entire analytical procedure. The results from this analysis indicate the precision of the results for the specific sample using the selected method. The matrix duplicate provides a usable measure of precision only when target analytes are found in the sample chosen for duplication.

2. Frequency. The frequency of the analysis of matrix duplicates may be determined as part of a systematic planning process (e.g., Data Quality Objectives) or as specified by the mandated test method.

3. Composition. Matrix duplicates are performed on replicate aliquots of actual samples. The composition is usually not known.

4. Evaluation criteria and corrective action.

a. The results from matrix duplicates are primarily designed to assess the precision of analytical results in a given matrix and are expressed as relative percent difference (RPD) or another statistical treatment (e.g., absolute differences). The laboratory shall document the calculation for relative percent difference or other statistical treatments.

b. Results are compared to the acceptance criteria as published in the mandated test method. Where there are no established criteria, the laboratory shall determine internal criteria and document the method used to establish the limits. For matrix duplicates results outside established criteria corrective action shall be documented or the data reported with appropriate data qualifying codes.

F. Sample specific controls - surrogate spikes.

1. Purpose. Surrogates are used most often in organic chromatography test methods and are chosen to reflect the chemistries of the targeted components of the method. Added prior to sample preparation/extraction, they provide a measure of recovery for every sample matrix.

2. Frequency. Except where the matrix precludes its use or when not commercially available, surrogate compounds shall be added to all samples, standards, and blanks for all appropriate test methods.

3. Composition. Surrogate compounds are chosen to represent the various chemistries of the target analytes in the method or MQO. They are often specified by the mandated method and are deliberately chosen for their being unlikely to occur as an environmental contaminant. Often this is accomplished by using deuterated analogs of select compounds.

4. Evaluation criteria and corrective action. The results are compared to the acceptance criteria as published in the mandated test method. Where there are no established criteria, the laboratory should determine internal criteria and document the method used to establish the limits. Surrogates outside the acceptance criteria shall be evaluated for the effect indicated for the individual sample results. Data quality objectives or other site-specific requirements may guide the appropriate corrective action. Results reported from analyses with surrogate recoveries outside the acceptance criteria should include appropriate data qualifiers.

1VAC30-45-771. Chemical testing: limit of detection and limit of quantitation.

A. General. All procedures used shall be documented. Documentation shall include the quality system matrix type. All supporting data shall be retained.

B. Limit of detection (LOD). The laboratory shall utilize a test method that provides an LOD that is appropriate and relevant for the intended use of the data. An LOD is not required for a test method when test results are not reported outside of the calibration range. LODs shall be determined by the protocol in the mandated test method or applicable regulation. If the protocol for determining LODs is not specified, the selection of the procedure shall reflect instrument limitations and the intended application of the test method.

1. The LOD shall be initially determined for the compounds of interest in each test method in a quality system matrix in which there are no target analytes or interferences at a concentration that would impact the results. Alternatively the LOD shall be determined in the quality system matrix of interest (see definition of matrix).

2. LODs shall be determined each time there is a change in the test method that affects how the test is performed, or when a change in instrumentation occurs that affects the sensitivity of the analysis.

3. The laboratory shall have established procedures to relate LOD with LOQ.

4. 3. The LOD shall be verified annually for each quality system matrix, method and analyte according to the procedure specified in 1VAC30-45-760 B 1.

C. Limit of quantitation (LOQ).

1. Any established LOQ shall be above the LOD.

2. The LOQ shall be verified annually for each quality system matrix, method and analyte according to the procedure specified in 1VAC30-45-760 B 2. Alternatively, the annual LOQ verification is not required if the LOD is reevaluated or verified according to subdivision B 4 of this section.

1VAC30-45-775. Chemical testing: constant and consistent test conditions.

A. The laboratory shall assure that the test instruments consistently operate within the specifications required of the application for which the equipment is used.

B. Glassware cleaning. Glassware shall be cleaned to meet the sensitivity of the test method.

C. B. Any cleaning and storage procedures that are not specified by the test method shall be documented in laboratory records and SOPs.

1VAC30-45-780. Toxicity testing: general. (Repealed.)

These standards apply to laboratories measuring the toxicity and/or bioaccumulation of contaminants in effluents (aquatic toxicity), receiving waters, sediments, elutriates, leachates and soils. In addition to the essential quality control standards set out in 1VAC30-45-781 through 1VAC30-45-788, some methods may have additional or other requirements based on factors such as the type of quality system matrix evaluated.

1VAC30-45-781. Toxicity testing: positive and negative controls. (Repealed.)

A. Positive control. Reference toxicant tests demonstrate a laboratory's ability to obtain consistent results with the test method and evaluate the overall health and sensitivity of test organisms over time.

1. The laboratory shall demonstrate its ability to obtain consistent results with standard reference toxicants (SRT) and complete an initial Demonstration of Capability (DOC) in order to attain accreditation in toxicity testing methods.

a. An initial DOC shall consist of five or more acceptable SRT tests for each test method, species and endpoint with different batches of organisms. Appropriate negative controls (water, sediment, or soil) shall be tested at the frequency and duration specified in the test method. Initial DOCs shall be prepared in accordance with the requirements of 1VAC30-45-730 F.

b. Initial DOC is established by maintenance of SRT test results on control charts. A laboratory shall record the control performance and statistical endpoints (such as NOEC or ECp) for each method species and endpoint on control charts. Initial DOC is established where 95% of the test results required in subdivision A 1 a of this section fall within the control limits established in accordance with subdivision A 1 c of this section and meet test acceptability criteria (TAC). The laboratory shall evaluate precision (i.e., coefficient of variation (CV)) or sensitivity (i.e., statistical minimum significant difference (SMSD) measures; see subdivision A 1 d of this section) for these tests against method-specific or, lacking the former, laboratory-derived criteria to determine validity of the initial DOC.

c. For endpoints that are point estimates (ICp, ECp), control charts are constructed by plotting the cumulative mean and the control limits that consist of the upper and lower 95% confidence limits (+/- 2 standard deviations). In case of highly variable point estimates that exceed method-specific criteria, the control chart limits are adjusted accordingly. For endpoints from hypothesis tests (NOEC, NOAEC), the values are plotted directly and the control limits consist of one concentration interval above and below the concentration representing the central tendency (i.e., the mode).

d. For endpoints that are point estimates, the cumulative mean CV is calculated and for endpoints from hypothesis tests, the SMSD is calculated. These values are maintained on a control chart.

2. Ongoing laboratory performance shall be demonstrated by routine SRT testing for each test method and species and endpoint in accordance with the minimum frequency requirements specified in subdivision A 3 of this section.

a. Intralaboratory precision is determined on an ongoing basis through the use of control charts as established in subdivision A 1 b of this section. The control charts shall be plotted as point estimate values, such as EC25 for chronic tests and LC50 for acute tests, or as appropriate hypothesis test values, such as the NOEC or NOAEC, over time within a laboratory.

b. After initial laboratory DOC is determined, the control limits and CV for an individual test method, endpoints and species shall be adjusted as additional test results are obtained. After 20 data points are collected for a test method and species, the control chart is maintained using only the last 20 data points, i.e., each successive mean value and control limit is calculated using only the last 20 values.

c. Control chart limits are expected to be exceeded occasionally regardless of how well a laboratory performs. Acceptance limits for point estimates (ICp, ECp) that are based on 95% confidence limits should theoretically be exceeded for one in 20 tests. Depending on the dilution factor and test sensitivity, control charts based on hypothesis test values (NOEC, NOAEC) may be expected to be exceeded on a similar frequency. Test results that fall outside of control chart limits at a frequency of 5.0% or less, or that fall just outside control chart limits (especially in the case of highly proficient laboratories that may develop relatively narrow acceptance limits over time), are not rejected de facto. Such data are evaluated in comparison with control chart characteristics including the width of the acceptance limits and the degree of departure of the value from acceptance limits.

d. Consistent with the test methods used, laboratories shall develop acceptance/rejection policies for SRT data that consider the source of test organisms, the direction of the deviation, test dilution factor, test sensitivity (for hypothesis test values), testing frequency, out-of-control test frequency, relative width of acceptance limits, inter-test CV, and degree of difference between test results and acceptance limits.

e. In the case of reference toxicant data that fails to meet control chart acceptance criteria, the test data are examined for defects, corrective action taken, and the test repeated if necessary, using a different batch of organisms or the data is qualified.

3. The frequency of ongoing laboratory reference toxicant testing shall be as follows unless the method specifically requires less frequent SRT tests (e.g., sediment tests):

a. For test methods conducted at a frequency of monthly or greater, SRT tests shall be conducted at an ongoing frequency of monthly.

b. For test methods and species commonly used in the laboratory, but that are tested at a frequency of less than monthly, SRT tests shall be conducted concurrently with the environmental test.

c. If the test organisms are obtained from an outside source the sensitivity of each batch of organisms received from a supplier shall be determined via a concurrent SRT test unless the supplier can provide control chart data for the last five SRT tests using the same SRT and test conditions. Supplied SRT data may not be older than six months.

d. The DOC for an analyst shall be consistent with 1VAC30-45-220 B but the frequency need not exceed the method-specified requirements and subdivision A 3 a and A 3 b of this section.

4. These standards do not currently specify a particular reference toxicant and dilution series. If the permitting authority identifies a reference toxicant or dilution series for a particular test, the laboratory shall follow the specified requirements. All reference toxicant tests conducted for a given test method and species shall use the same reference toxicant, test concentrations, dilution water and data analysis methods. A dilution factor of 0.5x or greater shall be used for both acute and chronic tests.

5. The reference toxicant tests shall be conducted following the same procedures as the environmental toxicity tests for which the precision is being evaluated, unless otherwise specified in the test method (for example, 10-day sediment tests employ 96-h water-only reference toxicant tests). The test duration, laboratory dilution water, feeding, organism age, range and density, test volumes, renewal frequency, water quality measurements, and the number of test concentrations, replicates and organisms per replicate shall be the same as specified for the environmental toxicity test.

B. Negative control: control, brine control, control sediment, control soil or dilution water.

1. The standards for the use, type and frequency of testing of negative controls are specified by the test methods and by permit or regulation and shall be followed. A negative control is included with each test to evaluate test performance and the health and sensitivity of the specific batch of organisms.

2. Appropriate additional negative controls shall be included when sample adjustments (for example, addition of thiosulfate for dechlorination) or solvent carriers are used in the test.

3. Test acceptability criteria (TAC). The test acceptability criteria specified in the test method shall be achieved for both the reference toxicant and the effluent or environmental sample toxicity test. The criteria shall be calculated and shall meet the method specified requirements for performing toxicity tests.

1VAC30-45-782. Toxicity testing: variability and/or reproducibility. (Repealed.)

Intralaboratory precision shall be determined on an ongoing basis through the use of further reference toxicant tests and related control charts as described in 1VAC30-45-840 A.

1VAC30-45-783. Toxicity testing: accuracy. (Repealed.)

This principle is not applicable to toxicity testing.

1VAC30-45-784. Toxicity testing: test sensitivity. (Repealed.)

A. The statistical minimum significant difference (SMSD) shall be calculated according to the formula specified by the test method and reported with the test results.

B. Point estimates: (LCp, ICp, or ECp) Confidence intervals shall be reported as a measure of the precision around the point estimate value, when the calculation is possible.

C. The SMSD shall be calculated and reported for only hypothesis test values, such as the NOEC or NOAEC.

1VAC30-45-785. Toxicity testing: selection of appropriate statistical analysis methods. (Repealed.)

A. If required, methods of data analysis and endpoints are specified by language in the regulation, permit or the test method.

B. Dose response curves. The data shall be plotted in the form of a curve relating the dose of the chemical or concentration of sample to cumulative percentage of test organisms demonstrating a response such as death. Evaluation criteria shall be established for interpretation of concentration or dose response curves.

1VAC30-45-786. Toxicity testing: selection and use of reagents and standards. (Repealed.)

A. The grade of all reagents used in toxicity tests is specified in the test method except the reference standard. All reference standards shall be prepared from chemicals that are analytical reagent grade or better. The preparation of all standards and reference toxicants shall be documented.

B. All standards and reagents associated with chemical measurements, such as dissolved oxygen, pH or specific conductance, shall comply with the standards outlined in 1VAC30-45-740 D 1 d.

C. Only reagent-grade water collected from distillation or deionization units is used to prepare reagents.

1VAC30-45-787. Toxicity testing: selectivity. (Repealed.)

The permit or regulation specifies the selectivity of the test.

1VAC30-45-788. Toxicity testing: constant and consistent test conditions. (Repealed.)

A. If closed refrigerator‑sized incubators are used, culturing and testing of organisms shall be separated to avoid cross‑contamination.

B. Laboratory space shall be adequate for the types and numbers of tests performed. The building shall provide adequate cooling, heating and illumination for conducting testing and culturing; hot and cold running water shall be available for cleaning equipment.

C. Air used for aeration of test solutions, dilution waters and cultures shall be free of oil and fumes.

D. The laboratory or a contracted outside expert shall positively identify test organisms to species on an annual basis. The taxonomic reference (citation and page(s)) and the names(s) of the taxonomic expert(s) shall be kept on file at the laboratory. When organisms are obtained from an outside source, the supplier shall provide this same information.

E. Instruments used for routine support measurements of chemical and physical parameters such as pH, DO, conductivity, salinity, alkalinity, hardness, chlorine, ammonia, and weight shall be calibrated, and/or standardized per manufacturer's instructions. As these are support measurements, only the calibration and verification requirements specified at 1VAC30-45-740 D 1 apply. All measurements and calibrations shall be documented.

F. Test temperature shall be maintained as specified for the test method. Temperature control equipment shall be adequate to maintain the required test temperature(s). The average daily temperature of the test solutions shall be maintained within the method-specified range. The minimum frequency of measurement shall be once per 24-hour period. The test temperature for continuous-flow toxicity tests shall be recorded and monitored continuously. Where electronic data loggers are used, temperature shall be monitored at a frequency sufficient to capture temporal variations of the environmental control system.

G. Reagent-grade water, prepared by any combination of distillation, reverse osmosis, ion exchange, activated carbon and particle filtration, shall meet the method specified requirements.

H. The quality of the standard dilution water used for testing or culturing shall be sufficient to allow satisfactory survival, growth and reproduction of the test species as demonstrated by routine reference toxicant tests and negative control performance. Water used for culturing and testing shall be analyzed for toxic metals and organics whenever the minimum acceptability criteria for control survival, growth or reproduction are not met and no other cause, such as contaminated glassware or poor stock, can be identified. It is recognized that the analyte lists of some methods manuals may not include all potential toxicants, are based on estimates of chemical toxicity available at the time of publication and may specify detection limits that are not achievable in all matrices. However, for those analytes not listed, or for which the measured concentration or limit of detection is greater than the method-specified limit, the laboratory shall demonstrate that the analyte at the measured concentration or reported limit of detection does not exceed one-tenth of the expected chronic value for the most sensitive species tested and/or cultured. The expected chronic value is based on professional judgment and the best available scientific data. The "USEPA Ambient Water Quality Criteria Documents" and the EPA AQUIRE database provide guidance and data on acceptability and toxicity of individual metals and organic compounds.

I. The quality of the food used for testing or culturing shall be sufficient to allow satisfactory survival, growth and reproduction of the test species as demonstrated by routine reference toxicant tests and negative control performance. The laboratory shall have written procedures for the evaluation of food acceptance.

J. A subset of organisms used in bioaccumulation tests shall be analyzed at the start of the test (baseline) for the target compounds to be measured in the bioaccumulation tests.

K. Test chamber size and test solution volume shall be as specified in the test method. All test chambers used in a test shall be identical.

L. Test organisms shall be fed the quantity and type food or nutrients specified in the test method. They shall also be fed at the intervals specified in the test methods.

M. All organisms in a test shall be from the same source. Where available certified seeds are used for soil tests.

N. All organisms used in tests, or used as broodstock to produce neonate test organisms (for example cladocerans and larval fish), shall appear healthy, show no signs of stress or disease and exhibit acceptable survival (90% or greater) during the 24-hour period immediately preceding use in tests.

O. All materials used for test chambers, culture tanks, tubing, etc., and coming in contact with test samples, solutions, control water, sediment or soil or food shall be nontoxic and cleaned as described in the test methods. Materials shall not reduce or add to sample toxicity. Appropriate materials for use in toxicity testing and culturing are described in the referenced manuals.

P. Light intensity shall be maintained as specified in the methods manuals. Measurements shall be made and recorded on a yearly basis. Photoperiod shall be maintained as specified in the test methods and shall be documented at least quarterly. For algal and plant tests, the light intensity shall be measured and recorded at the start of each test.

Q. The testing laboratory shall document the health and culturing conditions of all organisms used for testing. Such documentation shall include culture conditions (e.g., salinity, hardness, temperature, pH) and observations of any stress, disease or mortality. When organisms are obtained from an outside source, the laboratory shall obtain written documentation of these water quality parameters and biological observations for each lot of organism received. These observations shall adequately address the 24-hour time period referenced in subsection N of this section. The laboratory shall also record each of these observations and water quality parameters upon the arrival of the organisms at the testing laboratory.

R. Age and the age range of the test organisms shall be as specified in the test method. Supporting information, such as hatch dates and times, times of brood releases and metrics (for example, chironomid head capsule width) shall be documented.

S. The maximum holding time of effluents (elapsed time from sample collection to first use in a test) shall not exceed 36 hours; samples may be used for renewal up to 72 hours after first use except as prescribed by the method and approved by the regulatory agency having authority for program oversight.

T. All samples shall be chilled to 0 to 6°C during or immediately after collection except as prescribed by the method.

U. Organisms used in a given test shall be from the same batch.

V. All tests shall have the minimum number of replicates per treatment as prescribed by the method.

W. The control population of Ceriodaphnia in chronic effluent or receiving water tests shall contain no more than 20% males.

X. The culturing of C. dubia shall be adequate such that blocking by parentage can be established.

Y. Dissolved oxygen and pH in aquatic tests shall be within acceptable range at test initiation and aeration (minimal) is provided to tests if, and only if, acceptable dissolved oxygen concentrations cannot be otherwise maintained or if specified by the test method.

Z. Test soils or sediments shall be within the geochemical tolerance range of the test organism.

AA. An individual test may be conditionally acceptable if temperature, dissolved oxygen, pH and other specified conditions fall outside specifications, depending on the degree of the departure and the objectives of the tests (see test conditions and test acceptability criteria specified for each test method).

1VAC30-45-791. Microbiology testing: sterility checks and blanks, positive and negative controls.

A. Sterility checks and blanks. The laboratory shall demonstrate that the filtration equipment and filters, sample containers, media and reagents have not been contaminated through improper handling or preparation, inadequate sterilization, or environmental exposure.

1. A sterility blank shall be analyzed for each lot of pre-prepared, ready-to-use medium (including chromofluorogenic reagent) and for each batch of medium prepared in the laboratory. This shall be done prior to first use of the medium.

2. For filtration technique, the laboratory shall conduct one beginning and one ending sterility check for each laboratory sterilized filtration unit used in a filtration series. The filtration series may include single or multiple filtration units, which have been sterilized prior to beginning the series. For presterilized single use funnels a sterility check shall be performed on one funnel per lot. The filtration series is considered ended when more than 30 minutes elapses between successive filtrations. During a filtration series, filter funnels shall be rinsed with three 20-30 ml portions of sterile rinse water after each sample filtration. In addition, laboratories shall insert a sterility blank after every 10 samples or sanitize filtration units by UV light after each sample filtration.

3. For pour plate technique, sterility blanks of the medium shall be made by pouring, at a minimum, one uninoculated plate for each lot of pre-prepared, ready-to-use media and for each batch of medium prepared in the laboratory.

4. Sterility checks on sample containers shall be performed on at least one container for each lot of purchased, presterilized containers with nonselective growth media. For containers prepared and sterilized in the laboratory, a sterility check shall be performed on one container per sterilized batch with nonselective growth media.

5. A sterility blank shall be performed on each batch of dilution water prepared in the laboratory and on each batch of pre-prepared, ready-to-use dilution water with nonselective growth media.

6. At least one filter from each new lot of membrane filters shall be checked for sterility with nonselective growth media.

B. Positive controls.

1. Positive culture controls demonstrate that the medium can support the growth of the target organism(s), and that the medium produces the specified or expected reaction to the target organism(s).

2. Each preprepared, ready-to-use lot of medium (including chromofluorogenic reagent) and each batch of medium prepared in the laboratory shall be tested and demonstrate a known positive response. This shall be done prior to first use of the medium.

C. Negative controls. The provisions of this subsection shall not apply to wastewater treatment plants.

1. Negative culture controls demonstrate that the medium does not support the growth of non-target organisms or does not demonstrate the typical positive reaction of the target organism(s) organism or organisms.

2. Each pre-prepared, ready-to-use lot of selective medium (including chromofluorogenic reagent) and each batch of selective medium prepared in the laboratory shall be analyzed with one or more known negative culture controls, (i.e., nontarget organisms,) as appropriate to the method. This shall be done prior to first use of the medium.

1VAC30-45-796. Microbiology testing: quality of standards, reagents, and media.

A. The laboratory shall ensure that the quality of the reagents and media used is appropriate for the test concerned.

B. Culture media may be prepared from commercial dehydrated powders or may be purchased ready to use. The laboratory may prepare media from basic ingredients when commercial media are not available or when it can be demonstrated that commercial media do not provide adequate results. Media prepared by the laboratory from basic ingredients shall be tested for performance (e.g., for selectivity, sensitivity, sterility, growth promotion, growth inhibition) prior to first use. Detailed testing criteria information shall be defined in either the laboratory's test methods, SOPs, quality manual, or similar documentation.

C. Reagents, commercial dehydrated powders and media shall be used within the shelf-life of the product and shall be documented according to 1VAC30-45-730 J.

D. Distilled water, deionized water or reverse osmosis produced water free from bactericidal and inhibitory substances shall be used in the preparation of media, solutions and buffers. The quality of the water shall be monitored for chlorine residual, specific conductance, and heterotrophic bacteria plate count monthly (when in use), when maintenance is performed on the water treatment system, or at startup after a period of disuse longer than one month.

E. Analysis for metals and the Bacteriological Water Quality Test (to determine presence of toxic agents or growth promoting substances) shall be performed annually. Results of these analyses shall meet the specifications of the required method and records of analyses shall be maintained for three years. (An exception to performing the Bacteriological Water Quality Test shall be given to laboratories that can supply documentation to show that their water source meets the criteria, as specified by the method, for Type I or Type II reagent water.)

F. Media, solutions and reagents shall be prepared, used and stored according to a documented procedure following the manufacturer's instructions or the test method. Documentation for media prepared in the laboratory shall include date of preparation, preparer's initials, type and amount of media prepared, manufacturer and lot number, final pH of the media, and expiration date. Documentation for media purchased pre-prepared, ready to use shall include manufacturer, lot number, type and amount of media received, date of receipt, expiration date of the media, and pH of the media.

1VAC30-45-798. Microbiology testing: constant and consistent test conditions.

A. Laboratory facilities. Floors and work surfaces shall be nonabsorbent and easy to clean and disinfect. Work surfaces shall be adequately sealed. Laboratories shall provide sufficient storage space, and shall be clean and free from dust accumulation. Plants, food, and drink shall be prohibited from the laboratory work area.

B. Laboratory equipment.

1. Temperature measuring devices. Temperature measuring devices such as liquid-in-glass thermometers, thermocouples, and platinum resistance thermometers used in incubators, autoclaves and other equipment shall be the appropriate quality to meet specification(s) specifications in the test method. The graduation of the temperature measuring devices shall be appropriate for the required accuracy of measurement and they shall be calibrated to national or international standards for temperature (see 1VAC30-45-740 C). Calibration shall be done at least annually.

2. Autoclaves.

a. The performance of each autoclave shall be initially evaluated by establishing its functional properties and performance, for example, heat distribution characteristics with respect to typical uses. Autoclaves shall meet specified temperature tolerances. Pressure cookers shall not be used for sterilization of growth media.

b. Demonstration of sterilization temperature shall be provided by use of continuous temperature recording device or by use of a maximum registering thermometer with every cycle. Appropriate biological indicators shall be used once per month to determine effective sterilization. Temperature sensitive tape shall be used with the contents of each autoclave run to indicate that the autoclave contents have been processed.

c. Records of autoclave operations shall be maintained for every cycle. Records shall include date, contents, maximum temperature reached, pressure, time in sterilization mode, total run time (may be recorded as time in and time out) and analyst's initials.

d. Autoclave maintenance shall be performed annually, either internally or by service contract, shall be performed annually and shall include a pressure check and calibration of temperature device. Records of the maintenance shall be maintained in equipment logs. If the laboratory demonstrates regular monitoring of pressure (e.g., for each autoclaved batch) and annual calibration of the maximum registering thermometer, the annual autoclave pressure and temperature device checks shall not be required.

e. The autoclave mechanical timing device shall be checked quarterly against a stopwatch and the actual time elapsed documented.

3. Volumetric equipment. Volumetric equipment shall be calibrated as follows:

a. Equipment with movable parts such as automatic dispensers, dispensers/diluters, and mechanical hand pipettes shall be verified for accuracy quarterly.

b. Equipment such as filter funnels, bottles, nonclass A glassware, and other marked containers shall be calibrated once per lot prior to first use.

c. The volume of the disposable volumetric equipment such as sample bottles and disposable pipettes shall be checked once per lot.

4. UV instruments. UV instruments used for sanitization shall be tested quarterly for effectiveness with an appropriate UV light meter or by plate count agar spread plates. Replace bulbs if output is less than 70% of original for light tests or if count reduction is less than 99% for a plate containing 200 to 300 organisms.

5. Conductivity meters, oxygen meters, pH meters, hygrometers, and other similar measurement instruments shall be calibrated according to the method specified requirements (see 1VAC30-45-740 D 1 d).

6. Incubators, water baths, and ovens.

a. The stability and uniformity of temperature distribution and time required after test sample addition to reestablish equilibrium conditions in incubators and water baths shall be established. Temperature of incubators and water baths shall be documented twice daily, at least four hours apart, on each day of use.

b. Ovens used for sterilization shall be checked for sterilization effectiveness monthly with appropriate biological indicators. Records shall be maintained for each cycle that include date, cycle time, temperature, contents and analyst's initials.

7. Labware (glassware and plasticware).

a. The laboratory shall have a documented procedure for washing labware, if applicable. Detergents designed for laboratory use shall be used.

b. Glassware shall be made of borosilicate or other noncorrosive material, free of chips and cracks, and shall have readable measurement marks.

c. Labware that is washed and reused shall be tested for possible presence of residues that may inhibit or promote growth of microorganisms by performing the Inhibitory Residue Test annually, and each time the lab changes the lot of detergent or washing procedures.

d. Washed labware shall be tested at least once daily, each day of washing, for possible acid or alkaline residue by testing at least one piece of labware with a suitable pH indicator such as bromothymol blue. Records of tests shall be maintained.

1VAC30-45-800. Radiochemical testing: general. (Repealed.)

These standards apply to laboratories undertaking the examination of environmental samples by radiochemical analysis. These procedures for radiochemical analysis may involve some form of chemical separation followed by detection of the radioactive decay of analyte (or indicative daughters) and tracer isotopes where used. For the purpose of these standards, procedures for the determination of radioactive isotopes by mass spectrometry (e.g., ICP-MS or TIMS) or optical (e.g., KPA) techniques are not addressed herein.

1VAC30-45-801. Radiochemical testing: negative and positive controls. (Repealed.)

A. Negative controls.

1. Method blank shall be performed at a frequency of one per preparation batch. The results of this analysis shall be one of the quality control measures to be used to assess the batch. The method blank result shall be assessed against the specific acceptance criteria specified in the laboratory method manual. When the specified method blank acceptance criteria is not met, the specified corrective action and contingencies shall be followed and results reported with appropriate data qualifying codes. The occurrence of a failed method blank acceptance criteria and the actions taken shall be noted in the laboratory report.

2. In the case of gamma spectrometry, generally a nondestructive analysis, a method blank shall be prepared using a calibrated counting geometry similar to that used for the samples. The container of the appropriate geometry can be empty or filled to similar volume to partially simulate gamma attenuation due to a sample matrix.

3. There shall be no subtraction of the required method blank result from the sample results in the associated preparation or analytical batch unless permitted by method or program. This does not preclude the application of any correction factor (e.g., instrument background, analyte presence in tracer, reagent impurities, peak overlap, etc.) to all analyzed samples, both program/project submitted and internal quality control samples. However, these correction factors shall not depend on the required method blank result in the associated analytical batch.

4. The method blank sample shall be prepared with similar aliquot size to that of the routine samples for analysis and the method blank result and acceptance criteria shall be calculated in a manner that compensates for sample results based upon differing aliquot size.

B. Positive controls.

1. Laboratory control samples shall be performed at a frequency of one per preparation batch. The results of this analysis shall be one of the quality control measures to be used to assess the batch. The laboratory control sample result shall be assessed against the specific acceptance criteria specified in the laboratory method manual. When the specified laboratory control sample acceptance criteria is not met the specified corrective action and contingencies shall be followed. The occurrence of a failed laboratory control sample acceptance criteria and the actions taken shall be noted in the laboratory report.

2. Matrix spike shall be performed at a frequency of one per preparation batch for those methods that include a chemical separation process without the use of an internal standard or carrier, and where there is sufficient sample to do so. Although gross alpha, gross beta and tritium measurements do not involve a chemical separation process, matrix spikes shall be performed for these analyses on aqueous samples. The results of this analysis shall be one of the quality control measures to be used to assess the batch. The matrix spike result shall be assessed against the specific acceptance criteria specified in the laboratory method manual. When the specified matrix spike acceptance criteria is not met, the specified corrective action and contingencies shall be followed. The occurrence of a failed matrix spike acceptance criteria and the actions taken shall be noted in the laboratory report. The lack of sufficient sample aliquot size to perform a matrix spike shall be noted in the laboratory report.

3. The activity of the laboratory control sample shall (i) be at least five times the limit of detection and (ii) at a level comparable to that of routine samples when such information is available if the sample activities are expected to exceed five times the limit of detection.

4. The activity of the matrix spike analytes(s) shall be greater than five times the limit of detection.

5. The laboratory standards used to prepare the laboratory control sample and matrix spike shall be from a source independent of the laboratory standards used for instrument calibration and shall meet the requirements for reference standards provided in 1VAC30-45-807 A.

6. The matrix spike shall be prepared by adding a known activity of target analyte after subsampling if required but before any chemical treatment (e.g., chemical digestion, dissolution, separation, etc.). Where a radiochemical method, other than gamma spectroscopy, has more than one reportable analyte isotope (e.g., plutonium, Pu 238 and Pu 239, using alpha spectrometry), only one of the analyte isotopes need be included in the laboratory control or matrix spike sample at the indicated activity level. However, where more than one analyte isotope is present above the specified limit of detection, each shall be assessed against the specified acceptance criteria.

7. Where gamma spectrometry is used to identify and quantitate more than one analyte isotope, the laboratory control sample shall contain isotopes that represent the low (e.g., americium-241), medium (e.g., cesium-137) and high (e.g., cobalt-60) energy range of the analyzed gamma spectra. As indicated by these examples the isotopes need not exactly bracket the calibrated energy range or the range over which isotopes are identified and quantitated.

8. The laboratory control sample shall be prepared with similar aliquot size to that of the routine samples for analyses.

C. Other controls.

1. Tracer. For those methods that utilize a tracer (i.e., internal standard) each sample result shall have an associated tracer recovery calculated and reported. The tracer shall be added to the sample after subsampling if required but before any chemical treatment (e.g., chemical digestion, dissolution, separation, etc.) unless otherwise specified by the method. The tracer recovery for each sample result shall be one of the quality control measures to be used to assess the associated sample result acceptance. The tracer recovery shall be assessed against the specific acceptance criteria specified in the laboratory method manual. When the specified tracer recovery acceptance criteria is not met the specified corrective action and contingencies shall be followed. The occurrence of a failed tracer recovery acceptance criteria and the actions taken shall be noted in the laboratory report.

2. Carrier. For those methods that utilize a carrier for recovery determination, each sample shall have an associated carrier recovery calculated and reported. The carrier shall be added to the sample after subsampling if required but before any chemical treatment (e.g., chemical digestion, dissolution, separation, etc.) unless otherwise specified by the method. The carrier recovery for each sample shall be one of the quality control measures to be used to assess the associated sample result acceptance. The carrier recovery shall be assessed against the specific acceptance criteria specified in the laboratory method manual. When the specified carrier recovery acceptance criteria is not met the specified corrective action and contingencies shall be followed. The occurrence of a failed carrier recovery acceptance criteria and the actions taken shall be noted in the laboratory report.

1VAC30-45-802. Radiochemical testing: analytical variability/reproducibility. (Repealed.)

A. Replicate shall be performed at a frequency of one per preparation batch where there is sufficient sample to do so. The results of this analysis shall be one of the quality control measures to be used to assess batch acceptance. The replicate result shall be assessed against the specific acceptance criteria specified in the laboratory method manual. When the specified replicate acceptance criteria is not met the specified corrective action and contingencies shall be followed. The occurrence of a failed replicate acceptance criteria and the actions taken shall be noted in the laboratory report.

B. For low level samples (less than approximately three times the limit of detection) the laboratory may analyze duplicate laboratory control samples or a replicate matrix spike (matrix spike and a matrix spike duplicate) to determine reproducibility within a preparation batch.

1VAC30-45-803. Radiochemical testing: method evaluation. (Repealed.)

In order to ensure the accuracy of the reported result, the following procedures shall be in place:

1. Initial demonstration of capability shall be performed initially (prior to the analysis of any samples) and with a significant change in instrument type (e.g., different detection technique), personnel or method.

2. Proficiency test samples. The laboratory shall use the results of such analysis to evaluate its ability to produce accurate data.

1VAC30-45-804. Radiochemical testing: radiation measurement instrumentation. (Repealed.)

A. General. Because of the stability and response nature of modern radiation measurement instrumentation, it is not typically necessary to verify calibrate these systems each day of use. However, verification of calibration is required as outlined in subsection B of this section. This section addresses those practices that are necessary for proper calibration and those requirements of 1VAC30-45-740 D (instrument calibrations) that are not applicable to some types of radiation measurement instrumentation.

B. Instrument calibration.

1. Given that activity detection efficiency is independent of sample activity at all but extreme activity levels, the requirements of 1VAC30-45-740 D 2 b (7) are not applicable to radiochemical method calibrations except mass attenuation in gas-proportional counting and sample quench in liquid scintillation counting. Radiation measurement instruments are subject to calibration prior to initial use, when the instrument is placed back in service after malfunctioning and the instrument's response has changed as determined by a performance check or when the instrument's response exceeds predetermined acceptance criteria for the instrument quality control.

2. Instrument calibration shall be performed with reference standards as defined in 1VAC30-45-807 A. The standards shall have the same general characteristics (i.e., geometry, homogeneity, density, etc.) as the associated samples.

3. The frequency of calibration shall be addressed in the laboratory method manual if not specified in the method. A specific frequency (e.g., monthly) or observations from the associated control or tolerance chart, as the basis for calibration shall be specified.

C. Continuing instrument calibration verification (performance checks). Performance checks shall be performed using appropriate check sources and monitored with control charts or tolerance charts to ensure that the instrument is operating properly and that the detector response has not significantly changed and, therefore, the instrument calibration has not changed. The same check source used in the preparation of the tolerance chart or control chart at the time of calibration shall be used in the calibration verification of the instrument. The check sources shall provide adequate counting statistics for a relatively short count time and the source should be sealed or encapsulated to prevent loss of activity and contamination of the instrument and laboratory personnel.

1. For gamma spectroscopy systems, the performance checks for efficiency and energy calibration shall be performed on a day-of-use basis along with performance checks on peak resolution.

2. For alpha spectroscopy systems, the performance check for energy calibration shall be performed on a weekly basis and the performance check for counting efficiency shall be performed on at least a monthly basis.

3. For gas-proportional and liquid scintillation counters, the performance check for counting efficiency shall be performed on a day-of-use basis. For batches of samples that uninterruptedly count for more than a day a performance check can be performed at the beginning and end of the batch as long as this time interval is no greater than one week. Verification of instrument calibration does not directly verify secondary calibrations, e.g., the mass efficiency curve or the quench curve.

4. For scintillation counters the calibration verification for counting efficiency shall be performed on a day of use basis.

D. Background measurement. Background measurements shall be made on a regular basis and monitored using control charts or tolerance charts to ensure that a laboratory maintains its capability to meet required data quality objectives. These values may be subtracted from the total measured activity in the determination of the sample activity.

1. For gamma spectroscopy systems, background measurements shall be performed on at least a monthly basis.

2. For alpha spectroscopy systems, background measurements shall be performed on at least a monthly basis.

3. For gas-proportional counters, background measurements shall be performed on at least on a weekly basis.

4. For scintillation counters, background measurements shall be performed each day of use.

E. Instrument contamination monitoring. The laboratory shall have a written procedure for monitoring radiation measurement instrumentation for radioactive contamination. The procedure shall indicate the frequency of the monitoring and shall indicate criteria, which initiates corrective action.

1VAC30-45-805. Radiochemical testing: Minimum detectable activity (MDA)/Minimum detectable concentration (MDC)/Lower level of detection (LLD). (Repealed.)

A. MDA/MDC/LLD shall be determined prior to sample analysis and shall be redetermined each time there is a significant change in the test method or instrument type.

B. The procedures employed shall be documented and consistent with mandated method or regulation.

1VAC30-45-806. Radiochemical testing: data reduction. (Repealed.)

A. The requirements of 1VAC30-45-730 K apply.

B. Measurement uncertainties. Each result shall be reported with the associated measurement uncertainty. The procedures for determining the measurement uncertainty shall be documented and be consistent with mandated method and regulation.

1VAC30-45-807. Radiochemical testing: quality of standards and reagents. (Repealed.)

A. The quality control program shall establish and maintain provisions for radionuclide standards.

1. Reference standards that are used in a radiochemical laboratory shall be obtained from the National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST), or suppliers who participate in supplying NIST standards or NIST traceable radionuclides. Any reference standards purchased outside the United States shall be traceable back to each country's national standards laboratory. Commercial suppliers of reference standards shall conform to ANSI N42.22 to assure the quality of their products.

2. Reference standards shall be accompanied with a certificate of calibration whose content is as described in ANSI N42.22 - 1995, Section 8, Certificates.

3. Laboratories should consult with the supplier if the laboratory's verification of the activity of the reference traceable standard indicates a noticeable deviation from the certified value. The laboratory shall not use a value other than the decay corrected certified value. The laboratory shall have a written procedure for handling, storing and establishment of expiration dates for reference standards.

B. All reagents used shall be analytical reagent grade or better.

1VAC30-45-808. Radiochemical testing: constant and consistent test conditions. (Repealed.)

The laboratory shall maintain a radiological control program that addresses analytical radiological control. The program shall address the procedures for segregating samples with potentially widely varying levels of radioactivity. The radiological control program shall explicitly define how low level and high level samples will be identified, segregated and processed in order to prevent sample cross-contamination. The radiological control program shall include the measures taken to monitor and evaluate background activity or contamination on an ongoing basis.

1VAC30-45-811. Air testing: negative and positive controls.

A. Negative controls.

1. Method blanks shall be performed at a frequency of at least one per batch of 20 environmental samples or less per sample preparation method. The results of the method blank analysis shall be used to evaluate the contribution of the laboratory provided sampling media and analytical sample preparation procedures to the amount of analyte found in each sample. If the method blank result is greater than the limit of quantitation and contributes greater than 10% of the total amount of analyte found in the sample, the source of the contamination shall be investigated and measures taken to eliminate the source of contamination. If contamination is found, the data shall be qualified in the report.

2. Collection efficiency. Sampling trains consisting of multiple sections (e.g., filters, sorbent tubes, impingers) that are received intact by the laboratory shall be separated into "front" and "back" sections if required by the client. Each section shall be processed and analyzed separately and the analytical results reported separately.

B. Positive controls. Laboratory control sample (LCS) shall be analyzed at a rate of at least one per batch of 20 or fewer samples per sample preparation method for each analyte. If a spiking solution is not available, a calibration solution whose concentration approximates that of the samples shall be included in each batch and with each lot of media. If a calibration solution must be used for the LCS, the client will be notified prior to the start of analysis. The concentration of the LCS shall be relevant to the intended use of the data and either at a regulatory limit or below it.

C. Surrogates shall be used as required by the test method.

D. Matrix spike shall be used as required by the test method.

1VAC30-45-820. Asbestos testing: general. (Repealed.)

These standards apply to laboratories undertaking the examination of asbestos samples. These standards are organized by analytical technique, including transmission electron microscopy (TEM) for the analysis of water, wastewater, air, and bulk samples; phase contrast microscopy (PCM) for analysis of workplace air; and polarized light microscopy (PLM) for analysis of bulk samples. These procedures for asbestos analysis involve sample preparation followed by detection of asbestos. If NIST SRMs specified below are unavailable, the laboratory may substitute an equivalent reference material with a certificate of analysis.

1VAC30-45-821. Asbestos testing: negative controls. (Repealed.)

A. Transmission electron microscopy.

1. Water and wastewater.

a. Blank determinations shall be made prior to sample collection. When using polyethylene bottles, one bottle from each batch, or a minimum of one from each 24 shall be tested for background level. When using glass bottles, four bottles from each 24 shall be tested. An acceptable bottle blank level is defined as ≤0.01 MFL > 10 μm. (EPA/600/R-94/134, Method 100.2, Section 8.2)

b. A process blank sample consisting of fiber-free water shall be run before the first field sample. The quantity of water shall be ≥10 mL for a 25-mm diameter filter and ≥ 50 mL for a 47-mm diameter filter. (EPA/600/R-94/134, Method 100.2, Section 11.8)

2. Air.

a. A blank filter shall be prepared with each set of samples. A blank filter shall be left uncovered during preparation of the sample set and a wedge from that blank filter shall be prepared alongside wedges from the sample filters. At minimum, the blank filter shall be analyzed for each 20 samples analyzed. (40 CFR Part 763, Appendix A to Subpart E (AHERA), Table 1)

b. Maximum contamination on a single blank filter shall be no more than 53 structures/mm2. Maximum average contamination for all blank filters shall be no more than 18 structures/mm2. (AHERA, III.F.2)

3. Bulk samples.

a. Contamination checks using asbestos-free material, such as the glass fiber blank in SRM 1866 (Page C-3, NIST Handbook 150-3, August 1994) shall be performed at a frequency of one for every 20 samples analyzed. The detection of asbestos at a concentration exceeding 0.1% will require an investigation to detect and remove the source of the asbestos contamination.

b. The laboratory shall maintain a list of nonasbestos fibers that can be confused with asbestos (Section 7.5, Page C-8, NIST Handbook 150-3, August 1994). The list shall include crystallographic and/or chemical properties that disqualify each fiber being identified as asbestos (Section 2.5.5.2.1 Identification, Page 54, EPA/600/R-93/116).

c. The laboratory should have a set of reference asbestos materials from which a set of reference diffraction and X-ray spectra have been developed.

B. Phase contrast microscopy. At least two field blanks (or 10% of the total samples, whichever is greater) shall be submitted for analysis with each set of samples. Field blanks shall be handled in a manner representative of actual handling of associated samples in the set with a single exception that air shall not be drawn through the blank sample. A blank cassette shall be opened for approximately 30 seconds at the same time other cassettes are opened just prior to analysis. Results from field blank samples shall be used in the calculation to determine final airborne fiber concentration. The identity of blank filters should be unknown to the counter until all counts have been completed. If a field blank yields greater than seven fibers per 100 graticule fields, report possible contamination of the samples.

C. Polarized light microscopy.

1. Friable materials. At least one blank slide shall be prepared daily or with every 50 samples analyzed, whichever is less. This is prepared by mounting a subsample of an isotropic verified non-ACM (e.g., fiberglass in SRM 1866) in a drop of immersion oil (nD should reflect usage of various nD's) on a clean slide, rubbing preparation tools (forceps, dissecting needles, etc.) in the mount and placing a clean coverslip on the drop. The entire area under the coverslip shall be scanned to detect any asbestos contamination. A similar check shall be made after every 20 uses of each piece of homogenization equipment. An isotropic verified non-ACM shall be homogenized in the clean equipment, a slide prepared with the material and the slide scanned for asbestos contamination. (This can be substituted for the blank slide mentioned in this section.)

2. Nonfriable materials. At least one non-ACM nonfriable material shall be prepared and analyzed with every 20 samples analyzed. This non-ACM shall go through the full preparation and analysis regimen for the type of analysis being performed.

1VAC30-45-822. Asbestos testing: test variability/reproducibility. (Repealed.)

A. Transmission electron microscopy. Quality assurance analyses shall be performed regularly covering all time periods, instruments, tasks, and personnel. The selection of samples shall be random and samples of special interest may be included in the selection of samples for quality assurance analyses. When possible, the checks on personnel performance shall be executed without their prior knowledge. A disproportionate number of analyses shall not be performed prior to internal or external audits. It is recommended that a laboratory initially be at 100% quality control (all samples reanalyzed). The proportion of quality control samples can later be lowered gradually, as control indicates, to a minimum of 10%.

1. Water and wastewater. All analyses shall be performed on relocator grids so that other laboratories can easily repeat analyses on the same grid openings. Quality assurance analyses shall not be postponed during periods of heavy workloads. The total number of QA samples and blanks shall be greater than or equal to 10% of the total sample workload. Precision of analyses is related to concentration, as gleaned from interlaboratory proficiency testing. Relative standard deviations (RSD) for amphibole asbestos decreased from 50% at 0.8 MFL to 25% at 7 MFL in interlaboratory proficiency testing, while RSD for chrysotile was higher, 50% at 6 MFL.

a. Replicate. A second, independent analysis shall be performed on the same grids but on different grid openings than used in the original analysis of a sample. Results shall be within 1.5X of Poisson standard deviation. This shall be performed at a frequency of 1 per 100 samples. (EPA/600/R-94/134, Method 100.2, Table 2)

b. Duplicate. A second aliquot of sample shall be filtered through a second filter, prepared and analyzed in the same manner as the original preparation of that sample. Results shall be within 2.0X of Poisson standard deviation. This shall be performed at a frequency of one per 100 samples. (EPA/600/R-94/134, Method 100.2, Table 2)

c. Verified analyses. A second, independent analysis shall be performed on the same grids and grid openings used in the original analysis of a sample. The two sets of results shall be compared according to Turner and Steel (NISTIR 5351). This shall be performed at a frequency of one per 20 samples. Qualified analysts shall maintain an average of ≥ 80% true positives, ≤ 20% false negatives, and ≤ 10% false positives.

2. Air.

a. All analyses shall be performed on relocator grids so that other laboratories can easily repeat analyses on the same grid openings.

b. The laboratory and TEM analysts shall obtain mean analytical results on NIST SRM 1876b so that trimmed mean values fall within 80% of the lower limit and 110% of the upper limit of the 95% confidence limits as published on the certificate. These limits are derived from the allowable false positives and false negatives given in subdivision A 2 e (3) of this subsection. SRM 1876b shall be analyzed a minimum of once per year by each TEM analyst.

c. The laboratory shall have documentation demonstrating that TEM analysts correctly classify at least 90% of both bundles and single fibrils of asbestos structures greater than or equal to 1 mm in length in known standard materials traceable to NIST, such as NIST bulk asbestos SRM 1866.

d. Interlaboratory analyses shall be performed to detect laboratory bias. The frequency of interlaboratory verified analysis shall correspond to a minimum of 1 per 200 grid square analyses.

e. If more than one TEM is used for asbestos analysis, intermicroscope analyses shall be performed to detect instrument bias.

(1) Replicate. A second, independent analysis shall be performed in accordance with Section D.6.2.1.1.a. (AHERA, Table III)

(2) Duplicate. A second wedge from a sample filter shall be prepared and analyzed in the same manner as the original preparation of that sample. Results shall be within 2.0X of Poisson standard deviation. This shall be performed at a frequency of 1 per 100 samples. (AHERA, Table III)

(3) Verified analyses. A second, independent analysis shall be performed on the same grids and grid openings in accordance with subdivision A 1 c of this section.

3. Bulk samples. Determination of precision and accuracy should follow guidelines in NISTIR 5951, Guide for Quality Control on the Qualitative and Quantitative Analysis of Bulk Asbestos Samples: Version 1. Because bulk samples with low (< 10%) asbestos content are the most problematic, a laboratory's quality control program should focus on such samples. At least 30% of a laboratory's QC analyses shall be performed on samples containing from 1.0% to 10% asbestos.

a. Intra-analyst precision. At least one out of 50 samples shall be reanalyzed by the same analyst. For single analyst laboratories, at least one out of every 10 samples shall be reanalyzed by the same analyst.

b. Inter-analyst precision. At least one out of 15 samples shall be reanalyzed by another analyst. Inter-analyst results will require additional reanalysis, possibly including another analyst, to resolve discrepancies when classification (ACM vs. non-ACM) errors occur, when asbestos identification errors occur, or when inter-analyst precision is found to be unacceptable.

c. Inter-laboratory precision. The laboratory shall participate in round robin testing with at least one other laboratory. Samples shall be sent to this other lab at least four times per year. These samples shall be samples previously analyzed as QC samples. Results of these analyses shall be assessed in accordance with QC requirements. As a minimum, the QC requirements shall address misclassifications (false positives, false negatives) and misidentification of asbestos types.

B. Phase contrast microscopy.

1. Inter-laboratory precision. Each laboratory analyzing air samples for compliance determination shall implement an inter-laboratory quality assurance program that as a minimum includes participation of at least two other independent laboratories. Each laboratory shall participate in round robin testing at least once every six months with at least all the other laboratories in its inter-laboratory quality assurance group. Each laboratory shall submit slides typical of its own workload for use in this program. The round robin shall be designed and results analyzed using appropriate statistical methodology. Results of this QA program shall be posted in each laboratory to keep the microscopists informed.

2. Intra- and inter-analyst precision. Each analyst shall select and count a prepared slide from a "reference slide library" on each day on which air counts are performed. Reference slides shall be prepared using well-behaved samples taken from the laboratory workload. Fiber densities shall cover the entire range routinely analyzed by the laboratory. These slides shall be counted by all analysts to establish an original standard deviation and corresponding limits of acceptability. Results from the daily reference sample analysis shall be compared to the statistically derived acceptance limits using a control chart or a database. It is recommended that the labels on the reference slides be periodically changed so that the analysts do not become familiar with the samples. Intra- and inter-analyst precision may be estimated from blind recounts on reference samples. Inter-analyst precision shall be posted in each laboratory to keep the microscopists informed.

C. Polarized light microscopy. Refer to subdivision A 3 of this section.

1VAC30-45-823. Asbestos testing: other quality control measures. (Repealed.)

A. Transmission electron microscopy.

1. Water and wastewater.

a. Filter preparations shall be made from all six asbestos types from NIST SRMs 1866 and 1867. These preparations shall have concentrations between one and 20 structures (> 10 μm) per 0.01 mm2. One of these preparations shall be analyzed independently at a frequency of one per 100 samples analyzed. Results shall be evaluated as verified asbestos analysis in accordance with Turner and Steel (NISTIR 5351).

b. NIST SRM 1876b shall be analyzed annually by each analyst. Results shall be evaluated in accordance with limits published for that SRM. This SRM is not strictly appropriate for waterborne asbestos but analysts can demonstrate general TEM asbestos competence by producing results within the published limits of this (the only recognized TEM counting standard) SRM.

2. Air.

a. Filter preparations shall be made from all six asbestos types in accordance with subdivision A 1 a of this section.

b. NIST SRM 1876b shall be analyzed annually in accordance with subdivision A 1 b of this section.

3. Bulk samples. All analysts shall be able to correctly identify the six regulated asbestos types (chrysotile, amosite, crocidolite, anthophyllite, actinolite, and tremolite). Standards for the six asbestos types listed are available from NIST (SRMs 1866 and 1867). These materials can also be used as identification standards for AEM (Section 3.2.1 Qualitative Analysis, Page 57, EPA/600/R-93/116).

B. Phase contrast microscopy.

1. Test for nonrandom fiber distribution. Blind recounts by the same analyst shall be performed on 10% of the filters counted. A person other than the counter should re-label slides before the second count. A test for type II error (NIOSH 7400, Issue 2, 15 August 1994, Section 13) shall be performed to determine whether a pair of counts by the same analyst on the same slide should be rejected due to nonrandom fiber distribution. If a pair of counts is rejected by this test, the remaining samples in the set shall be recounted and the new counts shall be tested against first counts. All rejected paired counts shall be discarded. It shall not be necessary to use this statistic on blank recounts.

2. All individuals performing airborne fiber analysis shall have taken the NIOSH Fiber Counting Course for sampling and evaluating airborne asbestos dust or an equivalent course.

3. All laboratories shall participate in a national sample testing scheme such as the Proficiency Analytical Testing (PAT) program or the Asbestos Analysts Registry (AAR) program, both sponsored by the American Industrial Hygiene Association (AIHA), or equivalent.

C. Polarized light microscopy.

1. Friable materials. Because accuracy cannot be determined by reanalysis of routine field samples, at least one out of 100 samples shall be a standard or reference sample that has been routinely resubmitted to determine analyst's precision and accuracy. A set of these samples should be accumulated from proficiency testing samples with predetermined weight compositions or from standards generated with weighed quantities of asbestos and other bulk materials (Perkins and Harvey, 1993; Parekh et al., 1992; Webber et al., 1982). At least half of the reference samples submitted for this QC shall contain between 1.0% and 10% asbestos.

2. Nonfriable materials. At least one out of 100 samples shall be a verified quantitative standard that has routinely been resubmitted to determine analyst precision and accuracy.

1VAC30-45-824. Asbestos testing: method evaluation. (Repealed.)

In order to ensure the accuracy of reported results, the following procedures shall be in place:

1. Demonstration of capability shall be performed initially (prior to the analysis of any samples) and with a significant change in instrument type, personnel, or method.

2. Performance audits. The results of such analyses shall be used by the laboratory to evaluate the ability of the laboratory to produce accurate data.

1VAC30-45-825. Asbestos testing: asbestos calibration. (Repealed.)

Refer to methods referenced in the following sections for specific equipment requirements.

1. Transmission electron microscopy: general. Analytical electron microscopy equipment will not be discussed in this document.

2. Transmission electron microscopy: water and wastewater. All calibrations listed below (unless otherwise noted) shall be performed under the same analytical conditions used for routine asbestos analysis and shall be recorded in a notebook and include date and analyst's signature. Frequencies stated below may be reduced to "before next use" if no samples are analyzed after the last calibration period has expired. Likewise, frequencies may have to be increased following non-routine maintenance or unacceptable calibration performance.

a. Magnification calibration. Magnification calibration shall be done at the fluorescent screen, with the calibration specimen at the eucentric position, at the magnification used for fiber counting, generally 10,000 and 20,000x. A logbook shall be maintained with the dates of the calibration recorded. Calibrations shall be performed monthly to establish the stability of magnification. Calibration data shall be displayed on control charts that show trends over time. (EPA/600/R-94/134, Method 100.2, Section 10.1)

b. Camera constant. The camera length of the TEM in the Selected Area Electron Diffraction (SAED) mode shall be calibrated before SAED patterns of unknown samples are observed. The diffraction specimen shall be at the eucentric position for this calibration. This calibration shall allow accurate (< 10% variation) measurement of layer-line spacings on the medium used for routine measurement, i.e., the phosphor screen or camera film. This shall also allow accurate (< 5.0% variation) measurement of zone axis SAED patterns on permanent media, e.g., film. Calibrations shall be performed monthly to establish the stability of the camera constant (EPA/600/R-94/134, Method 100.2, Section 10.2). Where nonasbestiform minerals may be expected (e.g., winchite, richterite, industrial talc, vermiculite, etc.), an internal camera constant standard such as gold, shall be deposited and measured on each sample to facilitate accurate indexing of zone axis SAED patterns. In such cases, layer line analysis alone shall not be used. Calibration data shall be displayed on control charts that show trends over time.

c. Spot size. The diameter of the smallest beam spot at crossover shall be less than 250 nm as calibrated quarterly. Calibration data shall be displayed on control charts that show trends over time. (EPA/600/R-94/134, Method 100.2, Section 10.3)

d. Beam dose. The beam dose shall be calibrated so that beam damage to chrysotile is minimized, specifically so that an electron diffraction pattern from a single fibril ≥1 μm in length from a NIST SRM chrysotile sample is stable in the electron beam dose for at least 15 seconds.

e. EDXA system.

(1) The x-ray energy vs. channel number for the EDXA system shall be calibrated to within 20 eV for at least two peaks between 0.7 keV and 10 keV. One peak shall be from the low end (0.7 keV to 2 keV) and the other peak from the high end (7 keV to 10 keV) of this range. The calibration of the x-ray energy shall be checked prior to each analysis of samples and recalibrated if out of the specified range.

(2) The ability of the system to resolve the Na Ka line from the Cu L line shall be confirmed quarterly by obtaining a spectrum from the NIST SRM 1866 crocidolite sample on a copper grid.

(3) The k-factors for elements found in asbestos (Na, Mg, Al, Si, Ca, and Fe) relative to Si shall be calibrated semiannually, or anytime the detector geometry may be altered. NIST SRM 2063a shall be used for Mg, Si, Ca, Fe, while k-factors for Na and Al may be obtained from suitable materials such as albite, kaersutite, or NIST SRM 99a. The k-factors shall be determined to a precision (2s) within 10% relative to the mean value obtained for Mg, Al, Si, Ca, and Fe, and within 20% relative to the mean value obtained for Na. The k-factor relative to Si for Na shall be between 1.0 and 4.0, for Mg and Fe shall be between 1.0 and 2.0, and for Al and Ca shall be between 1.0 and 1.75. The k-factor for Mg relative to Fe shall be 1.5 or less. Calibration data shall be displayed on control charts that show trends over time.

(4) The detector resolution shall be checked quarterly to ensure a full-width half-maximum resolution of <175 eV at Mn Ka (5.90 keV). Calibration data shall be displayed on control charts that show trends over time.

(5) The portions of a grid in a specimen holder for which abnormal x-ray spectra are generated under routine asbestos analysis conditions shall be determined and these areas shall be avoided in asbestos analysis.

(6) The sensitivity of the detector for collecting x-rays from small volumes shall be documented quarterly by collecting resolvable Mg and Si peaks from a unit fibril of NIST SRM 1866 chrysotile.

f. Low temperature asher. The low temperature asher shall be calibrated quarterly by determining a calibration curve for the weight vs. ashing time of collapsed mixed-cellulose-ester (MCE) filters. Calibration data shall be displayed on control charts that show trends over time.

g. Grid openings. The magnification of the grid opening measurement system shall be calibrated using an appropriate standard at a frequency of 20 openings/20 grids/lot of 1000 or one opening/sample. The variation in the calibration measurements (2s) is <5.0% of the mean calibration value.

3. Air. All calibrations shall be performed in accordance with subdivision 2 of this section, with the exception of magnification. Magnification calibration shall be done at the fluorescent screen, with the calibration specimen at the eucentric position, at the magnification used for fiber counting, generally 15,000 to 20,000x (AHERA, III.G.1.c). A logbook shall be maintained with the dates of the calibration recorded. Calibrations shall be performed monthly to establish the stability of magnification.

4. Bulk samples. All calibrations shall be performed in accordance with subdivision 3 of this section.

5. Phase contrast microscopy.

a. At least once daily, the analyst shall use the telescope ocular (or Bertrand lens, for some microscopes) supplied by the manufacturer to ensure that the phase rings (annular diaphragm and phase-shifting elements) are concentric.

b. The phase-shift limit of detection of the microscope shall be checked monthly or after modification or relocation using an HSE/NPL phase-contrast test slide for each analyst/microscope combination (refer to NIOSH 7400, Issue 2, 15 August 1994, Section 10b). This procedure assures that the minimum detectable fiber diameter (< ca. 0.25mm) for this microscope is achieved.

c. Prior to ordering the Walton-Beckett graticule, calibration, in accordance with NIOSH 7400, Issue 2, 15 August 1994, Appendix A, shall be performed to obtain a counting area 100 mm in diameter at the image plane. The diameter, dc (mm), of the circular counting area and the disc diameter shall be specified when ordering the graticule. The field diameter (D) shall be verified (or checked), to a tolerance of 100 μm ± 2 μm, with a stage micrometer upon receipt of the graticule from the manufacturer. When changes (zoom adjustment, disassembly, replacement, etc.) occur in the eyepiece-objective-reticle combination, field diameter shall be remeasured (or recalibrated) to determine field area (mm2). Recalibration of field diameter shall also be required when there is a change in interpupillary distance (i.e., change in analyst). Acceptable range for field area shall be 0.00754 mm2 to 0.00817 mm2. The actual field area shall be documented and used.

6. Polarized light microscopy.

a. Microscope alignment. To accurately measure the required optical properties, a properly aligned polarized light microscope (PLM) shall be utilized. The PLM shall be aligned before each use. (Section 2.2.5.2.3, EPA/600/R-93/116, July 1993)

b. Refractive index liquids. Series of nD = 1.49 through 1.72 in intervals less than or equal to 0.005. Refractive index liquids for dispersion staining, high-dispersion series 1.550, 1.605, 1.680. The accurate measurement of the refractive index (RI) of a substance requires the use of calibrated refractive index liquids. These liquids shall be calibrated at first use and semiannually, or next use, whichever is less frequent, to an accuracy of 0.004, with a temperature accuracy of 2°C using a refractometer or RI glass beads.

1VAC30-45-826. Asbestos testing: analytical sensitivity. (Repealed.)

A. Transmission electron microscopy.

1. Water and wastewater. An analytical sensitivity of 200,000 fibers per liter (0.2 MFL) is required for each sample analyzed (EPA/600/R-94/134, Method 100.2, Section 1.6). Analytical sensitivity is defined as the waterborne concentration represented by the finding of one asbestos structure in the total area of filter examined. This value will depend on the fraction of the filter sampled and the dilution factor (if applicable).

2. Air. An analytical sensitivity of 0.005 structures/cm2 is required for each sample analyzed. Analytical sensitivity is defined as the airborne concentration represented by the finding of one asbestos structure in the total area of filter examined. This value will depend on the effective surface area of the filter, the filter area analyzed, and the volume of air sampled (AHERA, Table I).

3. Bulk samples.

a. The range is dependent on the type of bulk material being analyzed. The sensitivity may be as low as 0.0001% depending on the extent to which interfering materials can be removed during the preparation of AEM specimens. (Section 2.5.2 Range, Page 51, EPA/600/R-93/116)

b. There should be an error rate of less than 1.0% on the qualitative analysis for samples that contain chrysotile, amosite, and crocidolite. A slightly higher error rate may occur for samples that contain anthophyllite, actinolite, and tremolite, as it can be difficult to distinguish among the three types. (Section 3, Page 10, NIST Handbook 150-3, August 1994)

B. Phase contrast microscopy. The normal quantitative working range of the test method is 0.04 to 0.5 fiber/cm2 for a 1000 L air sample. An ideal counting range on the filter shall be 100 to 1300 fibers/mm2. The limit of detection (LOD) is estimated to be 5.5 fibers per 100 fields or 7 fibers/mm2. The LOD in fiber/cc will depend on sample volume and quantity of interfering dust but shall be <0.01 fiber/cm2 for atmospheres free of interferences. (NIOSH 7400, Issue 2, 15 August 1994)

C. Polarized light microscopy. The laboratory shall utilize a test method that provides a limit of detection that is appropriate and relevant for the intended use of the data. Limit of detection shall be determined by the protocol in the test method or applicable regulation.

1VAC30-45-827. Asbestos testing: data reduction. (Repealed.)

A. Transmission electron microscopy.

1. Water and wastewater.

a. The concentration of asbestos in a given sample shall be calculated in accordance with EPA/600/R-94/134, Method 100.2, Section 12.1. Refer to 1VAC30-45-730 K for additional data reduction requirements.

b. Measurement uncertainties. The laboratory shall calculate and report the upper and lower 95% confidence limits on the mean concentration of asbestos fibers found in the sample (EPA/600/R-94/134, Method 100.2, Section 12.2.2).

2. Air.

a. The concentration of asbestos in a given sample shall be calculated in accordance with the method utilized, e.g., AHERA. Refer to 1VAC30-45-730 K for additional data reduction requirements.

b. Measurement uncertainties. The laboratory shall calculate and report the upper and lower 95% confidence limits on the mean concentration of asbestos fibers found in the sample.

3. Bulk samples.

a. The concentration of asbestos in a given sample shall be calculated in accordance with the method utilized (e.g., EPA/600/R-93/116, July 1993). Refer to 1VAC30-45-730 K for additional data reduction requirements.

b. Measurement uncertainties. Proficiency testing for floor tiles analyzed by TEM following careful gravimetric reduction (New York ELAP Certification Manual Item 198.4) has revealed an interlaboratory standard deviation of approximately 20% for residues containing 70% or more asbestos. Standard deviations range from 20% to 60% for residues with lower asbestos content.

B. Phase contrast microscopy.

1. Airborne fiber concentration in a given sample shall be calculated in accordance with NIOSH 7400, Issue 2, 15 August 1994, Sections 20 and 21. Refer to 1VAC30-45-730 K for additional data reduction requirements.

2. Measurement uncertainties. The laboratory shall calculate and report the intra-laboratory and inter-laboratory relative standard deviation with each set of results. (NIOSH 7400, Issue 2, 15 August 1994)

3. Fiber counts above 1300 fibers/mm2 and fiber counts from samples with >50% of the filter area covered with particulate should be reported as "uncountable" or "probably biased." Other fiber counts outside the 100-1300 fibers/mm2 range should be reported as having "greater than optimal variability" and as being "probably biased."

C. Polarized light microscopy.

1. The concentration of asbestos in a given sample shall be calculated in accordance with the method utilized (e.g., EPA/600/R-93/116, July 1993). Refer to 1VAC30-45-730 K for additional data reduction requirements.

2. Method uncertainties. The individual laboratory shall determine precision and accuracy for the percent range involved. If point counting and/or visual estimates are used, a table of reasonable expanded errors (refer to EPA/600/R-93/116, July 1993, Table 2-1) should be generated for different concentrations of asbestos.

1VAC30-45-828. Asbestos testing: quality of standards and reagents. (Repealed.)

A. Transmission electron microscopy.

1. The quality control program shall establish and maintain provisions for asbestos standards.

a. Reference standards that are used in an asbestos laboratory shall be obtained from the National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST), EPA, or suppliers who participate in supplying NIST standards or NIST traceable asbestos. Any reference standards purchased outside the United States shall be traceable back to each country's national standards laboratory. Commercial suppliers of reference standards shall conform to ANSI N42.22 to assure the quality of their products.

b. Reference standards shall be accompanied with a certificate of calibration whose content is as described in ANSI N42.22-1995, Section 8, Certificates.

2. All reagents used shall be analytical reagent grade or better.

3. The laboratory shall have mineral fibers or data from mineral fibers that will allow differentiating asbestos from at least the following "look-alikes": fibrous talc, sepiolite, wollastonite, attapulgite (palygorskite), halloysite, vermiculite scrolls, antigorite, lizardite, pyroxenes, hornblende, richterite, winchite, or any other asbestiform minerals that are suspected as being present in the sample.

B. Phase contrast microscopy. Standards of known concentration have not been developed for this testing method. Routine workload samples that have been statistically validated and national proficiency testing samples such as PAT and AAR samples available from the AIHA may be utilized as reference samples (refer to 1VAC30-45-822 B 2) to standardize the optical system and analyst. All other testing reagents and devices (HSE/NPL test slide and Walton-Beckett Graticule) shall conform to the specifications of the method (refer to NIOSH 7400, Issue 2, 15 August 1994).

C. Polarized light microscopy. Refer to 1VAC30-45-828 A.

1VAC30-45-829. Asbestos testing: constant and consistent test conditions. (Repealed.)

The laboratory shall establish and adhere to written procedures to minimize the possibility of cross-contamination between samples.

1VAC30-45-850. Sample handling, sample acceptance policy, and sample receipt.

While the laboratory may not have control of field sampling activities, the following are essential to ensure the validity of the laboratory's data.

1. Sample tracking. The laboratory shall have a documented system for uniquely identifying the items to be tested to ensure that there can be no confusion regarding the identity of such items at any time. This system shall include identification for all samples, subsamples and subsequent extracts or digestates or both. The use of container shape, size or other physical characteristic, such as amber glass or purple top, is not an acceptable means of identifying the sample. System laboratories shall use a permanent chronological record such as a logbook or electronic database to document receipt of all containers. This sample receipt log shall record the following at a minimum: name of facility where sample was taken, date and time of laboratory receipt, unique laboratory ID code, and signature or initials of the person making the entries.

2. Sample acceptance policy. The laboratory shall have a written sample acceptance policy that clearly outlines the circumstances under which samples shall be accepted or rejected. The policy shall ensure that only properly obtained samples with appropriate sampling records (see 1VAC30-45-640 B) are analyzed and that the samples are handled properly. This sample acceptance policy shall be made available to sample collection personnel. The policy shall include elements such as appropriate documentation of the sample's identification, use of appropriate sample containers, adherence to specified holding times, adequate sample volume to perform necessary tests, and procedures to be used when samples show signs of damage, contamination or inadequate preservation.

3. Sample receipt protocols.

a. Upon receipt, the condition of the sample, including any abnormalities or departures from standard condition as prescribed in the relevant test method, shall be recorded. All items specified by the sample acceptance policy shall be checked.

b. All samples that require thermal preservation shall be considered acceptable if the arrival temperature is either within 2 degrees Celsius °C of the required temperature or the method specified range. For samples with a specified temperature of 4 degrees Celsius °C, samples with a temperature of ranging from just above freezing temperature of water to 6 degrees Celsius °C shall be acceptable. Samples that are hand delivered to the laboratory immediately after collection or on the same day that are collected may not meet this these criteria. In these cases, the samples shall be considered acceptable if there is evidence that the chilling process has begun such as arrival on ice. Thermal preservation is not required in the field if the laboratory receives the sample and either begins the analysis or refrigerates the sample within 15 minutes of collection.

c. The laboratory shall implement procedures for checking chemical preservation using readily available techniques, such as pH or free chlorine prior to or during sample preparation or analysis.

d. The results of all checks required by the sample acceptance policy and relevant test method shall be recorded.

4. Storage conditions.

a. The laboratory shall have documented procedures and appropriate facilities to avoid deterioration, contamination or damage to the sample during storage, handling, preparation, and testing. Any relevant instructions provided with the item shall be followed. Where items have to be stored or conditioned under specific environmental conditions, these conditions shall be maintained, monitored and recorded.

b. Samples shall be stored according to the conditions specified by preservation protocols:

(1) Samples that require thermal preservation shall be stored under refrigeration that is within 2 degrees Celsius °C of the specified preservation temperature unless method specific criteria exist. For samples with a specified storage temperature of 4 degrees Celsius °C, storage at a temperature above the freezing point of water to 6 degrees Celsius °C shall be acceptable.

(2) Samples shall be stored away from all standards, reagents, food and other potentially contaminating sources. Samples shall be stored in such a manner to prevent cross contamination.

c. Sample fractions, extracts, leachates and other sample preparation products shall be stored according to subdivision 4 a of this section or according to specifications in the test method.

d. Where a sample or portion of the sample is to be held secure (for example (e.g., for reasons of record, safety or value, or to enable check calibrations or tests to be performed later), the laboratory shall have storage and security arrangements that protect the condition and integrity of the secured items or portions concerned.

5. Sample disposal. The laboratory shall have standard operating procedures for the disposal of samples, digestates, leachates and extracts or other sample preparation products.

FORMS (1VAC30-45)

Application for Certification of Environmental Laboratories DGS‑21‑156 (eff. 1/09)

Application for Certification under 1VAC30-45 must be obtained from program staff at Lab_Cert@dgs.virginia.gov

DOCUMENTS INCORPORATED BY REFERENCE (1VAC30-45)

The Standards for Environmental Laboratories and Accreditation Bodies, 2009, The NELAC Institute (TNI), P.O. Box 2439, Weatherford, TX 76086; www.nelac-institute.org:

Volume 1: Management and Technical Requirements for Laboratories Performing Environmental Analysis (EL-V1-2009)

Volume 2: General Requirements for Accreditation Bodies Accrediting Environmental Laboratories (EL-V2-2009)

VA.R. Doc. No. R12-3334; Filed August 10, 2015, 10:01 a.m.
TITLE 1. ADMINISTRATION
DEPARTMENT OF GENERAL SERVICES
Final Regulation

Title of Regulation: 1VAC30-46. Accreditation for Commercial Environmental Laboratories (amending 1VAC30-46-10, 1VAC30-46-30 through 1VAC30-46-150, 1VAC30-46-200, 1VAC30-46-210; adding 1VAC30-46-15, 1VAC30-46-95, 1VAC30-46-220).

Statutory Authority: § 2.2-1105 of the Code of Virginia.

Effective Date: November 1, 2015.

Agency Contact: Rhonda Bishton, Regulatory Coordinator, Department of General Services, 1100 Bank Street, Suite 420, Richmond, VA 23219, telephone (804) 786-3311, FAX (804) 371-8305, or email rhonda.bishton@dgs.virginia.gov.

Summary:

The amendments (i) replace the 2003 National Environmental Laboratory Accreditation Conference (NELAC) Standards used to accredit commercial environmental laboratories with the 2009 The NELAC Institute (TNI) Standards; (ii) restructure and increase fees; (iii) revise the process used to accredit laboratories, eliminating requirements relating to the initial accreditation period and streamlining the process to renew accreditation; (iv) add a provision on suspension of accreditation; and (v) eliminate obsolete language and amend text for clarity.

Summary of Public Comments and Agency's Response: A summary of comments made by the public and the agency's response may be obtained from the promulgating agency or viewed at the office of the Registrar of Regulations.

Part I
General Provisions

1VAC30-46-10. Purpose.

Section 2.2-1105 of the Code of Virginia directs the Division of Consolidated Laboratory Services to establish a program to certify environmental laboratories that perform tests, analyses, measurements or monitoring required pursuant to the Commonwealth's air, waste and water laws and regulations. This chapter sets out the required standards and the process by which owners of commercial environmental laboratories may obtain certification for their laboratories. Certification is referred to as accreditation in this chapter. Commercial environmental laboratories are accredited under the standards of the National Environmental Laboratory Accreditation Conference (NELAC) as approved in 2003. In addition, this chapter sets out the process that NELAP-accredited environmental laboratories must use to receive accreditation in Virginia. 1VAC30-45 covers noncommercial environmental laboratories.

1VAC30-46-15. Standards for accreditation transition.

A. Commercial environmental laboratories are accredited under the standards of the National Environmental Laboratory Accreditation Conference (NELAC), now The NELAC Institute (TNI).

B. DCLS shall accredit commercial environmental laboratories under the 2003 NELAC Standards [ through June 30, 2014, as specified by the provisions of this chapter that became effective on January 1, 2009, for the first 10 months following November 1, 2015 ].

C. DCLS shall accredit commercial environmental laboratories under the 2009 TNI Standards [ beginning on July 1, 2014, as specified by the provisions of this chapter effective on November 1, 2015, beginning on the first day of the 11th month following November 1, 2015 ].

1VAC30-46-30. Applicability.

A. General applicability. This chapter applies to the following:

1. Any owner of a commercial environmental laboratory.

2. Any owner of an environmental laboratory holding NELAP TNI accreditation from a primary accrediting authority accreditation body who wishes to apply for reciprocal secondary accreditation under 1VAC30-46-140.

B. DGS-DCLS.

1. NELAP-accredited laboratory. DGS-DCLS shall meet the requirements of this chapter through review and accreditation by a NELAP-accredited federal or state accrediting authority. This process shall be completed before January 1, 2012.

2. Primary accrediting authority. DGS-DCLS shall meet the requirements of the NELAC standards to become the primary accrediting authority for the Commonwealth of Virginia. This review and approval by a NELAP accrediting team shall be completed no later than January 1, 2010.

B. Acquiring primary TNI accreditation through this chapter.

1. A commercial environmental laboratory located in Virginia shall obtain primary TNI accreditation in Virginia as long as the fields of accreditation for which the laboratory seeks accreditation are offered by DCLS.

2. DLCS shall not provide primary TNI accreditation for environmental laboratories located in other states that offer TNI accreditation.

C. Voluntary accreditation. Any owner of an a noncommercial environmental laboratory may apply for accreditation under this chapter.

D. Environmental laboratories required to obtain drinking water certification under 1VAC30-40. Any owner of an environmental laboratory Drinking water laboratory certification. An owner of a laboratory who must meet the requirements of 1VAC30-40 pertaining to drinking water laboratory certification and either 1VAC30-45 or this chapter may meet those requirements by obtaining accreditation under this chapter.

1VAC30-46-40. Definitions.

A. The definitions contained in the 2003 National Environmental Laboratory Accreditation Conference (NELAC) standards, Chapter 1, Appendix A – Glossary, the 2009 TNI Standards are incorporated by reference into this section. Some of the these definitions from this glossary are included in this section because the terms are used throughout this chapter. Where a term is defined in this section, the term shall have no other meaning, even if it is defined differently in the Code of Virginia or another regulation of the Virginia Administrative Code. Unless specifically defined in this section, the terms used in this chapter shall have the meanings commonly ascribed to them by recognized authorities.

B. The following words and terms when used in this chapter shall have the following meanings unless the context clearly indicates otherwise:

"Acceptance criteria" means specified limits placed on characteristics of an item, process, or service defined in requirement documents.

"Accreditation" means the process by which an agency or organization evaluates and recognizes a laboratory as meeting certain predetermined qualifications or standards, thereby accrediting the laboratory. "Accreditation" is the term used as a substitute for the term "certification" under this chapter.

[ "Accreditation body" or "AB" means the authoritative body that performs accreditation. ]

"Accrediting authority" [ "Accreditation body" of "AB" means the territorial, state, or federal agency having responsibility and accountability for environmental laboratory accreditation and which grants accreditation. ]

"Acceptance criteria" means specified limits placed on characteristics of an item, process, or service defined in requirement documents.

"Algae" means simple single-celled, colonial, or multicelled, mostly aquatic plants, containing chlorophyll and lacking roots, stems and leaves that are either suspended in water (phytoplankton) or attached to rocks and other substrates (periphyton).

"Analyte" means the substance or physical property to be determined in samples examined.

"Analytical method" means a technical procedure for providing analysis of a sample, defined by a body such as the Environmental Protection Agency or the American Society for Testing and Materials, that may not include the sample preparation method.

"Assessment" means the evaluation process used to measure or establish the performance, effectiveness, and conformance of an organization and its systems or both to defined criteria (i.e., the standards and requirements of laboratory accreditation).

"Assessor" means the person who performs on-site assessments of laboratories' capability and capacity for meeting the requirements under this chapter by examining the records and other physical evidence for each one of the tests for which accreditation has been requested assigned by DCLS to perform, alone or as part of an assessment team, an assessment of an environmental laboratory.

"Authority" means, in the context of a governmental body or local government, an authority created under the provisions of the Virginia Water and Waste Authorities Act, Chapter 51 (§ 15.2-5100 et seq.) of Title 15.2 of the Code of Virginia.

"Benthic macroinvertebrates" means bottom dwelling animals without backbones that live at least part of their life cycles within or upon available substrates within a body of water.

"Commercial environmental laboratory" means an environmental laboratory where environmental analysis is performed for another person.

"Corrective action" means the action taken to eliminate the causes of an existing nonconformity, defect or other undesirable situation in order to prevent recurrence.

"DGS-DCLS" "DCLS" means the Division of Consolidated Laboratory Services of the Department of General Services.

"Environmental analysis" or "environmental analyses" means any test, analysis, measurement, or monitoring used for the purposes of the Virginia Air Pollution Control Law, the Virginia Waste Management Act or the State Water Control Law (§ 10.1-1300 et seq., § 10.1-1400 et seq., and § 62.1-44.2 et seq., respectively, of the Code of Virginia). For the purposes of these regulations, any test, analysis, measurement, or monitoring required pursuant to the regulations promulgated under these three laws, or by any permit or order issued under the authority of any of these laws or regulations is "used for the purposes" of these laws. The term shall not include the following:

1. Sampling of water, solid and chemical materials, biological tissue, or air and emissions.

2. Field testing and measurement of water, solid and chemical materials, biological tissue, or air and emissions, except when performed in an environmental laboratory rather than at the site where the sample was taken.

3. Taxonomic identification of samples for which there is no national accreditation standard such as algae, benthic macroinvertebrates, macrophytes, vertebrates and zooplankton.

4. Protocols used pursuant to § 10.1-104.2 of the Code of Virginia to determine soil fertility, animal manure nutrient content, or plant tissue nutrient uptake for the purposes of nutrient management.

5. Geochemical and permeability testing for solid waste compliance.

6. Materials specification for air quality compliance when product certifications specify the data required by an air permit such as fuel type, Btu content, sulfur content, or volatile organic chemical (VOC) content.

"Environmental laboratory" or "laboratory" means a facility or a defined area within a facility where environmental analysis is performed. A structure built solely to shelter field personnel and equipment from inclement weather shall not be considered an environmental laboratory.

"Establishment date" means the date set for the accreditation program under this chapter and the certification program under 1VAC30-45 to be established.

"Establishment of accreditation program" or "established program" means that DGS-DCLS DCLS has completed the initial accreditation of environmental laboratories covered by this chapter and the initial certification of environmental laboratories covered by 1VAC30-45.

"Facility" means something that is built or installed to serve a particular function.

"Field of accreditation" means an approach to accrediting laboratories by those matrix, technology/method, and analyte/analyte group analyte combinations for which DCLS offers accreditation.

"Field of accreditation matrix" means the following when accrediting a laboratory:

1. Drinking water. Any aqueous sample that has been designated a potable or potential potable water source.

2. Nonpotable water. Any aqueous sample excluded from the definition of drinking water matrix. Includes surface water, groundwater, effluents, water treatment chemicals, and TCLP or other extracts.

3. Solid and chemical materials. Includes soils, sediments, sludges, products and byproducts of an industrial process that results in a matrix not previously defined.

4. Biological tissue. Any sample of a biological origin such as fish tissue, shellfish, or plant material. Such samples shall be grouped according to origin, i.e., by species.

5. Air and emissions. Whole gas or vapor samples including those contained in flexible or rigid wall containers and the extracted concentrated analytes of interest from a gas or vapor that are collected with a sorbent tube, impinger solution, filter or other device.

"Field of proficiency testing" or "FoPT" means an approach to offer proficiency testing by analytes for which a laboratory is required to successfully analyze a PT sample in order to obtain or maintain accreditation, collectively defined as: matrix, technology/method, and analyte/analyte group analyte.

"Field testing and measurement" means any of the following:

1. Any test for parameters under 40 CFR Part 136 for which the holding time indicated for the sample requires immediate analysis; or

2. Any test defined as a field test in federal regulation.

The following is a limited list of currently recognized field tests or measures that is not intended to be inclusive: continuous emissions monitoring; on-line monitoring; flow monitoring; tests for pH, residual chlorine, temperature and dissolved oxygen; and field analysis for soil gas.

"Finding" means a conclusion reached during an on-site assessment that identifies a condition having a significant effect on an item or activity. An assessment finding is normally a deficiency and is normally accompanied by specific examples of the observed condition an assessment conclusion referenced to a laboratory accreditation standard [ incorporated by reference or contained in this chapter ] and supported by objective evidence that identifies a deviation from a laboratory accreditation standard requirement.

"Governmental body" means any department, agency, bureau, authority, or district of the United States government, of the government of the Commonwealth of Virginia, or of any local government within the Commonwealth of Virginia.

"Holding time" (or maximum allowable holding time)" means the maximum time that a sample may be held prior to analysis and still be considered valid or not compromised can elapse between two specified activities.

"Initial accreditation period" means the period during which DGS-DCLS is accepting and processing applications for the first time under this chapter as specified in 1VAC30-46-70.

"Legal entity" means an entity, other than a natural person, who has sufficient existence in legal contemplation that it can function legally, be sued or sue and make decisions through agents as in the case of corporations.

"Local government" means a municipality (city or town), county, sanitation district, or authority.

"Macrophytes" means any aquatic or terrestrial plant species that can be identified and observed with the eye, unaided by magnification.

"Matrix" means the component or substrate that contains the analyte of interest of a test sample.

"National accreditation database" means the publicly accessible database listing the accreditation status of all laboratories participating in NELAP.

"National Environmental Laboratory Accreditation Conference (NELAC)" means a voluntary organization of state and federal environmental officials and interest groups with the primary purpose to establish mutually acceptable standards for accrediting environmental laboratories. A subset of NELAP.

"National Environmental Laboratory Accreditation Program (NELAP)" means the overall National Environmental Laboratory Accreditation Program of which NELAC is a part.

"Noncommercial environmental laboratory" means either of the following:

1. An environmental laboratory where environmental analysis is performed solely for the owner of the laboratory.

2. An environmental laboratory where the only performance of environmental analysis for another person is one of the following:

a. Environmental analysis performed by an environmental laboratory owned by a local government for an owner of a small wastewater treatment system treating domestic sewage at a flow rate of less than or equal to 1,000 gallons per day.

b. Environmental analysis performed by an environmental laboratory operated by a corporation as part of a general contract issued by a local government to operate and maintain a wastewater treatment system or a waterworks.

c. Environmental analysis performed by an environmental laboratory owned by a corporation as part of the prequalification process or to confirm the identity or characteristics of material supplied by a potential or existing customer or generator as required by a hazardous waste management permit under 9VAC20-60.

d. Environmental analysis performed by an environmental laboratory owned by a Publicly Owned Treatment Works (POTW) for an industrial source of wastewater under a permit issued by the POTW to the industrial source as part of the requirements of a pretreatment program under Part VII (9VAC25-31-730 et seq.) of 9VAC25-31.

e. Environmental analysis performed by an environmental laboratory owned by a county authority for any municipality within the county's geographic jurisdiction when the environmental analysis pertains solely to the purpose for which the authority was created.

f. Environmental analysis performed by an environmental laboratory owned by an authority or a sanitation district for any participating local government of the authority or sanitation district when the environmental analysis pertains solely to the purpose for which the authority or sanitation district was created.

"Owner" means any person who owns, operates, leases or controls an environmental laboratory.

"Person" means an individual, corporation, partnership, association, company, business, trust, joint venture or other legal entity.

"Physical," for the purposes of fee test categories, means the tests to determine the physical properties of a sample. Tests for solids, turbidity and color are examples of physical tests.

"Pretreatment requirements" means any requirements arising under Part VII (9VAC25-31-730 et seq.) of 9VAC25-31 including the duty to allow or carry out inspections, entry or monitoring activities; any rules, regulations, or orders issued by the owner of a POTW; or any reporting requirements imposed by the owner of a POTW or by the regulations of the State Water Control Board. Pretreatment requirements do not include the requirements of a national pretreatment standard.

"Primary accrediting authority accreditation body" or "primary AB" means the agency or department designated at the territory, state or federal level as the recognized authority with the responsibility and accountability for granting NELAC accreditation to a specific laboratory for a specific field of accreditation accreditation body responsible for assessing a laboratory's total quality system, on-site assessment, and PT performance tracking for fields of accreditation.

"Proficiency test or testing (PT)" "Proficiency test," "proficiency testing," or "PT" means evaluating a laboratory's performance under controlled conditions relative to a given set of criteria through analysis of unknown samples provided by an external source.

"Proficiency test (PT) sample" or "PT sample" means a sample, the composition of which is unknown to both the analyst and the laboratory, and is provided to test whether the analyst or laboratory or both laboratory can produce analytical results within specified acceptance criteria.

"Proficiency testing (PT) program" or "PT program" means the aggregate of providing rigorously controlled and standardized environmental samples to a laboratory for analysis, reporting of results, statistical evaluation of the results and the collective demographics and results summary of all participating laboratories.

"Publicly Owned Treatment Works" or "POTW" (POTW)" means a treatment works as defined by § 212 of the CWA, which is owned by a state or municipality (as defined by § 502(4) of the CWA). This definition includes any devices and systems used in the storage, treatment, recycling, and reclamation of municipal sewage or industrial wastes of a liquid nature. It also includes sewers, pipes, and other conveyances only if they convey wastewater to a POTW treatment plant. The term also means the municipality as defined in § 502(4) of the CWA, which has jurisdiction over the indirect discharges to and the discharges from such a treatment works.

"Quality assurance" or "QA" means an integrated system of management activities involving planning, quality control, quality implementation, assessment, reporting, and quality improvement to ensure that a product process, item, or service meets defined standards of quality with a stated level of confidence is of the type and quality needed and expected by the client.

"Quality assurance officer" means the person who has responsibility for the quality system and its implementation. Where staffing is limited, the quality assurance officer may also be the technical director manager.

"Quality control" or "QC" means the (i) overall system of technical activities whose purpose is to measure and control the quality of a product or service so that it meets the needs of users that measures the attributes and performance of a process, item, or service against defined standards to verify that they meet the stated requirements established by the customer; (ii) operational techniques and activities that are used to fulfill requirements for quality; and (iii) system of activities and checks used to ensure that measurement systems are maintained within prescribed limits, providing protection against "out of control" conditions and ensuring that the results are of acceptable quality.

"Quality manual" means a document stating the management policies, objectives, principles, organizational structure and authority, responsibilities, accountability, and implementation of an agency, organization, or laboratory, to ensure the quality of its product and the utility of its product to its users.

"Quality system" means a structured and documented management system describing the policies, objectives, principles, organizational authority, responsibilities, accountability, and implementation plan of an organization for ensuring quality in its work processes, products (items), and services. The quality system provides the framework for planning, implementing, and assessing work performed by the organization and for carrying out required quality assurance and quality control activities.

"Quality system matrix," for purposes of batch and quality control requirements, means the following:

1. Aqueous. Any aqueous sample excluded from the definition of drinking water matrix or saline/estuarine source. Includes surface water, groundwater, effluents, and TCLP or other extracts.

2. Drinking water. Any aqueous sample that has been designated a potable or potential potable water source.

3. Saline/estuarine. Any aqueous sample from an ocean or estuary, or other salt water source such as the Great Salt Lake.

4. Non-aqueous liquid. Any organic liquid with less than 15% settleable solids.

5. Biological tissue. Any sample of a biological origin such as fish tissue, shellfish, or plant material. Such samples shall be grouped according to origin.

6. Solids. Includes soils, sediments, sludges and other matrices with more than 15% settleable solids.

7. Chemical waste. A product or byproduct of an industrial process that results in a matrix not previously defined.

8. Air and emissions. Whole gas or vapor samples including those contained in flexible or rigid wall containers and the extracted concentrated analytes of interest from a gas or vapor that are collected with a sorbent tube, impinger solution, filter or other device.

1. Air and emissions. Whole gas or vapor samples, including those contained in flexible or rigid wall containers and the extracted concentrated analytes of interest from a gas or vapor that are collected with a sorbent tube, impinger solution, filter, or other device.

2. Aqueous. Any aqueous sample excluded from the definition of drinking water matrix or saline/estuarine source. Includes surface water, groundwater, effluents, and TCLP or other extracts.

3. Biological tissue. Any sample of a biological origin such as fish tissue, shellfish, or plant material. Such samples shall be grouped according to origin.

4. Chemical waste. A product or byproduct of an industrial process that results in a matrix not previously defined.

5. Drinking water. Any aqueous sample that has been designated a potable or potential potable water source.

6. Non-aqueous liquid. Any organic liquid with less than 15% settleable solids.

7. Saline/estuarine. Any aqueous sample from an ocean or estuary, or other salt water source such as the Great Salt Lake.

8. Solids. Includes soils, sediments, sludges, and other matrices with more than 15% settleable solids.

"Recognition" means the mutual agreement of two or more accrediting authorities to accept each other's findings regarding the ability of environmental laboratories to meet NELAC standards.

"Responsible official" means one of the following, as appropriate:

1. If the laboratory is owned or operated by a private corporation, "responsible official" means (i) a president, secretary, treasurer, or a vice-president of the corporation in charge of a principal business function, or any other person who performs similar policy-making or decision-making functions for the corporation or (ii) the manager of one or more manufacturing, production, or operating facilities employing more than 250 persons or having gross annual sales or expenditures exceeding $25 million (in second-quarter 1980 dollars), if authority to sign documents has been assigned or delegated in accordance with corporate procedures.

2. If the laboratory is owned or operated by a partnership, association, or a sole proprietor, "responsible official" means a general partner, officer of the association, or the proprietor, respectively.

3. If the laboratory is owned or operated by a governmental body, "responsible official" means a director or highest official appointed or designated to oversee the operation and performance of the activities of the governmental laboratory.

4. Any person designated as the responsible official by an individual described in subdivision 1, 2 or 3 of this definition provided the designation is in writing, the designation specifies an individual or position with responsibility for the overall operation of the laboratory, and the designation is submitted to DGS-DCLS DCLS.

"Sampling" means the act of collection for the purpose of analysis.

"Sanitation district" means a sanitation district created under the provisions of Chapters 3 (§ 21-141 et seq.) through 5 (§ 21-291 et seq.) of Title 21 of the Code of Virginia.

"Secondary accreditation body" or "secondary AB" means the accreditation body that grants TNI accreditation to laboratories based on their accreditation by a TNI-recognized primary accreditation body.

"Sewage" means the water-carried human wastes from residences, buildings, industrial establishments or other places together with such industrial wastes and underground, surface, storm, or other water as may be present.

"Standard operating procedure" or "SOP" (SOP)" means a written document which details the method of an operation, analysis or action whose techniques and procedures are thoroughly prescribed and which is accepted that details the method for an operation, analysis, or action with thoroughly prescribed techniques and steps. An SOP is officially approved as the method for performing certain routine or repetitive tasks.

"TCLP" or "toxicity characteristic leachate procedure" means Test Method 1311 in "Test Methods for Evaluating Solid Waste, Physical/Chemical Methods," EPA Publication SW-846, as incorporated by reference in 40 CFR 260.11. This method is used to determine whether a solid waste exhibits the characteristic of toxicity (see 40 CFR 261.24).

"Technical director manager (however named)" means the person who has overall responsibility for the technical operation of the environmental laboratory and who exercises actual day-to-day supervision of laboratory operation for the appropriate fields of testing and reporting of results. The title of this person may include but is not limited to laboratory director, technical director manager, laboratory supervisor, or laboratory manager.

"Technology" means a specific arrangement of analytical instruments, detection systems, or preparation techniques, or any combination of these elements.

"Test" means a technical operation that consists of the determination of one or more characteristics or performance of a given product, material, equipment, organism, physical phenomenon, process or service according to a specified procedure.

"Test, analysis, measurement or monitoring required pursuant to the Virginia Air Pollution Control Law" means any method of analysis required by the Virginia Air Pollution Control Law (§ 10.1-1300 et seq. of the Code of Virginia); by the regulations promulgated under this law (9VAC5), including any method of analysis listed either in the definition of "reference method" in 9VAC5-10-20, or listed or adopted by reference in 9VAC5; or by any permit or order issued under and in accordance with this law and these regulations.

"Test, analysis, measurement or monitoring required pursuant to the Virginia Waste Management Act" means any method of analysis required by the Virginia Waste Management Act (§ 10.1-1400 et seq. of the Code of Virginia); by the regulations promulgated under this law (9VAC20), including any method of analysis listed or adopted by reference in 9VAC20; or by any permit or order issued under and in accordance with this law and these regulations.

"Test, analysis, measurement or monitoring required pursuant to the Virginia Water Control Law" means any method of analysis required by the Virginia Water Control Law (§ 62.1-44.2 et seq. of the Code of Virginia); by the regulations promulgated under this law (9VAC25), including any method of analysis listed or adopted by reference in 9VAC25; or by any permit or order issued under and in accordance with this law and these regulations.

"Test method" means an adoption of a scientific technique for performing a specific measurement, as documented in a laboratory standard operating procedure or as published by a recognized authority.

"The NELAC Institute (TNI)" or "TNI" means the organization whose standards environmental laboratories must meet to be accredited in Virginia.

"TNI standards" means the 2009 Standards for Environmental Laboratories and Accreditation Bodies approved by TNI.

"U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (U.S. EPA or EPA)" means the federal government agency with responsibility for protecting, safeguarding and improving the natural environment (i.e., air, water and land) upon which human life depends.

"Virginia Air Pollution Control Law" means Chapter 13 (§ 10.1-1300 et seq.) of Title 10.1 of the Code of Virginia which that is titled "Air Pollution Control Board."

"Virginia Environmental Laboratory Accreditation Program" or "VELAP" means the program DCLS operates to accredit environmental laboratories under this chapter.

"Wastewater" means liquid and water-carried industrial wastes and domestic sewage from residential dwellings, commercial buildings, industrial and manufacturing facilities, and institutions.

"Waterworks" means each system of structures and appliances used in connection with the collection, storage, purification, and treatment of water for drinking or domestic use and the distribution thereof to the public, except distribution piping.

"Zooplankton" means microscopic animals that float freely with voluntary movement in a body of water.

1VAC30-46-50. Scope of accreditation.

A. Commercial environmental laboratories shall be accredited based on the general laboratory standards set out in Part II (1VAC30-46-200 et seq.) of this chapter and on the specific test methods or analysis, monitoring or measurement required by Virginia Air Pollution Control Law 10.1-1300 et seq. of the Code of Virginia), Virginia Waste Management Act 10.1-1400 et seq. of the Code of Virginia) or Virginia Water Control Law 62.1-44.2 et seq. of the Code of Virginia), the regulations promulgated under these laws, and by permits and orders issued under and in accordance with these laws and regulations.

B. DGS-DCLS DCLS shall review alternative test methods and procedures for accreditation when these are proposed by the applicant laboratory. The provisions of 1VAC30-46-70 E and 1VAC30-46-90 B govern alternative test methods and procedures.

C. Accreditation shall be granted for one or more fields of accreditation, including the matrix, the technology and methods used by the commercial environmental laboratory, and the individual analytes or analyte groups determined by the particular method.

1VAC30-46-60. General: accreditation requirements.

A. Components of accreditation. The components of accreditation include review of personnel qualifications, on-site assessment, proficiency testing and quality assurance and quality control standards. The criteria for these components, specified in Part II (1VAC30-46-200 et seq.) of this chapter, shall be fulfilled for accreditation.

B. Individual laboratory sites and mobile laboratories.

1. Individual laboratory sites are subject to the same application process, assessments, and other requirements as environmental laboratories. Any remote laboratory sites are considered separate sites and subject to separate on-site assessments.

2. Laboratories located at the same physical location shall be considered an individual laboratory site if these laboratories are owned by the same person, and have the same technical director manager and quality system.

3. Laboratories located at separate, noncontiguous physical locations may request to be considered as an individual laboratory site if these laboratories are owned by the same person and have the same laboratory manager and quality system.

4. 3. A mobile laboratory, which is configured with equipment to perform environmental analyses, whether associated with a fixed-based laboratory or not, is considered an environmental laboratory and shall require separate accreditation. This accreditation shall remain with the mobile laboratory and be site independent. Moving the configured mobile laboratory to a different site shall not require a new or separate accreditation. Before performing analyses at each new site, the laboratory shall ensure that instruments and equipment have been checked for performance and have been calibrated.

1VAC30-46-70. Process to apply and obtain accreditation.

A. Duty to apply. All owners of (i) commercial environmental laboratories and (ii) NELAP-accredited TNI-accredited commercial environmental laboratories applying for reciprocal secondary accreditation shall apply for accreditation as specified by the provisions of this section. Applications for accreditation must be obtained from DCLS program staff by email at Lab_Cert@dgs.virginia.gov.

B. Timely initial applications.

1. Owners of commercial environmental laboratories applying for accreditation under this chapter for the first time shall submit an application to DGS-DCLS no later than July 1, 2009.

2. Owners of commercial environmental laboratories that come into existence after January 1, 2009, shall submit an initial application to DGS-DCLS no later than 180 calendar days prior to initiating the provision of environmental laboratory services.

3. Owners of NELAP-accredited environmental laboratories.

a. During the initial accreditation period, NELAP- accredited environmental laboratories shall submit an application to DGS-DCLS no later than July 1, 2009.

b. After the program is established, NELAP-accredited environmental laboratories shall submit an application to DGS-DCLS no later than 180 calendar days prior to initiating the provision of environmental laboratory services in Virginia.

C. Timely renewal applications.

1. Every two years from the date of initial accreditation, laboratories accredited under this chapter shall submit an application for renewal of accreditation as required by subsection F of this section, including the fees required by 1VAC30-46-150. During this biannual renewal DGS-DCLS shall perform an on-site assessment in addition to a review of the laboratory's application package.

2. Every other year, DGS-DCLS shall renew accreditation for the accredited laboratory provided the laboratory does all of the following:

a. Maintains compliance with this chapter.

b. Attests to this compliance by signing the Certificate of Compliance provided under subdivision F 3 of this section.

c. Reports acceptable proficiency test values for the Fields of Accreditation for which the laboratory held accreditation during the previous year.

The laboratory shall submit the application information required by subdivisions F 1 (except for the quality manual) and F 3 of this section.

3. Renewal application due dates.

a. The owner of either an (i) accredited commercial environmental laboratory or (ii) environmental laboratory holding reciprocal accreditation shall submit an application for renewal of accreditation under subdivision C 1 of this section at least 90 calendar days prior to expiration of accreditation.

b. The owner of either an (i) accredited commercial environmental laboratory or (ii) environmental laboratory holding reciprocal accreditation shall submit an application for renewal of accreditation under subdivision C 2 of this section at least 30 calendar days prior to expiration of accreditation.

B. Initial applications. Owners of commercial environmental laboratories applying for accreditation under this chapter for the first time shall submit an application to DCLS as specified under subsection F of this section.

C. Renewal and reassessment.

1. DCLS shall renew accreditation annually for the accredited laboratory provided the laboratory does the following:

a. Maintains compliance with this chapter.

b. Attests to this compliance by signing the certificate of compliance provided under subdivision F 3 of this section.

c. Reports acceptable proficiency test values as required by 1VAC30-46-210 B.

d. Pays the fee required by 1VAC30-46-150.

2. DCLS shall reassess the accredited environmental laboratory during an on-site assessment as required by 1VAC30-46-220.

D. Responsibilities of the owner and operator when the laboratory is owned by one person and operated by another person.

1. When an environmental laboratory is owned by one person but is operated by another person, the operator may submit the application for the owner.

2. If the operator fails to submit the application, the owner is not relieved of his responsibility to apply for accreditation.

3. While DGS-DCLS DCLS may notify environmental laboratories of the date their applications are due, failure of DGS-DCLS DCLS to notify does not relieve the owner of his obligation to apply under this chapter.

E. Submission of applications for modifications to accreditation. An owner of an accredited environmental laboratory shall follow the process set out in 1VAC30-46-90 B to add a new matrix technology/method, an analyte or, analyte group, modify a test method or institute use of a method or technology not in the laboratory's standard operating procedures, including alternative test methods or procedures to modify the laboratory's scope of accreditation.

F. Contents of application.

1. Applications shall include but not be limited to the following information and documents:

a. Legal name of laboratory;

b. Name of owner of laboratory;

c. Name of operator of laboratory, if different than owner;

d. Street address and description of location of laboratory;

e. Mailing address of laboratory, if different from street address;

f. Address of owner, if different from laboratory address;

g. Name, address, telephone number, facsimile number and e-mail, as applicable, of responsible official;

h. Name, address, telephone number, facsimile number and e-mail, as applicable, of technical director manager;

i. Name, address, telephone number, facsimile number and e-mail, as applicable, of designated quality assurance officer;

j. Name, title and telephone number of laboratory contact person;

k. Laboratory type (e.g., commercial, public wastewater system, mobile);

l. Laboratory hours of operation;

m. Fields of accreditation for which the laboratory is seeking accreditation;

n. Methods employed, including analytes;

o. n. The results of the three most recent proficiency test studies two successful unique TNI-compliant PT studies for each accreditation field of proficiency testing as required by 1VAC30-46-210 B (for primary accreditation only);

p. o. Quality assurance manual (for primary accreditation only);

q. Lab identification number (for renewal only) p. Copy of the primary certificate of accreditation for secondary accreditation applications; and

r. q. For mobile laboratories, a unique vehicle identification number, such as a manufacturer's vehicle identification number (VIN #), serial number, or license number.

2. Fee. The application shall include payment of the fee as specified in 1VAC30-46-150.

3. Certification of compliance.

a. The application shall include a "Certification of Compliance" statement signed and dated by (i) the quality assurance officer, and a (ii) the responsible official or the technical director manager, or both.

b. The certification of compliance shall state: "The applicant understands and acknowledges that the laboratory is required to be continually in compliance with the Virginia environmental laboratory accreditation program regulation (1VAC30 Chapter 46) and is subject to the provisions of 1VAC30-46-100 in the event of noncompliance. Specifically the applicant:

(1) Shall commit to fulfill continually the requirements for accreditation set by DCLS for the areas where accreditation is sought or granted.

(2) When requested, shall afford such accommodation and cooperation as is necessary to enable DCLS to verify fulfillment of requirements for accreditation. This applies to all premises where laboratory services take place.

(3) Shall provide access to information, documents, and records as necessary for the assessment and maintenance of the accreditation.

(4) Shall provide access to those documents that provide insight into the level of independence and impartiality of the laboratory from its related bodies, where applicable.

(5) Shall arrange the witnessing of laboratory services when requested by DCLS.

(6) Shall claim accreditation only with respect to the scope for which it has been granted accreditation.

(7) Shall pay fees as shall be determined by the accreditation body.

I certify under penalty of law that this document and all attachments were prepared under my direction or supervision in accordance with a system designed to assure that qualified personnel properly gather and evaluate the information submitted. Based on my inquiry of the person or persons who manage the laboratory or those persons directly responsible for gathering and evaluating the information, the information submitted is, to the best of my knowledge and belief, true, accurate and complete. Submitting false information or data shall result in denial or withdrawal of accreditation. I further certify that I am authorized to sign this application."

G. Completeness determination.

1. DGS-DCLS DCLS shall determine whether an application is complete and notify the laboratory of the result of such determination. During the initial accreditation period, DGS-DCLS DCLS shall provide this notice within 90 calendar days of its receipt of the initial application. Following the initial accreditation period, DGS-DCLS shall provide this notice as follows:

a. Within 60 calendar days of DGS-DCLS' receipt of a laboratory's initial application.

b. Within 30 calendar days of DGS-DCLS' receipt of a laboratory's renewal application under subdivision C 1 of this section.

c. Within 15 calendar days of DGS-DCLS' receipt of a laboratory's renewal application under subdivision C 2 of this section.

2. An initial application or an application for renewal under subdivision C 1 of this section shall be determined complete if it contains all the information required pursuant to subsection F of this section and is sufficient to evaluate the laboratory prior to the on-site assessment. DGS-DCLS shall consider an application for renewal under subdivision C 2 of this section to be complete if it contains the information required under subdivision C 2 of this section. Designating an application complete does not preclude DGS-DCLS DCLS from requesting or accepting additional information.

3. If DGS-DCLS DCLS determines that an application is incomplete, DGS-DCLS's the DCLS notification of such determination shall explain why the application is incomplete and specify the additional information needed to make the application complete.

4. Except during the initial accreditation period, if If DCLS makes no determination is made within 60 within 90 calendar days of DGS-DCLS's its receipt of either (i) the application or (ii) additional information, in the case of an application determined to be incomplete, the application shall be determined to be complete. During the initial accreditation period, the time period shall be 90 calendar days.

5. If the laboratory has not submitted the required additional information within 90 days of receiving a notice from DGS-DCLS DCLS requesting additional information, DGS-DCLS DCLS may return the incomplete application and inform the laboratory that the application cannot be processed. The laboratory may then submit a new application.

H. Grant of interim accreditation pending final determination on application.

1. DGS-DCLS DCLS shall grant interim accreditation status to laboratories applying initially or for renewal under subdivision C 1 of this section under the following conditions:

a. The laboratory's application is determined to be complete;

b. The laboratory has satisfied all the requirements for accreditation, including all requests for additional information, with the exception of on-site assessment; and

c. DGS-DCLS DCLS is unable to schedule the on-site assessment within 90 120 days of its determination that the application is complete (for initial applications) or before the laboratory's accreditation expires (for renewal applications under subdivision C 1 of this section).

2. DGS-DCLS shall grant interim accreditation status to a laboratory renewing its accreditation under subdivision C 2 of this section during its review of the renewal application if the owner has submitted a complete application as required under subdivision C 2 of this section.

3. 2. A laboratory with interim accreditation status shall have the same rights and status as a laboratory that has been granted accreditation by DGS-DCLS DCLS.

4. 3. Interim accreditation status shall not exceed 12 months.

I. On-site assessment.

1. An on-site assessment shall be performed and the follow-up and reporting procedures for such assessments shall be completed in accordance with Part II (1VAC30-46-200 et seq.) of this chapter 1VAC30-46-220 prior to issuance of a final determination on accreditation.

2. Alternative on-site assessment option. If DGS-DCLS is unable to schedule an on-site assessment under the conditions of subdivision H 1 c of this section, the owner of the applicant laboratory may use third-party on-site assessors instead of DGS-DCLS on-site assessors under the following conditions:

a. The third-party on-site assessors are on a DGS-DCLS-approved list of NELAC-trained on-site assessors; and

b. The owner of the applicant laboratory agrees to pay the third-party on-site assessors.

J. Final determination on accreditation.

1. Upon completion of the accreditation review process and corrective action, if any, DGS-DCLS DCLS shall grant accreditation in accordance with subsection K of this section or deny accreditation in accordance with subsection L of this section.

2. Except during the initial accreditation period, DGS-DCLS shall complete action on a laboratory's application within nine months from the time a completed application is received from the laboratory.

3. During the initial accreditation period, DGS-DCLS shall notify applicants of their interim accreditation status under subsection H of this section only after all applications have been reviewed and are determined to be complete.

4. During the final approval process of the initial accreditation period, DGS-DCLS shall notify applicants of their final accreditation status only after all timely and complete applications have been reviewed, all on-site assessments have been completed, and accreditation status has been determined for all applicant laboratories.

5. During the final approval process, DGS-DCLS shall release on-site assessment reports to applicants at the time that applicants are notified of their final accreditation status.

K. Grant of accreditation.

1. When a laboratory meets the requirements specified for receiving accreditation, DGS-DCLS DCLS shall issue a certificate to the laboratory. The certificate shall be sent to the technical director manager, and the responsible official shall be notified.

2. The director of DGS-DCLS DCLS or his designee shall sign the certificate. The certificate shall be transmitted as a sealed and dated document.

3. The certificate shall include the following information:

a. Name of owner of laboratory;

b. Name of operator of laboratory, if different from owner;

c. Name of responsible official;

d. Address and location of laboratory;

e. Laboratory identification number;

f. Fields of accreditation (matrix, technology/method and analyte/analyte group) analyte) for which accreditation is granted;

g. Any addenda or attachments; and

h. Issuance date and expiration date.

4. National Environmental Laboratory Accreditation Program (NELAP) TNI-accreditation status.

a. Laboratories accredited under this chapter are accredited under the standards of the National Environmental Laboratory Accreditation Conference TNI.

b. The certificate of accreditation shall contain the NELAP TNI insignia.

c. Accredited laboratories shall comply with the provisions of 1VAC30-46-130 with regard to the use of these certificates and their status as NELAP-accredited TNI-accredited laboratories.

5. The laboratory shall post the most recent certificate of accreditation and any addenda to the certificate issued by DGS-DCLS DCLS in a prominent place in the laboratory facility.

6. Accreditation shall expire one year after the date on which accreditation is granted.

L. Denial of accreditation.

1. DGS-DCLS DCLS shall deny accreditation to an environmental laboratory in total if the laboratory is found to be falsifying any data or providing false information to support accreditation.

2. Denial of accreditation in total or in part.

a. DGS-DCLS DCLS may deny accreditation to an environmental laboratory in total or in part if the laboratory fails to do any of the following:

(1) Pay the required fees;

(2) Employ laboratory staff to meet the personnel qualifications as required by Part II (1VAC30-46-200 et seq.) of this chapter 1VAC30-46-210 A;

(3) Successfully analyze and report proficiency testing samples as required by Part II of this chapter 1VAC30-46-210 B;

(4) Submit a corrective action report plan in accordance with Part II of this chapter 1VAC30-46-220 in response to a deficiency report from the on-site assessment team within the required 30 calendar days;

(5) Implement the corrective actions detailed in the corrective action report plan within the time frame specified by DGS-DCLS DCLS;

(6) Pass required on-site assessment as specified in Part II of this chapter 1VAC30-46-220; or

(7) Implement a quality system as defined in Part II of this chapter 1VAC30-46-210 C.

b. DGS-DCLS DCLS may deny accreditation to an environmental laboratory in total or in part if the laboratory's application is not determined to be complete within 90 days following notification of incompleteness because the laboratory is delinquent in submitting information required by DGS-DCLS DCLS in accordance with this chapter.

c. DGS-DCLS DCLS may deny accreditation to an environmental laboratory in total or in part if the DGS-DCLS DCLS on-site assessment team is unable to carry out the on-site assessment pursuant to 1VAC30-46-210 B 1VAC30-46-220 because a representative of the environmental laboratory denied the team entry during the laboratory's normal business hours that it specified in the laboratory application.

3. DGS-DCLS DCLS shall follow the process specified in 1VAC30-46-110 when denying accreditation to an environmental laboratory.

M. Reapplication following denial of accreditation.

1. Upon denial of accreditation, the laboratory shall wait six months before reapplying for accreditation.

2. DGS-DCLS DCLS shall not waive application fees for a laboratory reapplying for accreditation.

1VAC30-46-80. Maintaining accreditation.

A. Accreditation remains in effect until withdrawn by DGS-DCLS DCLS, withdrawn voluntarily at the written request of the accredited laboratory, or expiration of the accreditation period. To maintain accreditation, the accredited laboratory shall comply with the elements listed in this section and in 1VAC30-46-90.

B. Quality systems. A laboratory seeking to maintain accreditation under this regulation shall assure consistency and promote the use of quality assurance and quality control procedures. Part II (1VAC30-46-200 et seq.) of this chapter 1VAC30-46-210 C specifies the quality assurance and quality control requirements that shall be met to maintain accreditation. The laboratory shall establish and maintain a quality system based on the these required elements contained in Part II.

C. Proficiency tests. Laboratories seeking to maintain accreditation under this regulation shall perform proficiency tests as required under Part II (1VAC30-46-200 et seq.) of this chapter 1VAC30-46-210 B.

D. Recordkeeping and retention. All laboratory records associated with accreditation parameters shall be kept as provided by the requirements for records under Part II (1VAC30-46-200 et seq.) of this chapter. These records shall be maintained for a minimum of five years unless designated for a longer period by another regulation or authority. All such records shall be available to DGS-DCLS DCLS upon request.

1VAC30-46-90. Notifications and changes to accreditation elements and status.

A. Changes to key accreditation criteria. The accredited laboratory shall notify DGS-DCLS DCLS in writing of any changes in key accreditation criteria within 30 calendar days of the change. Key accreditation criteria are laboratory ownership (including legal, commercial, or organizational status), location, resources and premises, key personnel (including top management), and major instrumentation, and quality system policies.

B. Changes to scope of accreditation.

1. DGS-DCLS DCLS may approve a laboratory's application to add a new matrix, technology, analyte, or test method to a laboratory's scope of accreditation or otherwise modify the laboratory's scope of accreditation by performing a data review.

2. To apply, the owner of the accredited laboratory shall submit the following to DGS-DCLS DCLS:

a. A letter written request signed by the owner that briefly summarizes the addition to be made to the laboratory's scope of accreditation.

b. Pertinent information demonstrating the laboratory's capability to perform the additional matrix, technology/method, or analyte/analyte group analyte, such as proficiency testing performance and quality control performance.

c. A written standard operating procedure covering the new matrix, technology/method, or analyte/analyte group analyte.

3. DGS-DCLS DCLS may approve a laboratory's application for modification to its scope of accreditation by performing a review of the application materials submitted, without an on-site assessment. The addition of a new technology or test method requiring the use of specific equipment may require an on-site assessment. Other reviews of performance and documentation may be carried out by DGS-DCLS DCLS, depending on the modification for which the laboratory applies.

4. Within 90 calendar days of the receipt of the application from the accredited environmental laboratory, DGS-DCLS DCLS shall review and determine whether the proposed modification may be approved.

5. If the proposed modification to the laboratory's scope of accreditation is approved, DGS-DCLS DCLS shall amend the laboratory's certificate of accreditation.

6. DCLS shall not send the amended certificate of accreditation to the laboratory until DCLS receives the payment of the fee required under 1VAC30-46-150 E 1.

C. Change of ownership or location of laboratory.

1. The accredited laboratory shall submit a written notification to DGS-DCLS DCLS of the change of ownership or location of the laboratory within 30 calendar days of the change. This requirement applies only to fixed-based and not pertaining to change of location does not apply to mobile laboratories.

2. Accreditation may be transferred when the legal status or ownership of a accredited laboratory changes as long as the transfer does not affect the laboratory's personnel, equipment, or organization.

3. If the laboratory's personnel, equipment, or organization are affected by the change of legal status or ownership, DGS-DCLS DCLS may require reaccreditation or reapplication in any or all of the categories for which the laboratory is accredited.

4. DGS-DCLS DCLS may require an on-site assessment depending on the nature of the change of legal status or ownership. DGS-DCLS DCLS shall determine the elements of any on-site assessment required.

5. When there is a change in ownership, the new owner of the accredited laboratory shall assure historical traceability of the laboratory accreditation numbers.

6. 5. When there is a change in ownership, the new owner of the accredited laboratory shall keep for a minimum of five years all records and analyses performed by the previous owner under his scope of accreditation for a period of five years pertaining to accreditation. These records and analyses are subject to inspection by DGS-DCLS DCLS during this five-year period. This provision applies regardless of change of ownership, accountability or liability.

D. Voluntary withdrawal. Any environmental laboratory owner who wishes to withdraw the laboratory from its accreditation status or from being accredited, in total or in part, shall submit written notification to DGS-DCLS no later than 30 calendar days before the end of the laboratory's accreditation term DCLS. Within 30 calendar days, DGS-DCLS DCLS shall provide the laboratory with a written notice of withdrawal.

1VAC30-46-95. Suspension of accreditation.

A. Before withdrawing accreditation, DCLS may suspend accreditation from an environmental laboratory in total or in part to allow the laboratory time to correct the reason for which DCLS may withdraw accreditation. Suspension is limited to the reasons listed in subsection B of this section.

B. DCLS may suspend accreditation from an environmental laboratory in part or in total when the laboratory has failed to do any of the following:

1. Participate in the proficiency testing program as required by 1VAC30-46-210 B.

2. Complete proficiency testing studies and maintain a history of at least two successful proficiency testing studies for each accredited field of testing out of the three most recent proficiency testing studies as defined in 1VAC30-46-210 B.

3. Maintain a quality system as defined in 1VAC30-46-210 C.

4. Employ staff that meets the personnel qualifications of 1VAC30-46-210 A.

5. Notify DCLS of any changes in key accreditation criteria as set forth in 1VAC30-46-90.

C. Process to suspend accreditation.

1. When DCLS determines that cause exists to suspend a laboratory, the agency shall send notification to the responsible official and the technical manager stating the agency's determination that the laboratory has failed to meet the 1VAC30-46 standards for one or more of the reasons listed in subsection B of this section. DCLS shall send the notification by certified mail.

2. In its notice, DCLS shall request the laboratory to notify DCLS in writing if the laboratory believes the agency is incorrect in its determination.

3. The notification shall state that the laboratory is required to take corrective action whenever a failure occurs and to document the corrective action. The notification shall require the laboratory to provide DCLS with documentation of the corrective action taken with regard to its failure to meet a standard under this chapter.

4. The notification shall state what the laboratory is required to do to restore its accreditation status and the time allowed to do so.

5. The environmental laboratory may proceed to correct the deficiencies for which DCLS has suspended the laboratory's accreditation.

6. Alternatively the laboratory may state in writing that DCLS is incorrect in its determination regarding suspension, giving specific reasons why the laboratory believes DCLS should not suspend accreditation.

7. With the exception of subdivision B 4 of this section, DCLS may allow the laboratory up to 60 days to correct the problem for which it may have its accreditation suspended.

8. DCLS shall set a date for suspension that follows the period provided under subdivision [ B ] 7 of this [ section subsection ] to restore accreditation.

9. If the laboratory does not correct its deficiencies within the time period allowed, DCLS shall suspend a laboratory in part or in total.

10. DCLS shall notify the laboratory by letter of its suspension status. DCLS shall send the notification by certified mail. DCLS shall also notify the pertinent Virginia state agency of the laboratory's suspension status.

11. The laboratory may provide information demonstrating why suspension is not warranted in accordance with the standard referenced in the initial DCLS notification. If such information is not provided prior to the suspension date, the laboratory accepts the DCLS decision to suspend.

12. The laboratory has the right to due process as set forth in 1VAC30-46-110.

D. Responsibilities of the environmental laboratory and DCLS when accreditation has been suspended.

1. The term of suspension shall be limited to six months or the period of accreditation whichever is longer.

2. The environmental laboratory shall not continue to analyze samples or report analysis for the fields of accreditation for which DCLS has suspended accreditation.

3. The environmental laboratory shall retain accreditation for the fields of accreditation, methods, and analytes where it continues to meet the requirements of this chapter.

4. The laboratory's suspended accreditation status shall change to accredited when the laboratory demonstrates to DCLS that the laboratory has corrected the deficiency or deficiencies for which its accreditation was suspended.

5. An environmental laboratory with suspended accreditation shall not have to reapply for accreditation if the cause or causes for suspension are corrected within the term of suspension.

6. If the laboratory fails to correct the causes of suspension within the term of suspension, DCLS shall withdraw the laboratory's accreditation in total or in part.

1VAC30-46-100.Withdrawal of accreditation.

A. DGS-DCLS DCLS shall withdraw accreditation from an environmental laboratory in total if the laboratory is found to be falsifying any data or providing false information to support certification: accreditation.

B. DGS-DCLS DCLS may withdraw accreditation from an environmental laboratory in part or in total when the laboratory has failed to do any of the following:

1. Participate in the proficiency testing program as required by 1VAC30-46-210 C 1VAC30-46-210 B.

2. Complete proficiency testing studies and maintain a history of at least two successful proficiency testing studies for each affected accredited field of testing out of the three most recent proficiency testing studies as defined in 1VAC30-46-210 C 1VAC30-46-210 B.

3. Maintain a quality system as defined in 1VAC30-46-210 D 1VAC30-46-210 C.

4. Employ staff that meet meets the personnel qualifications of 1VAC30-46-210 A.

5. Submit an acceptable corrective action report plan after two opportunities as specified in 1VAC30-46-210 B 1VAC30-46-220.

6. Implement corrective action specified in the laboratory's corrective action report plan as set out under 1VAC30-46-210 B 1VAC30-46-220.

7. Notify DGS-DCLS DCLS of any changes in key accreditation criteria as set forth in 1VAC30-46-90.

8. Use correct and authorized references to the laboratory's accreditation status or that of DGS-DCLS DCLS in the laboratory's documentation and advertising as set forth in 1VAC30-46-130.

9. Allow a DCLS assessment team entry during normal business hours to conduct an on-site assessment required by 1VAC30-46-220.

10. Pay required fees specified in 1VAC30-46-150.

C. DGS-DCLS DCLS shall follow the process specified in 1VAC30-46-110 when withdrawing accreditation from an environmental laboratory.

D. Responsibilities of the environmental laboratory and DGS-DCLS DCLS when accreditation has been withdrawn.

1. Laboratories that lose their accreditation in full shall return their certificate to DGS-DCLS DCLS.

2. If a laboratory loses accreditation in part, an addendum to the certificate shall be issued by DGS-DCLS DCLS shall issue a revised certificate to the laboratory.

3. The laboratory shall discontinue the use of all materials that contain either a reference to the environmental laboratory's past accreditation status or that display the NELAC/NELAP TNI logo. These materials may include catalogs, advertising, business solicitations, proposals, quotations, laboratory analytical results reports, or other materials.

4. The environmental laboratory shall not continue to analyze samples or report analyses for the fields of accreditation for which DCLS has withdrawn accreditation.

E. After correcting the reason or cause for the withdrawal of accreditation under 1VAC30-46-100 A or B, the laboratory owner may reapply for accreditation under 1VAC30-46-70 B and E.

1VAC30-46-110. Procedures to deny or withdraw accreditation, to withdraw accreditation, and appeal procedures.

A. Notification.

1. If DGS-DCLS believes it has grounds DCLS determines that cause exists to deny accreditation to or withdraw accreditation from an environmental laboratory, DGS-DCLS DCLS shall notify the environmental laboratory in writing of its intent to hold an informal fact finding under § 2.2-4019 of the Code of Virginia in order to make a decision on the denial of accreditation or withdrawal of accreditation determination. DGS-DCLS DCLS shall send this notification by certified mail to the responsible official and provide a copy to the technical director manager of the environmental laboratory. The notice of informal fact finding shall provide a detailed explanation of the basis for the notice.

2. For denial of accreditation, the notice shall state that the laboratory has failed to meet the standards in 1VAC30-46 and shall specify one or more of the reasons for denial of accreditation under 1VAC30-46-70 L, providing a detailed explanation of the basis for the denial of accreditation.

3. For withdrawal of accreditation, the notice shall state that the laboratory has failed to meet the standards in 1VAC30-46 and shall specify one or more of the reasons for withdrawal of accreditation under 1VAC30-46-100 A or B, providing a detailed explanation of the basis for the withdrawal of accreditation.

4. In its notice, DCLS shall request the laboratory to notify DCLS in writing if the laboratory believes the agency is incorrect in its determination.

5. If the laboratory believes DCLS to be incorrect in its determination, the laboratory shall provide DCLS with a detailed written demonstration of why DCLS should not deny or withdraw accreditation.

B. Following the informal fact finding held pursuant to § 2.2-4019 of the Code of Virginia, the director shall render a decision regarding accreditation, and shall send this notification by certified mail to the responsible official and provide a copy to the technical director of the environmental laboratory. If the director's decision is adverse to the environmental laboratory, the responsible official may appeal this decision in accordance with § 2.2-4026 of the Code of Virginia and Part 2A of the Rules of the Supreme Court of Virginia.

C. The provisions of this section do not preclude informal discussions between DGS-DCLS and any environmental laboratory that has been notified of a possible denial or withdrawal of accreditation. These informal discussions to resolve the concerns that prompted the notice shall be held prior to the informal fact finding proceeding.

B. An environmental laboratory may appeal a final decision by DCLS to deny or withdraw accreditation pursuant to the Administrative Process Act (§ 2.2-4000 et seq. of the Code of Virginia).

D. C. The accreditation status of an environmental laboratory appealing withdrawal of accreditation shall not change pending the final decision of the appeals filed under the Virginia Administrative Process Act (§ 2.2-4000 et seq. of the Code of Virginia) and Part 2A of the Rules of the Supreme Court of Virginia.

1VAC30-46-120. National accreditation database. Information about accredited environmental laboratories.

DGS-DCLS shall provide to NELAP the following information about environmental laboratories accredited under this chapter: (i) technical director's name; (ii) ownership and location of laboratory and any changes; (iii) key accreditation criteria and any changes; (iv) interim, as well as final, accreditation status; and (v) on-site assessment reports. DCLS shall make available to the public information identifying the environmental laboratories that it has accredited under this chapter.

1VAC30-46-130. Use of accreditation status by environmental laboratories accredited under this chapter.

A. The owner of an environmental laboratory accredited under this chapter shall not misrepresent the laboratory's fields of accreditation or its accreditation status on any document. This includes laboratory reports, catalogs, advertising, business solicitations, proposals, quotations or other materials.

B. Environmental laboratories accredited under this chapter shall comply with all of the following:

1. Post or display their most recent accreditation certificate or their fields of accreditation in a prominent place in the laboratory facility.

2. Make accurate statements concerning their fields of accreditation and accreditation status.

3. Accompany DGS-DCLS's DCLS's name or the NELAC/NELAP TNI logo or both with at least the phrase "NELAP-accredited" "TNI-accredited" and the laboratory's identification number or other identifier when DGS-DCLS's DCLS's name is used on general literature such as catalogs, advertising, business solicitations, proposals, quotations, laboratory analytical reports or other materials.

4. Not use their accreditation certificate, their accreditation status or the NELAC/NELAP TNI logo to imply endorsement by DGS-DCLS DCLS.

C. The owners of laboratories accredited under this chapter who choose to (i) use DGS-DCLS's DCLS's name; (ii) make reference to its NELAP TNI accreditation status; or (iii) use the NELAC/NELAP TNI logo in any catalogs, advertising, business solicitations, proposals, quotations, laboratory analytical reports or other materials, shall comply with both of the following:

1. Distinguish between proposed testing for which the laboratory is accredited and the proposed testing for which the laboratory is not accredited.

2. Include the laboratory's identification number or other identifier.

1VAC30-46-140. Reciprocal Secondary accreditation.

A. DGS-DCLS, when recognized by NELAP as a primary accrediting authority, DCLS may grant reciprocal secondary accreditation to an environmental laboratory that holds a current accreditation from another NELAP-recognized TNI-recognized primary accrediting authority accreditation body.

B. The owner of a NELAP-accredited TNI-accredited environmental laboratory that seeks accreditation under this chapter shall apply as specified in 1VAC30-46-70 with the exception of 1VAC30-46-70 F 1 n and o.

C. The owner of the applicant laboratory shall pay the fee required by 1VAC30-46-150.

D. DGS-DCLS DCLS shall not require a NELAP-accredited TNI-accredited environmental laboratory that seeks accreditation under this section to meet any additional proficiency testing, quality assurance, or on-site assessment requirements for the fields of accreditation for which the laboratory holds primary NELAP TNI accreditation.

E. DGS-DCLS DCLS shall consider only the current certificate of accreditation issued by the NELAP-recognized TNI-recognized primary accrediting authority accreditation body.

F. DGS-DCLS shall do the following: 1. Grant reciprocal DCLS shall grant secondary accreditation for only the fields of accreditation offered under this chapter for which the laboratory holds current primary NELAP TNI accreditation.

2. Except during the initial accreditation period, grant reciprocal accreditation and issue certificates to an applicant laboratory within 30 calendar days of receipt of the laboratory's application.

G. Potential nonconformance issues.

1. If DGS-DCLS notes any potential nonconformance with the NELAC standards by a laboratory during the initial application process for reciprocal accreditation or for a laboratory that already has been granted NELAP accreditation through reciprocal accreditation, DGS-DCLS shall immediately notify, in writing, the applicable NELAP-recognized primary accrediting authority and the laboratory. The notification shall cite the applicable sections within the NELAC standards for which nonconformance by the laboratory has been noted.

2. If the alleged nonconformance is noted during the initial application process for reciprocal accreditation, final action on the application for reciprocal accreditation shall not be taken until the alleged nonconformance issue has been resolved.

3. If the alleged nonconformance is noted after reciprocal accreditation has been granted, the laboratory shall maintain its current accreditation status until the alleged nonconformance issue has been resolved.

4. If DGS-DCLS does not believe the primary accrediting authority has taken timely and appropriate action on the potential nonconformance, DGS-DCLS shall notify the NELAP director of its concerns.

1VAC30-46-150. Fees.

A. General.

1. Fees shall be submitted Environmental laboratories shall pay a fee with all applications, including reapplications, for accreditation and all renewal applications for accreditation under 1VAC30-46-70 C 1. Applications shall not be designated as complete until the fee is received by DGS-DCLS. DCLS shall not designate an application as complete until it receives payment of the fee.

2. Fees shall be nonrefundable. Each accredited environmental laboratory shall pay an annual fee to maintain its accreditation. DCLS shall send an invoice to the accredited environmental laboratory.

3. An environmental laboratory applying for reciprocal secondary accreditation under this chapter 1VAC30-46-140 shall pay the same fee as other laboratories subject to this chapter.

4. Fees shall be nonrefundable.

B. Fee computation.

1. The fee shall be the total of the base fee and the test category fees.

2. The test category fees cover categories for the test methods to be accredited as specified in the laboratory's application.

3. If the total of the base fee and the test category fees is more than the maximum fee, the laboratory shall pay the maximum fee.

1. Fees shall be applied on an annual basis.

2. Environmental laboratories shall pay the total of the base fee and the test category fees set out in subsections C and D of this section [ for the first twelve months following (insert the effective date of this chapter) ].

[ 3. Environmental laboratories shall pay the total of the base fee and the test category fees required by subsections C and D of this section as adjusted by the method set out in subsection E of this section beginning the second 12 months following (insert the effective date of this chapter) and for each of the 12-month periods that follow. ]

C. Base fee. The base fee shall be $1,700.

1. DCLS determines the base fee for a laboratory by taking into account both the total number of methods and the total number of field of accreditation matrices for which the laboratory would be accredited.

2. DCLS shall charge the base fees set out in Table 1. The base fee for a laboratory is located by first finding the row for the total number of methods to be accredited and then finding the box on that row located in the column headed by the total number of matrices to be accredited. For example, DCLS charges a base fee of $1300 to a laboratory performing a total of eight methods for one matrix.

TABLE 1: BASE FEES

Number of Methods

One Matrix

Two Matrices

Three Matrices

Four or more Matrices

1 - 9

$1300

$1430

$1575

$1730

10 - 29

$1400

$1575

$1750

$1950

30 - 99

$1550

$1825

$2150

$2550

100 - 149

$1650

$1980

$2375

$2850

150+

$1800

$2250

$2825

$3525

D. Maximum fee. The maximum fee shall be $5,200.

E. D. Test category fees.

1. The test category fees cover the types of testing for which a laboratory may be accredited as specified in the laboratory's application or as accredited at the time of annual billing.

1. 2. Fees shall be charged for each category of tests to be accredited.

3. Fees shall be charged for the total number of field of accreditation matrices to be accredited under the specific test category. For example, if a laboratory is performing inorganic chemistry for both nonpotable water and solid and chemical matrices, the fee for this test category would be found in the column for two matrices.

2. 4. The fee for each category includes one or more analytical methods unless otherwise specified. With the exception of the test categories labeled oxygen demand and physical, test categories related to test methods for water are defined by 40 CFR 136.3.

5. Test category fees. DCLS shall charge the test category fees set out in Table 2. The test category fees for a laboratory are located by first finding the row with the total number of test methods for the test category to be accredited. The fee to be charged for the test category will be found on that row in the column headed by the total number of matrices to be accredited. A laboratory performing four test methods for bacteriology in both nonpotable and drinking water (two matrices) would be charged a test category fee of $330.

3. Fees.

TEST CATEGORY

FEE

Oxygen demand (BOD or COD)

$375

Bacteriology

$375

Inorganic chemistry, fewer than four methods

$375

Inorganic chemistry, four or more methods

$750

Chemistry metals, one - two methods

$450

Chemistry metals, more than two methods

$1,000

Organic chemistry, fewer than four methods

$600

Organic chemistry, four or more methods

$1,200

Aquatic toxicity, acute methods only

$400

Aquatic toxicity, acute and chronic methods

$700

Radiochemical

$1,000

Physical

$375

TABLE 2: TEST CATEGORY FEES

Fees by Number of Matrices

Test Category

One

Two

Three or More

Aquatic toxicity, acute methods only

$400

N/A

N/A

Aquatic toxicity, acute and chronic methods

$600

N/A

N/A

Oxygen demand

$225

$335

$435

Bacteriology, 1 - 3 total methods

$175

$265

$345

Bacteriology, 4 or more total methods

$220

$330

$430

Physical, 1 - 5 total methods

$175

$265

$345

Physical, 6 - 10 total methods

$220

$330

$430

Physical, 11 or more total methods

$275

$415

$540

Inorganic chemistry, 1 - 10 total methods

$250

$375

$490

Inorganic chemistry, 11 - 20 total methods

$315

$475

$620

Inorganic chemistry, 21 - 49 total methods

$394

$590

$767

Inorganic chemistry, 50 or more total methods

$492

$740

$962

Chemistry metals, 1 - 5 total methods

$325

$490

$637

Chemistry metals, 6 - 20 total methods

$410

$615

$800

Chemistry metals, 21 or more total methods

$512

$770

$1000

Organic chemistry, 1 - 5 total methods

$400

$600

$780

Organic chemistry, 6 - 20 total methods

$500

$750

$975

Organic chemistry, 21 - 40 total methods

$625

$940

$1222

Organic chemistry, 41 or more total methods

$780

$1170

$1520

Radiochemical, 1 - 10 total methods

$600

$900

$1170

Radiochemical, 11 or more total methods

$725

$1090

$1420

Asbestos

$725

$1090

$1420

6. Fee examples. Three examples are provided.

a. Example 1:

Base Fee

One matrix and four test methods

$1300

Test Category Fees

One Matrix

Nonpotable Water

Bacteriology
(2 methods)

$175

Nonpotable Water

Oxygen demand
(1 method)

$225

Nonpotable Water

Physical
(1 method)

$175

TOTAL

$1875

b. Example 2:

Base Fee

One matrix and 15 test methods

$1400

Test Category Fees

One Matrix

Nonpotable Water

Bacteriology
(2 methods)

$175

Nonpotable Water

Inorganic chemistry
(9 methods)

$250

Nonpotable Water

Metals (2 methods)

$325

Nonpotable Water

Oxygen demand
(1 method)

$225

Nonpotable Water

Physical (1 method)

$175

TOTAL

$2550

c. Example 3:

Base Fee

Two matrices and 27 test methods

$1575

Test Category Fees

One Matrix

Nonpotable Water

Bacteriology
(4 methods)

$220

Nonpotable Water

Oxygen demand
(1 method)

$225

Solid and Chemical Materials

Metals (1 method)

$325

Two Matrices

Nonpotable Water and Solid and Chemical Materials

Inorganic chemistry
(13 methods)

$475

Nonpotable Water and Solid and Chemical Materials

Physical
(7 methods)

$330

TOTAL

$3150

[ E. Calculation of fees - fees beginning (the thirteenth month following the effective date of this chapter).

1. DCLS shall revise the base fee and test category fee tables after the first twelve months following the effective date of this chapter and every twelve-month period thereafter.

2. DCLS shall increase or decrease the fees set out in the base fee and the test category fee tables using the Consumer Price Index-Urban (CPI-U) percentage change, average-average for the previous calendar year. (The CPI-U for all urban consumers is published by the U.S. Department of Labor, Bureau of Labor Statistics, U.S. Examples of the CPI-U average-average are -0.04, +1.6, and +3.2 percent for 2009, 2010, and 2011, respectively. DCLS would determine the fees in the tables for 2012, for example, by increasing each fee by 3.2 percent, the CPI-U average-average percentage change for 2011.)

3. DCLS shall revise each previous year's tables so that the revisions will be cumulative, reflecting the changes in the CPI-U over time.

4. DCLS shall round the revised fees to the nearest dollar.

5. DCLS shall publish the revised base fee and test category fee tables annually on its VELAP website.

F. E. ] Additional fees. Additional fees shall be charged to laboratories applying for the following: (i) modification to scope of accreditation under 1VAC30-46-90 B, (ii) transfer of ownership under 1VAC30-46-90 C, (iii) request that multiple, noncontiguous laboratory sites be considered as one site under 1VAC30-46-60 B 3, or (iv) (iii) petition for a variance under 1VAC30-46-160.

1. For any accredited environmental laboratory that applies to modify its scope of accreditation as specified under 1VAC30-46-90 B, DGS-DCLS DCLS shall assess a fee determined by the method in subsection [ G F ] of this section.

2. Under 1VAC30-46-90 C, DGS-DCLS DCLS may charge a transfer fee to a certified laboratory that transfers ownership. A fee shall be charged if DGS-DCLS DCLS (i) needs to review documentation sent by the laboratory about the transfer of ownership or (ii) determines that an on-site assessment is necessary to evaluate the effect of the transfer of ownership. DGS-DCLS DCLS shall assess a fee determined by the method in subsection [ G F ] of this section. If DGS-DCLS determines that a fee should be charged, the fee shall be a minimum of $100 and a maximum of $1,000. If, under 1VAC30-46-90 C, DGS-DCLS DCLS determines that the change of ownership or location of laboratory requires reaccreditation of or reapplication by the laboratory, the laboratory shall pay the application fee required under this section.

3. Under 1VAC30-46-60 B 3, the owner of multiple non-contiguous laboratories may request that DGS-DCLS consider these laboratories to be one site. If, as a result of the request being granted, DGS-DCLS needs to perform multiple on-site assessments, DGS-DCLS shall charge a fee for the additional on-site assessments. The fee shall be the sum of reasonable travel costs and labor charges for the additional on-site assessments. The labor charges will be determined following the method in subsection G of this section.

4. 3. Under 1VAC30-46-160, any person regulated by this chapter may petition the director to grant a variance from any requirement of this chapter. DGS-DCLS DCLS shall charge a fee for the time needed to review the petition, including any on-site assessment required. The fee shall be determined by the method specified in subsection [ G F ] of this section.

[ G. F. ] Fee Additional fees determination.

1. The fee shall be the sum of the total hourly charges for all reviewers plus any on-site review costs incurred.

2. An hourly charge per reviewer shall be determined by (i) obtaining a yearly cost by multiplying the reviewer's annual salary by 1.35 (accounts for overhead such as taxes and insurance) and then (ii) dividing the yearly cost by 1,642 (number of annual hours established by Fiscal Services, DGS, for billing purposes).

3. The charge per reviewer shall be determined by multiplying the number of hours expended in the review by the reviewer's hourly charge.

4. If an on-site review is required, travel time and on-site review time shall be charged at the same hourly charge per reviewer, and any travel expenses shall be added.

[ H. G. ] Out-of-state laboratories – travel costs applying for primary accreditation.

1. The owner of an environmental laboratory located in another state who applies for primary accreditation under this chapter shall also pay a fee equal to the surcharge of $5000 plus the labor costs of the on-site assessment and reasonable travel costs associated with conducting an on-site assessment at the laboratory. Reasonable travel costs include transportation, lodging, per diem, and telephone and duplication charges. These charges shall be in addition to the fees charged under subdivision A 1 and subsections B through D of this section.

2. Once the laboratory is accredited, DCLS shall charge the annual fee specified in subdivision A 2 and subsections B through D of this section, the labor costs for the on-site assessment, and reasonable travel costs associated with conducting the on-site assessment.

[ I. H. ] DGS-DCLS DCLS shall derive the travel costs charged under subsections G and H F and G of this section from the Commonwealth of Virginia reimbursement allowances and rates for lodging, per diem, and mileage.

Part II
Standards

1VAC30-46-200. Incorporation of NELAC standards by reference of TNI standards.

A. The 2003 National Environmental Laboratory Accreditation Conference (NELAC) standards approved June 5, 2003, as specified in 1VAC30-46-210 are incorporated by reference into this chapter.

B. Laboratories applying for accreditation and accredited under this chapter shall comply with the 2003 NELAC standards incorporated by reference into 1VAC30-46-210.

C. The requirements of Chapter 4 of the 2003 NELAC standards, Accreditation Process, are incorporated by reference into this chapter unless the requirements are (i) already addressed in this chapter, (ii) superseded by Virginia law, or (iii) incorporated by reference into 1VAC30-46-210.

A. The following TNI standards are incorporated by reference into this chapter: The Standards for Environmental Laboratories and Accreditation Bodies, 2009 (The NELAC Institute (TNI)), Volume 1: Management and Technical Requirements for Laboratories Performing Environmental Analysis, and Volume 2: General Requirements for Accreditation Bodies Accrediting Environmental Laboratories, except for section 6.6 of Module 3 concerning confidential business information.

B. Environmental laboratories applying for accreditation and accredited under this chapter shall comply with the TNI standards incorporated by reference into subsection A of this section. For convenience these standards are specified by accreditation component in 1VAC30-46-210 and 1VAC30-46-220.

C. The TNI standards are organized by volume and module.

1. Volume 1 - Management and Technical Requirements for Laboratories Performing Environmental Analysis includes the following modules:

a. Proficiency Testing.

b. Quality Systems General Requirements.

c. Quality Systems for Asbestos Testing.

d. Quality Systems for Chemical Testing.

e. Quality Systems for Microbiological Testing.

f. Quality Systems for Radiochemical Testing.

g. Quality Systems for Toxicity Testing.

2. Volume 2 - General Requirements for Accreditation Bodies Accrediting Environmental Laboratories includes the following modules:

a. General Requirements.

b. Proficiency Testing.

c. On-Site Assessment.

1VAC30-46-210. Standards for accreditation.

A. Standards for personnel qualifications. The standards for personnel qualifications are the following provisions of the National Environmental Laboratory Accreditation Conference (NELAC) standards as incorporated by reference into this part: Chapter 4, Accreditation Process, specifically, Components of Accreditation and Personnel Qualifications (4.1.1) and Chapter 5, Quality Systems, specifically, Technical Requirements - Personnel (5.5.2).

B. Standards for on-site assessment. The standards for on-site assessment are the following provisions of the NELAC standards as incorporated by reference into this part.

1. Chapter 3, On-site Assessment with one exception. Subsection 3.4.5, Confidential Business Information (CBI) Considerations, shall not be incorporated by reference into this part.

2. Chapter 4, Accreditation Process, specifically, On-site Assessments and Corrective Action Reports in Response to On-site Assessment (4.1.2 and 4.1.3).

C. Standards for proficiency testing. The standards for proficiency testing are the following provisions of the NELAC standards as incorporated by reference into this part.

1. Chapter 2, Proficiency Testing, specifically, Introduction, Scope, and Applicability; Major PT Groups and Their Responsibilities; Laboratory Enrollment in Proficiency Testing Programs; Requirements for Laboratory Testing of PT Study Samples; and PT Criteria for Laboratory Accreditation (2.1, 2.2, 2.4 through 2.7).

2. Chapter 4, Accreditation Process, specifically, Proficiency Testing Samples (4.1.4).

D. Standards for quality systems.

1. The standards for quality systems are the following provisions of the NELAC standards as incorporated by reference into this part: (i) Chapter 4, specifically, Accountability for Analytical Standards and (ii) Chapter 5, Quality Systems.

2. Quality systems - scope. Chapter 5 of the NELAC standards sets out the scope of quality systems requirements. These provisions provide an overview to major aspects of the accreditation process and are set out below for emphasis:

a. Chapter 5 includes all quality assurance policies and quality control procedures that shall be delineated in a quality manual and followed to ensure and document the quality of the analytical data. Laboratories seeking accreditation shall assure implementation of all quality assurance policies and the essential applicable quality control procedures specified in this chapter. The quality assurance policies, which establish essential quality control procedures, are applicable to environmental laboratories regardless of size and complexity.

b. The intent of Chapter 5 is to provide sufficient detail concerning quality management requirements so that DGS-DCLS can evaluate environmental laboratories consistently and uniformly.

c. Chapter 5 sets out the general requirements that a laboratory has to successfully demonstrate to be recognized as competent to carry out specific environmental tests.

d. If more stringent standards or requirements are included in a mandated test method or by regulation, the laboratory shall demonstrate that such requirements are met. If it is not clear which standards or requirements are more stringent, the standard or requirement from the method or regulation is to be followed.

A. Standards for personnel. The standards for personnel are found in Section 5.2 of Volume 1, Module 2 of the TNI standards.

B. Standards for proficiency testing.

1. The standards for proficiency testing are found in (i) Module 1 and (ii) section 4.11 of Module 2 of Volume 1 of the TNI standards.

2. Additional requirements from Volume 2, Module 2 of the TNI standards.

a. A laboratory shall perform two proficiency test studies each calendar year for each FoPT. These proficiency testing studies shall be performed at least five months apart and no longer than seven months apart within the calendar year.

b. The following proficiency testing studies shall not apply when meeting the requirements of subdivision 2 a of this subsection:

(1) Studies used for corrective action to reestablish successful history in order to maintain accreditation; and

(2) Studies used to reinstate accreditation after DCLS suspends accreditation.

c. DCLS shall consider a laboratory's analytical result for a FoPT not acceptable for the following reasons:

(1) When the laboratory does not report the results within the time frames specified in Volume 1, Module 1 of the TNI standards.

(2) When the laboratory makes any reporting error or omission that results in a nonspecific match between the analytical result for the FoPT and any criterion that identifies the laboratory or the field of accreditation for which the PT sample was analyzed for the purpose of initial or continued accreditation.

d. If DCLS requests a corrective action plan from a laboratory, the laboratory shall provide the plan within 30 calendar days of the request.

e. A laboratory may withdraw from a study for any FoPT on or before the close date of the study. Withdrawing from a study shall not exempt the laboratory from meeting the semiannual analysis requirements necessary for continued accreditation.

C. Standards for quality systems.

1. General requirements for all environmental laboratories are found in Volume 1, Module 2 of the TNI standards.

2. Requirements for the specific types of testing that may be performed by an individual environmental laboratory are found in Volume 1, Modules 3 through 7 of the TNI standards.

3. Drinking water laboratories obtaining certification under this chapter shall meet the reporting requirements set out in [ 1VAC30-40 1VAC30-41 ] for compliance with 12VAC5-590-530 and 12VAC5-590-540.

1VAC30-46-220. On-site assessment.

A. The standards for on-site assessment are found in Volume 2, Module 3 of the TNI standards. The requirements specific to environmental laboratories are set out in this section.

B. DCLS shall conduct a comprehensive on-site assessment of an environmental laboratory prior to granting final primary accreditation to the laboratory.

C. Frequency of on-site assessment.

1. DCLS shall reassess each accredited laboratory every two years starting from the date of the previous assessment plus or minus six months.

2. Other on-site assessments.

a. If DCLS identified a deficiency on a previous on-site assessment, the agency may conduct a follow-up on-site assessment.

b. DCLS may conduct an on-site assessment under the following circumstances:

(1) A laboratory applies to modify its scope of accreditation;

(2) A transfer of ownership occurs that affects personnel, equipment, or the laboratory facilities; or

(3) A laboratory applies for an exemption or a variance.

c. Any other change occurring in a laboratory's operations that might reasonably be expected to alter or impair analytical capability and quality may trigger an on-site assessment.

D. Announced and unannounced on-site assessments. DCLS, at its discretion, may conduct either announced or unannounced on-site assessments. Advance notice of an assessment shall not be necessary.

E. Preparation for the on-site assessment.

1. Prior to the actual site visit, DCLS may request in writing from a laboratory those records required to be maintained by this chapter.

2. DCLS may opt not to proceed with an on-site assessment based on nonconformities found during document and record review.

F. Areas to be assessed.

1. DCLS shall assess the laboratory against the standards incorporated by reference and specified in 1VAC30-46-200 and 1VAC30-46-210.

2. The laboratory shall ensure that its quality manual, analytical methods, quality control data, proficiency test data, laboratory SOPs, and all records needed to verify compliance with the standards specified in 1VAC30-46-200 and 1VAC30-46-210 are available for review during the on-site assessment.

G. National security considerations.

1. Assessments at facilities owned or operated by federal agencies or contractors may require security clearances, appropriate badging, or a security briefing before the assessment begins.

2. The laboratory shall notify DCLS in writing of any information that is controlled for national security reasons and cannot be released to the public.

H. Arrival, admittance, and opening conference.

1. Arrival. DCLS and the laboratory shall agree to the date and schedule for announced on-site assessments.

2. Admittance of assessment personnel. A laboratory's refusal to admit the assessment personnel for an on-site assessment shall result in an automatic failure of the laboratory to receive accreditation or loss of an existing accreditation by the laboratory, unless there are extenuating circumstances that are accepted and documented by DCLS.

3. Health and safety. Under no circumstance, and especially as a precondition to gain access to a laboratory, shall assessment personnel be required or even allowed to sign any waiver of responsibility on the part of the laboratory for injuries incurred during an assessment.

4. Opening conference. An opening conference shall be conducted and shall address the following topics:

a. The purpose of the assessment;

b. The identification of assessment personnel;

c. The test methods that will be examined;

d. Any pertinent records and procedures to be examined during the assessment and the names of the individuals in the laboratory responsible for providing assessment personnel with such records;

e. The roles and responsibilities of laboratory staff and managers;

f. Any special safety procedures that the laboratory may think necessary for the protection of assessment personnel;

g. The standards and criteria that will be used in judging the adequacy of the laboratory operation;

h. Confirmation of the tentative time for the exit conference; and

i. Discussion of any questions the laboratory may have about the assessment process.

I. On-site laboratory records review and collection.

1. Records shall be reviewed by assessment personnel for accuracy, completeness, and the use of proper methodology for each analyte and test method to be evaluated.

2. Records required to be maintained pursuant to this chapter shall be examined as part of an assessment for accreditation.

J. Observations of and interviews with laboratory personnel.

1. As an element of the assessment process, the assessment team shall evaluate an analysis regimen by requesting that the analyst normally conducting the procedure give a step-by-step description of exactly what is done and what equipment and supplies are needed to complete the regimen. Any deficiencies shall be noted and discussed with the analyst. In addition, the deficiencies shall be discussed in the closing conference.

2. Assessment personnel may conduct interviews with appropriate laboratory personnel.

3. Calculations, data transfers, calibration procedures, quality control and quality assurance practices, adherence to test methods, and report preparation shall be assessed for the complete scope of accreditation with appropriate laboratory analysts.

K. Closing conference.

1. Assessment personnel shall meet with representatives of the laboratory following the assessment for a closing conference.

2. During the closing conference, assessment personnel shall inform the laboratory of the preliminary findings and the basis for such findings. The laboratory shall have an opportunity to provide further explanation or clarification relevant to the preliminary findings. If the laboratory objects to the preliminary findings during the closing conference, all objections shall be documented by the assessment personnel and included in the final report to DCLS.

3. Additional problem areas may be identified in the final report.

L. Follow-up and reporting procedures.

1. DCLS shall provide an on-site assessment report to the laboratory documenting any deficiencies found by DCLS within 30 calendar days of the last day of the on-site assessment.

2. When deficiencies are identified in the assessment report, the laboratory shall have 30 calendar days from the date of its receipt of the on-site assessment report to provide a corrective action plan to DCLS.

3. The laboratory's corrective action plan shall include the following:

a. Any objections that the laboratory has with regard to the on-site assessment report;

b. The action that the laboratory proposes to correct each deficiency identified in the assessment report;

c. The time period required to accomplish the corrective action; and

d. Documentation of corrective action that the laboratory has already completed at the time the corrective action plan is submitted.

4. If the corrective action plan, or a portion of the plan, is determined to be unacceptable to remedy the deficiency, DCLS shall provide written notification to the responsible official and technical manager of the laboratory, including a detailed explanation of the basis for such determination. Following receipt of such notification, the laboratory shall have an additional 30 calendar days to submit a revised corrective action plan acceptable to DCLS.

5. DCLS may withdraw accreditation from a laboratory under 1VAC30-46-100 B 5 if DCLS finds the second revised corrective action plan to be unacceptable.

6. The laboratory shall submit documentation to DCLS that the corrective action set out in its plan has been completed within the time period specified in the plan.

7. DCLS, under 1VAC30-46-100 B 6, may withdraw accreditation from a laboratory if the laboratory fails to implement the corrective actions set out in its corrective action plan.

8. DCLS shall grant final accreditation as specified in 1VAC30-46-70 K upon successful completion of any required corrective action following the on-site assessment.

FORMS (1VAC30-46)

Application for Certification of Environmental Laboratories, DGS‑21‑156 (eff. 1/09).

Application for Accreditation under 1VAC30-46 - must be obtained from program staff at Lab_Cert@dgs.virginia.gov

[ Laboratory Management Qualifications, DGS-21-179 (eff. 2/09)

Applicant Laboratory Certification of Compliance, DGS-21-180 (eff. 8/12)

VELAP Request for Change of Scope - Request Authorization, DGS-21-185 (eff. 7/13)

Corrective Action (CA) Form, DGS-35-192 (rev. 4/13)

On-site Assessment Corrective Action Plan (CAP) Form, DGS-35-196 (eff. 5/13)

Sample - On-site Assessment Corrective Action Plan (CAP) Form, DGS-35-196 (eff. 5/13)

Fee Payment Form for Virginia Laboratory Certification Programs, DGS-35-232 (rev. 1/11)

Documentation Requested by VELAP Prior to Laboratory On-site Assessment, DGS-35-233 (rev. 3/13)

Demonstration of Capability Certification Statement, DGS-35-234 (eff. 4/10) ]

DOCUMENTS INCORPORATED BY REFERENCE (1VAC30-46)

2003 National Environmental Laboratory Accreditation Conference (NELAC) Standards, EPA/600/R-04/003, Approved at Ninth NELAC Annual Meeting, June 5, 2003.

The Standards for Environmental Laboratories and Accreditation Bodies, 2009, The NELAC Institute (TNI), P.O. Box 2439, Weatherford, TX 76086; www.nelac-institute.org:

Volume 1: Management and Technical Requirements for Laboratories Performing Environmental Analysis (EL-V1-2009)

Volume 2: General Requirements for Accreditation Bodies Accrediting Environmental Laboratories (EL-V2-2009)

VA.R. Doc. No. R12-3067; Filed August 12, 2015, 1:19 p.m.
TITLE 4. CONSERVATION AND NATURAL RESOURCES
MARINE RESOURCES COMMISSION
Final Regulation

REGISTRAR'S NOTICE: The Marine Resources Commission is claiming an exemption from the Administrative Process Act in accordance with § 2.2-4006 A 11 of the Code of Virginia; however, the commission is required to publish the full text of final regulations.

Title of Regulation: 4VAC20-280. Pertaining to Speckled Trout and Red Drum (amending 4VAC20-280-60).

Statutory Authority: § 28.2-201 of the Code of Virginia.

Effective Date: September 1, 2015.

Agency Contact: Jennifer Farmer, Regulatory Coordinator, Marine Resources Commission, 2600 Washington Avenue, 3rd Floor, Newport News, VA 23607, telephone (757) 247-2248, FAX (757) 247-2002, or email jennifer.farmer@mrc.virginia.gov.

Summary:

The amendment removes the Class 1 misdemeanor penalty for any person fishing recreationally with any gear type in possession of more than three red drum to conform to Chapter 108 of the 2014 Acts of Assembly, which repealed § 28.2-304 of the Code of Virginia.

4VAC20-280-60. Penalty.

A. Pursuant to § 28.2-304 of the Code of Virginia, any person violating any provision of 4VAC20-280-40 C of this chapter shall be guilty of a Class 1 misdemeanor.

B. Pursuant to § 28.2-903 of the Code of Virginia, any person violating any provision of this chapter other than 4VAC20-280-40 C shall be guilty of a Class 3 misdemeanor, and a second or subsequent violation of any provision of this chapter, other than 4VAC20-280-40 C, committed by the same person within 12 months of a prior violation is a Class 1 misdemeanor.

VA.R. Doc. No. R16-4484; Filed August 27, 2015, 9:47 a.m.
TITLE 4. CONSERVATION AND NATURAL RESOURCES
MARINE RESOURCES COMMISSION
Final Regulation

REGISTRAR'S NOTICE: The Marine Resources Commission is claiming an exemption from the Administrative Process Act in accordance with § 2.2-4006 A 11 of the Code of Virginia; however, the commission is required to publish the full text of final regulations.

Title of Regulation: 4VAC20-720. Pertaining to Restrictions on Oyster Harvest (amending 4VAC20-720-15, 4VAC20-720-20, 4VAC20-720-40, 4VAC20-720-60 through 4VAC20-720-80).

Statutory Authority: § 28.2-201 of the Code of Virginia.

Effective Date: September 1, 2015.

Agency Contact: Jennifer Farmer, Regulatory Coordinator, Marine Resources Commission, 2600 Washington Avenue, 3rd Floor, Newport News, VA 23607, telephone (757) 247-2248, FAX (757) 247-2002, or email jennifer.farmer@mrc.virginia.gov.

Summary:

The amendments (i) include effort controls on sale and resale of specific oyster licenses, with exceptions, and restriction on agents for public oyster gear licensees; (ii) change coordinates and correct a direction in oyster harvest area descriptions; (iii) update open oyster harvest seasons and areas; (iv) set Friday as an additional unlawful day to take, catch, or possess oysters from public grounds; (v) provide a vessel limit of 24 bushels only to the oyster areas designated as hand scrape gear areas listed in 4VAC20-720-40 B 8 through B 14 and a no-vessel limit for harvesters in hand tong gear areas listed in 4VAC20-720-40 B 2 through B 7 and B 15; and (vi) establish a 12-bushel vessel limit in the hand tong gear area listed in 4VAC20-720-40 B 1.

4VAC20-720-15. Control date, effort control, and agents.

A. The commission hereby establishes July 1, 2014, as the control date for management of all public oyster fisheries in Virginia. Participation by any individual in any public oyster fishery after the control date will not be considered in the calculation or distribution of oyster fishing rights should entry limitations be established. Any individual entering the public oyster fishery after the control date will forfeit any right to future participation in the public oyster fishery should further entry limitations be established by the commission.

B. The sale of oyster hand scrape and oyster dredge licenses to individuals who have not previously held these licenses shall be suspended until the commission reinstates the sale of those licenses. The sale of oyster patent tong licenses to individuals who had not purchased that license during the period from July 1, 2013, through August 25, 2015, shall be suspended until the commission reinstates the sale of those licenses.

C. For any lawful open public oyster harvest season, commercial licenses for oyster hand scrape and oyster dredge shall only be sold to those registered commercial fishermen who have been determined by the commission to be eligible to purchase either of these licenses as of December 1, 2015, for license year 2016, except as described in subsection D of this section.

D. It shall be unlawful for any registered commercial fisherman who paid an oyster resource user fee for using one or more gear types from July 1, 2013, through June 30, 2015, but during that same time period reported less than 20 days of harvest by oyster hand scrape or oyster dredge to purchase either of those gear licenses after November 30, 2015.

E. Any registered commercial fisherman with an oyster harvest status, as described in subsection D of this section, may appeal his license ineligibility to the commission if that person can document that a medical hardship, active military duty, or a substantial error in his mandatory harvest reporting records prevented him from reporting at least 20 days of oyster harvest from using oyster dredge or oyster hand scrape gear.

F. Beginning January 1, 2016, valid oyster hand scrape and oyster dredge for commercial licenses may be transferred to an immediate family member of the licensee. In cases of death or incapacitation of a licensee, these same licenses may be transferred to a registered commercial fisherman who paid a current oyster resource user fee for one or more gear types. A registered commercial fisherman who holds a current oyster resource user fee for one or more gear types and is a current oyster hand scrape or oyster dredge licensee may transfer that oyster hand scrape or oyster dredge license. All such transfers shall be documented by the commission and shall be subject to the approval of the commission.

G. No person shall serve as an agent for any public oyster gear licensee.

4VAC20-720-20. Definitions.

The following words and terms when used in this chapter shall have the following meanings unless the context clearly indicates otherwise:

"Aid to navigation" means any public or private day beacon, lighted channel marker, channel buoy, lighted channel buoy, or lighthouse that may be at, or adjacent to, any latitude and longitude used in area descriptions.

"Clean culled oyster" means any oyster taken from natural public beds, rocks, or shoals that is three inches or greater in shell length.

"Coan River Area" means that area of the Coan River inside of Public Grounds 77 and 78 of Northumberland County.

Public Ground 77 of Northumberland County is located near the mouth of the Coan River, beginning at a point approximately 2,300 feet northeast of Honest Point and 1,300 feet southwest of Travis Point, said point being Corner 1, located at Latitude 37° 59.5257207' N., Longitude 76° 27.8810639' W.; thence southwesterly to Corner 2, Latitude 37° 59.3710259' N., Longitude 76° 27.9962148' W.; thence southwesterly to Corner 3, Latitude 37° 59.2953830' N., Longitude 76° 28.0468953' W.; thence northwesterly to Corner 4, Latitude 37° 59.3350863' N., Longitude 76° 28.0968837' W.; thence northeasterly to Corner 5, Latitude 37° 59.3965161' N., Longitude 76° 28.0287342' W.; thence northwesterly to Corner 6, Latitude 37° 59.4758507' N., Longitude 76° 28.1112280' W.; thence north-northwesterly to Corner 7, Latitude 37° 59.5079401' N., Longitude 76° 28.1230058' W.; thence northeasterly to Corner 8, Latitude 37° 59.5579153' N., Longitude 76° 27.9889429' W.; thence southeasterly to Corner 1, said corner being the point of beginning.

Public Ground 78 of Northumberland County is located near the mouth of the Coan River, beginning at a point approximately 3,420 feet southeast of Travis Point and 3,260 feet northwest of Great Point, said point being Corner 1, located at Latitude 37° 59.4822275' N., Longitude 76° 27.1878637' W.; thence southeasterly to Corner 2, Latitude 37° 59.3824046' N., Longitude 76° 27.1088650' W.; thence southwesterly to Corner 3, Latitude 37° 59.2283287' N., Longitude 76° 27.8632901' W.; thence northeasterly to Corner 4, Latitude 37° 59.4368502' N., Longitude 76° 27.6868001' W.; thence continuing northeasterly to Corner 5, Latitude 37° 59.5949216' N., Longitude 76° 27.5399436' W.; thence southeasterly to Corner 1, said corner being the point of beginning.

"Deep Rock Area" means all public grounds and unassigned grounds, in that area of the Chesapeake Bay near Gwynn Island, beginning at Cherry Point at the western-most point of the eastern headland of Kibble Pond located at Latitude 37° 30.9802148' N., Longitude 76° 17.6764393' W.; thence northeasterly to the Piankatank River, Flashing Green Channel Light "3", Latitude 37° 32.3671325' N., Longitude 76° 16.7038334' W.; thence east-southeasterly to the Rappahannock River Entrance Lighted Buoy G"1R", Latitude 37° 32.2712833' N., Longitude 76° 11.4813666' W.; thence southwesterly to the southern-most point of Sandy Point, the northern headland of "The Hole in the Wall", Latitude 37° 28.1475258' N., Longitude 76° 15.8185670' W.; thence northwesterly along the Chesapeake Bay mean low water line of the barrier islands of Milford Haven, connecting headland to headland at their eastern-most points, and of Gwynn Island to the western-most point of the eastern headland of Kibble Pond on Cherry Point, said point being the point of beginning.

"Deep Water Shoal State Replenishment Seed Area" or "DWS" means that area in the James River near Mulberry Island, beginning at a point approximately 530 feet west of Deep Water Shoal Light, said point being Corner 1, located at Latitude 37° 08.9433287' N., Longitude 76° 38.3213007' W.; thence southeasterly to Corner 2, Latitude 37° 09.5734380' N., Longitude 76° 37.8300582' W.; thence southwesterly to Corner 3, Latitude 37° 08.9265524' N., Longitude 76° 37.0574269' W.; thence westerly to Corner 4, Latitude 37° 08.4466039 N., Longitude 76° 37.4523346' W.; thence northwesterly to Corner 5, Latitude 37° 08.4491489' N., Longitude 76° 38.0215553' W.; thence northeasterly to Corner 1, said corner being the point of beginning.

"Great Wicomico River Area" means all public grounds and unassigned grounds, in that area of the Great Wicomico River, Ingram Bay, and the Chesapeake Bay, beginning at a point on Sandy Point, Latitude 37° 49.3269652' N., Longitude 76° 18.3821766' W.; thence easterly to the southern-most point of Cockrell Point, Latitude 37° 49.2664838' N., Longitude 76° 17.3454434' W.; thence easterly following the mean low water line of Cockrell Point to a point on the boundary of Public Ground 115 at Cash Point, Latitude 37° 49.2695619' N., Longitude 76° 17.2804046' W.; thence southeasterly to the gazebo on the pierhead at Fleets Point, Latitude 37° 48.7855824' N., Longitude 76° 16.9609311' W.; thence southeasterly to the Great Wicomico Lighthouse; thence due south to a point due east of the southern-most point of Dameron Marsh, Latitude 37° 46.6610003' N., Longitude 76° 16.0570007' W.; thence due east west to the southern-most point of Dameron Marsh, Latitude 37° 46.6609070' N., Longitude 76° 17.2670707' W.; thence along the mean low water line of Dameron Marsh, north and west to Garden Point, Latitude 37° 47.2519872' N., Longitude 76° 18.4028142' W.; thence northwesterly to Windmill Point, Latitude 37° 47.5194547' N., Longitude 76° 18.7132194' W.; thence northerly along the mean low water to the western headland of Harveys Creek, Latitude 37° 47.7923573' N., Longitude 76° 18.6881450' W.; thence east-southeasterly to the eastern headland of Harveys Creek, Latitude 37° 47.7826936' N., Longitude 76° 18.5469879' W.; thence northerly along the mean low water line, crossing the entrance to Towels Creek at the offshore ends of the jetties and continuing to Bussel Point, Latitude 37° 48.6879208' N., Longitude 76° 18.4670860' W.; thence northwesterly to the northern headland of Cranes Creek, Latitude 37° 48.8329168' N., Longitude 76° 18.7308073' W.; thence following the mean low water line northerly to a point on Sandy Point, said point being the point of beginning.

"Hand scrape" means any device or instrument with a catching bar having an inside measurement of no more than 22 inches, which is used or usable for the purpose of extracting or removing shellfish from a water bottom or the bed of a body of water.

"Hand tong" or "ordinary tong" means any pincers, nippers, tongs, or similar device used in catching oysters, which consist of two shafts or handles attached to opposable and complementary pincers, baskets, or containers operated entirely by hand, from the surface of the water and has no external or internal power source.

"James River Area" means those public grounds of the James River and Nansemond River west of the Monitor Merrimac Memorial Bridge Tunnel (Route I-664), northeast of the Mills E. Godwin, Jr. Bridge (U.S. Route 17) on the Nansemond River, and south of the James River Bridge (U.S. Route 17).

"James River Seed Area" means all public grounds and unassigned grounds in that area of the James River and its tributaries with a southeastern boundary beginning at a point on the shore on the south side of the river at Rainbow Farm Point in Isle of Wight County located at Latitude 37° 00.1965862' N., Longitude 76° 34.0712010' W.; thence north-northeasterly to a VMRC Marker "STH", Latitude 37° 00.9815328 N., Longitude 76° 33.5955842' W.; thence to a VMRC Marker "SMT", at Latitude 37° 01.3228160' N., Longitude 76° 33.3887351' W.; thence to the Flashing Green Channel Light #5, at Latitude 37° 02.3449949' N., Longitude 76° 32.7689936' W.; thence northeasterly to a VMRC Marker "NMT", Latitude 37° 02.7740540' N., Longitude 76° 32.0960864' W.; thence to a VMRC Marker "NTH" located at Latitude 37° 03.2030055' N., Longitude 76° 31.4231211' W.; thence to a point on the north shore of the river at Blunt (Blount) Point, in the City of Newport News, located at Latitude 37° 03.3805862' N., Longitude 76° 31.1444562' W.; the northern boundary, being a straight line, beginning at a point on the shore on the east side of the river in the City of Newport News, at Latitude 37° 08.4458787' N., Longitude 76° 37.2855533' W.; thence westerly to the southeast corner of the Deep Water Shoal State Replenishment Seed Area, Latitude 37° 08.4466039' N., Longitude 76° 37.4523346' W.; thence westerly to the southwest corner of the Deep Water Shoal State Replenishment Seed Area, Latitude 37° 08.4490472' N., Longitude 76° 38.0215554' W.; thence westerly to a point on the shore on the west side of the river at the mouth of Lawnes Creek in Isle of Wight County, Latitude 37° 08.4582990' N., Longitude 76° 40.2816023' W.

"Latitude and longitude" means values that are based upon a geodetic reference system of the North American Datum of 1983 (NAD83). When latitude and longitude are used in any area description, in conjunction with any physical landmark, to include aids to navigation, the latitude and longitude value is the legal point defining the boundary.

"Little Wicomico River" means that area of the Little Wicomico River inside of Public Ground 43 of Northumberland County, located in the Little Wicomico River near Bridge Creek, beginning at a point approximately 150 feet north of Peachtree Point, said point being Corner 1, located at Latitude 37° 53.2910650' N., Longitude 76° 16.7312926' W.; thence southwesterly to Corner 2, Latitude 37° 53.2601877' N., Longitude 76° 16.8662408' W.; thence northwesterly to Corner 3, Latitude 37° 53.2678470' N., Longitude 76°16.8902408' W.; thence northeasterly to Corner 4, Latitude 37° 53.3113148' N., Longitude 76° 16.8211543' W.; thence southeasterly to Corner 1, said corner being the point of beginning.

"Milford Haven" means that area of Milford Haven inside of Public Ground 7 of Mathews County, beginning at a point approximately 1,380 feet east of Point Breeze, said point being Corner 1, located at Latitude 37° 28.3500000' N., Longitude 76° 16.5000000' W.; thence northeasterly to Corner 2, Latitude 37° 28.3700000' N., Longitude 76° 16.4700000' W.; thence southeasterly to Corner 3, Latitude 37° 28.3500000' N., Longitude 76° 16.4200000' W.; thence southwesterly to Corner 4, Latitude 37° 28.3200000' N., Longitude 76° 16.4500000' W.; thence northwesterly to Corner 1, said corner being the point of beginning.

"Mobjack Bay Area" means those areas of Mobjack Bay consisting of Public Ground 25 of Gloucester County (Tow Stake) and that portion of Public Ground 2 of Mathews County known as Pultz Bar described as:

Public Ground 25 of Gloucester County, known as Tow Stake, is located in Mobjack Bay, near the mouth of the Severn River, beginning at a point approximately 2,880 feet east-northeast of Tow Stake Point, said point being Corner 1, located at Latitude 37° 20.3883888' N., Longitude 76° 23.5883836' W.; thence northeasterly to Corner 2, Latitude 37° 30.5910482' N., Longitude 76° 23.2372184' W.; thence southeasterly to Corner 3, Latitude 37° 20.3786971' N., Longitude 76° 22.7241180' W.; thence southwesterly to Corner 4, Latitude 37° 19.8616759' N., Longitude 76° 23.5914937' W.; thence northwesterly to Corner 5, Latitude 37° 20.0284019' N., Longitude 76° 23.7717423' W.; thence northeasterly to Corner 1, said corner being the point of beginning.

Public Ground 2 of Mathews County, known as Pultz Bar, is located in Mobjack Bay, beginning at a point approximately 5,420 feet south of Minter Point, said point being Corner 1, located at Latitude 37° 21.2500000' N., Longitude 76° 21.3700000' W.; thence easterly to Corner 2, Latitude 37° 21.2700000' N., Longitude 76° 20.9600000' W.; thence southerly to Corner 3, Latitude 37° 21.0200000' N., Longitude 76° 20.9400000' W.; thence westerly to Corner 4, Latitude 37° 21.0500000' N., Longitude 76° 21.3300000' W.; thence northerly to Corner 1, said corner being the point of beginning.

"Nomini Creek Area" means that area of Nomini Creek inside of Public Grounds 26 and 28 of Westmoreland County.

Public Ground 26 of Westmoreland County is located in Nomini Creek, north of Beales Wharf and east of Barnes Point, beginning at a point approximately 1,400 feet north of Barnes Point, said point being Corner 1, located at Latitude 38° 07.2690219' N., Longitude 76° 42.6784210' W.; thence southeasterly to Corner 2, Latitude 38° 07.0924060' N., Longitude 76° 42.4745767' W.; thence southwesterly to Corner 3, Latitude 38° 06.8394053' N., Longitude 76° 42.6704025, W.; thence northwesterly to Corner 4, Latitude 38° 06.8743004' N., Longitude 76° 42.7552151' W.; thence northeasterly to Corner 5, Latitude 38° 07.0569717' N., Longitude 76° 42.5603535' W.; thence northwesterly to Corner 1, said corner being the point of beginning.

Public Ground 28 of Westmoreland County is located at the mouth of Nomini Creek, beginning at a point approximately 50 feet west of White Oak Point, said point being Corner 1, located at Latitude 38° 07.6429987' N., Longitude 76° 43.0337082' W.; thence south-southeasterly to Corner 2, Latitude 38° 07.2987193' N., Longitude 76° 43.1101420' W.; thence northwesterly to Corner 3, Latitude 38° 07.7029267' N., Longitude 76° 43.3337762' W.; thence west to the mean low water line, Latitude 38° 07.7031535' N., Longitude 76° 43.3378345' W.; thence northerly and westerly along the mean low water line of Nomini Creek to a point southwest of Cedar Island, Latitude 38° 07.8986449' N., Longitude 76° 43.6329097' W.; thence northeasterly to a point on the mean low water line at the southern-most point of Cedar Island, Latitude 38° 07.8986449' N., Longitude 76° 43.6329097' W.; thence following the mean low water line of the southern and eastern sides of Cedar Island to a point, Latitude 38° 08.0164430' N., Longitude 76° 43.4773169' W.; thence northeasterly to Corner 4, Latitude 38° 08.0712849' N., Longitude 76° 43.4416606' W.; thence northeasterly to a point on the northern headland of Nomini Creek at the mean low water line, said point being Corner 5, Latitude 38° 08.2729626' N., Longitude 76° 43.3105315' W.; thence following the mean low water line of White Point to a point northwest of Snake Island, Corner 6, Latitude 38° 08.4066960' N., Longitude 76° 42.9105565' W.; thence southeast, crossing the mouth of Buckner Creek, to a point on the mean low water line of Snake Island, Corner 7, Latitude 38° 08.3698254' N., Longitude 76° 42.8939656' W.; thence southeasterly following the mean low water line of Snake Island to Corner 8, Latitude 38° 08.2333798' N., Longitude 76° 42.7778877' W.; thence south-southwesterly, crossing the mouth of Buckner Creek, to Corner 9, Latitude 38° 08.2134371' N., Longitude 76° 42.7886409' W.; thence southeasterly to a point on the mean low water line of the southern headland of Buckner Creek, Corner 10, Latitude 38° 08.1956281' N., Longitude 76° 42.7679625' W.; thence southwesterly following the mean low water line of Nomini Creek, crossing the mouth of an un-named cove at the narrowest point between the headlands and continuing to follow the mean low water line to a point on White Oak Point, Latitude 38° 07.6428228' N., Longitude 76° 43.0233530' W.; thence west to Corner 1, said point being the point of beginning.

"Oyster" means any shellfish of the species Crassostrea virginica.

"Oyster dredge" means any device having a maximum weight of 150 pounds with attachments, maximum width of 50 inches, and maximum tooth length of four inches.

"Oyster patent tong" means any patent tong not exceeding 100 pounds in gross weight, including any attachment other than rope and with the teeth not to exceed four inches in length.

"Oyster resource user fee" means a fee that must be paid each calendar year by anyone who grows, harvests, shucks, packs, or ships oysters for commercial purposes.

"Pocomoke Sound Area" means that area of Pocomoke Sound inside of Public Grounds 9 and 10 of Accomack County.

Public Ground 9 of Accomack County is located in the Pocomoke Sound, beginning at a corner on the Maryland-Virginia state line, located in the Pocomoke Sound approximately 1.06 nautical miles north-northeast of the northern-most point of North End Point, said point being Corner 1, located at Latitude 37° 57.2711566' N., Longitude 75° 42.2870790' W. (NAD83); thence east-northeasterly along the Maryland-Virginia state line to Corner 2, Latitude 37° 57.2896577' N., Longitude 75° 41.9790727' W.; thence southerly to Corner 3, Latitude 37° 57.2574850' N., Longitude 75° 41.9790730' W.; thence southwesterly to Corner 4, Latitude 37° 57.2288700' N., Longitude 75° 42.0077287' W.; thence west-southwesterly to Corner 5, Latitude 37° 57.2034533' N., Longitude 75° 42.1511250' W.; thence south-southwesterly to Corner 6, Latitude 37° 57.0940590' N., Longitude 75° 42.1935214' W.; thence south-southeasterly to Corner 7, Latitude 37° 57.0551726' N., Longitude 75° 42.1814457' W.; thence southwesterly to Corner 8, Latitude 37° 56.9408327' N., Longitude 75° 42.2957912' W.; thence south-southwesterly to Corner 9, Latitude 37° 56.6574947' N., Longitude 75° 42.3790819' W.; thence southwesterly to Corner 10, Latitude 37° 56.5790952' N., Longitude 75° 42.5228752' W.; thence west-southwesterly to Corner 11, Latitude 37° 56.5712564' N., Longitude 75° 42.5915437' W.; thence south-southeasterly to Corner 12, Latitude 37° 56.5441067' N., Longitude 75° 42.5869894' W.; thence southwesterly to Corner 13, Latitude 37° 56.4575045' N., Longitude 75° 42.7458050' W.; thence west-southwesterly to Corner 14, Latitude 37° 56.2575123' N., Longitude 75° 43.3791097' W.; thence southwesterly to Corner 15, Latitude 37° 55.7408688' N., Longitude 75° 43.7957804' W.; thence westerly to Corner 16, Latitude 37° 55.7575327' N., Longitude 75° 43.9458298' W.; thence northwesterly to Corner 17, Latitude 37° 55.8908661' N., Longitude 75° 44.1291309' W.; thence north-northeasterly to Corner 18, Latitude 37° 55.9908639' N., Longitude 75° 44.0791266' W.; thence northeasterly to Corner 19, Latitude 37° 56.1241858' N., Longitude 75° 43.8791328' W.; thence north-northeasterly to Corner 20, Latitude 37° 56.4075136' N., Longitude 75° 43.7291361' W.; thence northeasterly to Corner 21, Latitude 37° 56.8241664' N., Longitude 75° 43.2624601' W.; thence north-northeasterly to Corner 22, Latitude 37° 57.0706006' N., Longitude 75° 43.1480402' W.; thence east-northeasterly along the Maryland-Virginia state line to Corner 1, said corner being the point of beginning.

Public Ground 10 of Accomack County is located in the Pocomoke Sound, beginning at a corner on the Maryland-Virginia state line, located in the Pocomoke Sound approximately 2.3 nautical miles westerly of the northern-most point of North End Point, said point being Corner 1, located at Latitude 37° 56.4741881' N., Longitude 75° 45.7051676' W. (NAD83); thence east-northeasterly along the Maryland-Virginia state line to Corner 2, Latitude 37° 56.9261140' N., Longitude 75° 43.7679786' W.; thence south-southwesterly to Corner 3, Latitude 37° 56.1241948' N., Longitude 75° 44.3624962' W.; thence west-southwesterly to Corner 4, Latitude 37° 56.0820561' N., Longitude 75° 44.5826292' W.; thence northerly to Corner 5, Latitude 37° 56.1377309' N., Longitude 75° 44.5817745' W.; thence west-southwesterly to Corner 6, Latitude 37° 56.1259751' N., Longitude 75° 44.6226859' W.; thence southwesterly to Corner 7, Latitude 37° 56.1039335' N., Longitude 75° 44.6692334' W.; thence southerly to Corner 8, Latitude 37° 56.0643616' N., Longitude 75° 44.6750106' W.; thence west-southwesterly to Corner 9, Latitude 37° 55.9742005' N., Longitude 75° 45.1458109' W.; thence west-northwesterly to Corner 10, Latitude 37° 56.0741973' N., Longitude 75° 45.8958329' W.; thence north-northwesterly to Corner 11, Latitude 37° 56.2565760' N., Longitude 75° 46.0000557' W.; thence northeasterly along the Maryland-Virginia state line to Corner 1, said corner being the point of beginning.

"Pocomoke and Tangier Sounds Management Area" or "PTSMA" means the area as defined in § 28.2-524 of the Code of Virginia.

"Pocomoke and Tangier Sounds Rotation Area 1" means all public grounds and unassigned grounds, within an area of the PTSMA, in Pocomoke and Tangier Sounds, bounded by a line beginning at a point on the Maryland-Virginia state line, located at Latitude 37° 54.6136000' N., Longitude 75° 53.9739600' W.; thence south to the house on Great Fox Island, Latitude 37° 53.6946500' N., Longitude 75° 53.8898800' W.; thence westerly to a point, Latitude 37° 53.3633500' N., Longitude 75° 56.5589600' W.; thence south to a point, Latitude 37° 48.4429100' N., Longitude 75° 56.4883600' W.; thence easterly to the north end of Watts Island, Latitude 37° 48.7757800' N., Longitude 75° 53.5994100' W.; thence northerly to the house on Great Fox Island, Latitude 37° 53.6946500' N., Longitude 75° 53.8898800' W.; thence southeasterly to Pocomoke Sound Shoal Flashing Light Red "8", Latitude 37° 52.4583300' N., Longitude 75° 49.4000000' W.; thence southeasterly to Messongo Creek Entrance Buoy Green Can "1", Latitude 37° 52.1000000' N., Longitude 75° 47.8083300' W.; thence southeast to Guilford Flats Junction Light Flashing 2+1 Red "GF", Latitude 37° 50.9533300' N., Longitude 75° 46.6416700' W.; thence southerly to a point on a line from Guilford Flats Junction Light to the northern-most point of Russell Island, where said line intersects the PTSMA boundary, Latitude 37° 48.4715943' N., Longitude 75° 46.9955932' W.; thence clockwise following the PTSMA boundary to a point on the Maryland-Virginia state line, said point being the point of beginning.

"Pocomoke and Tangier Sounds Rotation Area 2" means all public grounds and unassigned grounds, within an area of the PTSMA, in Pocomoke and Tangier Sounds, bounded by a line beginning at the house on Great Fox Island, located at Latitude 37° 53.6946500' N., Longitude 75° 53.8898800' W.; thence southerly to the north end of Watts Island, Latitude 37° 48.7757800' N., Longitude 75° 53.5994100' W.; thence westerly to a point, Latitude 37° 48.4429100' N., Longitude 75° 56.4883600' W.; thence northerly to a point, Latitude 37° 53.3633500' N., Longitude 75° 56.5589600' W.; thence easterly to the house on Great Fox Island, said house being the point of beginning. Also, Pocomoke and Tangier Sounds Rotation Area 2 shall include all public grounds and unassigned grounds in the PTSMA in Pocomoke Sound bounded by a line beginning at a point on the Maryland-Virginia state line, Latitude 37° 54.6136000' N., Longitude 75° 53.9739600' W.; thence following the PTSMA boundary clockwise to a point on the line from the northern-most point of Russell Island to Guilford Flats Junction Light Flashing 2+1 Red "GF", where said line intersects the PTSMA boundary, Latitude 37° 48.4715943' N., Longitude 75° 46.9955932' W.; thence northerly to Guilford Flats Junction Light Flashing 2+1 Red "GF", Latitude 37° 50.9533300' N., Longitude 75° 46.6416700' W.; thence northwesterly to Messongo Creek Entrance Buoy Green Can "1", Latitude 37° 52.1000000' N., Longitude 75° 47.8083300' W.; thence northwesterly to Pocomoke Sound Shoal Flashing Light Red "8", Latitude 37° 52.4583300' N., Longitude 75° 49.4000000' W.; thence northwesterly to the house on Great Fox Island, Latitude 37° 53.6946500' N., Longitude 75° 53.8898800' W.; thence northerly to a point on the Maryland-Virginia state line, said point being the point of beginning.

"Public oyster ground" means all those grounds defined in § 28.2-551 of the Code of Virginia or by any other acts of the General Assembly pertaining to those grounds, all those grounds set aside by court order, and all those grounds set aside by order of the Marine Resources Commission, and may be redefined by any of these legal authorities.

"Rappahannock River Area 7" means all public grounds, in that area of the Rappahannock River, bounded downstream by a line from Rogue Point, located at Latitude 37° 40.0400000' N., Longitude 76° 32.2530000' W.; thence west-northwesterly to Flashing Red Buoy "8", Latitude 37° 40.1580000' N., Longitude 76° 32.9390000' W.; thence southwesterly to Balls Point, Latitude 37° 39.3550000' N., Longitude 76° 34.4440000' W.; and bounded upstream by a line from Punchbowl Point, Latitude 37° 44.6750000' N., Longitude 76° 37.3250000' W.; thence southeasterly to Monaskon Point, Latitude 37° 44.0630000' N., Longitude 76° 34.1080000' W.

"Rappahannock River Area 8" means all public grounds, in that area of the Rappahannock River, bounded downstream by a line from Monaskon Point, located at Latitude 37° 44.0630000' N., Longitude 76° 34.1080000' W.; thence northwesterly to Punchbowl Point, Latitude 37° 44.6750000' N., Longitude 76° 37.3250000' W.; and bounded upstream by a line from Jones Point, Latitude 37° 46.7860000' N., Longitude 76° 40.8350000' W.; thence north-northwesterly to Sharps Point, Latitude 37° 49.3640000' N., Longitude 76° 42.0870000' W.

"Rappahannock River Area 9" means all public grounds, in that area of the Rappahannock River, bounded downstream by a line from Sharps Point, located at Latitude 37° 49.3640000' N., Longitude 76° 42.0870000' W.; thence south-southeasterly to Jones Point, Latitude 37° 46.7860000' N., Longitude 76° 40.8350000' W.; and bounded upstream by the Thomas J. Downing Bridge (U.S. Route 360).

"Rappahannock River Rotation Area 1 means all public grounds, in that area of the Rappahannock River and Chesapeake Bay, bounded by a line offshore and across the mouth of the Rappahannock River from a point on the mean low water line of Windmill Point, located at Latitude 37° 36.8200000' N., Longitude 76° 16.9460000' W.; thence southeast to Windmill Point Light, Latitude 37° 35.7930000' N., Longitude 76° 14.1800000' W.; thence southwesterly to Stingray Point Light, Latitude 37° 33.6730000' N., Longitude 76° 16.3620000' W.; thence westerly to a point on the mean low water line of Stingray Point, Latitude 37° 33.6920000' N., Longitude 76° 17.9860000' W.; and bounded upstream by a line from the mean low water line west of Broad Creek, Latitude 37° 33.9520000' N., Longitude 76° 19.3090000' W.; thence northeasterly to a VMRC Buoy on the Baylor line, Latitude 37° 34.5390000' 34.5310000' N., Longitude 76° 19.0220000' 19.1430000' W.; thence northeasterly to a VMRC Buoy, Latitude 37° 34.6830000' N., Longitude 76° 19.1000000' W.; thence northwesterly to a VMRC Buoy, Latitude 37° 35.0170000' N., Longitude 76° 19.4500000' W.; thence northwesterly to Sturgeon Bar Light “7R”, Latitude 37° 35.1500000' N., Longitude 76° 19.7330000' W.; thence continuing northwesterly to Mosquito Point Light “8R”, Latitude 37° 36.1000000' N., Longitude 76° 21.3000000' W.; thence northwesterly to the southern-most corner of the house on Mosquito Point, Latitude 37° 36.5230000' N., Longitude 76° 21.5950000' W.

"Rappahannock River Rotation Area 2" means all public grounds, in that area of the Rappahannock River, bounded downstream by a line from the southern-most corner of the house on Mosquito Point, located at Latitude 37° 36.5230000' N., Longitude 76° 21.5950000' W.; thence southeast to Mosquito Point Light "8R", Latitude 37° 36.1000000' N., Longitude 76° 21.3000000' W.; thence continuing southeasterly to Sturgeon Bar Beacon "7R", Latitude 37° 35.1500000' N., Longitude 76° 19.7330000' W.; thence west-southwesterly to a VMRC Buoy, Latitude 37° 34.9330000' N., Longitude 76° 21.0500000' W.; thence southwesterly to a VMRC Buoy, Latitude 37° 34.8830000' N., Longitude 76° 21.1000000' W.; thence southwesterly to a pier west of Hunting Creek at Grinels, Latitude 37° 34.4360000' N., Longitude 76° 26.2880000' W.; and bounded on the upstream by a line from Mill Creek Channel Marker "4", Latitude 37° 35.0830000' N., Longitude 76° 26.9500000' W.; thence northeasterly to Mill Creek Channel Marker "2", Latitude 37° 35.4830000' N., Longitude 76° 24.5670000' W.; thence northeasterly to the southern-most corner of the house on Mosquito Point, Latitude 37° 36.5230000' N., Longitude 76° 21.5950000'0 W.

"Rappahannock River Rotation Area 3" means all public grounds, in that area of the Rappahannock River, beginning from the north channel fender at the Robert O. Norris, Jr. Bridge, located at Latitude 37° 37.4830000' N., Longitude 76° 25.3450000' W.; thence southeast to the southern-most corner of the house on Mosquito Point, Latitude 37° 36.5230000' N., Longitude 76° 21.5950000' W.; thence southwest to Mill Creek Channel Marker "2", Latitude 37° 35.4830000' N., Longitude 76° 24.5670000' W.; thence southwesterly to Mill Creek Channel Marker "4", Latitude 37° 35.0830000' N., Longitude 76° 24.9500000' W.; thence northeasterly to Parrotts Creek Channel Marker "1", Latitude 37° 36.0330000' N., Longitude 76° 25.4170000' W.; thence northerly to VMRC Buoy, Latitude 37° 36.3330000' N., Longitude 76° 25.2000000' W.; thence northerly to the north channel fender of the Robert O. Norris, Jr. Bridge, said point being the point of beginning.

"Rappahannock River Rotation Area 4" means all public grounds, in that area of the Rappahannock River, Corrotoman River and Carter Creek, beginning at the White Stone end of the Robert O. Norris, Jr. Bridge (State Route 3), located at Latitude 37° 38.1290000' N., Longitude 76° 24.7220000' W.; thence along said bridge to the north channel fender, Latitude 37° 37.4830000' N., Longitude 76° 25.3450000' W.; thence westerly to the VMRC Buoy "5-4", Latitude 37° 38.0050000' N., Longitude 76° 30.0280000' W.; thence northerly to Old House Point, Latitude 37° 39.1390000' N., Longitude 76° 29.6850000' W.; thence northeasterly to Ball Point, Latitude 37° 41.6600000' N., Longitude 76° 28.6320000' W.; thence southeasterly to VMRC reef marker "Ferry Bar – North", Latitude 37° 40.3000000' N., Longitude 76° 28.5000000' W.; thence southwesterly to VMRC reef marker "Ferry Bar – South", Latitude 37° 40.1670000' N., Longitude 76° 28.5830000' W.; thence southeasterly to a duck blind west of Corrotoman Point, Latitude 37° 39.8760000' N., Longitude 76° 28.4200000' W.; thence southerly to VMRC Buoy "543", Latitude 37° 39.2670000' N., Longitude 76° 27.8500000' W.; thence southerly to VMRC Buoy "Drumming-West", Latitude 37° 38.8830000' N., Longitude 76° 27.6830000' W.; thence southerly to VMRC Buoy "Drumming-East", Latitude 37° 38.8330000' N., Longitude 76° 27.5670000' W.; thence northeasterly to Orchard Point, Latitude 37° 38.9240000' N., Longitude 76° 27.1260000' W.

"Rappahannock River Rotation Area 5" means all public grounds, in that area of the Rappahannock River, beginning at the Greys Point end of the Robert O. Norris, Jr. Bridge (State Route 3), located at Latitude 37° 36.8330000' N., Longitude 76° 25.9990000' W.; thence northeasterly along the bridge to the north channel fender, Latitude 37° 37.4830000' N., Longitude 76° 25.3450000' W.; thence west-northwesterly to VMRC Buoy "5-4", Latitude 37° 38.0050000' N., Longitude 76° 30.0280000' W.; thence westerly to Buoy "R6", Latitude 37° 38.0330000' N., Longitude 76° 30.2830000' W.; thence south to the eastern headland of Whiting Creek, Latitude 37° 36.6580000' N., Longitude 76° 30.3120000' W.

"Rappahannock River Rotation Area 6" means all public grounds, in that area of the Rappahannock River, beginning on the eastern headland of Whiting Creek, located at Latitude 37° 36.6580000' N., Longitude 76° 30.3120000' W.; thence north to Buoy "R6", Latitude 37° 38.0330000' N., Longitude 76° 30.2830000' W.; thence northwesterly to VMRC White House Sanctuary Buoy, Latitude 37° 38.1500000' N., Longitude 76° 30.5330000' W.; thence northwesterly to VMRC Towles Point Area Buoy, Latitude 37° 38.8330000' N., Longitude 76° 31.5360000' W.; thence northwesterly to Flashing Red Buoy "8" off Rogue Point, Latitude 37° 40.1580000' N., Longitude 76° 32.9390000' W.; thence southwesterly to Balls Point, Latitude 37° 39.3550000' N., Longitude 76° 34.4440000' W.

"Seed oyster" means any oyster taken by any person from natural beds, rocks, or shoals that is more than 30 days from harvest for human consumption.

"Thomas Rock Area" means all public grounds and unassigned grounds, in that area of the James River, with an eastern boundary being the upstream side of the James River Bridge (U.S. Route 17), and a western boundary being a line drawn from the south side of the river at Rainbow Farm Point, a point on the shore, in line with VMRC Markers "STH" and "SMT", located at Latitude 37° 00.1965862' N., Longitude 76° 34.0712010' W.; thence north-northeasterly to a VMRC Marker "STH", Latitude 37° 00.9815328 N., Longitude 76° 33.5955842' W.; thence to a VMRC Marker "SMT", at Latitude 37° 01.3228160' N., Longitude 76° 33.3887351' W.; thence to the Flashing Green Channel Light #5, at Latitude 37° 02.3449949' N., Longitude 76° 32.7689936' W.; thence northeasterly to a VMRC Marker "NMT", Latitude 37° 02.7740540' N., Longitude 76° 32.0960864' W.; thence to a VMRC Marker "NTH" located at Latitude 37° 03.2030055' N., Longitude 76° 31.4231211' W.; thence to a point on the north shore of the river at Blunt (Blount) Point, said point being in line with VMRC Markers "NMT" and "NTH" and located at Latitude 37° 03.3805862' N., Longitude 76° 31.1444562' W.

"Unassigned ground" means all those grounds defined by any other acts of the General Assembly pertaining to those grounds, all those grounds set aside by court order, and all those grounds set aside by order of the Marine Resources Commission, and may be redefined by any of these legal authorities.

"Upper Chesapeake Bay - Blackberry Hangs Area" means all public grounds and unassigned grounds, in that area of the Chesapeake Bay, bounded by a line, beginning at a point approximately 300 feet east of the mean low water line of the Chesapeake Bay and approximately 1,230 feet southwest of the end of the southern-most stone jetty at the mouth of the Little Wicomico River, said point being Corner 1, Latitude 37° 53.1811193' N., Longitude 76° 14.1740146' W.; thence east-southeasterly to Corner 2, Latitude 37° 52.9050025' N., Longitude 76° 11.9357257' W.; thence easterly to Corner 3, Latitude 37° 52.9076552' N., Longitude 76° 11.6098145' W.; thence southwesterly to Corner 4, Latitude 37° 52.8684955' N., Longitude 76° 11.6402444' W.; thence east-southeasterly to Corner 5, Latitude 37° 52.7924853' N., Longitude 76° 11.0253352' W.; thence southwesterly to Corner 6, Latitude 37° 49.4327736' N., Longitude 76° 13.2409959' W.; thence northwesterly to Corner 7, Latitude 37° 50.0560555' N., Longitude 76° 15.0023234' W.; thence north-northeasterly to Corner 8, Latitude 37° 50.5581183' N., Longitude 76° 14.8772805' W.; thence north-northeasterly to Corner 9, Latitude 37° 52.0260950' N., Longitude 76° 14.5768550' W.; thence northeasterly to Corner 1, said corner being the point of beginning.

"Yeocomico River Area" means that area of the North West Yeocomico River, inside Public Ground 8 of Westmoreland County and those areas of the South Yeocomico River inside Public Grounds 102, 104, and 107 of Northumberland County.

Public Ground 8 of Westmoreland County is located in the North West Yeocomico River, beginning at a point approximately 1,455 feet northeast of Crow Bar and 1,850 feet northwest of White Point, said point being Corner 1, located at Latitude 38° 02.7468214' N., Longitude 76° 33.0775726' W.; thence southeasterly to Corner 2, Latitude 38° 02.7397202' N., Longitude 76° 33.0186286' W.; thence southerly to Corner 3, Latitude 38° 02.6021644' N., Longitude 76° 33.0234175' W.; thence westerly to Corner 4, Latitude 38° 02.6006669' N., Longitude 76° 33.0824799' W.; thence northerly to Corner 1, said corner being the point of beginning.

Public Ground 102 of Northumberland County is located in the South Yeocomico River, beginning at a point approximately 630 feet south of Mundy Point and 1,745 feet southwest of Tom Jones Point, said point being Corner 1, located at Latitude 38° 01.2138059' N., Longitude 76° 32.5577201' W.; thence east-northeasterly to Corner 2, Latitude 38° 01.2268644' N., Longitude 76° 32.4497849' W.; thence southwesterly to Corner 3, Latitude 38° 01.1091209' N., Longitude 76° 32.5591101' W.; thence northerly to Corner 1, said corner being the point of beginning.

Public Ground 104 of Northumberland County is located in the South Yeocomico River, beginning at a point approximately 670 feet north of Walker Point and 1,900 feet northwest of Palmer Point, said point being Corner 1, located at Latitude 38° 00.8841841' N., Longitude 76° 32.6106215' W.; thence southeasterly to Corner 2, Latitude 38° 00.8609163' N., Longitude 76° 32.5296302' W.; thence southeasterly to Corner 3, Latitude 38° 00.6693092' N., Longitude 76° 32.4161866' W.; thence southwesterly to Corner 4, Latitude 38° 00.6418466' N., Longitude 76° 32.5394849' W.; thence northwesterly to Corner 1, said corner being the point of beginning.

Public Ground 107 of Northumberland County is located in the South Yeocomico River, beginning at a point approximately 1,000 feet southwest of Barn Point and 1,300 feet northwest of Tom Jones Point, said point being Corner 1, located at Longitude 38° 01.1389367' N., Latitude 76° 32.3425617' W.; thence east-southeasterly to Corner 2, Latitude 38° 01.4106421' N., Longitude 76° 32.1077962' W.; thence southwesterly to Corner 3, Latitude 38° 01.2717197' N., Longitude 76° 32.2917989' W.; thence north-northwesterly to Corner 1, said corner being the point of beginning.

"York River Rotation Area 1" means all public grounds in the York River, within Gloucester County, between a line from Upper York River Flashing Red Channel Marker "8", Latitude 37° 17.8863666' N., Longitude 76° 34.6534166' W.; thence northeasterly to Red Day Marker "2" at the mouth of Cedar Bush Creek, Latitude 37° 18.6422166' N., Longitude 76° 33.8216000' W.; upstream to a line from the Flashing Yellow VIMS Data Buoy "CB", Latitude 37° 20.4670000' N., Longitude 76° 37.4830000' W.; thence northeasterly to the inshore end of the wharf at Clay Bank.

"York River Rotation Area 2" means all public grounds in the York River, within Gloucester County, from the George P. Coleman Memorial Bridge (U.S. Route 17), upstream to a line from Upper York River Flashing Red Channel Marker "8", Latitude 37° 17.8863666' N., Longitude 76° 34.6534166' W.; thence northeasterly to Red Day Marker "2" at the mouth of Cedar Bush Creek, Latitude 37° 18.6422166' N., Longitude 76° 33.8216000' W.

4VAC20-720-40. Open oyster harvest season and areas.

A. It shall be unlawful for any person to harvest oysters from public and unassigned grounds outside of the seasons and areas set forth in this section.

B. It shall be unlawful to harvest clean cull oysters from the public oyster grounds and unassigned grounds except during the lawful seasons and from the lawful areas as described in the following subdivisions of this subsection.

1. James River Seed Area, including the Deep Water Shoal State Replenishment Seed Area: October 1, 2014 2015, through April 30, 2015 2016.

2. James River Area and the Thomas Rock Area (James River): November 1, 2014, through January 31, 2015 Milford Haven: December 1, 2015, through February 29, 2016.

3. York River Rotation Area 1: January 1, 2015, through February 28, 2015 Rappahannock River Area 9: November 1, 2015, through December 31, 2015.

4. Milford Haven: December 1, 2014, through February 28, 2015 Little Wicomico River: October 1, 2015, through December 31, 2015.

5. Deep Rock Area: December 1, 2014, through February 28, 2015 Coan River: October 1, 2015, through December 31, 2015.

6. Rappahannock River Rotation Area 1: October 1, 2014, through November 30, 2014 Yeocomico River: October 1, 2015, through December 31, 2015.

7. Rappahannock River Rotation Area 6: November 1, 2014, through December 31, 2014 Nomini Creek: October 1, 2015, through December 31, 2015.

8. Rappahannock River Area 7: December 1, 2014, through January 31, 2015 Mobjack Bay Area: January 1, 2016, through January 31, 2016.

9. Rappahannock River Area 8: January 1, 2015, through February 28, 2015 Rotation Area 5: October 1, 2015, through November 30, 2015.

10. Rappahannock River Area 9: November 1, 2014, through December 31, 2014 Rotation Area 3: November 1, 2015, through December 31, 2015.

11. Great Wicomico River Area: December 1, 2014 2015, through January 31, 2015 2016.

12. Upper Chesapeake Bay - Blackberry Hangs Area: December 1, 2014 2015, through January 31, 2015 2016.

13. Little Wicomico River: October 1, 2014, through December 31, 2014 James River Area and the Thomas Rock Area (James River): November 1 2015, through December 31, 2015, and March 1, 2016, through March 31, 2016.

14. Coan River: October 1, 2014, through December 31, 2014 Pocomoke and Tangier Sounds Rotation Area 1: December 1, 2015, through February 29, 2016.

15. Yeocomico River: October 1, 2014, through December 31, 2014 Deep Rock Area: December 1, 2015, through February 29, 2016.

16. Nomini Creek: October 1, 2014, through December 31, 2014 Seaside of the Eastern Shore (for clean cull oysters only): November 1, 2015, through March 31, 2016.

17. Pocomoke and Tangier Sounds Rotation Area 2: December 1, 2014, through February 28, 2015.

18. Seaside of the Eastern Shore (for clean cull oysters only): November 1, 2014, through March 31, 2015.

C. It shall be unlawful to harvest seed oysters from the public oyster grounds or unassigned grounds, except during the lawful seasons. The harvest of seed oysters from the lawful areas is described in the following subdivisions of this subsection.

1. James River Seed Area: October 1, 2014 2015, through May 31, 2015 2016.

2. Deep Water Shoal State Replenishment Seed Area: October 1, 2014 2015, through May 31, 2015 2016.

4VAC20-720-60. Day and time limit.

A. It shall be unlawful to take, catch, or possess oysters on Saturday and Sunday from the public oyster grounds or unassigned grounds in the waters of the Commonwealth of Virginia, for commercial purposes, except that this provision shall not apply to any person harvesting no more than one bushel per day by hand or ordinary tong for household use only during the season when the public oyster grounds or unassigned grounds are legally open for harvest.

B. From October 1, 2015, through December 31, 2015, it shall be unlawful to take, catch, or possess oysters on any Friday from the public oyster grounds or unassigned grounds described in 4VAC20-720-40 B 9 through B 14.

C. It shall be unlawful for any person to harvest or attempt to harvest oysters prior to sunrise or after 2 p.m. from the areas described in 4VAC20-720-40 B 1 through 17 B 15 and 4VAC20-720-40 C. In addition, it shall be unlawful for any boat with an oyster dredge aboard to leave the dock until one hour before sunrise or return to the dock after sunset, and it shall be unlawful for any boat with a hand scrape aboard to leave the dock until one-half hour before sunrise or return to the dock after sunset.

4VAC20-720-70. Gear restrictions.

A. It shall be unlawful for any person to harvest oysters in the James River Seed Area, including the Deep Water Shoal State Replenishment Seed Area;, the Rappahannock River Area 9;, Milford Haven, Little Wicomico River, Coan River, Nomini Creek and Yeocomico River, except by hand tong. It shall be unlawful for any person to have a hand scrape on board a boat that is harvesting or attempting to harvest oysters from public grounds by hand tong.

B. It shall be unlawful to harvest oysters from the seaside of the Eastern Shore area by any gear, except by hand.

C. It shall be unlawful to harvest oysters in the Rappahannock River Rotation Areas 1 and 6 Areas 3 and 5, the Rappahannock River Areas 7 and 8, James River Area, Thomas Rock Area, Upper Chesapeake Bay Blackberry Hangs Area, York River Rotation Area 1 Mobjack Bay Area, and Great Wicomico River Area, except by hand scrape.

D. It shall be unlawful for any person to have more than one hand scrape on board any boat that is harvesting oysters or attempting to harvest oysters from public grounds. It shall be unlawful for any person to have a hand tong on board a boat that is harvesting or attempting to harvest oysters from public grounds by hand scrape.

E. It shall be unlawful to harvest oysters from the Pocomoke and Tangier Sounds Rotation Area 2 Area 1, except by an oyster dredge.

F. It shall be unlawful to harvest oysters from the Deep Rock Area, except by an oyster patent tong.

4VAC20-720-75. Gear license.

A. It shall be unlawful for any person to harvest shellfish, from the hand scrape areas in the Rappahannock River, James River, Upper Chesapeake Bay, York River Mobjack Bay Area, and Great Wicomico River, unless that person has first obtained a valid hand scrape license.

B. It shall be unlawful for any person to harvest shellfish with an oyster dredge from the public oyster grounds in the Pocomoke and Tangier Sounds Rotation Area 2 Area 1, unless that person has first obtained a valid oyster dredge license.

C. It shall be unlawful for any person to harvest shellfish with a patent tong from the public oyster grounds in the Deep Rock Area, unless that person has first obtained a valid oyster patent tong license.

D. It shall be unlawful for any person to harvest shellfish with a hand tong from the public oyster grounds, as described in 4VAC20-720-70 A, unless that person has first obtained a valid hand tong license.

E. It shall be unlawful for any person to harvest shellfish by hand from the public oyster grounds on the Seaside of the Eastern Shore, as described in 4VAC20-720-40 B 16, unless that person has first obtained a valid oyster by hand license.

4VAC20-720-80. Quotas and harvest limits.

A. The lawful daily harvest and possession limit of clean cull oysters harvested from the areas described in 4VAC20-720-40 B 2 through 17 shall be eight bushels per registered commercial fisherman licensee who has paid the oyster resource user fee. It shall be unlawful for any registered commercial fisherman licensee to harvest or possess more than eight bushels per day. The lawful daily vessel limit of clean cull oysters harvested from the areas described in 4VAC20-720-40 B 2 through 17 shall be determined as the number of registered commercial fisherman licensees who have paid the oyster resource user fee on board the vessel multiplied by eight bushels with a maximum daily landing and possession limit of 24 bushels of clean cull oysters per vessel. It shall be unlawful to possess on board any vessel or to land more than the lawful daily vessel limit of clean cull oysters described in this subsection.

A. It shall be unlawful for any person who does not possess a valid commercial fisherman's registration license and a valid gear license required by harvest area, as described in 4VAC20-720-75, and has not paid the current year's oyster resource user fee to harvest or possess more than eight bushels per day. It shall be unlawful for any vessel to exceed a daily vessel limit of 24 bushels clean cull oysters harvested from the areas described in 4VAC20-720-40 B 8 through 14.

B. It shall be unlawful for any person who does not possess a valid commercial fisherman's registration license and a valid gear license required by harvest area, as described in 4VAC20-720-75, and has not paid the current year's oyster resource user fee to harvest or possess more than eight bushels per day. It shall be unlawful for any vessel to exceed a daily vessel limit for clean cull oysters harvested from the areas described in 4VAC20-720-40 B 2 through 7 and 15, whereby that vessel limit shall equal the number of registered commercial fisherman licensees on board the vessel who hold a valid gear license and who have paid the oyster resource user fee multiplied by eight.

C. It shall be unlawful for any vessel to exceed a daily vessel limit for clean cull oysters harvested from the areas described in 4VAC20-720-40 B 1, whereby that vessel limit shall equal the number of registered commercial fisherman licensees on board the vessel who hold a valid gear license and who have paid the oyster resource user fee multiplied by 12. It shall be unlawful for any person who does not possess a valid commercial fisherman's registration license and hold a valid gear license required by harvest area, as described in 4VAC20-720-75, and has not paid the current year's oyster resource user fee to harvest or possess more than 12 bushels per day.

B. D. In the Pocomoke and Tangier Sounds Rotation Area 2 1, no blue crab bycatch is allowed. It shall be unlawful to possess on board any vessel more than 250 hard clams.

VA.R. Doc. No. R16-4483; Filed August 27, 2015, 9:46 a.m.
TITLE 4. CONSERVATION AND NATURAL RESOURCES
MARINE RESOURCES COMMISSION
Final Regulation

REGISTRAR'S NOTICE: The Marine Resources Commission is claiming an exemption from the Administrative Process Act in accordance with § 2.2-4006 A 11 of the Code of Virginia; however, the commission is required to publish the full text of final regulations.

Title of Regulation: 4VAC20-1300. Living Shoreline Group 1 General Permit for Certain Living Shoreline Treatments Involving Tidal Wetlands (adding 4VAC20-1300-10 through 4VAC20-1300-50).

Statutory Authority: § 28.2-104.1 of the Code of Virginia.

Effective Date: September 1, 2015.

Agency Contact: Jennifer Farmer, Regulatory Coordinator, Marine Resources Commission, 2600 Washington Avenue, 3rd Floor, Newport News, VA 23607, telephone (757) 247-2248, or email jennifer.farmer@mrc.virginia.gov.

Summary:

This regulation establishes a general permit that authorizes and encourages the use of living shorelines as the preferred alternative for stabilizing tidal shorelines. The regulation provides for the permitting processes for living shoreline treatments by establishing procedures and qualifications for the general permit and sets forth specific criteria and permit conditions.

CHAPTER 1300
LIVING SHORELINE GROUP 1 GENERAL PERMIT FOR CERTAIN LIVING SHORELINE TREATMENTS INVOLVING TIDAL WETLANDS

4VAC20-1300-10. Purpose.

The purpose of this general permit is to provide a streamlined permitting process as an incentive to encourage property owners to utilize a living shoreline approach as appropriate, manage shoreline erosion, and promote the planting and growth of tidal wetland vegetation to restore or enhance ecosystem services. The techniques and conditions contained in this general permit are designed to limit the applicability of the permit to situations where the projects are most likely to be successful, and so as to limit the potential for adverse impacts on the environment and adjoining or nearby properties.

Approval under this general permit constitutes the commission or local wetlands board authorization required in accordance with § 28.2-1306 of the Code of Virginia. This general permit shall not conflict with or obviate the need to comply with any other federal, state, or local permitting requirement or authorization governing the proposed activity.

4VAC20-1300-20. Definitions.

The following words and terms when used in this chapter shall have the following meanings, unless the context clearly indicates otherwise:

"Chairman" means the chairman of a local wetlands board or his designee.

"Commission" or "VMRC" means the Virginia Marine Resources Commission.

"Commissioner" means the Commissioner of Marine Resources or his designee.

"Fiber log" means biodegradable fibrous material often composed of coconut fiber that is formed into rolls of various lengths and thicknesses used for erosion control and as a growing medium.

"Fiber mat" means a biodegradable fibrous material woven mat often composed of coconut fiber that is formed into mats of various sizes and thicknesses used for erosion control and as a growing medium.

"Grazing protection" means temporary structures consisting of wooden stakes, string lines, netting, and metal cages intended to protect planted wetland vegetation and introduced ribbed mussels from predation.

"Joint Permit Application" means the current Joint Permit Application utilized by the U.S. Army Corps of Engineers, Virginia Marine Resources Commission, Department of Environmental Quality, and local wetlands boards to evaluate projects involving submerged lands, wetlands, and coastal primary sand dunes and beaches for permit review, and any abbreviated application developed specifically for this general permit.

"Living shoreline" means a shoreline management practice that provides erosion control and water quality benefits; protects, restores, or enhances shoreline habitat; and maintains coastal processes through the strategic placement of plants, stone, sand fill, and other structural and organic materials.

"Ribbed mussels" means the Atlantic ribbed mussel (Geukensia demissa).

"Shell bags" means net bags of various sizes filled with oyster or clam shells used for erosion control and as a substrate for other organisms.

"Tidal wetlands" or "wetlands" means the jurisdictional area meeting the definition contained in § 28.2-1302 of the Code of Virginia.

"Wetlands board" or "board" means a local wetlands board created pursuant to § 28.2-1303 of the Code of Virginia.

"Wetlands vegetation" means the vegetative species listed in § 28.2-1302 of the Code of Virginia.

4VAC20-1300-30. Applicability and procedures.

A. This general permit shall authorize the placement of certain specified sand fill, fiber logs, fiber mats, shell bags, and temporary grazing protection in tidal wetlands, landward of mean low water, to improve the growing conditions for wetland vegetation. The establishment of oysters and ribbed mussels may be incorporated into the project design.

B. To qualify for this general permit the applicant must submit to VMRC a complete Joint Permit Application or special abbreviated application and any supplemental information deemed necessary by the commission or the applicable wetlands board chairman to fully evaluate the proposal. The commissioner will oversee administration of the provisions of the general permit.

VMRC will forward the application to the Norfolk District of the Corps of Engineers, the appropriate local wetlands board, and the Department of Environmental Quality.

C. The wetlands board and VMRC will review the application concurrently to determine whether:

1. The application is sufficiently complete to allow evaluation.

2. The project satisfactorily meets the general permit criteria.

3. The general permit process should be utilized.

If both the wetlands board chairman and the commission determine the proposal affirmatively satisfies all three requirements specified in subdivisions 1, 2, and 3 of this subsection, the commissioner shall issue the general permit. No public interest review or notification of adjoining property owners shall be required and there shall be no application processing fee or permit fee. In the event that no comment or request for additional information is received from a wetlands board chairman or designee within 21 days of being provided the application, it shall be assumed the wetlands board has no objection to the issuance of the general permit, and the commissioner may issue the permit.

Should either the wetlands board chairman or the commission determine that the proposal does not satisfy all three requirements specified in subdivisions 1, 2, and 3 of this subsection, the general permit process shall not be utilized; however, the application may be supplemented with additional information deemed necessary to qualify for the general permit, or the proposal could be reviewed in accordance with the standard provisions of the wetlands zoning ordinance contained in Chapter 13 (§ 28.2-1300 et seq.) of Title 28.2 of the Code of Virginia. Issuance of the general permit does not obviate the requirement for the permittee to comply with all other applicable local, state, and federal laws and regulations, including those laws and regulations administered by the U.S. Army Corps of Engineers, the Chesapeake Bay Preservation Act (§ 62.1-44.15:67 et seq. of the Code of Virginia), erosion and sediment control ordinances, stormwater management programs, and the Virginia Water Protection Permit programs.

4VAC20-1300-40. Specific criteria.

A. The maximum fetch at the project site shall not exceed 1/2 mile in any shore angle direction. Coarse sand should be utilized for any required fill. At a minimum the sand shall contain less than 10% very fine material (passing a #100 sieve). The sand shall not be placed in a manner that raises the elevation of any existing wetland area above the elevation of jurisdictional tidal wetlands (1.5 times the mean tide range above mean low water).

B. Appropriate wetland vegetation shall be planted in all wetland areas on which sand is placed where the resulting substrate elevation is appropriate to support the growth of wetlands vegetation. If deemed necessary to improve wetland habitat or resiliency, existing wetlands vegetation may be filled provided the project does not result in a net loss in aerial coverage of wetlands vegetation. Appropriate wetlands vegetation includes only those species listed in the tidal wetlands ordinance (§ 28.2-1302 of the Code of Virginia) that are anticipated to survive at the project site elevation and normal salinity regime. The common reed, Phragmites sp., shall not typically be considered appropriate wetlands vegetation for planting purposes.

C. Fiber logs, fiber mats, and shell bags may be utilized within the jurisdictional tidal wetland area to create a sill or to otherwise support the growth of wetlands vegetation, provided they are not placed on existing vegetation and are not stacked to a height that exceeds mean high water. The bags, mats, and fiber logs shall be maintained and promptly removed should they become displaced or unexpectedly damaged. If available, appropriate biodegradable materials are encouraged. The replacement of failed fiber logs, mats, or shell bags in the same location shall be allowed without the need to receive additional authorization. Additional sand may be placed to replace any lost sand or to adjust for substrate settlement, provided the elevation of the originally proposed grade is not exceeded.

D. Temporary grazing protection may be utilized to protect wetlands vegetation and ribbed mussels until they become established. The protective structures shall be removed once the vegetation or mussels are established. Such grazing protection is encouraged and should be considered in the project design. Any requested grazing protection shall be specified in the permit application.

E. The permittee agrees to notify the commission upon completion of the project and to provide a brief monitoring report at the end of the first full growing season following planting and after the second year of establishment. The monitoring shall be undertaken between June and September of each year and shall include at a minimum the permit number, representative photos of the site, and a brief statement concerning the success of the project. Additional documentation is encouraged to allow improved evaluation of the techniques utilized.

F. Any vegetated wetlands established under this general permit shall not be cut or harvested. Areas shall be replanted as necessary to ensure there is at least no net loss of wetland vegetation within the project area during the term of the permit. If necessary to promote the establishment of wetlands vegetation, additional sand may be placed to restore the originally proposed elevation grade.

G. Any measures taken to eradicate invasive species at the project site associated with the living shoreline activity, including Phragmites sp., shall be noted in the permit application or conducted in accordance with a plan evaluated and approved by the appropriate wetlands board or locality. Such plans shall include measures to revegetate the area with appropriate native wetlands vegetation.

H. All activities undertaken in accordance with the general permit are subject to the enforcement and penalty provisions contained in Article 4 (§ 28.2-1316 et seq.) of Chapter 13 of Title 28.2 of the Code of Virginia. Failure to comply with any criteria or condition of the general permit may constitute a violation of the permit.

4VAC20-1300-50. Permit conditions.

A. This permit grants no authority to the permittee to encroach on property rights, including riparian rights, of others.

B. The duly authorized agents of the commission and the applicable local government shall have the right to enter upon the premises at reasonable times for the purposes of inspecting the work authorized by the permit and to evaluate compliance with the terms and conditions of the permit. Although the general permit is issued by the commissioner, the applicable local wetlands board retains jurisdiction and may enforce violations and any nonconformance with the permit occurring within tidal wetlands.

C. The permittee shall comply with all applicable federal, state, and local laws, ordinances, and rules and regulations concerning the project, specifically including those related to the Corps of Engineers, water quality standards, erosion and sedimentation control, the Chesapeake Bay Preservation Act, the Stormwater Management Act, and the Virginia Water Protection Permit Program. The granting of this permit shall not relieve the permittee of the responsibility of obtaining any and all other permits or authorization for this project.

D. The permit shall not affect or interfere with the right vouchsafed to the people of Virginia concerning fowling and the catching of and taking of oysters and other shellfish in and from the waters not included within the terms of the permit.

E. The permittee shall, to the greatest extent practicable, minimize adverse impacts of the project on adjacent properties and wetlands and upon the natural resources of the Commonwealth.

F. The permit may be revoked at any time by the commission upon the failure of the permittee to comply with the terms and conditions hereof or at the will of the General Assembly of Virginia.

G. All structures authorized by this permit that are not maintained in good repair or that are displaced to areas not authorized shall be completely removed within 30 days after notification by the commission or its designated representatives.

H. The permittee agrees to indemnify and save harmless the Commonwealth of Virginia and any applicable locality from any liability arising from the establishment, operation, or maintenance of said project.

I. This general permit shall be retained by the permittee for the life of the project as evidence of authorization.

J. The project authorized by this general permit shall be completed within two years of the issuance of the permit. Upon proper request by the permittee, the permit may be extended to allow completion of the work.

NOTICE: The following form used in administering the regulation was filed by the agency. The form is not being published; however, online users of this issue of the Virginia Register of Regulations may click on the name of the form to access it through a hyperlink. The form is also available from the agency contact or may be viewed at the Office of the Registrar of Regulations, General Assembly Building, 2nd Floor, Richmond, Virginia 23219.

FORMS (4VAC20-1300)

Tidewater Joint Permit Application (JPA) for Projects Involving Tidal Waters, Tidal Wetlands, and/or Dunes and Beaches in Virginia (rev. 3/2014)

VA.R. Doc. No. R16-4482; Filed August 10, 2015, 11:00 a.m.
TITLE 8. EDUCATION
STATE BOARD OF EDUCATION
Proposed Regulation

Titles of Regulations: 8VAC20-22. Licensure Regulations for School Personnel (repealing 8VAC20-22-10 through 8VAC20-22-760).

8VAC20-23. Licensure Regulations for School Personnel (adding 8VAC20-23-10 through 8VAC20-23-800).

Statutory Authority: §§ 22.1-298.1 and 22.1-299 of the Code of Virginia.

Public Hearing Information:

October 22, 2015 - 11 a.m. - 22nd Floor Conference Room; James Monroe Building, 101 North 14th Street, Richmond, VA 23219. The public hearing will begin immediately following adjournment of the Board of Education business meeting.

Public Comment Deadline: November 6, 2015.

Agency Contact: Patty S. Pitts, Assistant Superintendent for Teacher Education and Licensure, Department of Education, P.O. Box 2120, Richmond, VA 23218, telephone (804) 371-2522, or email patty.pitts@doe.virginia.gov.

Basis: The Board of Education has the statutory authority to prescribe licensure requirements. Section 22.1-298.1 of the Code of Virginia, states, in part, the following: "…The Board of Education shall prescribe, by regulation, the requirements for the licensure of teachers and other school personnel required to hold a license…."

Article VIII, Section 4 of the Constitution of Virginia states that "The general supervision of the public school system shall be vested in a Board of Education…."

Sections 22.1-16, 22.1-298.1, 22.1-299, and 22.1-305.2 provide authority for the Board of Education to promulgate Licensure Regulations for School Personnel.

Purpose: A comprehensive review and subsequent revisions of the Licensure Regulations for School Personnel will align the regulations with recent actions of the General Assembly, current best practices in education, and with current educational research. The regulations will be aligned to the revised Virginia Standards of Learning and the Guidelines for Uniform Performance Standards and Evaluation Criteria for Teachers. Revisions to the Licensure Regulations for School Personnel will assist in ensuring that Virginia maintains high standards of professional competence for teachers and professional school personnel. In addition, these regulations establish policies and standards for the qualifications of instructional personnel, further ensuring educational quality for Virginia public school students is current and up to date. Ensuring high standards for professional competence and the qualifications of instructional personnel will provide for educational quality for public school students, which is necessary for the welfare of citizens. In revising these regulations, the Board of Education sets forth requirements for the revocation, cancellation, suspension, denial, and reinstatement of licenses.

Substance: The Board of Education has the statutory authority to prescribe licensure requirements. Section 22.1-298.1 of the Code of Virginia, states, in part, the following: "The Board of Education shall prescribe, by regulation, the requirements for the licensure of teachers and other school personnel required to hold a license…."

The Advisory Board on Teacher Education and Licensure received the proposed revisions to the Licensure Regulations for School Personnel on April 22, 2013. The advisory board unanimously recommended that the Board of Education accept the proposed revisions to the regulations in the proposed stage of the regulatory process under the Administrative Process Act.

Sections proposed to have substantive changes include the following sections:

8VAC20-22-10. Definitions. The amendments revise the definitions section of this chapter to align with proposed revisions throughout the Licensure Regulations for School Personnel.

8VAC20-22-40. Conditions for licensure. The amendments include the requirement that individuals seeking initial licensure provide evidence of training or certification in emergency first aid, cardiopulmonary resuscitation, and the use of automated external defibrillators, as prescribed in Chapters 498 and 530 of the 2013 Acts of Assembly. Text was added to clarify the endorsement requirements for the teacher of record.

8VAC20-22-50. Types of licenses; dating licenses. The amendments would revise this section to include the following:

- Issue a Provisional License for two years (with the exception of the Provisional Career Switcher License). Individuals may apply for a third year on the Provisional License by submitting documentation indicating that all licensure assessments prescribed by the Virginia Board of Education have been taken.

- Issue the International Educator License for a five-year, instead of a three-year, exchange program.

- Discontinue the Local Eligibility License by action of the 2013 General Assembly.

- Add the Online Teacher License as a five-year, renewable license valid only for teaching online courses.

- Add the Teach for America License, established as a two-year provisional license by action of the 2013 General Assembly.

8VAC20-22-90. Alternate routes to licensure. The amendments increase the requirements from three semester hours to nine semester hours of specified coursework prior to issuance of a Provisional (Special Education) License to individuals without a five-year Virginia teaching license.

8VAC20-22-110. Requirements for renewing a license. The amendments would revise this section to include the following:

- Add the requirement, as prescribed by Chapter 726 of the 2013 Acts of Assembly, that any individual licensed and endorsed to teach middle school civics or economics or high school government or history who is seeking renewal of such license is required to demonstrate knowledge of Virginia history or state and local government by completing a module or professional development course specifically related to Virginia history or state and local government.

- Add the requirement that individuals renewing a license, effective July 1, 2013, provide evidence of training or certification in emergency first aid, cardiopulmonary resuscitation, and the use of automated external defibrillators, as prescribed in Chapters 498 and 530 of the 2013 Acts of Assembly.

- Change text to allow the division superintendent or the principal to approve renewal activities and exceptions. Remove the text "for one cycle of the renewal process" to allow an exception to the content course requirements for individuals without a graduate degree beyond one renewal cycle.

8VAC20-22-130. Professional studies requirements. The amendments include changing professional study coursework titles and course content and adding an additional course requirement, "Assessment of and for Learning"; three semester hours.

8VAC20-22-1408VAC20-22-670 (endorsement areas) The amendments would revise the following endorsement areas:

- Early childhood for three-year-olds and four-year-olds (add-on endorsement) - Allow individuals who hold the early childhood special education endorsement to add this endorsement.

- Early/primary education preK-3 - Increase the coursework requirements in mathematics and science and provide an option for specified requirements and testing.

- Elementary education preK-6 - Increase the coursework requirements in mathematics and science and provide an option for specified requirements and testing.

- Middle education 6-8 - Increase the coursework requirements in mathematics.

- Career and technical education - industrial cooperative training (add-on endorsement). Discontinue the endorsement.

- Engineering - Create a new endorsement.

- Special education - general curriculum K-6 (add-on endorsement); Special education - general curriculum middle grades 6-8 (add-on endorsement); Special education - general curriculum secondary grades 6-12 (add-on endorsement) Establish new add-on endorsements.

- Administration and supervision preK-12 - Revise the alternate route to add an option of a combination of graduate-level coursework and a research-based program approved by the Department of Education and add "Principal of Distinction" to the name of the Level II endorsement, mathematics specialist for elementary education, and mathematics specialist for middle education.

- Establish separate endorsements specific to the population of students being served. Currently the endorsement is combined, mathematics specialist for elementary and middle education.

- Special education - speech language pathologist preK-12 - Discontinue issuing an initial license with an endorsement in speech/language pathology. Individuals will seek a license from the Virginia Board of Examiners for Audiology and Speech Pathology.

8VAC20-22-7208VAC20-22-800 (Part VII-Revocation, Cancellation, Suspension, Denial, and Reinstatement of Teaching Licenses) - Amendments proposed.

Issues: The primary advantages of revising the Licensure Regulations for School Personnel are to align the regulations with recent actions of the General Assembly, with current best practices in education, and with current educational research. The regulations will be aligned to the revised Virginia Standards of Learning and the Guidelines for Uniform Performance Standards and Evaluation Criteria for Teachers. Revisions to the Licensure Regulations for School Personnel will assist in ensuring that Virginia maintains high standards of professional competence for teachers and professional school personnel.

In addition, the regulations establish policies and standards for the qualifications of instructional personnel, further ensuring educational quality for Virginia public school students. In revising these regulations, the Board of Education sets forth requirements for the revocation, cancellation, suspension, denial, and reinstatement of licenses.

The regulatory action poses no disadvantages to the public or the Commonwealth.

Department of Planning and Budget's Economic Impact Analysis:

Summary of the Proposed Amendments to Regulation. The Board of Education proposes to repeal the current regulation (8 VAC 20-22) and replace it with a new regulation (8 VAC 20-23). In doing so, the Board proposes numerous amendments to the rules including:

• Requiring that individuals seeking initial licensure provide evidence of training or certification in emergency first aid, cardiopulmonary resuscitation, and the use of automated external defibrillators, as prescribed in Chapter 498 of the 2013 Acts of Assembly.

• Adding the requirement that individuals renewing a license, effective July 1, 2013, provide evidence of training or certification in emergency first aid, cardiopulmonary resuscitation, and the use of automated external defibrillators, as prescribed in Chapter 498 of the 2013 Acts of Assembly.

• Issuing a Provisional License for two years (with the exception of the Provisional Career Switcher License). Individuals may apply for a third year on the Provisional License by submitting documentation indicating that all licensure assessments prescribed by the Virginia Board of Education have been taken.

• Issuing the International Educator License for a five-year, instead of a three-year exchange program.

• Discontinuing the Local Eligibility License pursuant to Chapter 588 of the 2013 Acts of Assembly.

• Adding the Online Teacher License as a five-year, renewable license valid only for teaching online courses.

• Adding the Teach for America License, established as a two-year provisional license, pursuant to Chapter 440 of the 2013 Virginia Acts of Assembly.

• Increase the requirements from three semester hours to nine semester hours of specified coursework prior to issuance of a Provisional (Special Education) License to individuals without a five-year Virginia teaching license.

• Adding the requirement, as prescribed by Chapter 726 of the 2013 Acts of Assembly, that any individual licensed and endorsed to teach a) middle school civics or economics or b) high school government or history who is seeking renewal of such license is required to demonstrate knowledge of Virginia history or state and local government by completing a module or professional development course specifically related to Virginia history or state and local government.

• Changing text to allow the division superintendent or the principal to approve renewal activities and exceptions. Removed the text for one cycle of the renewal process to allow an exception to the content course requirements for individuals without a graduate degree beyond one renewal cycle.

• Changing professional study coursework titles and course content. An additional course requirement, Assessment of and for Learning (3 semester hours), is proposed.

• Allowing individuals who hold the early childhood special education endorsement to add the endorsement early childhood for three- and four-year-olds endorsement.

• For the early/primary education preK-3 endorsement, increasing the coursework requirements in mathematics and science and providing an option for specified requirements and testing.

• For the elementary education preK-6 endorsement, increasing the coursework requirements in mathematics and science and providing an option for specified requirements and testing.

• For the middle education 6-8 endorsement, increasing the coursework requirements in mathematics.

• Discontinuing the career and technical education industrial cooperative training endorsement.1

• Creating a new engineering endorsement.

• Establishing the following new add-on endorsements: Special education general curriculum K-6 (add-on endorsement), Special education general curriculum middle grades 6-8 (add-on endorsement), and Special education general curriculum secondary grades 6-12 (add-on endorsement).

• For administration and supervision preK-12, revising the alternate route to add an option of a combination of graduate-level coursework and a research-based program approved by the Department of Education. Adding Principal of Distinction to the name of the Level II endorsement.

• Establishing separate mathematics specialist for elementary education and mathematics specialist for middle education endorsements specific to the population of students being served. Currently the endorsement is combined, Mathematics specialist for elementary and middle education.

• Discontinuing initial licenses with an endorsement in speech/language pathology. Individuals will seek a license from the Virginia Board of Examiners for Audiology and Speech Pathology.2

Result of Analysis. The benefits likely exceed the costs for some changes. For other amendments, whether the benefits exceed the costs depend on the policy views of the observer.

Estimated Economic Impact.

First Aid, CPR, and AED Training:

The legislatively mandated proposal to require that individuals seeking initial teacher licensure and teachers seeking license renewal provide evidence of training or certification in emergency first aid, cardiopulmonary resuscitation, and the use of automated external defibrillators will introduce significant benefits and costs. Having all (or nearly all) teachers in the Commonwealth trained in emergency first aid, cardiopulmonary resuscitation, and the use of automated external defibrillators will increase the likelihood that someone with potentially lifesaving skills will be on hand during medical emergencies in the classroom. To the extent that the future teachers absorb and retain the knowledge they gain in this training, the long-run benefits may be quite significant.

For onsite training in emergency first aid, cardiopulmonary resuscitation, and the use of automated external defibrillators, the American Red Cross charges $250 plus $72 per person being trained if there at least 20 people being trained.3 So for example, if a school district arranged to have the Red Cross come in and train 50 teachers the fees would total $3,850. If teachers take courses on their own and go to a location already offering the course, the cost is $90. If done all in person, the Red Cross training would take 5.5 hours. Alternatively, the teachers could do 2 hours of online training ahead of time. In that case the in-person training would last 1.5 hours. The fees would be the same in either case, but the amount of staff time that potentially could have been used for other subjects differs.

Teach for America:

Currently individuals who go through the Teach for America training program are not permitted to teach in Virginia (unless they fulfill other requirements for provisional licensure). Pursuant to Chapter 440 of the 2013 Virginia Acts of Assembly, the Board proposes to add the Teach for America License, established as a two-year provisional license. The addition of this license will likely lead to Teach for America trained individuals teaching in Virginia. High-quality peer-reviewed research has found that Teach for America trained teachers have been particularly effective teachers in mathematics.4 Thus this proposed new license may have some positive impact on math learning in the Commonwealth.

Businesses and Entities Affected. The proposed amendments affect the 132 public school divisions in the Commonwealth, current and future teachers, and businesses or organizations that provide training in emergency first aid, cardiopulmonary resuscitation, and the use of automated external defibrillators.

Localities Particularly Affected. The proposed amendments do not disproportionately affect particular localities.

Projected Impact on Employment. The requirement that individuals seeking initial teacher licensure and teachers seeking license renewal provide evidence of training or certification in emergency first aid, cardiopulmonary resuscitation, and the use of automated external defibrillators will increase demand for these services from businesses and organizations that provide such training. The increase in demand may be enough to create additional jobs.

Effects on the Use and Value of Private Property. The requirement that individuals seeking initial teacher licensure and teachers seeking license renewal provide evidence of training or certification in emergency first aid, cardiopulmonary resuscitation, and the use of automated external defibrillators will likely increase business for firms that provide such training. This may increase the value of such organizations and firms.

Small Businesses: Costs and Other Effects. The proposed amendments are unlikely to significantly affect costs for small businesses. The requirement that individuals seeking initial teacher licensure and teachers seeking license renewal provide evidence of training or certification in emergency first aid, cardiopulmonary resuscitation, and the use of automated external defibrillators will increase demand for these services from small businesses that provide such training.

Small Businesses: Alternative Method that Minimizes Adverse Impact. The proposed amendments will not adversely affect small businesses.

Real Estate Development Costs. The proposed amendments are unlikely to significantly affect real estate development costs.

Legal Mandate.

General: The Department of Planning and Budget (DPB) has analyzed the economic impact of this proposed regulation in accordance with § 2.2-4007.04 of the Code of Virginia and Executive Order Number 14 (2010). Section 2.2-4007.04 requires that such economic impact analyses determine the public benefits and costs of the proposed amendments. Further the report should include but not be limited to:

• the projected number of businesses or other entities to whom the proposed regulatory action would apply,

• the identity of any localities and types of businesses or other entities particularly affected,

• the projected number of persons and employment positions to be affected,

• the projected costs to affected businesses or entities to implement or comply with the regulation, and

• the impact on the use and value of private property.

Small Businesses: If the proposed regulatory action will have an adverse effect on small businesses, § 2.2-4007.04 requires that such economic impact analyses include:

• an identification and estimate of the number of small businesses subject to the proposed regulation,

• the projected reporting, recordkeeping, and other administrative costs required for small businesses to comply with the proposed regulation, including the type of professional skills necessary for preparing required reports and other documents,

• a statement of the probable effect of the proposed regulation on affected small businesses, and

• a description of any less intrusive or less costly alternative methods of achieving the purpose of the proposed regulation.

Additionally, pursuant to § 2.2-4007.1, if there is a finding that a proposed regulation may have an adverse impact on small business, the Joint Commission on Administrative Rules is notified at the time the proposed regulation is submitted to the Virginia Register of Regulations for publication. This analysis shall represent DPB's best estimate for the purposes of public review and comment on the proposed regulation.

_________________________________________________

1According to the Department of Education the industrial cooperative training endorsement has never been used.

2The proposal to discontinue issuing an initial license with an endorsement in speech/language pathology resulted from a joint effort with the Department of Health Professions (DHP) to eliminate confusion as to whether these individuals should be licensed by DHP or the Department of Education. Chapter 781 of the 2014 Acts of Assembly clarified that DHP would issue the licenses; therefore the board is eliminating references to the program from its regulations.

3If there are fewer than 20 individuals being trained, the American Red Cross charges $90 per student.

4Glazerman, S., Mayer, D., & Decker, P. (2006). Alternative routes to teaching: The impacts of Teach For America on student achievement and other outcomes. Journal of Policy Analysis and Management, 25(1), 75-96.

Agency's Response to Economic Impact Analysis: The agency concurs with the economic impact analysis completed by the Department of Planning and Budget. The agency will continue to examine the economic and administrative impact of the regulations as they progress through the regulatory process under the Administrative Process Act.

Summary:

The proposed action repeals the existing regulation (8VAC20-22) and adopts a new regulation (8VAC20-23) regarding licensure for school personnel to align the regulation with recent changes in the Code of Virginia, current best practices in education, current educational research, and the revised Virginia Standards of Learning and the Guidelines for Uniform Performance Standards and Evaluation Criteria for Teachers. Substantive elements of the proposed new regulations (i) revise selected definitions to conform with changes in the proposed new regulations; (ii) require initial and renewal licensure applicants to provide evidence of training or certification in emergency first aid, cardiopulmonary resuscitation, and the use of automated external defibrillators; (iii) clarify the endorsement requirements for the teacher of record; (iv) modify the term of issuance of certain licenses; (v) discontinue the Local Eligibility License; (vi) add the Online Teacher License and the Teach for America License; (vii) increase the coursework requirements prior to issuance of a Provisional (Special Education) License to individuals without a five-year Virginia teaching license; (viii) add requirements for any individual licensed and endorsed to teach middle school civics or economics, or high school government or history, seeking license renewal; (ix) allow the division superintendent or the principal to approve renewal activities and exceptions; (x) change professional study coursework titles and course content and add a three-semester-hour course in assessment of and for learning; (xi) revise endorsement areas; (xii) discontinue issuance of an initial license with an endorsement in speech/language pathology as individuals will seek a license from the Virginia Board of Audiology and Speech-Language Pathology; and (xiii) amend the provisions on the revocation, cancellation, suspension, denial, and reinstatement of teaching licenses.

CHAPTER 23
LICENSURE REGULATIONS FOR SCHOOL PERSONNEL

Part I
Definitions

8VAC20-23-10. Definitions.

The following words and terms when used in this chapter shall have the meanings indicated unless the context clearly implies otherwise:

"Accredited institution" means an institution of higher education accredited by a regional accrediting agency recognized by the United States Department of Education.

"Accredited virtual school or program" means a virtual school or program accredited by one of the accrediting agencies recognized by the Virginia Department of Education.

"Alternate route to licensure" means a nontraditional route to licensure available to individuals who meet the criteria specified in 8VAC20-23-90.

"Approved program" means a professional education program recognized as meeting state standards for the content and operation of such programs so that graduates of the program will be eligible for state licensure. The Virginia Board of Education has the authority to approve programs in Virginia.

"Cancellation" means the withdrawal of a teaching license following the voluntary return of the license by the license holder.

"Certified provider" means a provider certified by the Virginia Department of Education to provide preparation and training for applicants seeking the Provisional License specified in 8VAC20-23-90.

"Collegiate Professional License" means a five-year, renewable license available to an individual who has satisfied all requirements for licensure set forth in this chapter, including an earned baccalaureate degree from a regionally accredited college or university and the professional teacher's assessments prescribed by the Virginia Board of Education.

"Content area coursework" means courses at the undergraduate level (i.e., two-year or four-year institution) or at the graduate level that will not duplicate previous courses, or the level of coursework, taken in humanities, English, history and social sciences, sciences, mathematics, health and physical education, and fine arts. These courses are usually available through the college or department of arts or sciences.

"Denial" means the refusal to grant a teaching license to a new applicant or to an applicant who is reapplying after the expiration of a license.

"Division Superintendent License" means a five-year, renewable license available to an individual who has completed an earned master's degree from a regionally accredited college or university and meets the requirements specified in 8VAC20-23-630. The individual's name must be listed on the Virginia Board of Education's list of eligible division superintendents.

"Experiential learning" means a process of applying for an initial license through the alternate route as prescribed by the Virginia Board of Education and meeting the criteria specified in 8VAC20-23-90 E to be eligible to request experiential learning credits in lieu of the coursework for the endorsement (teaching) content area.

"International Educator License" means a five-year cultural exchange opportunity for Virginia students and international teachers. The International Educator License is a professional teaching license issued for no more than five years to an exchange teacher with citizenship in a nation other than the United States of America and employed as teacher in a Virginia public school or an accredited nonpublic school.

"Licensure by reciprocity" means a process used to issue a license to an individual coming into Virginia from another state when that individual meets certain conditions specified in this chapter.

"Mentor" means a classroom teacher hired by the local school division who has achieved continuing contract status or other instructional personnel including retired teachers who meet local mentor selection criteria. The mentor should work in the same building as the beginning teacher or be instructional personnel who is assigned solely as a mentor. A mentor should be assigned a limited number of teachers at any time. Instructional personnel who are not assigned solely as mentors should not be assigned to more than four teachers at any time. Mentors guide teachers in the program through demonstrations, observations, and consultations.

"Online Teacher License" means a five-year, renewable license valid only for teaching online courses. Teachers who hold a five-year renewable license issued by the Virginia Board of Education may teach online courses for which they are properly endorsed and do not need to seek this license.

"Postgraduate Professional License" means a five-year, renewable license available to an individual who has qualified for the Collegiate Professional License and who holds an appropriate earned graduate degree from a regionally accredited college or university.

"Professional teacher assessment" means those tests or other requirements mandated for licensure as prescribed by the Virginia Board of Education.

"Provisional License" means a nonrenewable license valid for a specified period of time not to exceed three years issued to an individual who has allowable deficiencies for full licensure as set forth in this chapter. The individual must have a minimum of an undergraduate degree from a regionally accredited college or university, with the exception of those individuals seeking the Technical Professional License. The Provisional License, with the exception of those individuals seeking licensure through a career switcher program who will be issued a one-year Provisional License, will be issued for two years. Individuals may apply for a third year on the Provisional License by submitting documentation indicating that all licensure assessments prescribed by the Virginia Board of Education have been taken. Individuals must complete all requirements, including passing all licensure assessments, for a renewable license within the validity period of the license.

"Pupil Personnel Services License" means a five-year, renewable license available to an individual who has earned an appropriate graduate degree from a regionally accredited college or university with an endorsement as a school counselor, school psychologist, school social worker, or vocational evaluator. This license does not require teaching experience unless otherwise outlined under the specific endorsement's requirements.

"Renewable license" means a license issued by the Virginia Board of Education for five years to an individual who meets all requirements specified in this chapter.

"Revocation" means the withdrawal of a teaching license.

"School Manager License" means a five-year, renewable license intended to provide for a differentiation of administrative responsibilities in a school setting. A school manager is licensed to administer noninstructional responsibilities in an educational setting. For example, a school manager is restricted from evaluating teachers, supervising instruction, developing and evaluating curriculum, and serving as a school’s student disciplinarian. The license is available to a candidate who holds a baccalaureate degree from a regionally accredited college or university; has three years of success managerial experience; and is recommended for the license by a Virginia school division superintendent.

"Suspension" means the temporary withdrawal of a teaching license.

"Technical Professional License" means a five-year, renewable license available to an individual who has graduated from an accredited high school (or possesses a General Educational Development Certificate); has exhibited academic proficiency, technical competency, and successful occupational experience; and meets the requirements specified in subdivision 4 of 8VAC20-23-50.

Part II
Administering the Regulations

8VAC20-23-20. Administering this chapter.

A. In administering this chapter, modifications may be made in exceptional cases by the Superintendent of Public Instruction. Proposed modifications shall be made in writing to the Superintendent of Public Instruction, Commonwealth of Virginia, Virginia Department of Education, P.O. Box 2120, Richmond, Virginia 23218-2120.

B. In administering this chapter, competencies required for endorsement areas are outlined in the Regulations Governing the Review and Approval of Education Programs in Virginia (8VAC20-543). This document should be referenced for detailed information regarding coursework content for endorsements. Individuals must complete the semester hours required for endorsement areas, or the equivalent, that must be documented and approved by the Department of Education.

Part III
Licensure

8VAC20-23-30. Purpose and responsibility for licensure.

The primary purpose for licensing teachers and other school personnel is to maintain standards of professional competence. The responsibility for licensure is set forth in § 22.1-298.1 of the Code of Virginia, which states that the Virginia Board of Education shall prescribe by regulation the requirements for licensure of teachers.

8VAC20-23-40. Conditions for licensure.

A. Applicants for licensure must:

1. Be at least 18 years of age;

2. Pay the appropriate fees as determined by the Virginia Board of Education and complete the application process;

3. Have earned a baccalaureate degree, with the exception of the Technical Professional License, from a regionally accredited college or university and meet requirements for the license sought. Persons seeking initial licensure through approved programs from Virginia institutions of higher education shall only be licensed as instructional personnel by the Virginia Board of Education if the professional education programs offered at such institutions have been accredited by a national accrediting agency and the education (endorsement) programs have final approval by the Virginia Board of Education; and

4. Possess good moral character (i.e., free of conditions outlined in Part VII (8VAC20-23-720 et seq.) of this chapter.

B. All candidates who hold at least a baccalaureate degree from a regionally accredited college or university and who seek an initial Virginia teaching license must obtain passing scores on professional teacher's assessments prescribed by the Virginia Board of Education. With the exception of the career switcher program that requires assessments as prerequisites, individuals must complete the professional teacher's assessments requirements within the three-year validity of the initial provisional license. Candidates seeking a Technical Professional License, International Educator License, School Manager License, or Pupil Personnel Services License are not required to take the professional teacher's assessments. Individuals who hold a valid out-of-state license (full credential without deficiencies) and who have completed a minimum of three years of full-time, successful teaching experience in a public or an accredited nonpublic school, kindergarten through grade 12, outside of Virginia are exempt from the professional teacher's assessment requirements. Documentation must be submitted to verify the school's status as a public or an accredited nonpublic school.

C. All individuals seeking an initial endorsement in early/primary education preK-3, elementary education preK-6, special education-general curriculum, special education-deaf and hard of hearing, special education-blindness and visual impairments, and individuals seeking an endorsement as a reading specialist must obtain passing scores on a reading instructional assessment prescribed by the Virginia Board of Education.

D. Licensure by reciprocity is set forth in 8VAC20-23-100. A school leaders assessment prescribed by the Virginia Board of Education must be met for all individuals who are seeking an endorsement authorizing them to serve as principals and assistant principals in the public schools. Individuals seeking an initial administration and supervision endorsement who are interested in serving as central office instructional personnel are not required to take and pass the school leaders assessment prescribed by the Virginia Board of Education.

E. Individuals seeking initial licensure must demonstrate proficiency in the use of educational technology for instruction, complete study in child abuse recognition and intervention in accordance with curriculum guidelines developed by the Virginia Board of Education in consultation with the Virginia Department of Social Services, and receive professional development in instructional methods tailored to promote student academic progress and effective preparation for the Standards of Learning end-of-course and end-of-grade assessments.

F. Every person seeking initial licensure shall provide evidence of completion of certification or training in emergency first aid, cardiopulmonary resuscitation, and use of automated external defibrillators. The certification or training program shall be based on the current national evidenced-based emergency cardiovascular care guidelines for cardiopulmonary resuscitation and the use of an automated external defibrillator, such as a program developed by the American Heart Association or the American Red Cross. The Virginia Board of Education shall provide a waiver for this requirement for any person with a disability whose disability prohibits such person from completing the certification or training.

G. The teacher of record for verified credit courses for high school graduation must hold a Virginia license with the appropriate content endorsement.

8VAC20-23-50. Types of licenses; dating licenses.

A. The following types of licenses are available:

1. Provisional License. The Provisional License is a nonrenewable license valid for a period not to exceed three years issued to an individual who has allowable deficiencies for full licensure as set forth in this chapter. The Provisional License will be issued for two years, with the exception of those individuals seeking a Provisional License through a career switcher program. Individuals may apply for a third year on the Provisional License by submitting documentation indicating that all licensure assessments prescribed by the Virginia Board of Education (http://doe.virginia.gov/teaching/licensure/prof_teacher_assessment.pdf) have been taken. The Provisional (Career Switcher) License will be dated as set forth in 8VAC20-23-90 A 2. Individuals must complete the requirements including passing all licensure assessments, for the renewable five-year license within the validity period of the Provisional License. The individual must have a minimum of an undergraduate degree from a regionally accredited college or university, with the exception of those individuals seeking the Technical Professional License.

2. Collegiate Professional License. The Collegiate Professional License is a five-year, renewable license available to an individual who has satisfied all requirements for licensure, including an earned undergraduate degree from a regionally accredited college or university and the professional teacher's assessments prescribed by the Virginia Board of Education.

3. Postgraduate Professional License. The Postgraduate Professional License is a five-year, renewable license available to an individual who has qualified for the Collegiate Professional License and who holds an appropriate earned graduate degree from a regionally accredited college or university.

4. Technical Professional License. The Technical Professional License is a five-year, renewable license available to a person who has graduated from an accredited high school or possesses a General Educational Development Certificate; has exhibited academic proficiency, skills in literacy and communication, technical competency, and successful occupational experience; and has completed nine semester hours of specialized professional studies credit from a regionally accredited college or university. The nine semester hours of professional studies coursework must include three semester hours of human development and learning, three semester hours of curriculum and instruction, and three semester hours of applications of instructional technology or classroom and behavior management. The Technical Professional License is issued at the recommendation of an employing educational agency in the areas of career and technical education, educational technology, and military science. Individuals seeking an endorsement to teach military science must have the appropriate credentials issued by the United States military. The employing Virginia educational agency must ensure the credentials issued by the United States military are active during the period the individual is teaching. In addition to demonstrating competency in the endorsement area sought, the individual must:

a. Hold a valid license issued by the appropriate Virginia board for those program areas requiring a license and a minimum of two years of successful experience at the journeyman level or an equivalent. The employing Virginia educational agency must ensure that the valid license issued by the appropriate Virginia board for the occupational program area is active during the period the individual is teaching;

b. Have completed a registered apprenticeship program and two years of successful experience at the journeyman level or an equivalent level in the trade; or

c. Have four years of successful work experience at the management or supervisory level or equivalent or have a combination of four years of training and work experience at the management or supervisory level or equivalent.

Individuals holding the Technical Professional License who seek the Collegiate Professional or Postgraduate Professional License must meet the requirements of the respective licenses.

5. School Manager License. The school manager license is a five-year, renewable license intended to provide for the differentiation of administrative responsibilities in a school setting. A school manager is licensed to administer noninstructional responsibilities in an educational setting. For example, a school manager is restricted from evaluating teachers, supervising instruction, developing and evaluating curriculum, and serving as a school's student disciplinarian. The license is available to a candidate who holds a baccalaureate degree from a regionally accredited college or university, has three years of successful managerial experience, and is recommended for the license by a Virginia school division superintendent.

6. Pupil Personnel Services License. The Pupil Personnel Services License is a five-year, renewable license available to an individual who has earned an appropriate graduate degree from a regionally accredited college or university with an endorsement for school counselor, school psychologist, school social worker, or vocational evaluator. This license does not require teaching experience, unless otherwise outlined under the specific endorsement's requirements.

7. Division Superintendent License. The Division Superintendent License is a five-year, renewable license available to an individual who has completed an earned master's degree from a regionally accredited college or university and meets the requirements specified in 8VAC20-23-630. The individual's name must be listed on the Virginia Board of Education's list of eligible division superintendents.

8. International Educator License. The International Educator License provides a five-year cultural exchange opportunity for Virginia students and international teachers. The International Educator License is a professional teaching license issued to an exchange teacher with citizenship in a nation other than the United States of America and who is employed as a teacher in a Virginia public or accredited nonpublic school. To be issued the five-year, nonrenewable International Educator License, an individual serving as a cultural exchange teacher in Virginia must:

a. Be employed by a Virginia public or an accredited nonpublic school;

b. Hold non-United States citizenship and be a nonpermanent resident; and

c. Meet the following requirements as verified by a state-approved, federally-designated Exchange Visitor Program (22 CFR Part 62):

(1) Be proficient in written and spoken English;

(2) Demonstrate competence in the appropriate academic subject area or areas by meeting the credential requirements for a qualified teacher in the exchange country;

(3) Hold the United States equivalent of a baccalaureate degree or higher as determined by an approved credential agency; and

(4) Complete at least two years of successful full-time teaching experience that enables the educator to fulfill a similar assignment in his home country or is comparable to those requirements for Virginia teachers.

If an individual meets requirements of subdivisions 8 a, 8 b, 8 c (1), 8 c (2), and 8 c (3) of this subsection and has completed at least one year, but less than two years, of successful full-time teaching experience that enables the educator to fulfill a similar assignment in his home country or is comparable to those requirements for Virginia teachers, the International Educator License will be issued for three years with an option to extend the nonrenewable International Educator License for the additional two years upon meeting all teacher assessments prescribed by the Virginia Board of Education and a recommendation of the Virginia employing school division or accredited nonpublic school.

Individuals who have been issued an International Educator License who seek a five-year, renewable license will need to meet all licensure and endorsement requirements, including applicable assessments prescribed by the Virginia Board of Education.

9. Online Teacher License. The Online Teacher License is a five-year, renewable license valid only for teaching online courses. Teachers who hold a five-year renewable license issued by the Virginia Board of Education may teach online courses for which they are properly endorsed and do not need to seek this license.

a. The individual is required to meet requirements for an endorsement in a content (teaching) area, professional studies requirements, and qualifying scores on professional teacher's assessments as prescribed by the Virginia Board of Education. In addition, the individual must complete a three-semester-hour course in online instructional procedures.

Online instructional procedures: 3 semester hours. Skills in this area shall contribute to an understanding of the principles of online learning and online instructional strategies and the application of skills in the ability to use the Internet for teaching, learning, and management; design, deliver, and support instruction in an online environment; adapt strategies for a variety of course models (e.g., synchronous and asynchronous); select, adapt, and create rich multimedia for instruction; adapt individualized education program requirements to online course practices, as appropriate; use data to meet individual students needs; and employ innovative teaching strategies in an online environment. Demonstrated proficiency of advanced skills in the following must be addressed: use of communication technologies to interact with and engage students, parents, and mentors; use of education technologies; management of instructional activities in a technology-mediated environment; and nontraditional content delivery methods.

b. Online teaching experience is not acceptable to meet the full-time teaching experience for other license types, such as a Division Superintendent License, or for endorsements, such as for the reading specialist, school counselor, or administration and supervision endorsements. The Online Teacher License may be issued if requirements have been met as one of the following licenses to individuals teaching only online courses:

(1) Online Teacher (Postgraduate Professional) License - a five-year, renewable license available to an individual who has qualified for the Online Teacher (Collegiate Professional) License and who holds an appropriate earned graduate degree from a regionally accredited college or university.

(2) Online Teacher (Collegiate Professional) License - a five-year, renewable teaching license available to an individual who has satisfied all requirements for licensure, including an earned baccalaureate degree from a regionally accredited college or university, endorsement and professional studies requirements, and the professional teacher's assessments prescribed by the Virginia Board of Education, or

(3) Online Teacher (Technical Professional) License - a five-year, renewable teaching license available to an individual who has graduated from an accredited high school or possesses a General Educational Development Certificate; has exhibited academic proficiency, technical competency, and occupational experience; and meets the requirements specified in subdivision 4 of this section. An individual seeking an Online Teacher (Technical Professional) License must be recommended for the license by a Virginia public school, a Virginia accredited nonpublic school, or an accredited virtual school program.

c. A nonrenewable Online Teacher (Provisional) License may be issued for a period not to exceed three years to an individual who has allowable deficiencies for full licensure as set forth in 8VAC20-23-90 B. The Online (Provisional) License will be issued for two years. Individuals may apply for a third year on the Online (Provisional) License by submitting documentation indicating that all licensure assessments prescribed by the Virginia Board of Education have been taken. The individual must have a minimum of an undergraduate degree from a regionally accredited college or university, with the exception of those individuals seeking the Technical Professional License. Individuals must complete all requirements for a renewable Online Teacher License within the validity period of the license.

10. Teach For America License. The Teach For America License is a two-year provisional license.

a. This provisional license is available to any participant in Teach For America, a nationwide nonprofit organization focused on closing the achievement gaps between students in high-income and low-income areas, who submits an application and meets the following requirements:

(1) Holds, at minimum, a baccalaureate degree from a regionally accredited institution of higher education;

(2) Has met the requirements prescribed by the Virginia Board of Education for all endorsements sought or has met the qualifying scores on the content area assessment prescribed by the board for the endorsements sought;

(3) Possesses good moral character according to criteria developed by the Virginia Board of Education;

(4) Has been offered and has accepted placement in Teach For America;

(5) Has successfully completed preservice training and is participating in the professional development requirements of Teach For America, including teaching frameworks, curricula, lesson planning, instructional delivery, classroom management, assessment and evaluation of student progress, classroom diversity, and literacy development;

(6) Has an offer of employment from a local school board to teach in a public elementary or secondary school in the Commonwealth or a preschool program that receives state funds pursuant to subsection C of § 22.1-199.1 of the Code of Virginia; and

(7) Receives a recommendation from the employing school division for a Teach For America License in the endorsement area in which the individual seeks to be licensed.

b. In addition to the criteria set forth in subdivision 10 a of of this subsection, any individual who seeks an endorsement in early childhood, early/primary, or elementary education shall either (i) agree to complete such coursework in the teaching of reading as may be prescribed by the Virginia Board of Education pursuant to 8VAC20-23-130 during the first year of employment or (ii) achieve a passing score on a reading instructional assessment prescribed by the Virginia Board of Education.

c. Teachers issued a Teach For America provisional license shall not be eligible for continuing contract status while employed under the authority of a Teach For America license and shall be subject to the probationary terms of employment specified in § 22.1-303 of the Code of Virginia.

d. The Virginia Board of Education may extend any Teach For America License for one additional year upon request of the employing school division, provided that no Teach For America License shall exceed a total of three years in length.

e. Notwithstanding any provision of law to the contrary, upon completion of at least two years of full-time teaching experience in a public elementary or secondary school in the Commonwealth or a preschool program that receives state funds pursuant to subsection C of § 22.1-199.1 of the Code of Virginia, an individual holding a Teach For America License shall be eligible to receive a renewable license if he has (i) achieved satisfactory scores on all professional teacher assessments required by the Virginia Board of Education and (ii) received satisfactory evaluations at the conclusion of each year of employment.

f. Notwithstanding any provision of law to the contrary, the Virginia Board of Education shall issue a Teach For America License to any individual who (i) has completed two years of successful teaching in the Teach For America program in another state, (ii) is not eligible to receive a renewable license, and (iii) meets the criteria set forth in subdivision 10 a of this subsection.

B. All licenses will be effective from July 1 in the school year in which the application is made. An employing Virginia public school division, agency, or accredited nonpublic school is required to notify employees in writing at the time of employment of the need to meet appropriate assessment requirements for licensure.

8VAC20-23-60. Designations on licenses for career paths to teaching.

A. Designations on licenses will reflect stages in the professional development of teachers and promote continuing growth and career paths as educators.

B. Teaching licenses may be issued with one of the following designations, and the designation will be processed as an add-on endorsement. These designations will not apply to the Division Superintendent License, School Manager License, International Educator License, or Pupil Personnel Services License.

1. Career Teacher: This voluntary teacher designation will be issued on a renewable teaching license for individuals who have gained continuing contract status in Virginia and who apply for the Career Teacher designation.

2. Mentor Teacher: This voluntary teacher designation will be issued on a renewable teaching license for individuals who have (i) achieved the Career Teacher designation, (ii) received a recommendation for the designation from an employing Virginia school division superintendent or designee or accredited nonpublic school head, (iii) served at least three years as a mentor teacher in Virginia, (iv) documented responsibilities as a mentor, and (v) completed a local or state mentor teacher training program in accordance with the Virginia Board of Education requirements for mentor teachers in the Virgnia Board of Education Mentor Teacher Guidelines (http://www.doe.virginia.gov/teaching/career_resources/mentor/program_creation_guidelines.pdf).

3. Teacher as Leader: This voluntary teacher designation will be issued on a renewable teaching license for individuals who have (i) achieved the Career Teacher designation; (ii) completed at least five years of successful, full-time teaching experience in a Virginia public school or accredited nonpublic school; (iii) received the recommendation from an employing Virginia school division superintendent or designee or an accredited nonpublic school head; (iv) and completed one of the following:

a. National Board Certification or a nationally recognized certification program approved by the Virginia Board of Education and a recommendation from an employing Virginia school division superintendent or designee or accredited nonpublic school head and documentation in an approved Department of Education format verifying the individual's demonstrated skills and abilities as a school leader and direct contributions to school effectiveness and student achievement; or

b. A recommendation from an employing Virginia school division superintendent or designee or accredited nonpublic school head and documentation in an approved Department of Education format verifying the individual's demonstrated skills and abilities as a school leader and direct contributions to school effectiveness and student achievement.

8VAC20-23-70. Additional endorsements.

A. An individual who holds a teaching license may add an additional teaching endorsement to the license by passing a rigorous academic subject test for endorsements in which a test is prescribed by the Virginia Board of Education. This testing option does not apply to individuals (i) who are seeking an early/primary education preK-3 or elementary education preK-6 endorsement, special education endorsements, or a reading specialist endorsement or (ii) who hold a Technical Professional License, Vocational Evaluator License, Pupil Personnel Services License, School Manager License, or Division Superintendent License.

B. One or more endorsements may be added to a license provided specific endorsement requirements have been met. Written requests may be made by the licensed professional and should be directed to the Virginia employing educational agency or college or university. If the request is not acted upon by the local educational agency or college or university within 30 days or is disputed, the license holder may make a written request for an additional endorsement directly to the Office of Professional Licensure, Virginia Department of Education. Written requests should be submitted by January 15 to be in effect by July 1 of the same year.

8VAC20-23-80. Deletion of an endorsement.

An endorsement may be deleted from a license at the request of the licensed professional. Written requests are made by the licensed professional and should be directed to the employing educational agency. If the request is not acted upon by the local educational agency within 30 days or is disputed, the license holder may make a written request for the deletion of an endorsement directly to the Office of Professional Licensure, Virginia Department of Education. Written requests should be submitted by January 15 to be in effect on July 1 of that year. Individuals who wish to add an endorsement that has been deleted must meet requirements for that endorsement at the time it is requested.

8VAC20-23-90. Alternate routes to licensure.

A. Career switcher alternate route to licensure for career professions - Provisional (Career Switcher) License. An alternate route is available to career switchers who seek teaching endorsements preK through grade 12 with the exception of special education.

1. An individual seeking a Provisional (Career Switcher) License through the career switcher program must meet the following prerequisite requirements:

a. An application process;

b. An earned baccalaureate degree from a regionally accredited college or university;

c. The completion of requirements for an endorsement in a teaching area or the equivalent through verifiable experience or academic study;

d. At least five years of full-time work experience or its equivalent; and

e. Virginia qualifying scores on the professional teacher's assessments as prescribed by the Virginia Board of Education.

2. The Provisional (Career Switcher) License is awarded at the end of Level I preparation. All components of the career switcher alternate route for career professions must be completed by the candidate.

3. The Level I requirements must be completed during the course of a single year and may be offered through a variety of delivery systems, including distance learning programs. If an employing agency recommends extending the Provisional (Career Switcher) License for a second year, the candidate will enter Level III of the program. Career switcher programs must be certified by the Virginia Department of Education.

a. Level I preparation. Intensive Level I preparation includes a minimum of 180 clock hours of instruction, including field experience. This phase includes, but is not limited to, curriculum and instruction, including technology, reading, and other specific course content relating to the Standards of Learning; differentiation of instruction; classroom and behavior management; instructional design based on assessment data; and human development and learning.

b. Level II preparation during first year of employment.

(1) Candidate seeks employment in Virginia with the one-year Provisional (Career Switcher) License.

(2) Continued Level II preparation during the first year of employment with a minimum of five seminars that expand the intensive preparation requirements listed in subdivision 3 a of this subsection. The five seminars will include a minimum of 20 cumulative instructional hours. A variety of instructional delivery techniques will be utilized to implement the seminars.

(3) One year of successful, full-time teaching experience in a Virginia public or accredited nonpublic school under a one-year Provisional (Career Switcher) License. A trained mentor must be assigned to assist the candidate during the first year of employment. Responsibilities of the mentor include, but are not limited to, the following:

(a) Collaborate with the beginning teacher in the development and implementation of an individualized professional development plan;

(b) Observe, assess, coach, and provide opportunities for constructive feedback, including strategies for self-reflection;

(c) Share resources and materials;

(d) Share best instructional, assessment, and organizational practices; classroom and behavior management strategies; and techniques for promoting effective communication; and

(e) Provide general support and direction regarding school policies and procedures.

(4) Upon completion of Levels I and II of the career switcher alternate route to licensure program and submission of a recommendation from the Virginia educational employing agency, the candidate will be eligible to apply for a five-year, renewable license. Renewal requirements for the regular license will be subject to current regulations of the Virginia Board of Education.

c. Level III preparation, if required.

(1) Post preparation, if required, will be conducted by the Virginia employing educational agency to address the areas where improvement is needed as identified in the candidate's professional improvement plan; and

(2) Upon completion of Levels I, II, and III of the career switcher alternate route to licensure program and submission of a recommendation from the Virginia educational employing agency, the candidate will be eligible to receive a five-year renewable license.

4. Verification of program completion will be documented by the certified program provider and the division superintendent or designee.

5. Certified providers implementing a career switcher program may charge a fee for participation in the program.

B. An alternate route is available to individuals employed by an educational agency who seek teaching endorsements preK through grade 12. The employing Virginia educational agency may request a nonrenewable Provisional License on behalf of the individual if the individual has completed an allowable portion of professional studies and endorsement requirements. This route is also applicable to individuals who are employed by a Virginia public school, a Virginia accredited nonpublic school, or an accredited virtual school or program and who are seeking the Online Teacher License that is issued to teachers who teach only online courses. The Provisional License will be issued for two years. Individuals may apply for a third year on the Provisional License by submitting documentation indicating that all licensure assessments prescribed by the Virginia Board of Education have been taken. The Provisional License is a nonrenewable teaching license valid for a period not to exceed three years. Individuals must complete all licensure requirements to become eligible for the five-year, renewable license.

1. An individual seeking a license through this alternate route must have met the following requirements:

a. Entered the teaching field through the alternate route to licensure upon the recommendation of the Virginia employing educational agency. For the Online Teacher Provisional License, individuals must be employed by a Virginia public school division, a Virginia accredited nonpublic school, or an accredited virtual school or program;

b. Earned a baccalaureate degree from a regionally accredited college or university with the exception of individuals seeking the Technical Professional License;

c. Have met requirements for the endorsement area; and

d. Need to complete an allowable portion of professional studies and licensure requirements.

2. The professional studies requirements for the appropriate level of endorsement sought must be completed. A Virginia educational agency may submit to the Superintendent of Public Instruction for approval an alternate program to meet the professional studies requirements. The alternate program must include training (e.g., seminar, internship, coursework, etc.) in human development and learning; curriculum and instruction, including technology; assessment of and for learning; classroom and behavior management; the teaching profession, including legal status of teachers and students, federal and state laws, and teacher evaluation as prescribed by Virginia's Guidelines for Uniform Performance Standards and Evaluation Criteria for Teachers; and reading.

3. One year of successful, full-time teaching experience in the appropriate teaching area in a Virginia public or an accredited nonpublic school must be completed. For the Online Teacher License only, one year of successful online teaching experience in the endorsement area in a public school division, an accredited nonpublic school, or an accredited virtual school or program may be accepted in lieu of the supervised teaching experience. A fully licensed experienced teacher must be available in the school building to assist the beginning teacher employed through the alternate route.

C. Alternate route in special education. The Provisional (Special Education) License is a nonrenewable teaching license issued to an individual employed as a special education teacher in a public school or a nonpublic special education school in Virginia who does not hold the appropriate special education endorsement. The Provisional (Special Education) License will be issued for two years. Individuals may apply for a third year on the Provisional License by submitting documentation indicating that all licensure assessments prescribed by the Virginia Board of Education have been taken. The Provisional License is a nonrenewable teaching license valid for a period not to exceed three years. This alternate route to special education is not applicable to individuals seeking the Online Teacher License. To be issued the Provisional (Special Education) License through this alternate route, an individual must meet the requirements through one of the two following options:

1. Option I. The individual must hold a full, valid Collegiate Professional or Postgraduate Professional License and must:

a. Be employed by a Virginia public or nonpublic school as a special educator and have the recommendation of the employing educational agency;

b. Have earned a baccalaureate degree from a regionally accredited college or university;

c. Have an assigned mentor with an active Virginia teaching license with an endorsement in special education; and

d. Have a planned program of study in the assigned endorsement area, make progress toward meeting the endorsement requirements each of the three years of the license, and have completed at least three semester hours of coursework in the competencies of foundations for educating students with disabilities and an understanding and application of the legal aspects and regulatory requirements associated with identification, education, and evaluation of students with disabilities. A survey course integrating these competencies would satisfy this requirement.

The Provisional (Special Education) License through this alternate route shall not be issued without the completion of these prerequisites.

2. Option II. The individual must:

a. Be employed by a Virginia public or nonpublic school as a special educator and have the recommendation of the employing educational agency;

b. Have earned a baccalaureate degree from a regionally accredited college or university;

c. Have an assigned mentor endorsed in special education; and

d. Have a planned program of study in the assigned endorsement area, make progress toward meeting the endorsement requirements each of the three years of the license, and have completed nine semester hours including courses in the following: characteristics of students with disabilities, individualized education program implementation, and classroom and behavior management.

The Provisional (Special Education) License through this alternate route shall not be issued without the completion of these prerequisites.

D. Alternate programs at institutions of higher education or Virginia school divisions. Alternate programs developed by institutions of higher education (i) recognize the unique strengths of prospective teachers from nontraditional backgrounds and (ii) prepare these individuals to meet the same standards that are established for others who are granted a license through an alternate route.

E. Experiential learning. Individuals applying for an initial teaching license through the alternate route as prescribed by the Virginia Board of Education must meet the following criteria to be eligible to request experiential learning to satisfy the coursework for the endorsement (teaching) content area:

1. Have earned a baccalaureate degree from a regionally accredited college or university;

2. Have at least five years of documented full-time work experience that may include specialized training related to the endorsement sought; and

3. Have met the qualifying score on the content knowledge assessment prescribed by the Virginia Board of Education.

Experiential learning does not apply to individuals seeking special education and elementary education (i.e., preK-3 and preK-6) endorsements or endorsements in which there is no Virginia Board of Education prescribed content or subject assessment.

8VAC20-23-100. Conditions for licensure for out-of-state candidates by reciprocity.

A. An individual coming into Virginia from any state may qualify for a Virginia teaching license with comparable endorsement areas if the individual (i) has completed a state-approved teacher preparation program through a regionally accredited four-year college or university or (ii) holds a valid out-of-state teaching license (i.e., full credential without deficiencies) that must be in force at the time the application for a Virginia license is made. An individual seeking licensure must establish a file in the Department of Education by submitting a complete application packet that includes official student transcripts. Unless exempted by the criteria in subsection C of this section, professional teacher's assessments prescribed by the Virginia Board of Education must be satisfied.

B. An individual coming into Virginia will qualify for a Virginia teaching license with comparable endorsement areas if the individual holds an active national certification from the National Board for Professional Teaching Standards (NBPTS) or a nationally recognized certification program approved by the Virginia Board of Education.

C. Individuals who hold a valid out-of-state license (i.e., full credential without deficiencies) and who have completed a minimum of three years of full-time, successful teaching experience in a public or an accredited nonpublic school, kindergarten through grade 12, outside of Virginia are exempt from the professional teacher's assessment requirements. Documentation must be submitted to verify the school's status as a public or accredited nonpublic school.

8VAC20-23-110. Requirements for renewing a license.

A. The Division Superintendent, Postgraduate Professional, Collegiate Professional, Technical Professional, Pupil Personnel Services, Online Teacher, and School Manager Licenses may be renewed upon the completion of 180 professional development points within a five-year validity period based on an individualized professional development plan that includes ongoing, sustained, and high-quality professional development.

B. An individual who holds an expired license must submit a completed licensure application at the time a licensure renewal request is submitted.

C. Virginia public school divisions and public education agencies must report annually to the Virginia Department of Education that instructional personnel have completed high-quality professional development each year as set forth by the Virginia Department of Education.

D. Any individual licensed and endorsed to teach (i) middle school civics or economics or (ii) high school government or history who is seeking renewal of such license is required to demonstrate knowledge of Virginia history or state and local government by completing a module or professional development course specifically related to Virginia history or state and local government that has a value of five professional development points. This requirement applies for purposes of the individual's next or initial renewal occurring after July 1, 2014.

E. If the requirement has not been met for initial licensure or licensure renewal, individuals seeking renewal of a license shall provide evidence of completion of certification or training in emergency first aid, cardiopulmonary resuscitation, and the use of automated external defibrillators. The certification or training program shall be based on the current national evidence-based emergency cardiovascular care guidelines for cardiopulmonary resuscitation and the use of an automated external defibrillator, such as a program developed by the American Heart Association or the American Red Cross. The Virginia Board of Education shall provide a waiver for this requirement for any person with a disability whose disability prohibits such person from completing the certification or training.

F. Professional development points may be accrued by the completion of professional development activities to improve and increase instructional personnel's knowledge of the academic subjects the teachers teach or the area assigned from one or more of the following eight options.

1. College credit. Acceptable coursework offers content that provides new information and is offered on campus, off campus, or through extension by any regionally accredited two-year or four-year college or university. College coursework must develop further experiences in subject content taught, teaching strategies, uses of technologies, leadership, and other essential elements in teaching to high standards and increasing student learning. Instructional personnel must complete coursework to improve and increase the knowledge of the academic subjects or endorsement areas in which they are assigned. Individuals who do not hold a graduate degree must refer to subsection G of this section.

2. Professional conference. A professional conference is a workshop, institute, or seminar of four or more hours that contributes to ongoing, sustained, and high-quality professional development.

3. Curriculum development. Curriculum development is a group activity in which the license holder contributes to the improvement of the curriculum of a school, a school division, or an education institution in the teaching area assigned. This includes the alignment of curriculum frameworks, instructional materials, and assessments to provide a system with clear expectations of what is to be taught and learned.

4. Publication of article. The article must contribute to the education profession or to the body of knowledge of the license holder's teaching area or instructional position. Grant reports that present the results of educational research are acceptable provided the license holder had an active role in planning, analyzing, interpreting, demonstrating, disseminating, or evaluating the study or innovation. The article must be published in a recognized professional journal.

5. Publication of book. Books must be published for purchase and must contribute to the education profession or to the body of knowledge of the license holder's teaching area or instructional position. The published book must increase the field of content knowledge; planning and assessment for evaluating and providing students with feedback that encourages student progress and measures student achievement; instruction, safety, and learning environment; and communication and community relations working with students, parents, and members of the community to promote broad support for student learning. Points will not be awarded for self-published books.

6. Mentorship. Mentoring is the process by which an experienced professional who has received mentorship training provides assistance to one or more persons for the purpose of improving their performance. Assistance may involve role modeling, direct instruction, demonstration, observation with feedback, developing of plans, and consultation to promote instructional excellence and increased student achievement. Mentoring may include the supervision of a field experience of a pre-service student teacher or an intern in an approved teacher or principal preparation program, as well as mentoring as part of the induction process for a beginning teacher or a first-year administrator. Individuals serving in this role and submitting documentation for license renewal based on the mentorship option shall receive training as a mentor prior to the assignment and at least once during the five-year renewal cycle.

7. Educational project. Educational projects must be planned, focused projects based on high standards of teaching and learning. Projects must result in a written report or other tangible product. Projects must contribute to the education profession or to the body of knowledge of the license holder's teaching area or instructional position. A project could include participation in new professional responsibilities, such as leading a school improvement initiative.

8. Professional development activity. Professional development activities must focus on student learning and achievement, schoolwide educational improvement, leadership, subject content, teaching strategies, and use of technologies and other essential elements in teaching to high standards. Activities must be planned, rigorous, systematic, and promote continuous inquiry and reflection. Local employing educational agencies are encouraged to design professional development activities that are conducted in school settings and linked to student learning and achievement.

G. A minimum of 90 points (i.e., three semester hours in a content area) at the undergraduate (i.e., two-year or four-year institution) or graduate level earned from a regionally accredited college or university in the license holder's endorsement areas shall be required of license holders without a master's degree. With prior approval, exceptions to the content course requirement may be made by the division superintendent or principal. Special education coursework designed to assist classroom teachers and other school personnel in working with students with disabilities, a course in gifted education, a course in educational technology, or a course in English as a second language may be completed to satisfy the content course requirement. Professional development activities designed to support the Virginia Standards of Learning, Standards of Accreditation, and state assessments may be accepted in lieu of the content course. An individual without a master's degree who holds a renewable Online Teacher License may complete pedagogy of online instruction coursework to meet this requirement. The substance of the activities must clearly support these initiatives and address one or more of the following areas: (i) new content knowledge to implement the Virginia Standards of Learning, (ii) curriculum development initiative designed to translate the standards from standards to classroom objectives, (iii) teaching beginning reading skills including phonemic awareness and the structure of language (i.e., phonics), (iv) staff development activities in assessment to assist classroom teachers in the utilization of test results to improve classroom instruction, and (v) professional development designed to implement the technology standards in the schools. Technical Professional License holders without baccalaureate degrees may satisfy the requirement through career and technical education workshops, career and technical education institutes, or through undergraduate coursework at two-year or four-year institutions.

H. Content area courses are courses at the undergraduate level (i.e., two-year or four-year institution) or at the graduate level that will not duplicate previous courses taken in the humanities, English, history and social sciences, sciences, mathematics, health and physical education, and fine arts. These courses are usually available through the college of or department of arts and sciences. License holders with elementary education, middle education, special education, or reading endorsements must satisfy the 90-point requirement through reading coursework or content coursework in one of the areas listed in this subsection. Courses available through a regionally accredited college's or university's department of education may be used to satisfy the content requirement for those license holders with endorsements in health and physical education, career and technical education, and library science education.

I. With prior approval of the division superintendent or principal, the 90 points in a content area also may be satisfied through coursework taken to obtain a new teaching endorsement or coursework taken because of a particular need of a particular teacher.

J. The remaining 90 points may be accrued by activities drawn from one or more of the eight renewal options. Renewal work is designed to provide licensed personnel with opportunities for professional development relative to the grade levels or teaching fields to which they are assigned or for which they seek an added endorsement. Such professional development encompasses (i) responsible remediation of any area of an individual's knowledge or skills that fails to meet the standards of competency and (ii) responsible efforts to increase the individual's knowledge of new developments in his field and to respond to new curricular demands within the individual's area of professional competence.

K. The proposed work toward renewal in certain options must be approved in advance by the chief executive officer or designee of the employing educational agency. Persons who are not employed by an educational agency may renew or reinstate their license by submitting to the Office of Professional Licensure, Department of Education, their individualized renewal record and verification of points, including official student transcripts of coursework taken at a regionally accredited two-year or four-year college or university.

L. Accrual of professional development points shall be determined by criteria set forth by the Virginia Department of Education in the Virginia Renewal Manual (http://doe.virginia.gov/teaching/licensure/licensure_renewal_manual.pdf).

M. Persons seeking license renewal as teachers must demonstrate proficiency in the use of educational technology for instruction.

N. Virginia school divisions and nonpublic schools will recommend renewal of licenses using the renewal point system. The renewal recommendation must include verification of demonstrated proficiency in the use of educational technology for instruction.

O. Training in instructional methods tailored to promote academic progress and effective preparation for the Standards of Learning tests and end-of-grade assessments is required for licensure renewal.

P. If they have not already met the requirement, persons seeking licensure renewal as teachers must complete study in child abuse recognition and intervention in accordance with curriculum guidelines developed by the Virginia Board of Education in consultation with the Virginia Department of Social Services that are relevant to the specific teacher licensure routes.

Part IV
Licensure Regulations Governing Early/Primary Education, Elementary Education, and Middle Education Endorsements

8VAC20-23-120. Early/primary education, elementary education, and middle education endorsements.

Individuals seeking licensure with endorsements in early/primary education, elementary education, and middle education may meet requirements through the completion of an approved program or if employed by a Virginia public or nonpublic school through the alternate route to licensure. Components of the licensure program include a degree from a regionally accredited college or university in the liberal arts and sciences, or equivalent; professional teacher's assessments requirement prescribed by the Virginia Board of Education; specific endorsement requirements; and professional studies requirements.

8VAC20-23-130. Professional studies requirements.

Professional studies requirements for early/primary education, elementary education, and middle education: 21 semester hours. These requirements may be taught in integrated coursework or modules.

1. Human development and learning (birth through adolescence): 3 semester hours.

a. Skills in this area shall contribute to an understanding of the physical, social, emotional, speech and language, and intellectual development of children and the ability to use this understanding in guiding learning experiences and relating meaningfully to students.

b. The interaction of children with individual differences - economic, social, racial, ethnic, religious, physical, and mental - should be incorporated to include skills contributing to an understanding of developmental disabilities and developmental issues related to but not limited to low socioeconomic status, attention deficit disorders, developmental disorders, gifted education including the use of multiple criteria to identify gifted students, substance abuse, child abuse, and family disruptions.

2. Curriculum and instruction: 3 semester hours.

a. Early/primary education preK-3 or elementary education preK-6 curriculum and instruction: 3 semester hours.

(1) Skills in this area shall contribute to an understanding of the principles of learning; the application of skills in discipline-specific methodology; effective communication with and among students; selection and use of materials, including media and contemporary technologies; and selection, development, and use of appropriate curricula, methodologies, and materials that support and enhance student learning and reflect the research on unique, age-appropriate, and culturally relevant curriculum and pedagogy.

(2) Understanding of the principles of online learning and online instructional strategies and the application of skills to deliver online instruction must be included.

(3) Instructional practices that are sensitive to culturally and linguistically diverse learners, including limited English proficient students, gifted and talented students, and those students with disabilities; and appropriate for the level of endorsement (i.e., preK-3 or preK-6) sought shall be included.

(4) Teaching methods shall be tailored to promote student engagement and student academic progress and effective preparation for the Standards of Learning assessments.

(5) Study in (i) methods of improving communication between schools and families, (ii) communicating with families regarding social and instructional needs of children, (iii) ways of increasing family involvement in student learning at home and in school, (iv) the Virginia Standards of Learning, and (v) Virginia Foundation Blocks for Early Learning: Comprehensive Standards for Four-Year-Olds prepared by the department's Office of Humanities and Early Childhood shall be included.

(6) Early childhood educators must understand the role of families in child development and in relation to teaching educational skills.

(7) Early childhood educators must understand the role of the informal and play-mediated settings for promoting students' skills and development and must demonstrate knowledge and skill in interacting in such situations to promote specific learning outcomes as reflected in Virginia's Foundation Blocks for Early Learning. Demonstrated proficiency in the use of educational technology for instruction shall be included. Persons seeking initial licensure as teachers and persons seeking licensure renewal as teachers for the first time shall complete study in child abuse recognition and intervention in accordance with curriculum guidelines developed by the Virginia Board of Education in consultation with the Virginia Department of Social Services that are relevant to the specific teacher licensure routes. Pre-student teaching experiences (i.e., field experiences) should be evident within these skills.

b. Middle education 6-8 curriculum and instruction: 3 semester hours.

(1) Skills in this area shall contribute to an understanding of the principles of learning; the application of skills in discipline-specific methodology; effective communication with and among students; and selection and use of materials, including media and contemporary technologies.

(2) Understanding of the principles of online learning and online instructional strategies and the application of skills to deliver online instruction must be included.

(3) Instructional practices that are sensitive to culturally and linguistically diverse learners including limited English proficient students, gifted and talented students, and students with disabilities, and must be appropriate for the middle education endorsement shall be included.

(4) Teaching methods shall be tailored to promote student engagement and student academic progress and effective preparation for the Virginia Standards of Learning assessments.

(5) Study in methods of improving communication between schools and families, ways of increasing family involvement in student learning at home and in school, and the Standards of Learning shall be included.

(6) Demonstrated proficiency in the use of educational technology for instruction shall be included.

(7) Persons seeking initial licensure as teachers and persons seeking licensure renewal as teachers for the first time shall complete study in child abuse recognition and intervention in accordance with curriculum guidelines developed by the Virginia Board of Education in consultation with the Virginia Department of Social Services that are relevant to the specific teacher licensure routes. Pre-student teaching experiences (i.e., field experiences) should be evident within these skills.

3. Classroom and behavior management: 3 semester hours.

a. Skills in this area shall contribute to an understanding and application of research-based classroom and behavior management techniques, classroom community building, positive behavior supports, and individual interventions, including techniques that promote emotional well-being and teach and maintain behavioral conduct and skills consistent with norms, standards, and rules of the educational environment.

b. This area shall address diverse approaches based upon behavioral, cognitive, affective, social and ecological theory and practice.

c. Approaches should support professionally appropriate practices that promote positive redirection of behavior, development of social skills, and of self discipline.

d. Knowledge and an understanding of various school crisis management and safety plans and the demonstrated ability to create a safe, orderly classroom environment must be included.

e. The link between classroom management and students' ages must be understood and demonstrated in techniques used in the classroom.

4. Assessment of and for learning: 3 semester hours.

a. Skills in this area shall be designed to develop an understanding and application of creating, selecting, and implementing valid and reliable classroom-based assessments of student learning, including formative and summative assessments. Assessments designed and adapted to meet the needs of diverse learners must be addressed.

b. Analytical skills necessary to inform ongoing planning and instruction, as well as to understand, and help students understand their own progress and growth must be included.

c. Skills also include the relationships among assessment, instruction, and monitoring student progress to include student performance measures in grading practices, the ability to interpret valid assessments using a variety of formats in order to measure student attainment of essential skills in a standards-based environment, and the ability to analyze assessment data to make decisions about how to improve instruction and student performance.

d. Understanding of state assessment programs and accountability systems, including assessments used for student achievement goal setting as related to teacher evaluation and determining student academic progress must be included.

e. Knowledge of legal and ethical aspects of assessment, and skills for developing familiarity with assessments used in preK-12 education (e.g., diagnostic, college admission exams, industry certifications, and placement assessments) must be included.

5. The teaching profession: 3 semester hours.

a. Skills in this area shall be designed to develop an understanding of the historical, philosophical, and sociological foundations underlying the role, development, and organization of public education in the United States.

b. Attention must be given to the legal status of teachers and students, including federal and state laws and regulations; school as an organization and culture; and contemporary issues and current trends in education, including the impact of technology on education. Local, state, and federal governance of schools, including the roles of teachers and schools in communities, must be included.

c. Professionalism and ethical standards, as well as personal integrity must be addressed.

d. Knowledge and understanding of Virginia's Guidelines for Uniform Performance Standards and Evaluation Criteria for Teachers must be included.

6. Reading: 6 semester hours.

a. Early/primary preK-3 and elementary education preK-6 - language acquisition and reading and writing: 6 semester hours. Skills listed for these endorsement areas represent the minimum competencies that a beginning teacher must be able to demonstrate. These skills are not intended to limit the scope of a beginning teacher's program. Additional knowledge and skills that add to a beginning teacher's competencies to deliver instruction and improve student achievement should be included as part of a quality learning experience.

(1) Language acquisition: 3 semester hours. Skills in this area shall be designed to impart a thorough understanding of the Virginia English Standards of Learning as well as the complex nature of language acquisition as a precursor to literacy. Language acquisition shall follow the typical development of linguistic competence in the areas of phonetics, semantics, syntax, morphology, phonology, and pragmatics.

(2) Reading and writing: 3 semester hours. Skills in this area shall be designed to impart a thorough understanding of the Virginia English Standards of Learning as well as the reciprocal nature of reading and writing. Reading shall include phonemic awareness, concept of print, phonics, fluency, vocabulary development, and comprehension strategies. Writing shall include writing strategies and conventions as supporting the composing and writing expression and usage and mechanics domains. Additional skills shall include proficiency in understanding the stages of spelling development, the writing process, as well as the ability to foster appreciation of a variety of fiction and nonfiction texts and independent reading.

b. Middle education - language acquisition and reading development: 3 semester hours and literacy in the content areas: 3 semester hours.

(1) Language acquisition and reading development: 3 semester hours. Skills in this area shall be designed to impart a thorough understanding of the complex nature of language acquisition and reading, to include phonemic awareness, phonics, fluency, vocabulary development, and comprehension strategies for adolescent learners. Additional skills shall include proficiency in writing strategies as well as the ability to foster appreciation of a variety of fiction and nonfiction texts and independent reading for adolescent learners.

(2) Literacy in the content areas: 3 semester hours. Skills in this area shall be designed to impart an understanding of vocabulary development and comprehension skills in English, mathematics, science, history and social science, and other content areas. Strategies include teaching students how to ask effective questions, summarize and retell both verbally and in writing, and to listen effectively. Teaching strategies include literal, interpretive, critical, and evaluative comprehension, as well as the ability to foster appreciation of a variety of fiction and nonfiction texts and independent reading for adolescent readers.

7. Supervised clinical experience. Supervised clinical experiences shall be continuous and systematic and comprised of early field experiences and a minimum of 10 weeks of full-time student teaching under the supervision of a cooperating teacher with demonstrated effectiveness in the classroom. The summative supervised student teaching experience shall include at least 150 clock hours spent in direct teaching at the level of endorsement. One year of successful full-time teaching experience in the endorsement area in a public or accredited nonpublic school may be accepted in lieu of the supervised teaching experience. For the Online Teacher License only, one year of successful online teaching experience in the endorsement area in a public school, an accredited nonpublic school, or an accredited virtual school or program may be accepted in lieu of the supervised teaching experience. A fully licensed, experienced teacher shall be available in the school building to assist a beginning teacher employed through the alternate route.

8VAC20-23-140. Early childhood for three-year-olds and four-year-olds (add-on endorsement).

Endorsement requirements. The candidate must have:

1. An earned baccalaureate degree from a regionally accredited college or university and hold a license issued by the Virginia Board of Education with an endorsement in elementary education (such as preK-3 or preK-6) or special education early childhood;

2. Completed 9 semester hours of graduate-level coursework in early childhood education; and

3. Completed a supervised practicum of at least 45 instructional hours in a preschool setting (i.e., three-year-olds and four-year-olds) in a public school, an accredited nonpublic school, or another program approved by the Virginia Board of Education. One year of successful, full-time teaching experience in a public or accredited nonpublic school may be accepted in lieu of the practicum.

4. The add-on endorsement to an elementary endorsement that includes preK is not required to teach preK (i.e., three-year-olds and four-year-olds), but the endorsement recognizes the candidate's additional preparation in early childhood education.

8VAC20-23-150. Early/primary education preK-3.

Endorsement requirements.

1. The candidate must have graduated from an approved teacher preparation program in early/primary education preK-3; or

2. The candidate for the early/primary education preK-3 endorsement must have earned a baccalaureate degree from a regionally accredited college or university in the liberal arts and sciences, or equivalent, and completed coursework that covers the early/primary education preK-3 competencies and fulfills the following 51 semester-hour requirements:

a. English (must include composition, oral communication, and literature): 12 semester hours; or complete 6 semester hours in English and pass a rigorous elementary subject test prescribed by the Virginia Board of Education;

b. Mathematics (must include algebra, geometry, probability and statistics, and methods in teaching elementary mathematics): 12 semester hours; or complete 6 semester hours in mathematics, complete a methods in teaching elementary mathematics course (3 semester hours), and pass a rigorous elementary subject test prescribed by the Virginia Board of Education;

c. Laboratory sciences: 12 semester hours (in at least two science disciplines and methods in teaching elementary science); or complete 6 semester hours in laboratory science (in two science disciplines), complete a methods in teaching elementary science course (3 semester hours), and pass a rigorous elementary subject test prescribed by the Virginia Board of Education;

d. History (must include American history and world history): 6 semester hours, and Social Science (must include geography and economics): 6 semester hours; or complete 3 semester hours in history, complete 3 semester hours in social science (geography or economics), and pass a rigorous elementary subject test prescribed by the Virginia Board of Education; and

e. Arts: 3 semester hours.

8VAC20-23-160. Elementary education preK-6.

Endorsement requirements.

1. The candidate shall have graduated from an approved teacher preparation program in elementary education preK-6; or

2. The candidate for the elementary education preK-6 endorsement must have earned a baccalaureate degree from a regionally accredited college or university majoring in the liberal arts and sciences (or equivalent) and fulfill the following 57 semester-hour requirements:

a. English (must include composition, oral communication, and literature): 12 semester hours; or complete 6 semester hours in English and pass a rigorous elementary subject test prescribed by the Virginia Board of Education;

b. Mathematics (must include algebra, geometry, probability and statistics, and teaching elementary mathematics): 15 semester hours; or complete 6 hours in mathematics, complete a methods in teaching elementary mathematics course (3 semester hours), and pass a rigorous elementary subject test prescribed by the Virginia Board of Education;

c. Science (including a laboratory course): 15 semester hours in at least three science disciplines and at least a three credit science methods course; or complete 6 semester hours (in two science disciplines), complete a methods in teaching elementary science course (3 semester hours), and pass a rigorous elementary subject test prescribed by the Virginia Board of Education;

d. History (must include American history and world history): 6 semester hours, and Social Science (must include geography and economics): 6 semester hours; or complete 3 semester hours in history, complete 3 semester hours in social science (geography or economics), and pass a rigorous elementary subject test prescribed by the Virginia Board of Education; and

e. Arts: 3 semester hours.

8VAC20-23-170. Middle education 6-8.

Endorsement requirements.

1. The candidate must have graduated from an approved teacher preparation discipline-specific program in middle education 6-8 with at least one area of academic preparation from the areas of English, mathematics, science, and history and social sciences; or

2. An applicant seeking the middle education 6-8 endorsement must have earned a baccalaureate degree from a regionally accredited college or university in the liberal arts and sciences, or equivalent; and completed the minimum number of semester hours, as indicated, in at least one area of academic preparation (i.e., concentration) that will be listed on the license. The applicant will be restricted to teaching only in the area or areas of concentration listed on the teaching license.

a. English. English concentration (must include coursework in language, for example history, structure, grammar, fiction and nonfiction texts, media literacy, advanced composition, and interpersonal communication or speech): 21 semester hours.

b. Mathematics. Mathematics concentration (must include coursework in algebra, geometry, probability and statistics, applications of mathematics, and methods of teaching mathematics to include middle school mathematics content): 24 semester hours.

c. Science. Science concentration (must include courses in each of the following: biology, chemistry, physics, and Earth and space science; and a laboratory course is required in two of the four areas): 21 semester hours.

d. History and social sciences. History and social sciences concentration (must include a course in American history; world history; economics; American government, including state and local government; and geography): 21 semester hours.

Part V
Licensure Regulations Governing PreK-12 Endorsements, Special Education, Secondary Grades 6-12 Endorsements, and Adult Education

8VAC20-23-180. PreK-12 endorsements, special education, secondary grades 6-12 endorsements, and adult education.

Individuals seeking licensure with preK-12 endorsements, special education, secondary grades 6-12 endorsements, or adult education may meet requirements through the completion of an approved program or if employed by a Virginia public or nonpublic school through the alternate route to licensure. Components of the licensure program include a degree from a regionally accredited college or university in the liberal arts and sciences, or equivalent; professional teacher's assessment requirements prescribed by the Virginia Board of Education; specific endorsement requirements; and professional studies requirements.

8VAC20-23-190. Professional studies requirements.

Professional studies requirements for adult education, preK-12 endorsements, and secondary grades 6-12 endorsements: 18 semester hours. Professional studies requirements for special education: 21 semester hours. These requirements may be taught in integrated coursework or modules.

1. Human development and learning (birth through adolescence): 3 semester hours.

a. Skills in this area shall contribute to an understanding of the physical, social, emotional, speech and language, and intellectual development of children and the ability to use this understanding in guiding learning experiences.

b. The interaction of children with individual differences - economic, social, racial, ethnic, religious, physical, and mental - should be incorporated to include skills contributing to an understanding of developmental disabilities and developmental issues related to but not limited to low socioeconomic status, attention deficit disorders, developmental disabilities, gifted education including the use of multiple criteria to identify gifted students, substance abuse, child abuse, and family disruptions.

2. Curriculum and instruction: 3 semester hours.

a. Skills in this area shall contribute to an understanding of the principles of learning; the application of skills in discipline-specific methodology; effective communication with and among students; selection and use of materials, including media and contemporary technologies; selection, development, and use of appropriate curricula, methodologies, and materials that support and enhance student learning and reflect the research on unique, age-appropriate, and culturally relevant curriculum and pedagogy.

b. Understanding of the principles of online learning and online instructional strategies and the application of skills to deliver online instruction must be included.

c. Instructional practices that are sensitive to culturally and linguistically diverse learners, including limited English proficient students; gifted and talented students and those students with disabilities; and appropriate for the level of endorsement sought shall be included.

d. Teaching methods shall be tailored to promote student academic progress and effective preparation for the Virginia Standards of Learning assessments.

e. Methods of improving communication between schools and families, ways of increasing family involvement in student learning at home and in school, and the Virginia Standards of Learning shall be included.

f. Demonstrated proficiency in the use of educational technology for instruction shall be included.

g. Persons seeking initial licensure as teachers and persons seeking licensure renewal as teachers for the first time shall complete study in child abuse recognition and intervention in accordance with curriculum guidelines developed by the Virginia Board of Education in consultation with the Virginia Department of Social Services that are relevant to the specific teacher licensure routes.

h. Curriculum and instruction for secondary grades 6-12 endorsements shall include middle and secondary education. Pre-student teaching experiences (i.e., field experiences) should be evident within these skills. For preK-12, field experiences shall be at the elementary, middle, and secondary levels.

3. Assessment of and for learning: 3 semester hours.

a. Skills in this area shall be designed to develop an understanding and application of creating, selecting, and implementing valid and reliable classroom-based assessments of student learning, including formative and summative assessments. Assessments designed and adapted to meet the needs of diverse learners must be addressed.

b. Analytical skills necessary to inform ongoing planning and instruction, as well as to understand, and help students understand their own progress and growth must be included.

c. Skills also include the relationships among assessment, instruction, and monitoring student progress to include student performance measures in grading practices, the ability to interpret valid assessments using a variety of formats in order to measure student attainment of essential skills in a standards-based environment, and the ability to analyze assessment data to make decisions about how to improve instruction and student performance.

d. Understanding of state assessment programs and accountability systems, including assessments used for student achievement goal setting as related to teacher evaluation and determining student academic progress, including knowledge of legal and ethical aspects of assessment.

e. Develop familiarity with assessments used in preK-12 education (e.g., diagnostic, college admission exams, industry certifications, placement assessments).

4. The teaching profession: 3 semester hours.

a. Skills in this area shall be designed to develop an understanding of the historical, philosophical, and sociological foundations underlying the role, development, and organization of public education in the United States.

b. Attention must be given to the legal status of teachers and students, including federal and state laws and regulations, school as an organization and culture, and contemporary issues and current trends in education, including the impact of technology on education. Local, state, and federal governance of schools, including the roles of teachers and schools in communities must be included.

c. Professionalism and ethical standards, as well as personal integrity must be addressed.

d. Knowledge and understanding of Virginia's Guidelines for Uniform Performance Standards and Evaluation Criteria for Teachers must be included.

5. Classroom and behavior management: 3 semester hours.

a. Skills in this area shall contribute to an understanding and application of research-based classroom and behavior management techniques, classroom community building, positive behavior supports, and individual interventions, including techniques that promote emotional well-being and teach and maintain behavioral conduct and skills consistent with norms, standards, and rules of the educational environment.

b. This area shall address diverse approaches based upon behavioral, cognitive, affective, social and ecological theory and practice.

c. Approaches should support professionally appropriate practices that promote positive redirection of behavior, development of social skills and of self-discipline.

d. Knowledge and an understanding of various school crisis management and safety plans and the ability to create a safe, orderly classroom environment must be included. The link between classroom management and the students' ages must be understood and demonstrated in techniques used in the classroom.

6. Reading.

a. Adult education, preK-12, and secondary grades 6-12 - literacy in the content areas: 3 semester hours. Skills in this area shall be designed to impart an understanding of vocabulary development and comprehension skills in English, mathematics, science, history and social science, and other content areas. Strategies include teaching students how to ask effective questions, summarize and retell both verbally and in writing, and listen effectively. Teaching strategies include literal, interpretive, critical, and evaluative comprehension, as well as the ability to foster appreciation of a variety of fiction and nonfiction texts and independent reading for adolescent learners.

b. Special education - language acquisition and reading and writing: 6 semester hours. Skills listed for these endorsement areas represent the minimum competencies that a beginning teacher must be able to demonstrate. These skills are not intended to limit the scope of a beginning teacher's program. Additional knowledge and skills that add to a beginning teacher's competencies to deliver instruction and improve student achievement should be included as part of a quality learning experience.

(1) Language acquisition: 3 semester hours. Skills in this area shall be designed to impart a thorough understanding of the Virginia English Standards of Learning as well as the complex nature of language acquisition as a precursor to literacy. Language acquisition shall follow the typical development of linguistic competence in the areas of phonetics, semantics, syntax, morphology, phonology, and pragmatics.

(2) Reading and writing: 3 semester hours. Skills in this area shall be designed to impart a thorough understanding of the Virginia English Standards of Learning as well as the reciprocal nature of reading and writing. Reading shall include phonemic awareness, concept of print, phonics, fluency, vocabulary development, and comprehension strategies. Writing shall include writing strategies and conventions as supporting the composing and writing expression and usage and mechanics domains. Additional skills shall include proficiency in understanding the stages of spelling development, the writing process, as well as the ability to foster appreciation of a variety of fiction and nonfiction texts and independent reading.

7. Supervised classroom experience. Supervised clinical experiences shall be continuous and systematic and comprised of early field experiences and a minimum of 10 weeks of full-time student teaching under the supervision of a cooperating teacher with demonstrated effectiveness in the classroom. The summative supervised student teaching experience shall include at least 150 clock hours spent in direct teaching at the level of endorsement.

If a preK-12 endorsement is sought, teaching activities shall be at the elementary and middle or secondary levels. Individuals seeking the endorsement in library media shall complete the supervised school library media practicum in a school library media setting. Individuals seeking an endorsement in an area of special education shall complete the supervised classroom experience requirement in the area of special education for which the endorsement is sought. One year of successful full-time teaching experience in the endorsement area in a public or an accredited nonpublic school may be accepted in lieu of the supervised teaching experience. For the Online Teacher License only, one year of successful online teaching experience in the endorsement area in a public school, an accredited nonpublic school, or an accredited virtual school or program may be accepted in lieu of the supervised teaching experience. A fully licensed, experienced teacher shall be available in the school building to assist a beginning teacher employed through the alternate route.

8VAC20-23-200. Adult education.

A. Endorsement requirements. The candidate must have:

1. Earned a baccalaureate degree from a regionally accredited college or university or hold a Collegiate Professional License; and

2. A minimum of 15 semester hours in adult education that must include the following competencies and one semester of supervised successful full-time, or an equivalent number of hours of part-time experience, teaching of adults:

a. Understanding of the nature or psychology of the adult learner or adult development;

b. Understanding of the knowledge, skills, and processes needed for the selection, evaluation, and instructional applications of the methods and materials for adult basic skills including:

(1) Curriculum development in adult basic education or General Educational Development (GED) instruction;

(2) Beginning reading for adults;

(3) Beginning mathematics for adults;

(4) Reading comprehension for adult education;

(5) Foundations of adult education; and

(6) Other adult basic skills instruction.

B. Individuals not holding a Collegiate Professional License or a Postgraduate Professional License must meet the professional teacher's assessment requirements prescribed by the Virginia Board of Education.

8VAC20-23-210. Adult English as a second language (add-on endorsement).

Endorsement requirements. The candidate must have:

1. Graduated from an approved teacher preparation program in adult English as a second language; or

2. An earned baccalaureate degree from a regionally accredited college or university and hold a license issued by the Virginia Board of Education with an endorsement in a teaching area; and

3. Completed 21 semester hours of coursework distributed in the following areas:

a. Methods for teaching English as a second language to adults: 3 semester hours;

b. English linguistics: 3 semester hours;

c. Cross-cultural education: 3 semester hours;

d. Modern foreign language: 6 semester hours; and

e. Electives from the following areas: 6 semester hours:

(1) Cross-cultural communication;

(2) Second language acquisition;

(3) General linguistics;

(4) Teaching reading to adults;

(5) Adult English as a second language instruction; or

(6) Adult English as a second language curriculum development.

8VAC20-23-220. Career and technical education – agricultural education.

A. Endorsement requirements. The candidate must have:

1. Graduated from an approved teacher preparation program with a minimum of a baccalaureate degree from a regionally accredited college or university in agricultural education; or

2. Completed 39 semester hours of coursework in agriculture, including at least three semester hours in each of the following areas in subdivisions 2 a through 2 f as well as a minimum of nine hours in one concentration area listed in the following areas subdivisions 2 a through 2 f:

a. Plant science;

b. Animal science;

c. Agricultural mechanics and applied technology with a lab component;

d. Agricultural economics and management;

e. Forestry and wildlife management;

f. Horticulture; and

g. Supervised occupational experience, 3 semester hours, or one year of successful, full-time or the equivalent of relevant occupational experience (a minimum of 2,000 cumulative hours) within the past five years.

B. Technical Professional License. An endorsement in specialized areas may be granted to individuals who have:

1. Been recommended by an employing Virginia educational agency;

2. Completed two years of successful, full-time or the equivalent of occupational experience within the past five years in the teaching specialty sought;

3. Completed professional studies requirements (human development and learning: 3 semester hours; curriculum and instruction in career and technical education: 3 semester hours; and applications of instructional technology or classroom and behavior management: 3 semester hours); and

4. Completed an agricultural education certificate or associate degree program in the teaching specialty area sought.

8VAC20-23-230. Career and technical education – business and information technology.

A. Endorsement requirements. The candidate must have:

1. Graduated from an approved teacher preparation program with a minimum of a baccalaureate degree from a regionally accredited college or university in business and information technology; or

2. Completed a major in business education or 39 semester hours of coursework in business and information technology, including:

a. Accounting: 6 semester hours;

b. Economics: 3 semester hours;

c. Business law, business principles, management, marketing, or finance: 9 semester hours;

d. Communications and media to include oral, written, and presentation: 3 semester hours;

e. Information systems and technology to include computer software applications (e.g., word processing, spreadsheet, database, and presentation), information technology fundamentals, database management, communications systems, programming, software development, security, and networking: 12 semester hours;

f. Input technologies to include touch keyboarding (required, or documented demonstrated mastery of the touch keyboarding skill), audio input devices, video input devices, pointing devices, touch screens, or other emerging input technologies: 3 semester hours; and

g. Supervised business experience: 3 semester hours; or one year of successful full-time or the equivalent (i.e., 2,000 part-time hours) relevant occupational experience within the last five years.

B. Technical Professional License. An endorsement in a highly specialized business and information technology area, such as networking, administration, communications systems, programming, database management, Internet application development, medical office procedures, legal office procedures, network administration, and other emerging highly specialized areas may be granted to individuals who have:

1. Been recommended by an employing Virginia educational agency;

2. Completed two years of successful, full-time or the equivalent occupational experience within the last five years in the teaching specialty area sought;

3. Completed a business certificate or associate degree program from a regionally accredited institution in the teaching specialty area sought; and

4. Completed professional studies requirements (human development and learning: 3 semester hours; curriculum and instruction in career and technical education: 3 semester hours; and applications of instructional technology or classroom and behavior management: 3 semester hours).

8VAC20-23-240. Career and technical education – family and consumer sciences.

A. Endorsement requirements. The candidate must have:

1. Graduated from an approved teacher preparation program with a minimum of a baccalaureate degree from a regionally accredited college or university in family and consumer sciences; or

2. Completed a major in family and consumer sciences education or 39 semester hours of coursework in family and consumer sciences distributed in the following areas:

a. Development of individuals through the lifespan and the family life cycle and family: 9 semester hours;

b. Resource management, personal and family finance, and consumer economics: 6 semester hours;

c. Food, nutrition, dietetics, wellness, and food science: 9 semester hours;

d. Housing, home furnishing, and equipment: 3 semester hours;

e. Apparel and textiles: 6 semester hours;

f. Occupational program management: 3 semester hours; and

g. Supervised occupational experience related to family and consumer sciences, 3 semester hours, or one year of successful, full-time or the equivalent of relevant occupational experience within the last five years.

B. Technical Professional License. An endorsement in a specialized family and consumer sciences area, such as child care occupations, consumer services, family and human services, fashion design occupations, food occupations, hospitality occupations, interior design occupations, and home furnishings occupations, and home and institutional services, may be granted to individuals who have:

1. Been recommended by an employing Virginia educational agency.

2. Completed at least two years of successful, full-time occupational experience or the equivalent within the past five years in the teaching specialty for which they are seeking endorsement.

3. Completed a family and consumer sciences certificate or associate degree program where applicable in the area of endorsement sought.

4. Completed professional studies requirements (human development and learning: 3 semester hours; curriculum and instruction in career and technical education: 3 semester hours; and applications of instructional technology or classroom and behavior management: 3 semester hours).

8VAC20-23-250. Career and technical education – health and medical sciences.

A. Endorsement requirements. The candidate must have:

1. Graduated from an approved program of study with a minimum of a baccalaureate degree from a regionally accredited college or university in a health care program of study and hold a current license or certification as a professional practitioner in the area in which one is to be teaching; or

2. A current license or certification as a professional practitioner in the area in which one is to be teaching and completed two years of successful, full-time or the equivalent of occupational experience within the past five years in an area related to the teaching specialty sought.

B. Technical Professional License. An endorsement in a specialized health occupations area may be granted to individuals who have:

1. Been recommended by an employing Virginia educational agency;

2. A license or be certified as a professional practitioner in the area in which one is to be teaching;

3. Completed two years of full-time or the equivalent of occupational experience within the past five years in the teaching specialty sought;

4. Completed a health occupations certificate or associate degree program from a regionally accredited institution in the teaching specialty area sought; and

5. Completed professional studies requirements (human development and learning: 3 semester hours; curriculum and instruction in career and technical education: 3 semester hours; and applications of instructional technology or classroom and behavior management: 3 semester hours).

8VAC20-23-260. Career and technical education – marketing education.

A. Endorsement requirements. The candidate must have:

1. Graduated from an approved teacher preparation program with a minimum of a baccalaureate degree from a regionally accredited college or university in marketing education; or

2. Completed a major in marketing education or a minimum of 39 semester hours of coursework in marketing to include;

a. Marketing processes and environment: 3 semester hours;

b. Management and supervision: 6 semester hours;

c. Economics: 3 semester hours;

d. Merchandising and operations: 3 semester hours;

e. Advertising and promotion: 3 semester hours;

f. Sales and selling: 3 semester hours;

g. Communication theory and techniques: 3 semester hours;

h. Consumer behavior: 3 semester hours;

i. International (global) marketing: 3 semester hours;

j. Finance, accounting, or marketing mathematics: 3 semester hours;

k. Technology applications: 3 semester hours; and

l. Supervised marketing occupational experience, 3 semester hours, or one year of full-time work experience in the field of marketing may be accepted in lieu of the supervised marketing internship.

B. Technical Professional License. An endorsement in a specialized marketing area, such as apparel and accessories, hotel operations, international marketing, or restaurant, may be granted to individuals who have:

1. Been recommended by an employing Virginia educational agency;

2. Completed two years of full-time occupational experience, or the equivalent, within the last five years in the teaching specialty area sought; and

3. Completed professional studies requirements (human development and learning: 3 semester hours; curriculum and instruction in career and technical education: 3 semester hours; and applications of instructional technology or classroom and behavior management: 3 semester hours).

8VAC20-23-270. Career and technical education – technology education.

Endorsement requirements. The candidate must have:

1. Graduated from an approved teacher preparation program from a regionally accredited college or university with a minimum of a baccalaureate degree in technology education; or

2. Completed a major in technology education or 33 semester hours in technology education distributed in the following areas:

a. The nature of technology. Experiences shall include those that promote an understanding of the characteristics, scope, and core concepts of physical, biological, and informational technologies, the relationships among these technologies, and their connections to other science, technology, engineering, and mathematics (STEM) fields: 6 semester hours;

b. Technology and society. Experiences shall include those that develop a working knowledge of the cultural, social, economic, and political effects of technology, its effect on the environment, and the role of society in the history, development, and use of physical, biological, and informational technologies: 3 semester hours;

c. Engineering. Experiences shall include those that develop comprehension of the attributes of technological design, inclusive of constraints, optimization, predictive analysis, problem solving, critical thinking, technical writing, and integrative mathematics and science: 6 semester hours;

d. Abilities for a technological world. Experiences shall include those that develop the capacity to utilize the design process, to use and maintain technological products and systems, and to assess their impact: 9 semester hours; and

e. The designed world. Experiences shall include those that promote an understanding of current and emerging physical, biological, and informational technologies: 9 semester hours; or

3. Earned a baccalaureate degree from a regionally accredited college or university with a major in one of the following fields of study: architecture, design, engineering, engineering technology, industrial technology, or physics and completed a minimum of 15 semester hours of technology education content coursework, including at least 3 semester hours in each of the following areas:

a. The nature of technology;

b. Technology and society;

c. Engineering;

d. Abilities for a technological world; and

e. The designed world.

8VAC20-23-280. Career and technical education – trade and industrial education.

A. Endorsement requirements.

1. The candidate must have graduated from an approved teacher preparation program with a minimum of a baccalaureate degree from a regionally accredited college or university in trade and industrial education; or

2. A candidate who has graduated from an approved teacher preparation program that is not in the trade and industrial education program subject area for which the candidate is seeking endorsement must have:

a. A current state licensure or industry certification based on the prescribed standard or examination, if applicable; and

b. Evidence of at least two years of full-time or equivalent occupational experience within the past five years in the teaching specialty for which the candidate is seeking endorsement. A candidate whose occupational experience has not been within the last five years must participate in a supervised technical update related to the teaching specialty or area of endorsement or complete a supervised internship of work experience of not less than six weeks related to the area of endorsement or teaching specialty.

B. Technical Professional License. An endorsement in a specialized trade and industrial education area will be granted to an individual who has:

1. Been recommended by an employing Virginia educational agency;

2. A current license or is currently certified as a professional practitioner in the area in which he is to be teaching, if applicable, or can demonstrate competency in the area of trade and industrial education he is to be teaching;

3. Evidence of at least two years of full-time or the equivalent occupational experience within the past five years in the teaching specialty for which he is seeking endorsement. Candidates whose occupational experience has not been within the last five years must participate in a supervised technical update related to the teaching specialty or area of endorsement or complete a supervised internship of work experience of not less than six weeks related to the area of endorsement or teaching specialty; and

4. Completed professional studies requirements (human development and learning: 3 semester hours; curriculum and instruction in career and technical education: 3 semester hours; and applications of instructional technology or classroom and behavior management: 3 semester hours).

C. Add-on endorsement requirements. A candidate must:

1. Hold an active Collegiate Professional or Postgraduate Professional License with a teaching endorsement;

2. Demonstrate competency in the trade or industrial area being sought;

3. Hold current state licensure or industry certification for the trade or industrial area for which endorsement is sought based upon the prescribed standard or examination;

4. Have completed two years or 4,000 clock hours of satisfactory, full-time occupational experience at the journeyman level or an equivalent level in the occupation within the last five years. Candidates whose occupational experience has not been within the last five years must participate in a supervised technical update related to the teaching specialty or area of endorsement or complete a supervised internship of work experience of not less than six weeks related to the area of endorsement or teaching specialty; and

5. Have completed 3 semester hours in curriculum and instruction specific to vocational industrial education.

8VAC20-23-290. Career and technical education – transition and special needs (add-on endorsement).

Endorsement requirements. The candidate must have:

1. Graduated from an approved teacher preparation program with a minimum of a baccalaureate degree from a regionally accredited college or university in special needs; or

2. Completed a major in career and technical education or special education, pre-K-12 with an endorsement in one area of career and technical education or special education preK-12, including 12 semester hours distributed in the following areas:

a. Overview of special needs programs and services: 3 semester hours;

b. Instructional methods, curriculum, and resources: 3 semester hours;

c. Career and life planning, transitioning, occupational information, and delivery of cooperative education programs: 3 semester hours; and

d. Purposes and practices and characteristics of special populations: 3 semester hours; and

3. Completed successful, supervised occupational experience, 3 semester hours, or one year of full-time or the equivalent of relevant occupational experience within the past five years.

8VAC20-23-300. Computer science.

A. Endorsement requirements. The candidate must have:

1. Graduated from an approved teacher preparation program in computer science; or

2. Earned a baccalaureate degree from a regionally accredited college or university and completed 36 semester hours of coursework distributed in the following areas:

a. Mathematics, including discrete mathematics;

b. Data structures and algorithm analysis;

c. Foundations of computer science; and

d. Programming in at least two distinct languages: 6 semester hours.

B. Add-on endorsement requirements in computer science. The candidate must have:

1. An earned baccalaureate degree from a regionally accredited college or university and hold a license issued by the Virginia Board of Education with a teaching endorsement in a teaching area; and

2. Completed 18 semester hours of coursework distributed in the following areas:

a. Mathematics, including discrete mathematics;

b. Data structures and algorithm analysis;

c. Foundations of computer science; and

d. Programming in at least two distinct languages: 6 semester hours.

8VAC20-23-310. Dance arts preK-12.

A. Endorsement requirements. The candidate must have:

1. Graduated from an approved teacher preparation program in dance arts; or

2. Earned a baccalaureate degree from a regionally accredited college or university and completed a major in dance arts or 24 semester hours with coursework distributed in the following areas:

a. Development of movement language: 9 semester hours.

(1) A course in each area of ballet, folk, jazz, and modern dance: 6 semester hours; and

(2) Area of concentration in one area of ballet, folk, jazz, or modern dance beyond the entry level: 3 semester hours;

b. Composition, improvisation, and dance arts production, may include stage lighting, stage costuming, or stage makeup: 3 semester hours;

c. Scientific foundations, including human anatomy, kinesiology, and injury prevention and care for dance arts: 9 semester hours; and

d. Cultural understanding, including cultural context and dance history: 3 semester hours.

B. Add-on endorsement requirements in dance arts. The candidate must have:

1. An earned baccalaureate degree from a regionally accredited college or university and hold a license issued by the Virginia Board of Education with a teaching endorsement in a teaching area; and

2. Completed 15 semester hours of coursework distributed in the following areas:

a. Development of movement language: 9 semester hours.

(1) A course in each area of ballet, folk, jazz, and modern: 6 semester hours; and

(2) Area of concentration in one area of ballet, folk, jazz, or modern beyond the entry level: 3 semester hours;

b. Composition, improvisation, and dance arts production, may include stage lighting, stage costuming, or stage makeup: 3 semester hours; and

c. Cultural understanding, including cultural context and dance history: 3 semester hours.

8VAC20-23-320. Driver education (add-on endorsement).

Endorsement requirements. The candidate must have:

1. An earned baccalaureate degree from a regionally accredited college or university and hold a license issued by the Virginia Board of Education with a teaching endorsement in a teaching area; and

2. Completed an approved teacher preparation program in driver education; or

3. Completed 6 semester hours of coursework distributed in the following areas:

a. Driver Task Analysis: to include instructional strategies as prescribed in the Curriculum and Administrative Guide for Driver Education in Virginia 2010 (http://www.doe.virginia.gov/instruction/driver_ education/curriculum_admin_guide/index.shtml); understanding the highway transportation system; applying Virginia's motor vehicle laws; personal, legal, and emotional factors; visual and sensory perception; risk perception and risk management; space management and other defensive driving techniques; environmental, financial, and other vehicle ownership responsibilities; vehicle technologies; and the scientific principles of the driving tasks: 3 semester hours; and

b. Principles and methodologies of classroom and in-car instruction, including applying classroom and in-car teaching techniques for delivering concurrent instruction; applying perception, vehicle balance, speed control, and other risk management principles to the development of precision driving skills; and understanding program administrative tasks, including juvenile licensing laws and issuance of a driver's license; a minimum of 14 hours of actual behind-the-wheel supervised teaching experience demonstrating vehicle control skills and performance capabilities that includes 2 hours of basic evasive maneuvers; and a minimum of 14 hours of mentorship with a licensed, endorsed driver education teacher: 3 semester hours.

4. A current, valid Virginia driver's license.

8VAC20-23-330. Engineering.

Endorsement requirements. The candidate must have:

1. Graduated from an approved teacher preparation program in engineering;

2. Earned a baccalaureate degree from a regionally accredited college or university and completed a major in engineering or an engineering subspecialty at an Accreditation Board for Engineering and Technology (ABET)-accredited college or university program;

3. Earned a baccalaureate degree from a regionally accredited college or university and completed an engineering technology, science, or technology education major with at least 12 semester hours of coursework in engineering courses, including:

a. Introduction to engineering design;

b. Statics or dynamics;

c. Circuits or fluid mechanics; and

d. Thermodynamics;

4. Completed a science, mathematics, or technology education major with at least five years of successful experience working in an engineering environment; or

5. Hold a professional engineer's (P.E.) license.

8VAC20-23-340. English.

Endorsement requirements. The candidate must have:

1. Graduated from an approved teacher preparation program in English; or

2. Earned a baccalaureate degree from a regionally accredited college or university and completed a major in English or a minimum of 36 semester hours of coursework distributed in the following areas:

a. Literacy and reading: 12 semester hours. Courses must include:

(1) Survey of British literature;

(2) Survey of American literature;

(3) World literature; and

(4) Literary theory and criticism.

b. Language: 3 semester hours. Includes the development and nature of the English language.

c. Composition: 12 semester hours. Experiences shall include:

(1) A grammar course integrating grammar and writing;

(2) The teaching of writing, based on current knowledge and most effective practices, including the use of technology for this purpose;

(3) An advanced composition course emphasizing rhetorical practices of expository, persuasive, argumentative, and analytical writing; and

(4) Teaching research including ethical accessing, evaluating, organizing, crediting, and synthesizing information.

d. Oral language: 3 semester hours. Experiences shall include the teaching of public and presentation speaking, including nonverbal communication and the role of communication in small group and mass communication.

e. Electives from the areas listed in this section: 6 semester hours.

8VAC20-23-350. English as a second language preK-12.

Endorsement requirements. The candidate must have:

1. Graduated from an approved teacher preparation program in English as a second language; or

2. Earned a baccalaureate degree from a regionally accredited college or university and completed 24 semester hours of coursework distributed in the following areas:

a. Teaching of reading and writing. Courses must include the five areas of reading instruction: phonemic awareness, phonics, fluency, vocabulary and text comprehension as well as the similarities and differences between reading in a first language and reading in a second language and a balanced literacy approach; one course must address teaching reading to English language learners: 6 semester hours;

b. English linguistics: 3 semester hours;

c. Cross-cultural education: 3 semester hours;

d. Second language acquisition: 3 semester hours;

e. Methods of English as a second language, to include the World-Class Instructional Design and Assessment (WIDA) English Language Development (ELD) Standards: 3 semester hours;

f. English as a second language assessment to include assessing comprehension and communication in English: 3 semester hours; and

g. Electives from the areas listed in this section: 3 semester hours.

8VAC20-23-360. Foreign language preK-12.

A. The specific language of the endorsement will be noted on the license.

B. Endorsement requirements for foreign language
preK-12 - languages other than Latin. The candidate must have:

1. Graduated from an approved teacher preparation program in a foreign language; or

2. Earned a baccalaureate degree from a regionally accredited college or university and completed 30 semester hours of coursework above the intermediate level in the foreign language distributed in the following areas:

a. Advanced grammar and composition;

b. Conversation, culture and civilization, and literature; and

c. In addition to the 30 semester hours, completed a minimum of 3 semester hours of methods of teaching foreign languages at the elementary and secondary levels.

3. Endorsement in a second language may be obtained with 24 semester hours of coursework above the intermediate level.

4. Candidates who have learned a foreign language without formal academic credit in a regionally accredited college or university must complete the following requirements:

a. Achieve a qualifying score on a foreign language assessment in the appropriate language as prescribed by the Virginia Board of Education; and

b. Earn a minimum of 3 semester hours of methods of teaching foreign languages at the elementary and secondary levels from a regionally accredited college or university in the United States or obtain teacher certification in another country with at least 3 semester hours of methods of teaching foreign languages at the elementary and secondary levels at a foreign institution.

C. Endorsement requirements for foreign language
preK-12 - Latin. The candidate must have:

1. Graduated from an approved teacher preparation program in Latin; or

2. Earned a baccalaureate degree from a regionally accredited college or university and completed 24 semester hours of Latin above the intermediate level. A maximum of six semester hours of Roman history, Roman life, mythology, or archaeology may be included in the total hours. A minimum of 3 semester hours of methods of teaching Latin at the elementary and secondary levels are required.

D. Endorsement requirements for foreign language
preK-12 - American Sign Language.

1. The candidate must have (i) graduated from an approved teacher preparation program in a foreign language - American Sign Language or (ii) earned a baccalaureate degree from a regionally accredited college or university and completed a major in American Sign Language or 24 semester hours above the intermediate level in American Sign Language. The program shall include (i) courses in advanced grammar and syntax, conversation, and culture and (ii) a minimum of 3 semester hours of methods of teaching foreign languages at the elementary and secondary levels.

2. Native users or candidates who have learned American Sign Language without formal academic credit in a regionally accredited college or university, as explained in subdivision 1 of this subsection, must complete the following requirements:

a. Competency in American Sign Language demonstrated by written documentation of one of the following:

(1) Hold a current, valid Provisional, Qualified, or Professional certification by the American Sign Language Teachers' Association;

(2) Hold one of the following current, valid national certificates in interpreting:

(a) Registry of Interpreters for Deaf certification in at least one of the following: Certificate of Interpretation (CI), Certificate of Deaf Interpretation (CDI), Reverse Skills Certification (RSC), or Comprehensive Skills Certificate (CSC);

(b) Hold a current, valid National Association for the Deaf Level IV certification or higher; or

(c) National Interpreter Certification (NIC); or

(3) Complete requirements by achieving a qualifying score on an assessment demonstrating proficiency in American Sign Language prescribed by the Virginia Board of Education.

b. Completed a minimum of 3 semester hours of methods of teaching foreign languages at the elementary and secondary levels from a regionally accredited college or university in the United States; and

c. Earned a minimum of 6 semester hours in coursework including grammar and syntax of American Sign Language.

8VAC20-23-370. Gifted education (add-on endorsement).

Endorsement requirements. The candidate must have:

1. An earned baccalaureate degree from a regionally accredited college or university and hold a license issued by the Virginia Board of Education with a teaching endorsement in a teaching area; and

2. Completed an approved teacher preparation program in gifted education; or

3. Completed the following requirements:

a. Completed 12 semester hours of graduate-level coursework in gifted education distributed in the following areas:

(1) Academic and social-emotional characteristics and special populations of gifted learners: 3 semester hours;

(2) Curriculum models and differentiation of instruction for gifted learners: 3 semester hours;

(3) Identification and assessment of gifted learners: 3 semester hours; and

(4) Current trends and issues in the field of gifted education: 3 semester hours; and

b. Completed a practicum of at least 45 instructional hours. This practicum shall include a minimum of 45 instructional hours of successful teaching experiences with gifted students in a public or an accredited nonpublic school. In lieu of the practicum, one year of successful, full-time teaching experience with gifted students in a public or an accredited nonpublic school may be accepted provided the teacher is assigned a mentor holding a valid license with an endorsement in gifted education.

8VAC20-23-380. Health and physical education preK-12.

Endorsement requirements. The candidate must have:

1. Graduated from an approved teacher preparation program in health and physical education; or

2. Earned a baccalaureate degree from a regionally accredited college or university and completed a major in health and physical education or 45 semester hours of coursework distributed in the following areas:

a. Personal health and safety: 3 semester hours;

b. Human anatomy, physiology, and kinesiology: 9 semester hours;

c. General health and physical education theory, including curriculum design and development in health and physical education: 3 semester hours;

d. Instructional methods and skills for secondary physical education: 3 semester hours;

e. Instructional methods and skills for elementary physical education: 3 semester hours;

f. School health methods course: 3 semester hours;

g. Health and physical education electives: 9 semester hours;

h. Adapted physical education: 3 semester hours;

i. Technology in health and physical education: 3 semester hours;

j. Nutrition: 3 semester hours; and

k. Measurement and evaluation in the content area: 3 semester hours.

8VAC20-23-390. History and social sciences.

A. Endorsement requirements. The candidate must have:

1. Graduated from an approved teacher preparation program in history and social sciences; or

2. Earned a baccalaureate degree from a regionally accredited college or university and completed 51 semester hours of coursework distributed in the following areas:

a. History: a major in history or 18 semester hours in history (must include coursework in American history, Virginia history, and world history);

b. Political science: a major in political science or 18 semester hours in political science to include coursework in American government (state and local government);

c. Geography: 9 semester hours; and

d. Economics: 6 semester hours.

B. Add-on endorsement requirements in history, political science, geography, and economics. The candidate must have:

1. Earned a baccalaureate degree from a regionally accredited college or university and have a teaching license with an endorsement in history, political science, geography, or economics; and

2. Completed 21 semester hours of coursework in the additional social science area (i.e., history, political science, geography, or economics) sought.

8VAC20-23-400. Journalism (add-on endorsement).

Endorsement requirements. The candidate must have:

1. An earned baccalaureate degree from a regionally accredited college or university and hold a license issued by the Virginia Board of Education with a teaching endorsement in a teaching area; and

2. Completed a minimum of 15 semester hours in journalism.

8VAC20-23-410. Keyboarding (add-on endorsement).

Endorsement requirements. The candidate must have:

1. An earned baccalaureate degree from a regionally accredited college or university and hold a license issued by the Virginia Board of Education with a teaching endorsement in a teaching area; and

2. Completed 6 semester hours in keyboarding. Three of the six semester hours may be from either formal keyboarding instruction or documented demonstrated mastery of the touch keyboarding skill, and three semester hours must include document formatting skills, word processing, and computer applications.

8VAC20-23-420. Library media preK-12.

Endorsement requirements. The candidate must have:

1. Graduated from an approved preparation program in school library media; or

2. Earned a baccalaureate degree from a regionally accredited college or university and completed 24 semester hours distributed in the following areas:

a. Teaching for learning, including knowledge of learners and learning; effective and knowledgeable teaching; collaborative instructional partners; integration of learning standards and technologies; assessment of and for student learning; and the design and implementation of instruction that engages students interests and develops their ability to inquire, think critically, and gain and share knowledge: 3 semester hours;

b. Literacy and reading, including familiarity with children's, young adult, and professional literature in multiple formats; use of a variety of strategies to promote reading for enjoyment and information; collection development to support diverse learning needs; and collaboration to reinforce reading instructional strategies: 6 semester hours;

c. Information and knowledge, including efficient and ethical information-seeking behavior, ethical and equitable access to information, design and delivery of authentic learning through current and emerging technology, and the use of evidence-based action research to create and share knowledge: 6 semester hours;

d. Advocacy and leadership, including networking with the library community, commitment to professional development, leadership in articulating the role of the school library program in the educational community and in student learning, and advocacy for school library programs, resources, and services: 3 semester hours; and

e. Program management and administration, including planning, developing, implementing, and evaluating library programs, collections, and facilities; personnel; funding; organization of materials; professional ethics; and strategic planning and program assessment: 6 semester hours.

3. Supervised school library media practicum. Experiences shall include clinical experience to give the applicant an opportunity to apply the skills, understandings, and competencies required for the endorsement. One year of successful, full-time experience as a school librarian in a public or accredited nonpublic school may be accepted in lieu of the supervised practicum.

8VAC20-23-430. Mathematics.

Endorsement requirements. The candidate must have:

1. Graduated from an approved teacher preparation program in mathematics; or

2. Earned a baccalaureate degree from a regionally accredited college or university and completed a major in mathematics or 36 semester hours of coursework distributed in each of the following areas:

a. Algebra. Experience shall include linear algebra (matrices, vectors, and linear transformations) and abstract algebra (ring, group, and field theory);

b. Geometry. Experience shall include Euclidean and non-Euclidean geometries;

c. Analytic geometry;

d. Probability and statistics;

e. Discrete mathematics. Experience shall include the study of mathematical properties of finite sets and systems and linear programming;

f. Calculus. Experience shall include multivariable calculus; and

g. Mathematical modeling.

8VAC20-23-440. Mathematics – Algebra I (add-on endorsement).

Endorsement requirements. The candidate must have:

1. An earned baccalaureate degree from a regionally accredited college or university and hold a license issued by the Virginia Board of Education with a teaching endorsement in a teaching area; and

2. Either:

a. Completed an approved teacher preparation program in Algebra I; or

b. Completed 24 semester hours that include coursework in each of the following areas:

(1) Elementary functions, introductory college algebra, and trigonometry;

(2) Linear algebra;

(3) Calculus;

(4) Euclidean geometry;

(5) Probability and statistics;

(6) Discrete mathematics;

(7) Mathematical modeling; and

(8) Methods of teaching algebra.

8VAC20-23-450. Music education – instrumental preK-12.

Endorsement requirements. The candidate must have:

1. Graduated from an approved teacher preparation program in music education - instrumental; or

2. Earned a baccalaureate degree from a regionally accredited college or university and completed 42 semester hours of coursework distributed in the following areas:

a. Basic music knowledge. Experiences shall be related to music theory, music history, and literature: 18 semester hours.

b. Musical performance. Experiences shall consist of developing competency in a primary performance medium (band or orchestral instrument), in a secondary performance medium (band, orchestral, or keyboard instrument), and in teaching, rehearsing, and conducting ensembles: 18 semester hours.

c. Electives with coursework selected from either of the two areas listed in subdivisions 2 a and 2 b of this section: 6 semester hours.

8VAC20-23-460. Music education – vocal/choral preK-12.

Endorsement requirements. The candidate must have:

1. Graduated from an approved teacher preparation program in music education - vocal/choral; or

2. Earned a baccalaureate degree from a regionally accredited college or university and completed 42 semester hours of coursework distributed in the following areas:

a. Basic music knowledge. Experiences shall be related to music theory, music history, and literature: 18 semester hours.

b. Musical performance. Experiences shall consist of developing competency in a primary and secondary medium, selected from voice or keyboard and in teaching, rehearsing, and conducting ensembles: 18 semester hours.

c. Electives with coursework selected from either of the two areas listed in subdivisions 2 a and 2 b of this section: 6 semester hours.

8VAC20-23-470. Science – biology.

Endorsement requirements. The candidate must have:

1. Graduated from an approved teacher preparation program in biology;

2. Earned a baccalaureate degree from a regionally accredited college or university and completed a major in biology or 32 semester hours in biology, and at least one course in each of the following: genetics, biochemistry/molecular biology, cell biology, botany, zoology, anatomy/physiology, ecology, and evolutionary biology and other preparation consistent with the competencies for the endorsement; or

3. Earned an endorsement in another science discipline and at least 18 semester hours in biology, including at least one course in each of the following areas: genetics, biochemistry/molecular biology or cell biology, botany or zoology, anatomy/physiology, and evolutionary biology or ecology.

8VAC20-23-480. Science – chemistry.

Endorsement requirements. The candidate must have:

1. Graduated from an approved teacher preparation program in chemistry;

2. Earned a baccalaureate degree from a regionally accredited college or university and completed a major in chemistry or 32 semester hours in chemistry, including at least one course in each of the following: inorganic chemistry, organic chemistry, physical chemistry, biochemistry, and analytical chemistry and other preparation consistent with the competencies required for the endorsement; or

3. Earned an endorsement in another science discipline and at least 18 semester hours in chemistry, including at least one course in each of the following areas: inorganic chemistry, organic chemistry, physical chemistry, biochemistry, and analytical chemistry.

8VAC20-23-490. Science – Earth science.

Endorsement requirements. The candidate must have:

1. Graduated from an approved teacher preparation program in Earth science;

2. Earned a baccalaureate degree from a regionally accredited college or university and completed a major in Earth science, geology, or environmental science with a minimum of 32 semester hours in Earth sciences, including at least one course in each of the following: structural geology, petrology, paleontology, oceanography, meteorology, and astronomy/space science; or

3. Earned an endorsement in another science discipline and at least 18 semester hours in Earth sciences, including at least one course in each of the following areas: structural geology, petrology, paleontology, oceanography, meteorology, and astronomy/space or planetary science.

8VAC20-23-500. Science – physics.

Endorsement requirements. The candidate must have:

1. Graduated from an approved teacher preparation program in physics;

2. Earned a baccalaureate degree from a regionally accredited college or university and completed a major in physics or 32 semester hours in physics, including the following coursework: mechanics, electricity and magnetism, optics, and modern physics and other preparation consistent with the competencies required for the endorsement; or

3. Earned an endorsement in another science discipline and at least 18 semester hours in physics, including preparation in each of the following areas: mechanics, electricity and magnetism, optics, and modern physics.

8VAC20-23-510. Special education – adapted curriculum K-12.

Endorsement requirements: The candidate must have:

1. Graduated from an approved program in special education - adapted curriculum; or

2. Earned a baccalaureate degree from a regionally accredited college or university and completed 27 semester hours in the education of students with disabilities distributed in the following areas:

a. Core coursework: 12 semester hours distributed among the following areas:

(1) Foundations: 3 semester hours. Characteristics that include knowledge of the foundation for educating students with disabilities; historical, ethical, and legal aspects that include an understanding and application of the federal and state regulatory requirements; and expectations associated with identification, education, and evaluation of students with disabilities;

(2) Assessment and evaluation: 3 semester hours. Includes an understanding and application of the foundation of assessment and evaluation related to best practices in special education, including types and characteristics of assessment, introduction to formal and informal assessment, and the use of assessments and other information to determine special education eligibility, service delivery, curriculum, and instruction of students with disabilities. Understanding of the current legal and ethical issues related to assessment selection and use, including comprehensive evaluation requirements, students with disabilities participation in the state and local accountability systems, assessment options, appropriate grading and testing accommodations, and assessment of students from diverse backgrounds.

(3) Collaboration that includes skills in consultation, case management, co-teaching, and collaboration: 3 semester hours. Includes understanding roles and responsibilities, knowledge and application of effective communication skills and of culturally responsive practices and strategies, and the ability to develop home, school, and community partnerships to address the needs of students with disabilities.

(4) Management of classroom instruction and behaviors: 3 semester hours. Includes an understanding and knowledge of research-based classroom management techniques, positive behaviors supports, and individual interventions and a demonstrated ability to create a safe, orderly classroom environment including classroom organization, instructional design, and establishment of classroom routines and procedures. Knowledge of the elements of effective instructional planning, differentiation of instruction, and other instructional approaches to enhance student engagement and achievement. Understanding of behavior assessments, data collection and analysis, and development and monitoring of behavior intervention plans.

b. Adapted curriculum coursework: 15 semester hours of coursework distributed in the following areas:

(1) Characteristics: 3 semester hours. Skills in this area include the ability to demonstrate knowledge of the characteristics, including medical and health conditions, and learning and support needs of students with disabilities (K-12) whose cognitive and functional skills are significantly different from typically developing peers and therefore require adaptations to the general curriculum for an appropriate education, including, but not limited to, students with autism spectrum disorders, developmental delay, intellectual disability, traumatic brain injury, and multiple disabilities including sensory, deaf-blindness, speech-language, orthopedic and/or health impairments as an additional disability to those referenced above.

(2) Individualized education program (IEP) implementation: 3 semester hours. Knowledge of the eligibility process and legal and regulatory requirements of IEP development, including timelines, components, team composition, roles, and responsibilities. Skills in this area include the ability to apply knowledge of assessment and evaluation throughout the K-12 grade levels to construct, use, and interpret a variety of standardized and nonstandardized data collection techniques; to make decisions about student progress, instruction, program, goal development, modifications, adaptations, placement, and teaching methodology for students with disabilities who are accessing the general education curriculum and Standards of Learning through an aligned curriculum; and to demonstrate the use of assessment, evaluation, and other information to develop and implement individual educational planning and group instruction with students with disabilities in an adapted curriculum across the K-12 grade levels.

(3) Transitioning: 3 semester hours. Skills in this area include the ability to prepare students and work with families to provide successful student transitions throughout the educational experience to include postsecondary education, training, employment, and independent living that addresses an understanding of long-term planning, age-appropriate transition assessments, career development, life skills, community experiences and resources, and self-determination to include goal setting, decision making, problem solving, self-awareness and self-advocacy, guardianship, and other legal considerations.

(4) Instructional methods and strategies for the adapted curriculum: 3 semester hours. An understanding and application of service delivery, curriculum, and instruction of students with disabilities who need an adapted curriculum. Knowledge of the general curriculum requirements and expectations and how to provide access to the curriculum based on student characteristics and needs. Skills in this area include the ability to understand and use a range of modifications, adaptations, special instructional strategies, and research-based interventions that reflect best practice in reading, writing, and mathematics instruction for students with more significant disabilities; ability to align the instructional practices and intervention with the Virginia Standards of Learning and state assessments; knowledge of available assistive and instructional technologies, including alternative communication methods and systems to promote learning and independence for students with disabilities in the adaptive curriculum and the ability to evaluate its effectiveness; ability to develop and use curriculum-based and standardized assessment to conduct ongoing evaluations of instructional material and practices to determine effectiveness and assess student needs as they relate to curriculum design and delivery; ability to modify and adapt instructional content in a variety of settings and collaborate with general education content teachers to develop and implement instructional practices that meet the needs of students with disabilities in the adapted curriculum and monitor student progress.

(5) Individualized supports and specialized care of students with significant disabilities: 3 semester hours. Knowledge of and ability to implement adapted strategies to address the positioning, handling, communication, personal care, and medical needs of students with significant disabilities. Knowledge and understanding of the roles of related disciplines and service providers in collaborative planning and service delivery. Demonstration of the ability to develop and utilize a blended curriculum design to address disability-specific or unique needs such as feeding and communication while addressing the adapted curriculum requirements.

8VAC20-23-520. Special education blindness and visual impairments preK-12.

Endorsement requirements. The candidate must have:

1. Graduated from an approved teacher preparation program in special education visual impairments preK-12; or

2. Earned a baccalaureate degree from a regionally accredited college or university and completed a major in special education blindness and visual impairments or 30 semester hours in education of students with visual impairments, distributed with at least one course in each of the following areas:

a. Characteristics of students with visual impairment. Provides an overview of the characteristics of and services to persons with visual impairments, including the impact of visual impairment on infant and child growth and development, child and adolescent emotional and social development, and family interaction patterns. Includes the educational, conceptual, psychosocial, and physical implications of a visual impairment.

b. Foundations. Includes knowledge of the foundation for educating students with disabilities; historical, ethical, and legal aspects that include understanding and application of the regulatory requirements; and expectations associated with identification, education, and evaluation of students with disabilities.

c. Braille code: 3 semester hours. Includes the literary code of Braille, its implications for educational and literacy programs for students with visual disabilities and how to teach the Braille code to students with visual impairments.

d. Braille reading and writing: 3 semester hours. Includes instruction in the various technologies used by students who use Braille; basic instruction on transcription of advanced Braille codes, including music, foreign language, chemistry, computer Braille, and Nemeth code (Braille mathematics code); techniques for teaching skills in each code; and technology tools used to create Braille and tactile materials in addition to other assistive technologies used for instruction in mathematics and science.

e. Medical and educational implications of visual impairment. Includes anatomy of the human eye, normal visual development, pathology of the eye, examination procedures for the identification of visual pathology, and the effects of pathology on visual learning and development.

f. Assistive technology for students with sensory impairment. Introduces specific technology and resources available to enhance and improve ability of individuals with sensory disabilities and includes literacy skill development of students who are blind or visually impaired using technology.

g. Curriculum and assessment. Includes knowledge of educational assessments used with students with visual impairments and additional disabilities including deaf-blindness. Addresses assessment of technology needs of students with visual impairments, including functional vision assessments, learning media assessments, assistive technology, and assessment in areas of the expanded core curriculum; application of assessment results to development of the individualized education program (IEP); planning for placement; and services and accommodations for students with visual impairments.

h. Positive behavior intervention supports. Includes understanding of research-based, positive behavior intervention supports and individual interventions; knowledge of the elements of effective instructional planning, differentiation of instruction, and other instructional approaches to enhance student engagement and achievement; and understanding of behavior assessments, data collection and analysis, development and monitoring of behavior intervention plans.

i. Collaboration. Includes skills in consultation, case management, co-teaching, and collaboration that include understanding roles and responsibilities, knowledge and application of effective communication skills, of culturally responsive practices and strategies, and the ability to develop home, school, and community partnerships to address the needs of students who are visually impaired.

j. Teaching methods.

(1) Includes methods of teaching compensatory skills, the core curriculum, and technology used by students who are blind and visually impaired; introduces individual family service plans (IFSPs); and includes understanding and application of development and implementation of the IEP, including service delivery, curriculum, and instruction of students who are visually impaired.

(2) Knowledge of the general curriculum requirements and expectations and how to provide access to the curriculum based on student characteristics and needs.

(3) Ability to assess, interpret data, and implement instructional practices to address the identified needs of the students. Skills in this area include the ability to identify, understand, and implement a range of specialized instructional strategies and research-based interventions that reflect best practice in instruction for students who are visually impaired.

(4) Ability to align the instructional practices and intervention with the Standards of Learning and state assessments.

(5) Ability to develop and use curriculum-based and standardized assessments to conduct ongoing evaluations of instructional materials and practices to assess student needs as they relate to curriculum design and delivery.

(6) Ability to model and directly teach instructional strategies in a variety of settings, and monitor student progress.

(7) Ability to adapt materials and procedures to meet the needs of students with visual impairments.

k. Orientation and mobility. Includes the components of orientation and mobility (O&M); how the need for independent travel in the blind population created the field of O&M; and the philosophy and history of O&M, including cane instruction, dog guides, and methods of travel. Addresses techniques in developing orientation skills and basic mobility instruction. Motor and concept skill development are emphasized.

8VAC20-23-530. Special education deaf and hard of hearing preK-12.

Endorsement requirements. The candidate must have:

1. Graduated from an approved teacher preparation program in special education deaf and hard of hearing; or

2. Earned a baccalaureate degree from a regionally accredited college or university and completed a major in special education deaf and hard of hearing or 27 semester hours in education of students who are deaf and hard of hearing distributed in the following areas:

a. Foundations: 3 semester hours. Includes knowledge of the foundation for educating students with disabilities; historical, ethical and legal aspects that include understanding and application of the regulatory requirements; and expectations associated with identification, education, and evaluation of students with disabilities.

b. Characteristics: 3 semester hours. Includes the ability to demonstrate knowledge of etiologies of hearing loss, definitions, characteristics, learning, and support needs of students who are deaf and hard of hearing from pre-K through secondary levels, who may be using various communication modalities/languages and who may have additional disabilities.

c. Assessment and evaluation: 3 semester hours. Includes an understanding and application of the foundation of assessment and evaluation related to best practices, including types and characteristics of assessments, formal and informal assessment, and the use of assessment information to determine special education eligibility and inform service delivery, curriculum, accommodations, instructional methods, and student progress. Understanding comprehensive evaluation requirements, participation of students with disabilities in state and local accountability systems, assessment options, appropriate testing accommodations, and assessment of students from diverse backgrounds.

d. Instructional planning: 3 semester hours.

(1) Familiarity with individual family service plans (IFSPs).

(2) An understanding and application of development and implementation of the individualized education program (IEP) including service delivery, curriculum, and instruction of students who are deaf and hard of hearing and transition.

(3) Knowledge of the general curriculum requirements and expectations and how to provide access to the curriculum based on student characteristics and needs.

(4) Ability to assess, interpret data, and implement instructional practices to address the identified needs of the students. Skills in this area include the ability to identify, understand, and implement a range of specialized instructional strategies and research-based interventions that reflect best practice in instruction for students who are deaf and hard of hearing.

(5) Ability to align the instructional practices and intervention with the Standards of Learning and state assessments.

(6) Ability to develop and use curriculum-based and standardized assessments to conduct ongoing evaluations of instructional materials and practices to assess student needs as they relate to the curriculum design and delivery.

(7) Ability to model and directly teach instructional strategies in a variety of settings, collaborate with general educators to develop and implement instructional practices that meet the needs of students who are deaf and hard of hearing, and monitor student progress.

e. Speech, language, and literacy development: 3 semester hours. Includes an understanding of the normal developmental sequence of speech, language (oral, signed, and written), auditory, and cognitive milestones, varying methodologies and strategies used in assessing language skills (through the air and spoken) of a student who is deaf and hard of hearing; demonstrate skills necessary to foster and enhance language development and communication skills in students who are deaf and hard of hearing including American Sign Language, cued speech, and listening and spoken language skills. Ability to model and directly teach instructional strategies that foster language and literacy development.

f. Classroom and behavior management: 3 semester hours. Includes an understanding and knowledge of research-based classroom management techniques, positive behavior intervention supports and individual interventions; and demonstrated ability to create a safe, orderly classroom environment including classroom organization, instructional design, and establishment of classroom routines and procedures. Knowledge of the elements of effective instructional planning, differentiation of instruction, and other instructional approaches to enhance student engagement and achievement. Understanding of behavior assessments, data collection and analysis, development, and monitoring of behavior intervention plans

g. Audiology and speech and hearing science: 3 semester hours. Understanding of the basic principles of sound reception and production including neuroanatomy of speech and hearing mechanisms and physical characteristics and measurement of acoustic stimuli; biological, neurological, and acoustic bases of communication; reading and interpreting audiograms and other audiologic assessments used in determining eligibility; knowledge of types, degrees, and effects of hearing loss on developmental domains; relevance of age of onset, age of identification of hearing loss, and age of amplification and intervention in speech and language development; ability to troubleshoot hearing aids, external components of cochlear implants, and other assistive listening devices; ability to foster development of listening skills.

h. Collaboration: 3 semester hours. Includes skills in consultation, case management, co-teaching, and collaboration that includes understanding roles and responsibilities, knowledge and application of effective communication skills, of culturally responsive practices and strategies, and the ability to develop home, school, and community partnerships to address the needs of students who are deaf and hard of hearing.

i. Communication Modalities: 3 semester hours. Includes introduction to the various communication modalities used by students who are deaf and hard of hearing, including listening and spoken language, cued speech, speech reading, and through the air communication including use of American Sign Language (ASL) and contact varieties of signed language and coursework to learn ASL.

8VAC20-23-540. Special education early childhood (birth-age five years).

Endorsement requirements. The candidate must have:

1. Graduated from an approved teacher preparation program in early childhood special education; or

2. Earned a baccalaureate degree from a regionally accredited college or university and completed a major in early childhood special education or 27 semester graduate hours in early childhood special education, including at least one course in each of the following:

a. Foundations and legal aspects of special education: 3 semester hours;

b. Assessment for diagnosis, program planning, and curriculum-based measurement to document progress for young children with typical development, disabling, and at-risk conditions: 3 semester hours;

c. Curriculum and instructional programming for preschool: 3 semester hours;

d. Speech and language development and intervention: 3 semester hours;

e. Medical aspects: 3 semester hours;

f. Social and emotional skills and behavior management for early childhood: 3 semester hours;

g. Consultation, co-teaching, coaching, and mentoring: 3 semester hours;

h. Family-centered intervention: 3 semester hours; and

i. Early childhood elective: 3 semester hours.

8VAC20-23-550. Special education – general curriculum K-12.

Endorsement requirements: The candidate must have:

1. Graduated from an approved program in special education - general curriculum; or

2. Earned a baccalaureate degree from a regionally accredited college or university and completed 27 semester hours in the education of students with disabilities distributed in the following areas:

a. Core coursework: 12 semester hours distributed among the following areas:

(1) Foundations: 3 semester hours. Characteristics that include knowledge of the foundation for educating students with disabilities; historical, ethical, and legal aspects that include an understanding and application of the federal and state regulatory requirements; and expectations associated with identification, education, and evaluation of students with disabilities.

(2) Assessment and evaluation: 3 semester hours. Includes an understanding and application of the foundation of assessment and evaluation related to best practice in special education, including types and characteristics of assessment, introduction to formal and informal assessment, and the use of assessments and other information to determine special education eligibility, service delivery, curriculum, and instruction of students with disabilities. Understanding of the current legal and ethical issues related to assessment selection and use, including comprehensive evaluation requirements, students with disabilities participation in the state and local accountability systems, assessment options, appropriate grading and testing accommodations, and assessment of students from diverse backgrounds.

(3) Collaboration that includes skills in consultation, case management, co-teaching, and collaboration: 3 semester hours. Includes understanding roles and responsibilities, knowledge and application of effective communication skills and of culturally responsive practices and strategies and the ability to develop home, school, and community partnerships to address the needs of students with disabilities.

(4) Management of classroom instruction and behaviors: 3 semester hours. Includes an understanding and knowledge of research-based classroom management techniques, positive behavior support, and individual interventions and a demonstrated ability to create a safe, orderly classroom environment, including classroom organization, instructional design, and establishment of classroom routines and procedures. Knowledge of the elements of effective instructional planning, differentiation of instruction, and other instructional approaches to enhance student engagement and achievement. Understanding of behavior assessments, data collection and analysis, development, and monitoring of behavior intervention plans.

b. General curriculum coursework: 15 semester hours distributed in the following areas:

(1) Characteristics: 3 semester hours. Skills in this area shall include the ability to demonstrate knowledge of definitions, characteristics, and learning and behavioral support needs of students with disabilities who are accessing the general education curriculum at the elementary, middle, and high school levels, including but not limited to, students with learning disabilities, emotional disability, and intellectual disabilities; developmental delay; autism; other health impairments; traumatic brain injury; and multiple disabilities.

(2) Individualized education program development and implementation: 3 semester hours. Knowledge of the eligibility process and legal and regulatory requirements of IEP development including timelines, components, team composition, and roles and responsibilities. Skills in this area include the ability to apply knowledge of assessment and evaluation throughout the K-12 grade levels to construct, use, and interpret a variety of standardized and nonstandardized data collection techniques; to make decisions about student progress, instructional program, goal development, accommodations, placement, and teaching methodology for students with disabilities who are accessing the general education curriculum and the standards of learning; and to demonstrate the use of assessment, evaluation, and other information to develop and implement individual educational planning and group instruction with students with disabilities who are accessing the general education curriculum across the K-12 grade levels.

(3) Transitioning: 3 semester hours. Skills in this area include the ability to prepare students and work with families and community agencies to provide successful student transitions throughout the educational experience to include postsecondary education training, employment, and independent living that addresses an understanding of long-term planning, career development, life skills, community experiences and resources, self-advocacy, and self-determination, guardianship, and legal considerations.

(4) Instructional strategies in reading and writing: 3 semester hours.

(a) An understanding and application of service delivery, curriculum, and instruction of students with disabilities in reading and writing.

(b) Knowledge of the general curriculum, English requirements and expectations, and how to provide access to the curriculum based on student characteristics and needs.

(c) Ability to assess, interpret data, and implement instructional practices to address the identified reading needs of the students. Skills in this area include the ability to identify, understand, and implement a range of specialized instructional strategies and research-based interventions that reflect best practice in reading and writing instruction for students with disabilities.

(d) Ability to align the instructional practices and intervention with the Virginia Standards of Learning and state assessments.

(e) Knowledge and ability to utilize current assistive and instructional reading and writing technologies to promote learning and independence for students with disabilities in the general curriculum and the ability to evaluate the effectiveness of the use of the technologies.

(f) Ability to develop and use curriculum-based and standardized reading and writing assessments to conduct ongoing evaluations of instructional materials and practices to determine effectiveness and assess student needs as they relate to the curriculum design and delivery.

(g) Ability to model and directly teach reading and writing instructional strategies in a variety of settings, collaborate and co-teach with general educators to develop and implement instructional practices that meet the needs of students with disabilities in the general curriculum, and monitor student progress.

(5) Instructional strategies in mathematics: 3 semester hours.

(a) An understanding and application of service delivery, curriculum, and instruction of students with disabilities in mathematics.

(b) Knowledge of the general curriculum mathematics requirements and expectations and how to provide access to the curriculum based on student characteristics and needs.

(c) Ability to assess, interpret data, and implement instructional practices to address calculations, reasoning, and problem-solving skills. Skills in this area include the ability to understand and use a range of specialized mathematics instructional strategies and research-based interventions that reflect best practice in mathematics instruction for students with disabilities.

(d) Ability to align the instructional practices and intervention with the Virginia Standards of Learning and state assessments.

(e) Knowledge of and ability to utilize current mathematics related assistive and instructional technologies to promote learning and independence for students with disabilities in the general curriculum and the ability to evaluate the effectiveness of the use of the technologies.

(f) Ability to develop and use curriculum-based and standardized mathematics assessments to conduct ongoing evaluations of instructional materials and practices to determine effectiveness and assess student needs as they relate to the mathematics curriculum design and delivery.

(g) Ability to model and directly teach mathematics instructional strategies in a variety of settings, collaborate and co-teach with general educators to develop and implement instructional practices that meet the needs of students with disabilities in the mathematics general curriculum, and monitor student progress.

8VAC20-23-560. Special education – general curriculum K-6 (add-on endorsement).

Endorsement requirements: The candidate must:

1. Hold an earned baccalaureate degree from a regionally accredited college or university and hold a license issued by the Virginia Board of Education with an endorsement in elementary education (i.e., early/primary education preK-3 or elementary education preK-6).

2. Have completed 15 semester hours in the education of students with disabilities distributed in each of the following areas:

a. Foundations: 3 semester hours. Characteristics that include knowledge of the foundation for educating students with disabilities; historical, ethical, and legal aspects that include an understanding and application of the federal and state regulatory requirements; and expectations associated with identification, education, and evaluation of students with disabilities.

b. Individualized education program development and implementation: 3 semester hours. Knowledge of the eligibility process and legal and regulatory requirements of IEP development including timelines, components, team composition, and roles and responsibilities. Skills in this area include the ability to apply knowledge of assessment and evaluation throughout the K-12 grade levels to construct, use, and interpret a variety of standardized and nonstandardized data collection techniques; to make decisions about student progress, instructional, program, goal development, accommodations, placement, and teaching methodology for students with disabilities who are accessing the general education curriculum and the Virginia Standards of Learning; and to demonstrate the use of assessment, evaluation, and other information to develop and implement individual educational planning and group instruction with students with disabilities who are accessing the general education curriculum across the K-12 grade levels.

c. Assessment and evaluation: 3 semester hours. Includes an understanding and application of the foundation of assessment and evaluation related to best practice in special education, including types and characteristics of assessment, introduction to formal and informal assessment, and the use of assessments and other information to determine special education eligibility, service delivery, curriculum, and instruction of students with disabilities. Understanding of the current legal and ethical issues related to assessment selection and use, including comprehensive evaluation requirements, students with disabilities' participation in the state and local accountability systems, assessment options, appropriate grading and testing accommodations, and assessment of students from diverse backgrounds.

d. Instructional strategies in reading and writing: 3 semester hours.

(1) An understanding and application of service delivery, curriculum, and instruction of students with disabilities in reading and writing.

(2) Knowledge of the general curriculum, English requirements and expectations, and how to provide access to the curriculum based on student characteristics and needs.

(3) Ability to assess, interpret data, and implement instructional practices to address the identified reading needs of the students. Skills in this area include the ability to identify, understand, and implement a range of specialized instructional strategies and research-based interventions that reflect best practice in reading and writing instruction for students with disabilities.

(4) Ability to align the instructional practices and intervention with the Virginia Standards of Learning and state assessments.

(5) Knowledge and ability to utilize current assistive and instructional reading and writing technologies to promote learning and independence for students with disabilities in the general curriculum and the ability to evaluate the effectiveness of the use of the technologies.

(6) Ability to develop and use curriculum-based and standardized reading and writing assessments to conduct ongoing evaluations of instructional materials and practices to determine effectiveness and assess student needs as they relate to the curriculum design and delivery.

(7) Ability to model and directly teach reading and writing instructional strategies in a variety of settings, collaborate and co-teach with general educators to develop and implement instructional practices that meet the needs of students with disabilities in the general curriculum, and monitor student progress.

e. Instructional strategies in mathematics: (3 semester hours).

(1) An understanding and application of service delivery, curriculum, and instruction of students with disabilities in mathematics.

(2) Knowledge of the general curriculum mathematics requirements and expectations and how to provide access to the curriculum based on student characteristics and needs.

(3) Ability to assess, interpret data, and implement instructional practices to address calculations, reasoning, and problem-solving skills. Skills in this area include the ability to understand and use a range of specialized mathematics instructional strategies and research-based interventions that reflect best practice in mathematics instruction for students with disabilities.

(4) Ability to align the instructional practices and intervention with the Virginia Standards of Learning and state assessments.

(5) Knowledge of and ability to utilize current mathematics-related assistive and instructional technologies to promote learning and independence for students with disabilities in the general curriculum and the ability to evaluate the effectiveness of the use of the technologies.

(6) Ability to develop and use curriculum-based and standardized mathematics assessments to conduct ongoing evaluations of instructional materials and practices to determine effectiveness and assess student needs as they relate to the mathematics curriculum design and delivery.

(7) Ability to model and directly teach mathematics instructional strategies in a variety of settings, collaborate and co-teach with general educators to develop and implement instructional practices that meet the needs of students with disabilities in the mathematics general curriculum, and monitor student progress.

8VAC20-23-570. Special education – general curriculum middle grades 6-8 (add-on endorsement).

Endorsement requirements: The candidate must:

1. Hold an earned baccalaureate degree from a regionally accredited college or university and hold a license issued by the Virginia Board of Education with an endorsement in middle education (i.e., middle education 6-8 English, middle education 6-8 history and social sciences, middle education 6-8 mathematics, or middle education-sciences).

2. Have completed 15 semester hours in the education of students with disabilities distributed in each of the following areas:

a. Foundations: 3 semester hours. Characteristics that include knowledge of the foundation for educating students with disabilities; historical, ethical, and legal aspects that include an understanding and application of the federal and state regulatory requirements; and expectations associated with identification, education, and evaluation of students with disabilities.

b. Individualized education program development and implementation: 3 semester hours. Knowledge of the eligibility process and legal and regulatory requirements of IEP development, including timelines, components, team composition, and roles and responsibilities. Skills in this area include the ability to apply knowledge of assessment and evaluation throughout the K-12 grade levels to construct, use, and interpret a variety of standardized and nonstandardized data collection techniques; to make decisions about student progress, instructional, program, goal development, accommodations, placement, and teaching methodology for students with disabilities who are accessing the general education curriculum and the standards of learning; and to demonstrate the use of assessment, evaluation, and other information to develop and implement individual educational planning and group instruction with students with disabilities who are accessing the general education curriculum across the K-12 grade levels.

c. Transitioning: 3 semester hours. Skills in this area include the ability to prepare students and work with families and community agencies to provide successful student transitions throughout the educational experience to include postsecondary education training, employment, and independent living that addresses an understanding of long-term planning, career development, life skills, community experiences and resources, self-advocacy, and self-determination, guardianship, and legal considerations.

d. Instructional strategies in reading and writing: 3 semester hours.

(1) An understanding and application of service delivery, curriculum, and instruction of students with disabilities in reading and writing.

(2) Knowledge of the general curriculum, English requirements and expectations, and how to provide access to the curriculum based on student characteristics and needs.

(3) Ability to assess, interpret data, and implement instructional practices to address the identified reading needs of the students. Skills in this area include the ability to identify, understand, and implement a range of specialized instructional strategies and research-based interventions that reflect best practice in reading and writing instruction for students with disabilities.

(4) Ability to align the instructional practices and intervention with the Virginia Standards of Learning and state assessments.

(5) Knowledge and ability to utilize current assistive and instructional reading and writing technologies to promote learning and independence for students with disabilities in the general curriculum and the ability to evaluate the effectiveness of the use of the technologies.

(6) Ability to develop and use curriculum-based and standardized reading and writing assessments to conduct ongoing evaluations of instructional materials and practices to determine effectiveness and assess student needs as it relates to the curriculum design and delivery.

(7) Ability to model and directly teach reading and writing instructional strategies in a variety of settings, collaborate and co-teach with general educators to develop and implement instructional practices that meet the needs of students with disabilities in the general curriculum, and monitor student progress.

e. Instructional strategies in mathematics: (3 semester hours).

(1) An understanding and application of service delivery, curriculum, and instruction of students with disabilities in mathematics.

(2) Knowledge of the general curriculum mathematics requirements and expectations and how to provide access to the curriculum based on student characteristics and needs.

(3) Ability to assess, interpret data, and implement instructional practices to address calculations, reasoning and problem-solving skills. Skills in this area include the ability to understand and use a range of specialized mathematics instructional strategies and research-based interventions that reflect best practice in mathematics instruction for students with disabilities.

(4) Ability to align the instructional practices and intervention with the Virginia Standards of Learning and state assessments.

(5) Knowledge of and ability to utilize current mathematics-related assistive and instructional technologies to promote learning and independence for students with disabilities in the general curriculum and the ability to evaluate the effectiveness of the use of the technologies.

(6) Ability to develop and use curriculum-based and standardized mathematics assessments to conduct ongoing evaluations of instructional materials and practices to determine effectiveness and assess student needs as they relate to the mathematics curriculum design and delivery.

(7) Ability to model and directly teach mathematics instructional strategies in a variety of settings, collaborate and co-teach with general educators to develop and implement instructional practices that meet the needs of students with disabilities in the mathematics general curriculum, and monitor student progress.

8VAC20-23-580. Special education – general curriculum secondary grades 6-12 (add-on endorsement).

Endorsement requirements: The candidate must:

1. Hold an earned baccalaureate degree from a regionally accredited college or university and hold a license issued by the Virginia Board of Education with an endorsement in English, history and social sciences, mathematics, biology, chemistry, Earth science, or physics.

2. Have completed 15 semester hours in the education of students with disabilities distributed in each of the following areas:

a. Foundations: 3 semester hours. Characteristics that include knowledge of the foundation for educating students with disabilities; historical, ethical, and legal aspects that include an understanding and application of the federal and state regulatory requirements; and expectations associated with identification, education, and evaluation of students with disabilities.

b. Individualized education program development and implementation: 3 semester hours. Knowledge of the eligibility process and legal and regulatory requirements of IEP development, including timelines, components, team composition, and roles and responsibilities. Skills in this area include the ability to apply knowledge of assessment and evaluation throughout the K-12 grade levels to construct, use, and interpret a variety of standardized and nonstandardized data collection techniques; to make decisions about student progress, instructional, program, goal development, accommodations, placement, and teaching methodology for students with disabilities who are accessing the general education curriculum and the Virginia Standards of Learning; and to demonstrate the use of assessment, evaluation, and other information to develop and implement individual educational planning and group instruction with students with disabilities who are accessing the general education curriculum across the K-12 grade levels.

c. Transitioning: 3 semester hours. Skills in this area include the ability to prepare students and work with families and community agencies to provide successful student transitions throughout the educational experience to include postsecondary education training, employment, and independent living that addresses an understanding of long-term planning, career development, life skills, community experiences and resources, self-advocacy, and self-determination, guardianship, and legal considerations.

d. Instructional strategies in reading and writing: 3 semester hours.

(1) An understanding and application of service delivery, curriculum, and instruction of students with disabilities in reading and writing.

(2) Knowledge of the general curriculum, English requirements and expectations, and how to provide access to the curriculum based on student characteristics and needs.

(3) Ability to assess, interpret data, and implement instructional practices to address the identified reading needs of the students. Skills in this area include the ability to identify, understand, and implement a range of specialized instructional strategies and research-based interventions that reflect best practice in reading and writing instruction for students with disabilities.

(4) Ability to align the instructional practices and intervention with the Virginia Standards of Learning and state assessments.

(5) Knowledge and ability to utilize current assistive and instructional reading and writing technologies to promote learning and independence for students with disabilities in the general curriculum and the ability to evaluate the effectiveness of the use of the technologies.

(6) Ability to develop and use curriculum-based and standardized reading and writing assessments to conduct ongoing evaluations of instructional materials and practices to determine effectiveness and assess student needs as they relate to the curriculum design and delivery.

(7) Ability to model and directly teach reading and writing instructional strategies in a variety of settings, collaborate and co-teach with general educators to develop and implement instructional practices that meet the needs of students with disabilities in the general curriculum, and monitor student progress.

e. Instructional strategies in mathematics: (3 semester hours).

(1) An understanding and application of service delivery, curriculum, and instruction of students with disabilities in mathematics.

(2) Knowledge of the general curriculum mathematics requirements and expectations and how to provide access to the curriculum based on student characteristics and needs.

(3) Ability to assess, interpret data, and implement instructional practices to address calculations, reasoning, and problem-solving skills. Skills in this area include the ability to understand and use a range of specialized mathematics instructional strategies and research-based interventions that reflect best practice in mathematics instruction for students with disabilities.

(4) Ability to align the instructional practices and intervention with the Virginia Standards of Learning and state assessments.

(5) Knowledge of and ability to utilize current mathematics-related assistive and instructional technologies to promote learning and independence for students with disabilities in the general curriculum and the ability to evaluate the effectiveness of the use of the technologies.

(6) Ability to develop and use curriculum-based and standardized mathematics assessments to conduct ongoing evaluations of instructional materials and practices to determine effectiveness and assess student needs as they relate to the mathematics curriculum design and delivery.

(7) Ability to model and directly teach mathematics instructional strategies in a variety of settings, collaborate and co-teach with general educators to develop and implement instructional practices that meet the needs of students with disabilities in the mathematics general curriculum, and monitor student progress.

8VAC20-23-590. Speech communication (add-on endorsement).

Endorsement requirements. The candidate must have:

1. An earned baccalaureate degree from a regionally accredited college or university and a license issued by the Virginia Board of Education with a teaching endorsement in a teaching area; and

2. A minimum of 15 semester hours in speech communication.

8VAC20-23-600. Theatre arts preK-12.

A. Endorsement requirements. The candidate must have:

1. Graduated from an approved teacher preparation program in theatre arts; or

2. Earned a baccalaureate degree from a regionally accredited college or university and completed a major in theatre arts or 33 semester hours distributed among the following areas:

a. Directing: 6 semester hours;

b. Technical theatre: 9 semester hours;

c. Cultural context and theatre history: 3 semester hours;

d. Performance: 6 semester hours; and

e. Dramatic literature: 9 semester hours.

B. Add-on endorsement requirements in theatre arts preK-12. The candidate must have:

1. An earned baccalaureate degree from a regionally accredited college or university and hold a license issued by the Virginia Board of Education with a teaching endorsement in a teaching area; and

2. Completed 15 semester hours distributed in the following areas:

a. Directing: 3 semester hours;

b. Technical theatre: 3 semester hours;

c. Cultural context and theatre history: 3 semester hours; and

d. Performance: 6 semester hours.

8VAC20-23-610. Visual arts preK-12.

Endorsement requirements. The candidate must have:

1. Graduated from an approved teacher preparation program in visual arts; or

2. Earned a baccalaureate degree from a regionally accredited college or university and completed a major in visual arts or 36 semester hours in art distributed in the following areas:

a. Two-dimensional media: 12 semester hours;

b. Three-dimensional media: 12 semester hours;

c. Cultural context and art history: 6 semester hours;

d. Evaluation and criticism and aesthetics: 3 semester hours; and

e. Related areas of the fine arts: 3 semester hours.

Part VI
Licensure Regulations Governing Support Personnel

8VAC20-23-620. Administration and supervision
preK-12.

A. An endorsement in administration and supervision preK-12 consists of Level I, which is required to serve as a building-level administrator or central office instructional supervisor, and Level II, which is an optional endorsement to which an experienced building-level administrator may aspire. Individuals must meet the requirements for the administration and supervision preK-12 endorsement through one of the four options listed in this section. A school leader's assessment prescribed by the Virginia Board of Education must be met for all individuals who are seeking an initial endorsement authorizing them to serve as principals and assistant principals in the public schools. Individuals seeking an initial administration and supervision endorsement who are interested in serving as central office instructional personnel are not required to take and pass the school leaders assessment prescribed by the Virginia Board of Education.

B. Level I, Option I: Approved program route to Level I administration and supervision preK-12 endorsement. To become eligible for a Level I endorsement under this option, the candidate must have:

1. Earned a master's degree from a regionally accredited college or university;

2. Completed three years of successful, full-time experience in a public school or accredited nonpublic school in an instructional personnel position that requires licensure in Virginia;

3. Completed an approved program in administration and supervision from a regionally accredited college or university;

4. Completed a deliberately structured and supervised internship that is focused on student academic progress for all students and that:

a. Provides significant experiences within a school environment for candidates to synthesize and apply content knowledge and develop professional skills through school-based leadership experiences;

b. Shall occur in a public or accredited nonpublic school;

c. Provides exposure to five different multiple sites (i.e., elementary, middle high, central office, agency) with diverse student populations; and

d. Documents a minimum of 320 clock hours, of which 120 clock hours are embedded as experiential field-based opportunities experienced during coursework; and

5. Satisfied the requirements for the school leaders licensure assessment prescribed by the Virginia Board of Education. Individuals seeking an initial administration and supervision endorsement who are interested in serving as central office instructional personnel are not required to take and pass the school leaders assessment prescribed by the Virginia Board of Education.

C. Level I, Option II: Alternate route to Level I administration and supervision preK-12 endorsement restricted to the Virginia school division in which the superintendent submitted the recommendation for endorsement. This endorsement is valid only in the designated Virginia school division and would not be portable or reciprocal. In order to be eligible for Level I endorsement under this option, the candidate must have:

1. Earned a master's degree from a regionally accredited college or university;

2. Completed graduate coursework in school law, evaluation of instruction, and other areas of study as required by an employing Virginia school superintendent. The graduate coursework must be taken from a regionally accredited college or university that has a state-approved administration and supervision program;

3. Completed three years of successful, full-time experience in a public school or accredited nonpublic school in an instructional personnel position that requires licensure in Virginia;

4. Satisfied the requirements for the school leaders licensure assessment specified by the Virginia Board of Education; and

5. Been recommended by the superintendent in the employing Virginia school division.

D. Level I, Option III: Alternate route to Level I administration and supervision preK-12 endorsement. In order to be eligible for Level I endorsement under this option, the candidate must have:

1. Earned a master's degree from a regionally accredited college or university;

2. Completed graduate coursework in school law, evaluation of instructional personnel, special education, school finance, educational leadership, and other areas of study as required by an employing Virginia school superintendent, and the graduate coursework must be taken from a regionally accredited college or university that has a state-approved administration and supervision program, or the candidate must have completed school law, school finance, and a research-based program approved by the Virginia Department of Education that includes organizational leadership, instructional leadership, instructional practices in content areas, data utilization, evaluation and instructional coaching, and creating positive school cultures;

3. Completed three years of successful, full-time experience in a public school or accredited nonpublic school in an instructional personnel position that requires licensure in Virginia;

4. Satisfied the requirements for the school leaders licensure assessment specified by the Virginia Board of Education; and

5. Been recommended by the superintendent in the employing Virginia school division.

E. Level I, Option IV: Out-of-state administration and supervision endorsement. Virginia does not issue a stand-alone license in administration and supervision. The endorsement is added to a license. The candidate must have:

1. Earned a master's degree from a regionally accredited college or university;

2. Completed three years of successful, full-time experience in a public school or accredited nonpublic school in an instructional personnel position;

3. Satisfied the requirements for the school leaders licensure assessment specified by the Virginia Board of Education; and

4. A current, valid out-of-state license, which is full credential, with an endorsement in administration and supervision or completed an approved program in administration and supervision from a regionally accredited college or university leading to an endorsement as a building-level administrator.

F. Level II: Principal of Distinction endorsement in administration and supervision preK-12. A building-level administrator may seek the Principal of Distinction, Level II endorsement in administration and supervision preK-12 after successfully serving as a building-level administrator for at least five years in a public school or an accredited nonpublic school and successfully completing a formal induction program as a principal or assistant principal. In order to earn the Principal of Distinction, Level II endorsement, the candidate must meet two or more of the following criteria as specified by the Virginia Board of Education and documented in a Virginia Department of Education approved format and be recommended by the employing Virginia school division superintendent:

1. Evidence of improved student achievement;

2. Evidence of effective instructional leadership;

3. Evidence of positive effect on school climate or culture;

4. Earned doctorate in educational leadership or evidence of formal professional development in the areas of school law, school finance, supervision, human resource management, and instructional leadership; or

5. Evidence of a completion of a high-quality professional development project designed by the division superintendent.

8VAC20-23-630. Division Superintendent License.

An individual may be a candidate for the list of eligible division superintendents and the renewable Division Superintendent License through the completion of the requirements in one of the following four options:

1. Option I. The individual must:

a. Hold an earned doctorate degree in educational administration or educational leadership from a regionally accredited college or university; and

b. Have completed five years of educational experience in a public or an accredited nonpublic school, two of which must be successful, full-time teaching experience at the preK-12 level and two of which must be in administration and supervision at the preK-12 level.

2. Option II. The individual must:

a. Hold an earned master's degree from a regionally accredited college or university and completed 30 graduate semester hours beyond the conferral date of the master's degree; and

b. Have completed requirements for administration and supervision preK-12 endorsement that includes the demonstration of competencies in the following areas:

(1) Knowledge, understanding, and application of planning, assessment, and instructional leadership that builds collective professional capacity, including;

(a) Principles of student motivation, growth, and development as a foundation for age- appropriate and grade-appropriate curriculum, instruction, and assessment;

(b) Collaborative leadership in gathering and analyzing data to identify needs to develop and implement a school improvement plan that results in increased student learning;

(c) Planning, implementation, and refinement of standards-based curriculum aligned with instruction and assessment;

(d) Collaborative planning and implementation of a variety of assessment techniques, including examination of student work that yields individual, class, grade level, and school level data as a foundation for identifying existing competencies and targeting areas in need of further attention;

(e) Incorporation of differentiated and effective instruction that responds to individual learner needs including appropriate response to cultural, ethnic, and linguistic diversity;

(f) Knowledge, understanding, and application of the federal and state regulatory requirements and expectations associated with identification, education, and evaluation of students with disabilities;

(g) Collaboratively working with parents and school personnel to ensure that students with disabilities are included as a valued part of the school community, and that they receive effective and appropriately intensive instruction to assist them in meeting the standards set for all students as well as individual goals outlined in their individualized education programs;

(h) Integration of technology in curriculum and instruction to enhance learner understanding;

(i) Identification, analysis, and resolution of problems using effective problem-solving techniques; and

(j) Development, articulation, implementation, and stewardship of a vision of excellence linked to mission and core beliefs that promote continuous improvement consistent with the goals of the school division.

(2) Knowledge, understanding, and application of leadership and organizations, including;

(a) The change process of systems, organizations, and individuals, using appropriate and effective adult learning models;

(b) Aligning organizational practice, division mission, and core beliefs for developing and implementing strategic plans;

(c) Information sources and processing, including data collection and data analysis strategies;

(d) Using data as a part of ongoing program evaluation to inform and lead change;

(e) Developing a change management strategy for improved student outcomes;

(f) Developing distributed leadership strategies to create personalized learning environments for diverse schools; and

(g) Effective two-way communication skills including consensus building, negotiation, and mediation skills.

(3) Knowledge, understanding, and application of management and leadership skills that achieve effective and efficient organizational operations and sustain an instructional program conducive to student academic progress, including;

(a) Alignment of curriculum and instruction and assessment of the educational program to achieve high academic success at the school and division or district level;

(b) Principles and issues of supervising and leading others to ensure a working and learning climate that is safe, secure, and respectful of a diverse school community;

(c) Management decisions that ensure successful teaching and learning including, human resources management and development, theories of motivation, change in school culture, innovation and creativity, conflict resolution, adult learning, and professional development models;

(d) Knowledge, understanding, and application of Virginia's Guidelines for Uniform Performance Standards and Evaluation Criteria for Teachers and Virginia's Guidelines for Uniform Performance Standards and Evaluation Criteria for Principals;

(e) Principles and issues related to fiscal operations of school management;

(f) Principles and issues related to school facilities and use of space and time for supporting high-quality school instruction and student learning;

(g) Legal issues impacting school operations and management;

(h) Technologies that support management functions; and

(i) Application of data-driven decision making to initiate and continue improvement in school and classroom practices and student achievement.

(4) Knowledge, understanding, and application of the conditions and dynamics impacting a diverse school community, including:

(a) Emerging issues and trends within school and community relations;

(b) Working collaboratively with staff, families, and community members to secure resources and to support the success of a diverse population;

(c) Developing appropriate public relations and public engagement strategies and processes for building and sustaining positive relationships with families, caregivers, and community partners; and

(d) Integration of technology to support communication efforts.

(5) Knowledge, understanding, and application of the purpose of education and the role of professionalism in advancing educational goals, including:

(a) Philosophy of education that reflects commitment to principles of honesty, fairness, caring, and equity in day-to-day professional behavior;

(b) Integration of high-quality, content-rich, job-embedded professional learning that respects the contribution of all faculty and staff members in building a diverse professional learning community;

(c) Reflective understanding of moral and legal consequences of decision making in the school setting;

(d) Intentional and purposeful effort to model professional, moral, and ethical standards as well as personal integrity in all interactions; and

(e) Intentional and purposeful effort to model continuous professional learning and to work collegially and collaboratively with all members of the school community to support the school's goals and enhance its collective capacity.

(6) Knowledge, understanding, and application of leadership theories and influences that impact schools, including:

(a) Concepts of leadership including systems theory, change theory, learning organizations, and current leadership theory;

(b) Identify and respond to internal and external forces and influences on a school;

(c) Identify and apply the processes of educational policy development at the state, local, and school level; and

(d) Identify and demonstrate ways to influence educational policy development at the state, local, and school level.

3. Option III. The individual must:

a. Hold an earned master's degree from a regionally accredited college or university;

b. Hold a current, valid out-of-state license with an endorsement as a division or district superintendent; and

c. Have completed five years of educational experience in a public or an accredited nonpublic school, two of which must be successful, full-time teaching experience at the preK-12 level and two of which must be in successful administration and supervision.

4. Option IV. The individual must:

a. Hold an earned master's degree or its equivalent from a regionally accredited college or university;

b. Have held a senior leadership position such as chief executive officer or senior military officer; and

c. Be recommended by a school board interested in employing the individual as superintendent.

8VAC20-23-640. Mathematics specialist for elementary education.

Endorsement requirements. The candidate must have:

1. Earned a baccalaureate degree from a regionally accredited college or university and an endorsement in a teaching area;

2. Completed at least three years of successful, full-time teaching experience in a public or accredited nonpublic school in which the teaching of mathematics was an important responsibility; and

3. Either:

a. Graduated from an approved mathematics specialist for elementary preparation program - master's level; or

b. Completed a master's level program in mathematics, mathematics education, or related education field with at least 21 semester hours undergraduate or graduate mathematics coursework distributed in the following areas: (i) number and operations; (ii) rational numbers; (iii) geometry and measurement; (iv) probability and statistics; (v) algebra and functions; and (vi) at least nine semester hours of graduate coursework pertaining to mathematics education in mathematics instructional leadership, evaluation of mathematics curriculum and instruction, mathematical learning theory, and student assessment for mathematics.

8VAC20-23-650. Mathematics specialist for middle education.

Endorsement requirements. The candidate must have:

1. Earned a baccalaureate degree from a regionally accredited college or university and an endorsement in a teaching area;

2. Completed at least three years of successful, full-time teaching experience in a public or accredited nonpublic school in which the teaching of mathematics was an important responsibility;

3. Hold the secondary mathematics teaching endorsement (6-12); and

4. Either:

a. Graduated from an approved mathematics specialist for middle education preparation program - master's level; or

b. Completed a master's level program in mathematics, mathematics education, or related education field with at least 21 semester hours of undergraduate or graduate mathematics coursework distributed in the following areas; (i) number and operations; (ii) rational numbers; (iii) geometry and measurement; (iv) probability and statistics; (v) algebra and functions; and (vi) at least nine semester hours of graduate coursework pertaining to mathematics education in mathematics instructional leadership, evaluation of mathematics curriculum and instruction, mathematical learning theory, and student assessment for mathematics.

8VAC20-23-660. Reading specialist.

Endorsement requirements. The candidate must have:

1. Completed a graduate-level reading specialist state-approved preparation program - master's degree required - that includes course experiences of at least 30 semester hours of graduate coursework in the competencies for the endorsement, as well as a practicum experience in the diagnosis and remediation of reading difficulties.

2. Satisfied the requirements for the reading specialist assessment specified by the Virginia Board of Education.

3. At least three years of successful classroom teaching experience in which the teaching of reading was an important responsibility.

8VAC20-23-670. School counselor preK-12.

Endorsement requirements.

1. Option I. The candidate must have:

a. Earned a master's degree from a regionally accredited college or university and completed an approved school counselor preparation program that shall include at least 100 clock hours of internship and practicum experiences in the preK-6 setting and 100 clock hours of internship and practicum experiences in the grades 7-12 setting; and

b. Two years of successful, full-time teaching experience or two years of successful, full-time experience in school counseling in a public or an accredited nonpublic school. Two years of successful, full-time experience in school counseling in a public or an accredited nonpublic school under a Provisional License may be accepted to meet this requirement.

2. Option II. The candidate must have:

a. Earned a master's degree from a regionally accredited college or university and completed an approved school counselor preparation program that shall include at least 100 clock hours of internship and practicum experiences in the preK-6 setting and 100 clock hours of internship and practicum experiences in the grades 7-12 setting; and

b. Two years of successful, full-time teaching experience or two years of successful, full-time experience in school counseling in a public or an accredited nonpublic school. Two years of successful, full-time experience in school counseling in a public or an accredited nonpublic school under a nonrenewable Provisional License may be accepted to meet this requirement.

8VAC20-23-680. School manager license.

A. The school manager license is intended to provide for the differentiation of administrative responsibilities in a school setting. A school manager is licensed to administer noninstructional responsibilities in an educational setting. For example, a school manager is restricted from evaluating teachers, supervising instruction, developing and evaluating curriculum, and serving as a school's student disciplinarian.

B. To earn a school manager license, the candidate must:

1. Have earned a baccalaureate degree from a regionally accredited college or university;

2. Have three years successful, full-time managerial experience; and

3. Be recommended for the license by a Virginia school division superintendent.

8VAC20-23-690. School psychology.

Endorsement requirements:

1. Option I. The candidate must:

a. Complete an approved program in school psychology;

b. Earn a baccalaureate degree from a regionally accredited college or university and complete 60 graduate-level hours, 54 of which are academic coursework, exclusive of field-based experiences, that culminate in at least a master's degree; and

c. Complete an internship that is documented by the degree-granting institution. The internship experience shall occur on a full-time basis over a period of one year or on a half-time basis over a period of two consecutive years. The internship shall occur under conditions of appropriate supervision, that is, the school-based supervisor shall be licensed as either a school or clinical psychologist. The internship shall include experiences at multiple age levels, at least one half of which shall be in an accredited school setting.

2. Option II. The candidate must hold a currently valid certificate issued by the National School Psychology Certification Board.

8VAC20-23-700. School social worker.

Endorsement requirements. The candidate must have:

1. Earned a master's of social work degree from a regionally accredited college or university school of social work with a minimum of 60 graduate-level semester hours;

2. A minimum of six graduate semester hours in education to include six semester hours from two of the following courses:

a. The teaching profession (3 semester hours);

b. Characteristics of special education (3 semester hours);

c. Human development and learning (3 semester hours); or

d. Classroom and behavior management (3 semester hours).

3. Completed a supervised practicum or field experience of a minimum of 400 clock hours in a public or an accredited nonpublic school discharging the duties of a school social worker. One year of successful, full-time experience as a school social worker in a public or an accredited nonpublic school may be accepted in lieu of the school social work practicum.

8VAC20-23-710. Vocational evaluator.

Endorsement requirements:

1. Option I. The candidate must be certified as a vocational evaluation specialist by holding a professional vocational evaluator (PVE) credential or a certified vocational evaluator (CVE) specialist credential, meeting all standards and criteria of the Commission on Certification of Work Adjustment and Vocational Evaluation Specialists (CCWAVES).

2. Option II. The candidate must have earned a master's degree in vocational evaluation, career and technical education, special education, or rehabilitation counseling and completed 15 graduate semester hours distributed in the following areas:

a. Tests and measurements: 3 semester hours;

b. Medical and educational aspects of disability: 3 semester hours;

c. Occupational information and job analysis: 3 semester hours;

d. Purposes and practices of vocational evaluation: 3 semester hours; and

e. Career, life planning, and transition services: 3 semester hours.

Part VII
Revocation, Cancellation, Suspension, Denial, and Reinstatement of Teaching Licenses

8VAC20-23-720. Revocation.

A. A license issued by the Virginia Board of Education may be revoked for the following reasons:

1. Obtaining or attempting to obtain such license by fraudulent means or through misrepresentation of material facts;

2. Falsification of school records, documents, statistics, or reports;

3. Conviction of any felony;

4. Conviction of any misdemeanor involving moral turpitude;

5. Conviction of any misdemeanor involving a minor child or drugs, not including alcohol;

6. Conduct with direct and detrimental effect on the health, welfare, discipline, or morale of students;

7. Misapplication of or failure to account for school funds or other school properties with which the licensee has been entrusted;

8. Acts related to secure mandatory tests as specified in subsection A of § 22.1-292.1 of the Code of Virginia;

9. Knowingly and willfully with the intent to compromise the outcome of an athletic competition procure, sell, or administer anabolic steroids or cause such drugs to be procured, sold, or administered to a student who is a member of a school athletic team, or fail to report the use of such drugs by a student to the school principal and division superintendent as required by clause (iii) of subsection A of § 22.1-279.3:1 of the Code of Virginia. Any person whose license is suspended or revoked by the board pursuant to this section shall be ineligible for three school years for employment in the public schools of the Commonwealth;

10. Revocation, suspension, surrender, cancellation, invalidation, or denial of, or other adverse action against, a teaching, administrator, pupil personnel services, or other education-related certificate or license by another state, territory, or country;

11. Founded case of child abuse or neglect after all appeal rights have been exhausted;

12. Notification of dismissal or resignation pursuant to subsection F of § 22.1-313 of the Code of Virginia; or

13. Other good and just cause in the best interest of the public schools of the Commonwealth of Virginia.

B. Procedures.

1. A complaint may be filed by anyone, but it shall be the duty of a division superintendent, principal, or other responsible school employee to file a complaint in any case in which he has knowledge that a holder of a license is guilty of any offense set forth in subsection A of this section. The person making the complaint shall submit the complaint in writing to the appropriate division superintendent.

2. Upon receipt of the complaint against the holder of a license, a division superintendent or his duly authorized representative shall investigate the complaint. If, on the basis of such investigation, the division superintendent finds the complaint to be without merit, he shall so notify the complaining party or parties in writing and then close his file on the matter. This action shall be final unless the local school board, on its own motion, votes to proceed to a hearing on the complaint.

C. Petition for revocation. Should the division superintendent or local school board conclude that there is reasonable cause to believe that a complaint against the holder of a license is well founded, the license holder shall be notified of the complaint by a written petition for revocation of a license signed by the division superintendent. A copy of such petition shall be sent by certified mail, return receipt requested, to the license holder's last known address.

D. Form of petition. The petition for the revocation of a license shall set forth:

1. The name and last known address of the person against whom the petition is being filed;

2. The type of license and the license number held by the person against whom the petition is being filed;

3. The offenses alleged and the specific actions that comprise the alleged offenses;

4. A statement of rights of the person charged under this chapter. The statement of rights shall include notification to the person of the right to cancel the license if he chooses not to contest the allegations in the petition. The statement must notify the individual that he shall receive a notice of cancellation that will include the statement: "The license holder voluntarily returned the license in response to a petition for revocation." The individual also shall be notified that the cancellation of the license will be reported to division superintendents in Virginia and to chief state school officers of the other states and territories of the United States; and

5. Any other pertinent information.

E. Filing of petition. The original petition shall be entered in the files of the local school board where the license holder is or was last employed.

F. Response to petition. The license holder shall present his written answer to the petition, if any, within 14 days of delivery or attempted delivery of the petition as certified by the United States Postal Service.

1. If the license holder does not wish to contest the allegations in the petition, he may cancel the license by returning the license to the division superintendent with a written, signed statement requesting cancellation in response to a petition for revocation. The division superintendent shall forward the request for cancellation along with the petition for revocation to the Superintendent of Public Instruction within 14 days of receipt. The Superintendent of Public Instruction shall cancel the license and send a notice of cancellation to the person by certified mail within 14 days of receipt of the request for cancellation.

2. If the license holder files a written answer admitting or denying the allegations in the petition or fails to file a written answer within 14 days of delivery or attempted delivery of the petition as certified by the United States Postal Service, the local school board shall promptly proceed to a hearing. The local school board shall provide a hearing at the time and place of its regular meeting or at such other reasonable time and place it may specify. The license holder or his representative, if any, shall be given at least 14 days' notice of the hearing.

3. At the hearing, the local school board shall receive the recommendation of the division superintendent and then either deny the petition or recommend license revocation or suspension. A decision to deny the petition shall be final, except as specified in subsection G of this section, and the investigative file on the petition shall be closed and maintained as a separate file. Any record or material relating to the allegations in the petition shall be placed in the investigative file. Should the local school board recommend the revocation or suspension of a license, the division superintendent shall forward the recommendation and the investigative file to the Superintendent of Public Instruction within 14 days.

G. Revocation on motion of the Virginia Board of Education. The Virginia Board of Education reserves the right to act directly to revoke a license when the Virginia Board of Education has reasonable cause to believe that subsection A of this section is applicable. The Superintendent of Public Instruction may send a petition for revocation to the license holder as provided by subsection D of this section. The license holder shall have the opportunity to respond to the petition or request cancellation of the license within 14 days of delivery or attempted delivery of the petition, as certified by the United States Postal Service.

1. If the license holder files a written answer admitting the allegations in the petition or fails to file a written answer within 14 days of delivery or attempted delivery of the petition as certified by the United States Postal Service, the petition shall be forwarded to the Virginia Board of Education for action. No revocation will be ordered without the involved license holder being given the opportunity to appear at a hearing specified in 8VAC20-23-780 C.

2. If the license holder timely files his written answer denying the allegations in the petition, the Superintendent of Public Instruction shall schedule a hearing with the investigative panel provided in 8VAC20-23-780 A. The license holder or his representative, if any, shall be given at least 14 days' notice of the hearing. The investigative panel shall take action on the petition as specified in 8VAC20-23-780 A. No revocation will be ordered without the involved license holder being given the opportunity to appear at a hearing specified in 8VAC20-23-780 C.

H. Reinstatement of license. A license that has been revoked may be reinstated by the Virginia Board of Education after five years if the board is satisfied that reinstatement is in the best interest of the public schools of the Commonwealth of Virginia. The individual seeking reinstatement must submit a written request and completed application to the board. The request for reinstatement will be reviewed by the Superintendent of Public Instruction's investigative panel pursuant to 8VAC20-23-780. Notification to all appropriate parties will be communicated in writing by the Virginia Department of Education.

8VAC20-23-730. Cancellation.

A. A license may be canceled by the voluntary return of the license by the license holder. Reasons for cancellation are the same as those listed under 8VAC20-23-720 A.

B. The individual may voluntarily return the license to the division superintendent or the Superintendent of Public Instruction with a written, signed statement requesting cancellation. The individual shall acknowledge in the request that he understands that the notice of cancellation will include the statement: "The license holder voluntarily returned his teaching license and requested cancellation. Reasons for cancellation are the same as those for revocation." However, if the request for cancellation is in response to a petition for revocation, the individual shall acknowledge that he understands that the notice of cancellation will include the statement: "The license holder voluntarily returned the license in response to a petition for revocation." The individual also shall acknowledge that he understands that the cancellation of the license will be reported to division superintendents in Virginia and to chief state school officers of the other states and territories of the United States. The division superintendent shall forward any request for cancellation and, if applicable, the petition for revocation to the Superintendent of Public Instruction within 14 days of receipt. The Superintendent of Public Instruction shall cancel the license and send the person a notice of cancellation by certified mail within 14 days of receipt of the request for cancellation.

C. A license that has been canceled may be reinstated by the Virginia Board of Education if the board is satisfied that reinstatement is in the best interest of the public schools of the Commonwealth of Virginia. The individual seeking reinstatement must submit a written request and completed application to the board. The request for reinstatement will be reviewed by the Superintendent of Public Instruction's investigative panel pursuant to 8VAC20-23-780 A. Notification to all appropriate parties will be communicated in writing by the Virginia Department of Education.

8VAC20-23-740. Suspension.

A. A license may be suspended for the following reasons:

1. Physical, mental, or emotional incapacity as shown by a competent medical authority;

2. Incompetence or neglect of duty;

3. Failure or refusal to comply with school laws and regulations, including willful violation of contractual obligations;

4. Acts related to secure mandatory tests as specified in subsection A of § 22.1-292.1 of the Code of Virginia;

5. Knowingly and willfully with the intent to compromise the outcome of an athletic competition procure, sell, or administer anabolic steroids or cause such drugs to be procured, sold, or administered to a student who is a member of a school athletic team, or fail to report the use of such drugs by a student to the school principal and division superintendent as required by clause (iii) of subsection A of § 22.1-279.3:1 of the Code of Virginia. Any person whose license is suspended or revoked by the board pursuant to this section shall be ineligible for three school years for employment in the public schools of the Commonwealth; or

6. Other good and just cause in the best interest of the public schools of the Commonwealth of Virginia.

B. Procedures.

1. A complaint may be filed by anyone, but it shall be the duty of a division superintendent, principal, or other responsible school employee to file a complaint in any case in which he has knowledge that the license holder has committed any offense set forth in subsection A of this section. The person making the complaint shall submit the complaint in writing to the appropriate division superintendent.

2. Upon receipt of the complaint against the holder of a license, a division superintendent or his duly authorized representative shall investigate the complaint. If, on the basis of such investigation, the division superintendent finds the complaint to be without merit, he shall so notify the complaining party or parties in writing and then close his file on the matter. This action shall be final unless the local school board on its own motion votes to proceed to a hearing on the complaint.

C. Petition f